system i programming savs36f (save s/36...

650
System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File) Version 6 Release 1

Upload: others

Post on 03-Mar-2021

8 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

System i

Programming

i5/OS commands

Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Version 6 Release 1

���

Page 2: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F
Page 3: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

System i

Programming

i5/OS commands

Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Version 6 Release 1

���

Page 4: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Note

Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the information in

“Notices,” on page 629.

This edition applies to version 6, release 1, modification 0 of IBM i5/OS (product number 5761-SS1) and to all

subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions. This version does not run on all

reduced instruction set computer (RISC) models nor does it run on CICS models.

© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1998, 2008. All rights reserved.

US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract

with IBM Corp.

Page 5: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Contents

Save S/36 File (SAVS36F) . . . . . . . 1

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

From file (FROMFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 3

From library (FROMLIB) . . . . . . . . . . 4

Device (DEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

File group qualifier (GROUP) . . . . . . . . . 4

Set identifier (SET) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

File label (TOLABEL) . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Sequence number (SEQNBR) . . . . . . . . . 5

Volume identifier (VOL) . . . . . . . . . . 5

Retention period (RETAIN) . . . . . . . . . 6

End of tape option (ENDOPT) . . . . . . . . 6

Data compression (DTACPR) . . . . . . . . . 6

Physical file (PHYFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Data base member option (MBROPT) . . . . . . 7

Creation date (CRTDATE) . . . . . . . . . . 7

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Save S/36 Library Members

(SAVS36LIBM) . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

From member (FROMMBR) . . . . . . . . . 12

From library (FROMLIB) . . . . . . . . . . 13

Device (DEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

S/36 source members (SRCMBRS) . . . . . . . 13

File label (TOLABEL) . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Sequence number (SEQNBR) . . . . . . . . 14

Volume identifier (VOL) . . . . . . . . . . 14

Retention period (RETAIN) . . . . . . . . . 14

Diskette file exchange type (EXCHTYPE) . . . . 14

End of tape option (ENDOPT) . . . . . . . . 15

Physical file (PHYFILE) . . . . . . . . . . 15

Data base member option (MBROPT) . . . . . . 15

Record length (RCDLEN) . . . . . . . . . . 16

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Save Save File Data (SAVSAVFDTA) . . 19

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Save file (SAVF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Device (DEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Volume identifier (VOL) . . . . . . . . . . 21

Sequence number (SEQNBR) . . . . . . . . 21

End of media option (ENDOPT) . . . . . . . 21

Optical file (OPTFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Use optimum block (USEOPTBLK) . . . . . . 22

Clear (CLEAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

File expiration date (EXPDATE) . . . . . . . 23

Data compaction (COMPACT) . . . . . . . . 23

Output (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

File to receive output (OUTFILE) . . . . . . . 24

Output member options (OUTMBR) . . . . . . 24

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Save Security Data (SAVSECDTA) . . . 27

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Device (DEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Volume identifier (VOL) . . . . . . . . . . 28

Sequence number (SEQNBR) . . . . . . . . 29

File expiration date (EXPDATE) . . . . . . . 29

End of media option (ENDOPT) . . . . . . . 29

Use optimum block (USEOPTBLK) . . . . . . 30

Save file (SAVF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Optical file (OPTFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 30

ASP device (ASPDEV) . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Clear (CLEAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Object pre-check (PRECHK) . . . . . . . . . 32

Data compression (DTACPR) . . . . . . . . 32

Data compaction (COMPACT) . . . . . . . . 33

Output (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

File to receive output (OUTFILE) . . . . . . . 34

Output member options (OUTMBR) . . . . . . 34

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Save Storage (SAVSTG) . . . . . . . 39

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Tape device (DEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

File expiration date (EXPDATE) . . . . . . . 40

Clear (CLEAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Save System (SAVSYS) . . . . . . . 43

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Device (DEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Volume identifier (VOL) . . . . . . . . . . 44

File expiration date (EXPDATE) . . . . . . . 45

End of media option (ENDOPT) . . . . . . . 45

Use optimum block (USEOPTBLK) . . . . . . 45

Omit (OMIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Output (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

File to receive output (OUTFILE) . . . . . . . 47

Output member options (OUTMBR) . . . . . . 47

ASP device (ASPDEV) . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Clear (CLEAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Data compression (DTACPR) . . . . . . . . 49

Data compaction (COMPACT) . . . . . . . . 49

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Save System Information (SAVSYSINF) 53

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Device (DEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Volume identifier (VOL) . . . . . . . . . . 55

Sequence number (SEQNBR) . . . . . . . . 55

File expiration date (EXPDATE) . . . . . . . 55

End of media option (ENDOPT) . . . . . . . 56

Save file (SAVF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 iii

Page 6: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Optical file (OPTFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Use optimum block (USEOPTBLK) . . . . . . 57

Clear (CLEAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Data compression (DTACPR) . . . . . . . . 58

Data compaction (COMPACT) . . . . . . . . 59

Output (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

File to receive output (OUTFILE) . . . . . . . 59

Output member options (OUTMBR) . . . . . . 60

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Submit Data Base Jobs (SBMDBJOB) 63

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Data base file (FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Member (MBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Job queue (JOBQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Show on submitted job list (DSPSBMJOB) . . . . 65

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Submit Finance Job (SBMFNCJOB) . . 67

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Device table (DEVTBL) . . . . . . . . . . 67

Program table (PGMTBL) . . . . . . . . . . 68

User table (USRTBL) . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Job name (JOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Job description (JOBD) . . . . . . . . . . 68

Message queue (MSGQ) . . . . . . . . . . 69

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Submit Job (SBMJOB) . . . . . . . . 71

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Command to run (CMD) . . . . . . . . . . 73

Job name (JOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Job description (JOBD) . . . . . . . . . . 74

Job queue (JOBQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Job priority (on JOBQ) (JOBPTY) . . . . . . . 74

Output priority (on OUTQ) (OUTPTY) . . . . . 75

Print device (PRTDEV) . . . . . . . . . . 75

Output queue (OUTQ) . . . . . . . . . . 75

User (USER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Accounting code (ACGCDE) . . . . . . . . . 77

Print text (PRTTXT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Routing data (RTGDTA) . . . . . . . . . . 77

Request data or command (RQSDTA) . . . . . 78

System library list (SYSLIBL) . . . . . . . . 78

Current library (CURLIB) . . . . . . . . . . 78

Initial library list (INLLIBL) . . . . . . . . . 79

Initial ASP group (INLASPGRP) . . . . . . . 79

Message logging (LOG) . . . . . . . . . . 80

Log CL program commands (LOGCLPGM) . . . . 81

Job log output (LOGOUTPUT) . . . . . . . . 81

Job message queue maximum size (JOBMSGQMX) 82

Job message queue full action (JOBMSGQFL) . . . 82

Inquiry message reply (INQMSGRPY) . . . . . 82

Hold on job queue (HOLD) . . . . . . . . . 83

Schedule date (SCDDATE) . . . . . . . . . 83

Schedule time (SCDTIME) . . . . . . . . . 84

Job date (DATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Job switches (SWS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Allow display by WRKSBMJOB (DSPSBMJOB) . . 85

Submitted for (SBMFOR) . . . . . . . . . . 85

Message queue (MSGQ) . . . . . . . . . . 85

Sort sequence (SRTSEQ) . . . . . . . . . . 86

Language ID (LANGID) . . . . . . . . . . 87

Country or region ID (CNTRYID) . . . . . . . 87

Coded character set ID (CCSID) . . . . . . . 87

Copy environment variables (CPYENVVAR) . . . 88

Allow multiple threads (ALWMLTTHD) . . . . . 88

Spooled file action (SPLFACN) . . . . . . . . 88

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Submit Network Job (SBMNETJOB) . . 91

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

File (FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

User ID (TOUSRID) . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Member (MBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Send priority (PTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Submit Network Server Command

(SBMNWSCMD) . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Command (CMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Server (SERVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Command (not logged) (NOLOGCMD) . . . . . 96

Server type (SVRTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . 96

Command type (CMDTYPE) . . . . . . . . 96

Load user profile (LODUSRPRF) . . . . . . . 97

Authentication domain (AUTDMN) . . . . . . 97

Command standard output (CMDSTDOUT) . . . 97

Convert standard output (CVTSTDOUT) . . . . 98

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Submit Remote Command

(SBMRMTCMD) . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Command to run (CMD) . . . . . . . . . 100

DDM file (DDMFILE) . . . . . . . . . . 100

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Select (SELECT) . . . . . . . . . . 103

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Set ASP Group (SETASPGRP) . . . . 105

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

ASP group (ASPGRP) . . . . . . . . . . 106

System library list (SYSLIBL) . . . . . . . . 106

Current library (CURLIB) . . . . . . . . . 106

Libraries for current thread (USRLIBL) . . . . . 107

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

iv System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 7: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Set Attention Program (SETATNPGM) 109

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Program (PGM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Set attention key (SET) . . . . . . . . . . 110

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Set Customization Data (SETCSTDTA) 113

Error messages for SETCSTDTA . . . . . . . 113

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

User profile (USRPRF) . . . . . . . . . . 114

Customization data to use (VALUE) . . . . . . 114

Replace customization data (REPLACE) . . . . 114

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) . . 117

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Device (DEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

PF1 key value (PF1) . . . . . . . . . . . 121

PF2 key value (PF2) . . . . . . . . . . . 123

PF3 key value (PF3) . . . . . . . . . . . 124

PF4 key value (PF4) . . . . . . . . . . . 125

PF5 key value (PF5) . . . . . . . . . . . 126

PF6 key value (PF6) . . . . . . . . . . . 127

PF7 key value (PF7) . . . . . . . . . . . 128

PF8 key value (PF8) . . . . . . . . . . . 129

PF9 key value (PF9) . . . . . . . . . . . 130

PF10 key value (PF10) . . . . . . . . . . 132

PF11 key value (PF11) . . . . . . . . . . 133

PF12 key value (PF12) . . . . . . . . . . 134

PF13 key value (PF13) . . . . . . . . . . 135

PF14 key value (PF14) . . . . . . . . . . 136

PF15 key value (PF15) . . . . . . . . . . 137

PF16 key value (PF16) . . . . . . . . . . 138

PF17 key value (PF17) . . . . . . . . . . 139

PF18 key value (PF18) . . . . . . . . . . 141

PF19 key value (PF19) . . . . . . . . . . 142

PF20 key value (PF20) . . . . . . . . . . 143

PF21 key value (PF21) . . . . . . . . . . 144

PF22 key value (PF22) . . . . . . . . . . 145

PF23 key value (PF23) . . . . . . . . . . 146

PF24 key value (PF24) . . . . . . . . . . 147

PA1-PF1 key value (PA1PF1) . . . . . . . . 148

PA1-PF2 key value (PA1PF2) . . . . . . . . 150

PA1-PF3 key value (PA1PF3) . . . . . . . . 151

PA1-PF4 key value (PA1PF4) . . . . . . . . 152

PA1-PF5 key value (PA1PF5) . . . . . . . . 153

PA1-PF6 key value (PA1PF6) . . . . . . . . 154

PA1-PF7 key value (PA1PF7) . . . . . . . . 155

PA1-PF8 key value (PA1PF8) . . . . . . . . 156

PA1-PF9 key value (PA1PF9) . . . . . . . . 157

PA1-PF10 key value (PA1PF10) . . . . . . . 159

PA1-PF11 key value (PA1PF11) . . . . . . . 160

PA1-PF12 key value (PA1PF12) . . . . . . . 161

PA2-PF1 key value (PA2PF1) . . . . . . . . 162

PA2-PF2 key value (PA2PF2) . . . . . . . . 163

PA2-PF3 key value (PA2PF3) . . . . . . . . 164

PA2-PF4 key value (PA2PF4) . . . . . . . . 165

PA2-PF5 key value (PA2PF5) . . . . . . . . 166

PA2-PF6 key value (PA2PF6) . . . . . . . . 168

PA2-PF7 key value (PA2PF7) . . . . . . . . 169

PA2-PF8 key value (PA2PF8) . . . . . . . . 170

PA2-PF9 key value (PA2PF9) . . . . . . . . 171

PA2-PF10 key value (PA2PF10) . . . . . . . 172

PA2-PF11 key value (PA2PF11) . . . . . . . 173

PA2-PF12 key value (PA2PF12) . . . . . . . 174

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Set Master Key (SETMSTKEY) . . . . 177

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Master key (MSTKEY) . . . . . . . . . . 177

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Set Object Access (SETOBJACC) . . . 179

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Object (OBJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Object type (OBJTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . 181

Storage pool (POOL) . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Member (MBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Member data (MBRDATA) . . . . . . . . . 181

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Set Program Information

(SETPGMINF) . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Error messages for SETPGMINF . . . . . . . 183

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Root program (ROOTPGM) . . . . . . . . 184

Sub-programs (SUBPGM) . . . . . . . . . 185

Library information files (LIBFILE) . . . . . . 185

Listing detail (LISTDETAIL) . . . . . . . . 186

Print file (PRTFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Run attributes (RUNATTR) . . . . . . . . . 187

Performance options (PFROPT) . . . . . . . 187

Initial size of heap spaces (HEAPSIZE) . . . . . 188

Initial size of auto storage (STACKSIZE) . . . . 188

Session file attributes (SSNATTR) . . . . . . . 188

Debug options (DBGOPT) . . . . . . . . . 189

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Set Tape Category (SETTAPCGY) . . . 191

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Library device (DEV) . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Option (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Category (CGY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Cartridge order (CTGORDER) . . . . . . . . 193

Target category (TGTCGY) . . . . . . . . . 193

Mount identifier (MNTID) . . . . . . . . . 194

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Set Upgrade Environment

(SETUPGENV) . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Upgrade environment (UPGENV) . . . . . . 197

Contents v

Page 8: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Target release (TGTRLS) . . . . . . . . . . 197

Target processor (TGTPRC) . . . . . . . . . 198

Merge with Advanced/36 (MERGE) . . . . . . 198

Upgrade environment identifier (UPGENVID) . . 198

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Sign Off (SIGNOFF) . . . . . . . . . 199

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Job log (LOG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Drop line (DROP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

End connection (ENDCNN) . . . . . . . . 200

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Select Command (SLTCMD) . . . . . 201

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Command (CMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Send Break Message (SNDBRKMSG) 203

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Message text (MSG) . . . . . . . . . . . 203

To work station message queue (TOMSGQ) . . . 204

Message type (MSGTYPE) . . . . . . . . . 204

Message queue to get reply (RPYMSGQ) . . . . 204

Coded character set ID (CCSID) . . . . . . . 205

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Send Distribution (SNDDST) . . . . . 207

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Information to be sent (TYPE) . . . . . . . . 209

Recipient (TOUSRID) . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Internet Recipient (TOINTNET) . . . . . . . 210

Description (DSTD) . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Message (MSG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Message (LONGMSG) . . . . . . . . . . 211

Confirmation of delivery (CFMDEL) . . . . . . 211

Sensitivity (SENSITIV) . . . . . . . . . . 212

Personal (PERSONAL) . . . . . . . . . . 212

Content importance (IMPORTANCE) . . . . . 212

Priority (PTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

User identifier (USRID) . . . . . . . . . . 213

Document file (DOCFILE) . . . . . . . . . 213

Document member (DOCMBR) . . . . . . . 214

Document type (DOCTYPE) . . . . . . . . 214

Send format (SNDFMT) . . . . . . . . . . 214

System code (SYSCOD) . . . . . . . . . . 215

Document character identifier (DOCCHRID) . . . 215

Distribution identifier (DSTID) . . . . . . . 215

Distribution ID extension (DSTIDEXN) . . . . . 216

Document (DOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

In folder (FLR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Document identifier (DOCID) . . . . . . . . 216

Profile file (IDPFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Profile member (IDPMBR) . . . . . . . . . 218

Document description (DOCD) . . . . . . . 218

Author (AUTHOR) . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Document class (DOCCLS) . . . . . . . . . 218

Keyword (KWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Subject (SUBJECT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Document date (DOCDATE) . . . . . . . . 219

File cabinet location (FILCAB) . . . . . . . . 220

Copy list (CPYLST) . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Expiration date (EXPDATE) . . . . . . . . 220

Creation date (CRTDATE) . . . . . . . . . 220

Reference (REFERENCE) . . . . . . . . . 221

Action due date (ACTDATE) . . . . . . . . 221

Reply requested (RPYDATE) . . . . . . . . 221

Document status (STATUS) . . . . . . . . . 222

Completion date (CMPDATE) . . . . . . . . 222

Project (PROJECT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Language ID (DOCLANGID) . . . . . . . . 222

Country or region ID (DOCCNTRYID) . . . . . 223

Allow alternate recipient (ALWALTRCP) . . . . 223

Disclose recipient (DISCLOSE) . . . . . . . . 223

Allow X.400 conversion (ALWX400CNV) . . . . 224

Authorizing user (AUTUSR) . . . . . . . . 224

Distribution expiry indicator (DSTEXPDATE) . . . 224

Command character identifier (CMDCHRID) . . . 225

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Send Distribution Queue (SNDDSTQ) 229

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Distribution queue (DSTQ) . . . . . . . . . 230

Priority (PTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Send File (SNDF) . . . . . . . . . . 233

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Display device (DEV) . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Record format (RCDFMT) . . . . . . . . . 234

Open file identifier (OPNID) . . . . . . . . 234

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Send Journal Entry (SNDJRNE) . . . 237

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Journal (JRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Journal entry type (TYPE) . . . . . . . . . 238

Entry data (ENTDTA) . . . . . . . . . . 239

Journaled physical file (FILE) . . . . . . . . 239

Object (OBJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Object (OBJPATH) . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

File identifier (OBJFID) . . . . . . . . . . 241

Force journal entry (FORCE) . . . . . . . . 241

Override journal state (OVRSTATE) . . . . . . 241

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Send Message (SNDMSG) . . . . . . 245

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Message text (MSG) . . . . . . . . . . . 246

To user profile (TOUSR) . . . . . . . . . . 246

To message queue (TOMSGQ) . . . . . . . . 246

Message type (MSGTYPE) . . . . . . . . . 247

vi System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 9: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Message queue to get reply (RPYMSGQ) . . . . 247

Coded character set ID (CCSID) . . . . . . . 248

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Send Network File (SNDNETF) . . . . 251

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

File (FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

User ID (TOUSRID) . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Member (MBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

To file type (TOTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . 253

VM/MVS class (CLASS) . . . . . . . . . . 253

Send format (FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . 253

Send priority (PTY) . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Send Network Message

(SNDNETMSG) . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Message text (MSG) . . . . . . . . . . . 257

User ID (TOUSRID) . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Send Network Spooled File

(SNDNETSPLF) . . . . . . . . . . 261

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Spooled file (FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 262

User ID (TOUSRID) . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Job name (JOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Spooled file number (SPLNBR) . . . . . . . 263

Job system name (JOBSYSNAME) . . . . . . 263

Spooled file created (CRTDATE) . . . . . . . 263

Data format (DTAFMT) . . . . . . . . . . 264

VM/MVS class (CLASS) . . . . . . . . . . 265

Send priority (PTY) . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Send Program Message

(SNDPGMMSG) . . . . . . . . . . 269

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Message text, or (MSG) . . . . . . . . . . 270

Message identifier (MSGID) . . . . . . . . 270

Message file (MSGF) . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Message data field values (MSGDTA) . . . . . 271

Call stack entry message queue (TOPGMQ) . . . 271

Send to non-pgm message queue (TOMSGQ) . . . 274

To user profile (TOUSR) . . . . . . . . . . 274

Message type (MSGTYPE) . . . . . . . . . 275

Message queue to get reply (RPYMSGQ) . . . . 276

CL var for KEYVAR (4) (KEYVAR) . . . . . . 276

Coded character set ID (CCSID) . . . . . . . 277

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD) . . . . 281

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

PTF identifier (PTFID) . . . . . . . . . . 282

PTF parts (PTFPART) . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Remote control point (RMTCPNAME) . . . . . 283

Remote network identifier (RMTNETID) . . . . 283

Delivery method (DELIVERY) . . . . . . . . 283

Delivery format (DLVRYFMT) . . . . . . . . 284

Order (ORDER) . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Reorder (REORDER) . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Check PTF (CHKPTF) . . . . . . . . . . 284

Image option (IMGOPT) . . . . . . . . . . 285

Image directory (IMGDIR) . . . . . . . . . 285

Image prefix (IMGPFX) . . . . . . . . . . 285

Image catalog (IMGCLG) . . . . . . . . . 285

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Send/Receive File (SNDRCVF) . . . . 289

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Display device (DEV) . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Record format (RCDFMT) . . . . . . . . . 290

Open file identifier (OPNID) . . . . . . . . 290

Wait (WAIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Send Reply (SNDRPY) . . . . . . . 293

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Message key (MSGKEY) . . . . . . . . . . 293

Message queue (MSGQ) . . . . . . . . . . 294

Reply (RPY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Remove message (RMV) . . . . . . . . . . 294

Reject default reply (RJTDFTRPY) . . . . . . 295

Coded character set ID (CCSID) . . . . . . . 295

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Send Service Request (SNDSRVRQS) 297

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Action (ACTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Remote control point (RMTCPNAME) . . . . . 297

Remote network identifier (RMTNETID) . . . . 298

Problem identifier (PRBID) . . . . . . . . . 298

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Send TIE File (SNDTIEF) . . . . . . . 301

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

File (FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Member (MBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

User ID (TOUSRID) . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Node (TONODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

To file (TOFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Type of contents of file (TYPE) . . . . . . . 302

Priority (PTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Send User Message (SNDUSRMSG) 305

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Message text, or (MSG) . . . . . . . . . . 306

Contents vii

Page 10: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Message identifier (MSGID) . . . . . . . . 306

Message file (MSGF) . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Message data field values (MSGDTA) . . . . . 307

Valid reply values (VALUES) . . . . . . . . 307

Default reply value (DFT) . . . . . . . . . 307

Message type (MSGTYPE) . . . . . . . . . 308

To message queue (TOMSGQ) . . . . . . . . 308

To user profile (TOUSR) . . . . . . . . . . 308

CL var for message reply (MSGRPY) . . . . . 309

Translate table (TRNTBL) . . . . . . . . . 309

Coded character set ID (CCSID) . . . . . . . 309

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Display Mounted FS Information

(STATFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Object (OBJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Output (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Start Agent Services (STRAGTSRV) 315

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Preferences file directory (PREFDIR) . . . . . . 315

Home directory (HOMEDIR) . . . . . . . . 315

Additional classpath (CLASSPATH) . . . . . . 316

User profile for SBMJOB (SBMJOBUSER) . . . . 316

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Start ASP Balance (STRASPBAL) . . . 319

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Balance type (TYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Auxiliary storage pool ID (ASP) . . . . . . . 320

ASP device (ASPDEV) . . . . . . . . . . 321

Storage unit (UNIT) . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Time limit (TIMLMT) . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Start CHT Server (STRCHTSVR) . . . 325

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Server (SERVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Request response timeout (RSPTIMO) . . . . . 326

Authorization list (AUTL) . . . . . . . . . 326

Node (NODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) . . . . . 329

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Option (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Start Communications Server

(STRCMNSVR) . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Server type (SERVER) . . . . . . . . . . 333

Number of servers (NBRPASTHR) . . . . . . 333

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Start Communications Trace

(STRCMNTRC) . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Configuration object (CFGOBJ) . . . . . . . 337

Type (CFGTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Buffer size (MAXSTG) . . . . . . . . . . 337

Data direction (DTADIR) . . . . . . . . . 338

Trace full (TRCFULL) . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Number of user bytes to trace (USRDTA) . . . . 338

Communications trace options (CMNTRCOPTS) 339

DDI trace options (DDITRCOPTS) . . . . . . 339

Remote controller (RMTCTL) . . . . . . . . 340

Remote MAC address (RMTMAC) . . . . . . 340

Remote SAP (RMTSAP) . . . . . . . . . . 340

Local SAP (LCLSAP) . . . . . . . . . . . 340

IP protocol number (IPPCLNUM) . . . . . . 340

Remote IP address (RMTIPADR) . . . . . . . 341

LMI trace options (LMITRCOPTS) . . . . . . 341

NWS trace options (NWSTRCOPTS) . . . . . . 341

Watch for message (WCHMSG) . . . . . . . 341

Watched message queue (WCHMSGQ) . . . . . 342

Watched job (WCHJOB) . . . . . . . . . . 343

Watch for LIC log entry (WCHLICLOG) . . . . 344

Watch for PAL entry (WCHPAL) . . . . . . . 346

Length of time to watch (WCHTIMO) . . . . . 347

Trace program (TRCPGM) . . . . . . . . . 347

Time interval (TRCPGMITV) . . . . . . . . 349

Run priority (RUNPTY) . . . . . . . . . . 350

Trace description (TEXT) . . . . . . . . . 350

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Start Commitment Control

(STRCMTCTL) . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Lock level (LCKLVL) . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Notify object (NFYOBJ) . . . . . . . . . . 354

Commitment definition scope (CMTSCOPE) . . . 355

Text ’description’ (TEXT) . . . . . . . . . 356

Journal (DFTJRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Journal entries to be omitted (OMTJRNE) . . . . 356

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Start Copy Screen (STRCPYSCN) . . . 359

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Source device (SRCDEV) . . . . . . . . . 360

Output device (OUTDEV) . . . . . . . . . 360

Job queue (JOBQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

File to receive output (OUTFILE) . . . . . . . 361

Output member options (OUTMBR) . . . . . . 361

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Start Debug (STRDBG) . . . . . . . 363

viii System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 11: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Program (PGM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Default program (DFTPGM) . . . . . . . . 365

Maximum trace statements (MAXTRC) . . . . . 365

Trace full (TRCFULL) . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Update production files (UPDPROD) . . . . . 366

OPM source level debug (OPMSRC) . . . . . . 366

Service program (SRVPGM) . . . . . . . . 367

Class file (CLASS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Display module source (DSPMODSRC) . . . . . 368

Source debug program (SRCDBGPGM) . . . . . 368

Unmonitored message program (UNMONPGM) 368

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Start Debug Server (STRDBGSVR) 371

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Start Database Monitor (STRDBMON) 373

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

File to receive output (OUTFILE) . . . . . . . 374

Output member options (OUTMBR) . . . . . . 375

Job name (JOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Type of records (TYPE) . . . . . . . . . . 376

Force record write (FRCRCD) . . . . . . . . 376

Run time threshold (RUNTHLD) . . . . . . . 376

Storage threshold (STGTHLD) . . . . . . . . 376

Include system SQL (INCSYSSQL) . . . . . . 377

Filter by database file (FTRFILE) . . . . . . . 377

Filter by user profile (FTRUSER) . . . . . . . 378

Filter by internet address (FTRINTNETA) . . . . 378

Filter by local port number (FTRLCLPORT) . . . 378

Filter by query governor (FTRQRYGOVR) . . . . 379

Comment (COMMENT) . . . . . . . . . . 379

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Start Data Base Reader (STRDBRDR) 383

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Data base file (FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Member (MBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Job queue (JOBQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Queue for reader messages (MSGQ) . . . . . . 385

Reader (RDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Start DFU (STRDFU) . . . . . . . . 387

Error messages for STRDFU . . . . . . . . 387

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Option (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

DFU program (DFUPGM) . . . . . . . . . 388

Data base file (FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Member (MBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Start DIG Query (STRDIGQRY) . . . . 391

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Query name (HOSTNAME) . . . . . . . . 393

Query type (TYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Query class (CLASS) . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Reverse lookup (REVERSE) . . . . . . . . . 394

Domain name server (DMNNAMSVR) . . . . . 395

Domain name server port (PORT) . . . . . . 395

Query timeout (TIMEOUT) . . . . . . . . . 395

Use domain search list (USEDMNSCHL) . . . . 396

Domain search list (DMNSCHLIST) . . . . . . 396

Source address (SRCADR) . . . . . . . . . 396

Batch input file (BCHFILE) . . . . . . . . . 397

IP Version (IPVSN) . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Network protocol (PROTOCOL) . . . . . . . 398

Recursion desired (SETRDFLAG) . . . . . . . 398

Authoritative answers only (SETAAFLAG) . . . 398

Authentic data (SETADFLAG) . . . . . . . . 399

Disable DNSSEC checking (SETCDFLAG) . . . . 399

Print multiple lines (MULTILINE) . . . . . . 399

Print short answer (SHORT) . . . . . . . . 399

Print server in short answer (IDENTIFY) . . . . 399

Print query (PRTQRY) . . . . . . . . . . 400

Print RR class (PRTCLASS) . . . . . . . . . 400

Print RR TTL (PRTTTL) . . . . . . . . . . 400

Print all query detail (PRTALL) . . . . . . . 400

Print query command (CMD) . . . . . . . . 400

Print query comments (COMMENTS) . . . . . 401

Print query statistics (STATS) . . . . . . . . 401

Print question section (QUESTION) . . . . . . 401

Print answer section (ANSWER) . . . . . . . 401

Print authority section (AUTHORITY) . . . . . 401

Print additional section (ADDITIONAL) . . . . 402

Key file (KEYFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Key name (KEYNAME) . . . . . . . . . . 402

Stop on SERVFAIL (STOPFAIL) . . . . . . . 403

Ignore truncated responses (UDPTRUNC) . . . . 403

List authoritative servers (NSSCH) . . . . . . 403

Trace delegation path (TRACE) . . . . . . . 403

Times to try UDP query (UDPTRIES) . . . . . 403

UDP retry (UDPNBRRTY) . . . . . . . . . 404

Number of dots (NBRDOTS) . . . . . . . . 404

UDP buffer size for EDNS (BUFSIZE) . . . . . 404

Set EDNS version (EDNS) . . . . . . . . . 404

Clear EDNS version (NOEDNS) . . . . . . . 405

Best effort display (BESTEFFORT) . . . . . . 405

Request DNSSEC records (DNSSEC) . . . . . . 405

Chase DNSSEC chains (SIGCHASE) . . . . . . 405

Trusted keys file (TRUSTEDKEY) . . . . . . . 406

DNSSEC top down validation (TOPDOWN) . . . 406

Output file (TOSTMF) . . . . . . . . . . 406

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Start Directory Shadowing

(STRDIRSHD) . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Contents ix

Page 12: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start NSLOOKUP Query

(STRDNSQRY) . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Query name (HOSTNAME) . . . . . . . . 415

Domain name server (DMNNAMSVR) . . . . . 416

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Start Disk Reorganization

(STRDSKRGZ) . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Auxiliary storage pool ID (ASP) . . . . . . . 419

ASP device (ASPDEV) . . . . . . . . . . 419

Time limit (TIMLMT) . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Start Disk Watcher (STRDW) . . . . . 423

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Definition (DFN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Collection (COL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Library (LIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Text ’description’ (TEXT) . . . . . . . . . 424

Replace data (RPLDTA) . . . . . . . . . . 424

Collection interval (COLITV) . . . . . . . . 425

End collection (ENDCOL) . . . . . . . . . 425

Hardware file (HDWF) . . . . . . . . . . 425

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Start Education (STREDU) . . . . . . 429

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Start 3270 Display Emulation

(STREML3270) . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Emulation controller (EMLCTL) . . . . . . . 432

Emulation device (EMLDEV) . . . . . . . . 433

Emulation location (EMLLOC) . . . . . . . 433

Display device, batch only (DSPDEV) . . . . . 433

Page Up (Roll Down) key (PAGEUP) . . . . . 433

Page Down (Roll Up) key (PAGEDOWN) . . . . 434

Test Request key (TESTREQ) . . . . . . . . 434

Cursor Select key (CSRSLT) . . . . . . . . 435

SNA DBCS 3270PC emulation (IGCEMLPC) . . . 435

Emulation printer device (EMLPRTDEV) . . . . 435

Timeout wait for host (INZWAIT) . . . . . . 435

Numeric lock keyboard (NUMLCK) . . . . . . 436

Handle nulls (NULLS) . . . . . . . . . . 436

Host signon/logon command (LOGON) . . . . 436

Wait response (WAITRSP) . . . . . . . . . 437

End emulation conditions (ENDCOND) . . . . 437

Attention emulation menu (ATNEMLMNU) . . . 438

Function key program (FKEYPGM) . . . . . . 438

Keyboard language type (KBDTYPE) . . . . . 439

Outgoing translation table (TRNTBLOUT) . . . . 440

Incoming translation table (TRNTBLIN) . . . . 440

Configuration entry (EMLCFGE) . . . . . . . 440

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Start EPM Environment (STREPMENV) 445

Error messages for STREPMENV . . . . . . . 445

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Environment Name (EPMENV) . . . . . . . 445

Environment Program (ROOTPGM) . . . . . . 445

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Start Font Management Aid (STRFMA) 447

Error messages for STRFMA . . . . . . . . 447

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Start HOST Query (STRHOSTQRY) 449

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Query name (HOSTNAME) . . . . . . . . 449

Query type (TYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Query class (CLASS) . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Domain name server (DMNNAMSVR) . . . . . 451

Display SOA records (SOA) . . . . . . . . 451

List all hosts (AXFR) . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Use IP6.INT domain (IP6INT) . . . . . . . . 452

Recursion desired (SETRDFLAG) . . . . . . . 452

Network protocol (PROTOCOL) . . . . . . . 452

Show debug information (DEBUG) . . . . . . 452

IP Version (IPVSN) . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Number of dots (NBRDOTS) . . . . . . . . 453

Query timeout (TIMEOUT) . . . . . . . . . 453

UDP retry (UDPNBRRTY) . . . . . . . . . 453

Output file (TOSTMF) . . . . . . . . . . 453

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

Start Host Server (STRHOSTSVR) . . 457

Error messages for STRHOSTSVR . . . . . . 457

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Server type (SERVER) . . . . . . . . . . 458

Required protocol (RQDPCL) . . . . . . . . 459

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Start IDDU (STRIDD) . . . . . . . . 461

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Start IP over SNA Interface

(STRIPSIFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

Internet address (INTNETADR) . . . . . . . 463

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

Start ITF (STRITF) . . . . . . . . . 465

x System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 13: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Remote location (RMTLOCNAME) . . . . . . 465

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Start Journal (STRJRN) . . . . . . . 467

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

Objects (OBJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

File identifier (OBJFID) . . . . . . . . . . 469

Journal (JRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Directory subtree (SUBTREE) . . . . . . . . 469

Name pattern (PATTERN) . . . . . . . . . 470

New objects inherit journaling (INHERIT) . . . . 471

Images (IMAGES) . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Omit journal entry (OMTJRNE) . . . . . . . 471

Logging level (LOGLVL) . . . . . . . . . 471

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Start Journal Access Path

(STRJRNAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Journaled file (FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Journal (JRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Logging level (LOGLVL) . . . . . . . . . 477

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Start Journal Library (STRJRNLIB) 481

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

Library (LIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

Journal (JRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

Inherit rules (INHRULES) . . . . . . . . . 483

Logging level (LOGLVL) . . . . . . . . . 485

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Start Journal Object (STRJRNOBJ) 487

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Object (OBJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Object type (OBJTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . 488

Journal (JRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Images (IMAGES) . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Logging level (LOGLVL) . . . . . . . . . 489

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Start Journal Physical File

(STRJRNPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

Physical file to be journaled (FILE) . . . . . . 492

Journal (JRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

Record images (IMAGES) . . . . . . . . . 493

Journal entries to be omitted (OMTJRNE) . . . . 493

Logging level (LOGLVL) . . . . . . . . . 493

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

Start Job Watcher (STRJW) . . . . . 497

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

Definition (DFN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

Collection (COL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

Library (LIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

Text ’description’ (TEXT) . . . . . . . . . 498

Replace data (RPLDTA) . . . . . . . . . . 499

Collection interval (COLITV) . . . . . . . . 499

End collection (ENDCOL) . . . . . . . . . 499

Job name (JOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

Task name (TASKNAME) . . . . . . . . . 501

TDE number (TDENBR) . . . . . . . . . . 501

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

Start Job Log Server (STRLOGSVR) 503

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

Number of servers (NBRSVR) . . . . . . . . 503

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Start Mode (STRMOD) . . . . . . . . 505

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Remote location (RMTLOCNAME) . . . . . . 505

Device (DEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Mode (MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

Local location (LCLLOCNAME) . . . . . . . 506

Remote network identifier (RMTNETID) . . . . 506

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Start Mail Server Framework

(STRMSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

How to process mail messages (MSGOPT) . . . . 509

Number of MSF jobs (NBRMSFJOB) . . . . . . 509

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Start NFS Server (STRNFSSVR) . . . 511

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Server daemon (SERVER) . . . . . . . . . 512

Number of server daemons (NBRSVR) . . . . . 512

Number of block I/O daemons (NBRBIO) . . . . 513

Retrieve RPC registration (RTVRPCREG) . . . . 513

Timeout for start of daemon (STRJOBTIMO) . . . 513

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

Start Object Conversion

(STROBJCVN) . . . . . . . . . . . 515

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Option (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Library (LIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Object type (OBJTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . 517

ASP device (ASPDEV) . . . . . . . . . . 517

Object (OBJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

Directory subtree (SUBTREE) . . . . . . . . 518

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

Contents xi

Page 14: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Pass-Through (STRPASTHR) 521

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

Remote location (RMTLOCNAME) . . . . . . 521

APPC device (CNNDEV) . . . . . . . . . 522

Virtual controller (VRTCTL) . . . . . . . . 522

Virtual display device (VRTDEV) . . . . . . . 523

Mode (MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Local location (LCLLOCNAME) . . . . . . . 523

Remote network identifier (RMTNETID) . . . . 523

System request program (SRQ10PGM) . . . . . 524

User profile (RMTUSER) . . . . . . . . . 524

User password (RMTPWD) . . . . . . . . . 525

Initial program to call (RMTINLPGM) . . . . . 525

Initial menu (RMTINLMNU) . . . . . . . . 525

Current library (RMTCURLIB) . . . . . . . . 526

Display option (PASTHRSCN) . . . . . . . . 526

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

Start PC Command (STRPCCMD) . . . 531

Error messages for STRPCCMD . . . . . . . 531

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

PC command (PCCMD) . . . . . . . . . . 531

Pause (PAUSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

Start Organizer (STRPCO) . . . . . . 533

Error messages for STRPCO . . . . . . . . 533

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Text Assist (PCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Start Performance Explorer (STRPEX) 535

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

Session ID (SSNID) . . . . . . . . . . . 535

Option (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

Definition (DFN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

Filter (FTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

Error messages for RMVPEXDFN . . . . . . 537

Start Performance Collection

(STRPFRCOL) . . . . . . . . . . . 539

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

Default collection profile (COLPRF) . . . . . . 539

Cycle collection (CYCCOL) . . . . . . . . . 540

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

Start Performance Trace

(STRPFRTRC) . . . . . . . . . . . 543

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

Trace table size (SIZE) . . . . . . . . . . 543

Omit trace points (OMTTRCPNT) . . . . . . 544

Job types (JOBTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . 544

Job trace interval (JOBTRCITV) . . . . . . . 545

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Start Program Export List

(STRPGMEXP) . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Program level (PGMLVL) . . . . . . . . . 547

Signature level check (LVLCHK) . . . . . . . 547

Signature (SIGNATURE) . . . . . . . . . . 547

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

Start Programmer Menu

(STRPGMMNU) . . . . . . . . . . . 549

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

Source file (SRCFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 549

Source library (SRCLIB) . . . . . . . . . . 550

Object library (OBJLIB) . . . . . . . . . . 550

Job description (JOBD) . . . . . . . . . . 550

Allow changes (ALWUSRCHG) . . . . . . . 550

Option 3 exit program (EXITPGM) . . . . . . 551

Delete option (DLTOPT) . . . . . . . . . . 551

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Start Program Profiling (STRPGMPRF) 555

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Start Prestart Jobs (STRPJ) . . . . . 557

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

Subsystem (SBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

Program (PGM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

Start Printer Emulation (STRPRTEML) 561

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Emulation controller (EMLCTL) . . . . . . . 562

Emulation device (EMLDEV) . . . . . . . . 562

Emulation location (EMLLOC) . . . . . . . 563

Print device (PRTDEV) . . . . . . . . . . 563

Job name (JOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

End Bracket eject (ENDBKTEJT) . . . . . . . 563

Printer file (PRTFILE) . . . . . . . . . . 564

Timeout wait eject (TIMOUTEJT) . . . . . . . 564

Defer printing spool output (DFRPRTOUT) . . . 564

Spool output (SPOOL) . . . . . . . . . . 565

Open printer file (OPNPRTF) . . . . . . . . 565

Print positions per line (NUMCOL) . . . . . . 565

Lines per page (NUMLIN) . . . . . . . . . 566

Lines per inch (LPI) . . . . . . . . . . . 566

Message queue (MSGQ) . . . . . . . . . . 566

Language character set (CHRSET) . . . . . . 567

Submit job (SBMJOB) . . . . . . . . . . . 567

Job description (JOBD) . . . . . . . . . . 567

Outgoing translation table (TRNTBLOUT) . . . . 568

Job queue (JOBQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

xii System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 15: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

End emulation conditions (ENDCOND) . . . . 569

Acknowledge form feed (FORMFEED) . . . . . 569

Configuration entry (EMLCFGE) . . . . . . . 569

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR) 573

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

Printer (DEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

Output queue (OUTQ) . . . . . . . . . . 574

Queue for writer messages (MSGQ) . . . . . . 575

Form type options (FORMTYPE) . . . . . . . 575

File separators (FILESEP) . . . . . . . . . 576

Drawer for separators (SEPDRAWER) . . . . . 576

Writer (WTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Auto-end options (AUTOEND) . . . . . . . 577

Allow direct print (ALWDRTPRT) . . . . . . 577

Align page (ALIGN) . . . . . . . . . . . 578

Initialize printer (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . 578

Spooled file (FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 578

Job name (JOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

Spooled file number (SPLNBR) . . . . . . . 579

Job system name (JOBSYSNAME) . . . . . . 579

Spooled file created (CRTDATE) . . . . . . . 580

Starting page (PAGE) . . . . . . . . . . . 580

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

Start Query Management Proc

(STRQMPRC) . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Source member (SRCMBR) . . . . . . . . . 583

Source file (SRCFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 584

Relational database (RDB) . . . . . . . . . 584

Connection Method (RDBCNNMTH) . . . . . 584

User (USER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

Password (PASSWORD) . . . . . . . . . . 585

Naming convention (NAMING) . . . . . . . 585

Allow information from QRYDFN (ALWQRYDFN) 585

Command source file (CMDSRCFILE) . . . . . 585

Source member (CMDSRCMBR) . . . . . . . 586

Display screens (ALWDSPLAY) . . . . . . . 586

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Start Query Management Query

(STRQMQRY) . . . . . . . . . . . 589

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

Query management query (QMQRY) . . . . . 590

Output (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

Query management report form (QMFORM) . . . 591

File to receive output (OUTFILE) . . . . . . . 591

Output member options (OUTMBR) . . . . . . 591

Date and time (DATETIME) . . . . . . . . 592

Page numbers (PAGNBR) . . . . . . . . . 592

Relational database (RDB) . . . . . . . . . 592

Connection Method (RDBCNNMTH) . . . . . 593

User (USER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Password (PASSWORD) . . . . . . . . . . 593

Naming convention (NAMING) . . . . . . . 593

Allow information from QRYDFN (ALWQRYDFN) 594

Set variables (SETVAR) . . . . . . . . . . 594

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

Start Query (STRQRY) . . . . . . . 597

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

Start QSH (STRQSH) . . . . . . . . 599

Error messages for STRQSH . . . . . . . . 600

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Command (CMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

Start Question and Answer (STRQST) 603

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

Q/A database (QSTDB) . . . . . . . . . . 603

Lib containing Q/A database (LIB) . . . . . . 603

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

Start REXX Procedure (STRREXPRC) 605

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Source member (SRCMBR) . . . . . . . . . 605

Source file (SRCFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Parameters (PARM) . . . . . . . . . . . 606

Command environment (CMDENV) . . . . . . 606

Exit program (EXITPGM) . . . . . . . . . 607

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608

Start Remote Support (STRRMTSPT) 611

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

Device class (DEVCLS) . . . . . . . . . . 612

Display type (DSPTYPE) . . . . . . . . . 612

Display model (DSPMODEL) . . . . . . . . 613

Address (STNADR) . . . . . . . . . . . 613

User profile (USRPRF) . . . . . . . . . . 613

Resource name (RSRCNAME) . . . . . . . . 614

Remote location (RMTLOCNAME) . . . . . . 614

Local location (LCLLOCNAME) . . . . . . . 614

Remote network identifier (RMTNETID) . . . . 615

Maximum length of request unit (MAXLENRU) 615

Data compression (DTACPR) . . . . . . . . 615

Inbound data compression (INDTACPR) . . . . 616

Outbound data compression (OUTDTACPR) . . . 616

Modem (MODEM) . . . . . . . . . . . 617

Modem remote system (MDMRMTSYS) . . . . 618

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

Start Remote Writer (STRRMTWTR) 621

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621

Output queue (OUTQ) . . . . . . . . . . 622

Queue for writer messages (MSGQ) . . . . . . 622

Form type options (FORMTYPE) . . . . . . . 623

Contents xiii

Page 16: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Writer (WTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

Auto-end options (AUTOEND) . . . . . . . 624

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624

Start S/36 Session (STRS36) . . . . . 625

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

Menu (MENU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

Current library (CURLIB) . . . . . . . . . 625

Procedure or program (PRC) . . . . . . . . 626

Force menu (FRCMNU) . . . . . . . . . . 626

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Appendix. Notices . . . . . . . . . 629

Programming interface information . . . . . . 630

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

Terms and conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 632

Code license and disclaimer information . . . . 632

xiv System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 17: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Save S/36 File (SAVS36F)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Save System/36 File (SAVS36F) command can create:

v a copy of a single database physical file or logical file to diskette, tape magnetic media or another

database physical file in the same format as if a System/36 has saved the file.

v a copy of multiple database physical files or logical files to diskette or tape magnetic media in the

same format as if a System/36 had saved the files as a save all set. The files can be all files in a library,

all files that are not part of a file group, all files in a specific file group, or all files that begin with a

specified set of characters.

A Save All Set is a group (set) of files that share the same group (set) name and that are saved (copied)

to diskette or tape with one operation. The set of files can be restored (copied back from diskette or tape)

with a single operation by referring to the set name (see the Restore System/36 Files (RSTS36F)

command).

File groups are defined by file names that contain a period. The characters preceding the period identify

the file group, and the characters following the period identify the file within the group. As with file

names within the System/36 environment, the maximum number of characters is eight, including the

period. Files with names that do not contain a period are not part of a file group. The following examples

show the names of files within a file group.

PAYROL.A

PAYROL.B Files in File Group PAYROL

PAYROL.C

A.ACCTS

A.INV

A.PROL Files in File Group A

A.B.GO

A.B.INV

A.B.GO

A.B.INV Files in File Group A.B

The saved files can be restored to the following systems:

v System/36 (RESTORE procedure or $COPY utility)

v i5/OS (Restore System/36 File (RSTS36F) command)

The SAVS36F command is intended for exchanging files with a System/36. For creating a backup version

of a file, the i5/OS save commands (for example, Save Object (SAVOBJ) or Save Changed Object

(SAVCHGOBJ)) should be used.

Restrictions:

1. The following authorities are required (normally only applies when running on a system using

resource security):

v *USE authority for this command.

v *USE authority for the file or group of files specified in the FROMFILE parameter.

v *USE authority for the library specified in the FROMLIB parameter.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 1

Page 18: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

v *CHANGE authority to the file specified on the PHYFILE parameter if saving to an existing

physical file.

v *USE authority for the library specified in the PHYFILE parameter if saving to a physical file.

v *CHANGE authority for the library specified in the PHYFILE parameter if saving to a physical file

and the file does not exist.

v *USE authority for the diskette device description object, *USE authority for device file QSYSDKT,

in library QSYS if saving to diskette.

v *USE authority for the tape device description object, *USE authority for device file QSYSTAP, in

library QSYS if saving to tape.

v *USE authority for the based-on physical file if saving a logical file.2. All diskettes that are used for the save operation should be initialized using the INZDKT CL

command or the equivalent System/36 environment function (INIT operator control language (OCL)

procedure or $INIT SSP utility). For a two-sided diskette, use a sector size of 256 or 1024. For a

one-sided diskette, use a sector size of 128 or 512. If tape is used, each tape volume used should have

been initialized with standard labels using the INZTAP CL command or the equivalent System/36

environment function (TAPEINIT OCL procedure or $TINIT SSP utility). Use a density of 1600 bits

per inch when initializing the tape.

Note: If the tape or diskette has not been initialized as stated above, the System/36 will not be able to

process the media.

3. Object-level and record-level functions, other than read operations, should not be attempted for a file

being saved by SAVS36F. Concurrent activity against the file (for example, moving the file or adding

or removing records) can cause:

v For a save operation of a single file (FROMFILE(file-name)), the save operation will end with

escape message CPF9826 because the file cannot be allocated.

v For a save operation of multiple files (FROMFILE(*ALL or generic*-file-name)), the save function

sends an inquiry message CPA2C6A because the file cannot be allocated. The message allows an

ignore, retry and cancel response. The ignore response bypasses this file and attempts to save the

next file selected.4. When saving a single file to diskette, the diskette cannot already contain an active file with the same

label and creation date as the new file to be created.

5. When saving multiple files to diskette, the diskette used for the save cannot contain any active files.

6. Not all physical and logical files can be saved with the SAVS36F command.

v Only logical files created under the System/36 environment (for example, through the BLDINDEX

OCL procedure) or through a DDM request from a System/36 system can be saved. These files are

saved as System/36 alternative index files.

v All physical files created under the System/36 environment (for example, through the BLDFILE

OCL procedure) or through a DDM request from a System/36 system are saved using information

stored within the i5/OS file description. These files are saved as System/36 sequential, direct, or

indexed physical files.

v Any physical files created by i5/OS commands or utilities can be saved as long as the record length

is not greater than 4096. These files are saved as System/36 sequential files.7. To generate a save format which can be processed by the System/36 RESTORE procedure, the

following information is not saved:

v If saving a logical file, only the description of the file is saved. The index (or access path) is not

saved.

v If saving an indexed (keyed) physical file, the data is saved but the index is not. The index will be

rebuilt after the file is restored.8. The following restrictions apply to naming standards:

v When saving a single file, the specified name (FROMFILE parameter) must meet naming standards.

If not, message CPF0001 is sent when the SAVS36F command is processed.

2 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 19: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

v If a file name is found during a save operation of multiple files (FROMFILE(*ALL or

generic*-file-name)) that does not meet the System/36 naming standards, diagnostic message

CPF2C0E is sent and the file is not saved.9. Multiple files (FROMFILE(*ALL) or FROMFILE(generic*-name)) cannot be saved to a physical file.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

FROMFILE From file Generic name, name, *ALL Required,

Positional 1

FROMLIB From library Name Required,

Positional 2

DEV Device Single values: *PHYFILEOther values (up to 4 repetitions): Name

Required,

Positional 3

GROUP File group qualifier Character value, *ALL, *NONE Optional

SET Set identifier Character value, #SAVE Optional

TOLABEL File label Character value Optional

SEQNBR Sequence number 1-9999, *END Optional

VOL Volume identifier Values (up to 50 repetitions): Character value, *MOUNTED Optional

RETAIN Retention period 0-999, 1 Optional

ENDOPT End of tape option *REWIND, *LEAVE, *UNLOAD Optional

DTACPR Data compression *YES, *NO Optional

PHYFILE Physical file Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: Physical file Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

MBROPT Data base member option *NOREPLACE, *REPLACE Optional

CRTDATE Creation date Date, *LAST, *ALL Optional

Top

From file (FROMFILE)

Specifies the name of the file being saved. The file specified must exist in the library specified in the

From library prompt (FROMLIB parameter).

This is a required parameter.

file-name

Specify the name of a single file to save.

*ALL All files in the specified library are saved. To further describe which files are saved, use the File

group qualifier prompt (GROUP parameter).

generic*-file-name

Specify a generic name of a group of files in the specified library to save. All files with the same

prefix as the generic name are saved. A generic name is specified as a character string of one or

more characters, followed by an asterisk.

Top

Save S/36 File (SAVS36F) 3

Page 20: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

From library (FROMLIB)

Specifies which library contains the database files to be saved.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Device (DEV)

Specifies the name of a diskette unit or the names of one or more tape devices. A maximum of four tape

device names can be specified. If more than one tape device is used, enter the names of the devices in the

order in which they are used. Each device name must be already known on the system by a device

description.

This is a required parameter.

*PHYFILE

A database physical file receives the copied file. The qualified name of the physical file must be

specified on the Physical file prompt (PHYFILE parameter). *PHYFILE is not valid if *ALL or a

generic*-file-name is specified for the From file prompt (FROMFILE parameter).

device-name

Specifies the name of the diskette unit or the names of one or more tape devices used for the

save operation.

Top

File group qualifier (GROUP)

Specifies which file groups are to be saved. This parameter is valid only if *ALL is specified for the From

file prompt (FROMFILE parameter).

*ALL All files are saved.

*NONE

No files that belong to a file group are saved. Only files that do not belong to file group are

saved.

group-name

Specify the name of a file group. All files that belong to that file group are saved. Files that do

not belong to the specified file group are not saved. A group name can be up to 7 characters in

length. The first character in the name must be an alphabetic character (A through Z, #, @, or $).

The remaining characters can be any combination of characters (numeric, alphabetic, and special)

except commas (,), apostrophes (’), quotation marks (″), question mark (?), asterisk (*), or blanks.

The period, which indicates a file group name, must not be included as part of the group name.

Top

Set identifier (SET)

Specifies the set identifier used to identify the entire set of files to be saved. This parameter is valid only

if *ALL or a generic name is specified for the From file prompt (FROMFILE parameter).

#SAVE

The default set identifier is used.

4 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 21: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

set-identifier

Specify the set identifier used to identify the entire set of files to be saved. The set identifier can

be up to 8 characters in length. The first character in the name must be an alphabetic character (A

through Z, #, @, or $). The remaining characters can be any combination of characters (numeric,

alphabetic, and special) except commas (,), apostrophes (’), quotation marks (″), question mark (?),

asterisk (*), or blanks.

Top

File label (TOLABEL)

Specifies the label value (eight characters maximum) given to the new diskette or tape file created by the

save operation of a single file. If no value is specified, the value of the From file prompt (FROMFILE

parameter) is used as the diskette or tape label.

This parameter is not allowed if *ALL or a generic name is specified for From file prompt (FROMFILE

parameter).

Top

Sequence number (SEQNBR)

Specifies, only when tape is used, which sequence number is used for the save operation.

*END The specified file or files are saved starting after the last sequence number on the first tape (that

is, this file follows all other files currently on the tape volume). If the first tape is full, an error

message is issued and the operation ends. If the sequence number to be assigned to the specified

file is greater than 9999, an error message is issued and the operation ends.

If multiple files are saved, the next file is saved to a file after the first file that was saved, and so

on. If the sequence number to be assigned ever exceeds 9999, an error message is issued and the

operation ends.

file-sequence-number

Specify the sequence number of the tape file that is used for the save operation. Valid values

range from 1 through 9999.

If this sequence number already exists on the tape volume, the tape label at that sequence

number must match the TOLABEL parameter. The existing file at that sequence number is

overwritten, and all subsequent files on the volume are not accessible after the save.

If a new tape file is added to the tape, the sequence number must be one higher than the

sequence number of the last tape file on that volume. No gaps are allowed in the series of

sequence numbers.

If multiple files are being saved, this sequence number is used for the first file. All remaining files

are saved as if *END was specified on the parameter SEQNBR. If the sequence number to be

assigned ever exceeds 9999, an error message is issued and the operation ends.

Top

Volume identifier (VOL)

Specifies the volume identifiers of the tape volumes on which the object data is to be saved. The volumes

must be placed in the device in the same order as the volume identifiers are specified for this parameter.

*MOUNTED

The volume currently placed in the device is used.

Save S/36 File (SAVS36F) 5

Page 22: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

volume-identifier

Specify the volume identifiers of the tapes or diskettes used for the save operation. A maximum

of 50 volume identifiers can be specified.

Top

Retention period (RETAIN)

Specifies the retention period for the newly created tape or diskette file. The file is protected and cannot

be written over until the day after the retention period ends.

1 A retention period of one day is used.

retention-period

Specify the number of days the tape or diskette file should be kept. If a retention period of 999 is

specified, the tape or diskette file becomes a permanent file.

Top

End of tape option (ENDOPT)

Specifies, only when tape is used, what operation is automatically performed on the tape volume after

the save operation ends. This parameter applies only to the last reel used.

*REWIND

The tape is rewound, but not unloaded.

*LEAVE

The tape is not rewound.

*UNLOAD

The tape is automatically rewound and unloaded after the operation ends.

Top

Data compression (DTACPR)

Specifies, when a diskette is used, whether the data is compressed into System/36 compatible format

before it is written to the diskette. If the save command is operating while other jobs on the system are

active and data compression is used, the overall system performance may be affected. This parameter is

not valid if *PHYFILE or a tape device is specified on the Device prompt (DEV parameter).

The possible values are:

*NO The data is not compressed before being written to the diskette.

*YES The data is compressed before being written to the diskette.

Top

Physical file (PHYFILE)

Specifies the name of the file that receives the copied file. If the specified file does not exist, it is created

in the current library as a non-keyed, program-described file with a record length of 256. The copied

records are put in the first member of the physical file. If the file has no members, a member is created

using the system date.

6 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 23: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The possible library values are:

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current

library for the job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the library where the file is located.

Top

Data base member option (MBROPT)

Specifies whether the new records replace or are added to the existing records.

*NOREPLACE

Specifies whether a file already exists by the name specified on the PHYFILE parameter in the

specified library, an error message is sent and the data in that member is not replaced.

*REPLACE

The PHYFILE member is cleared before copying the first record.

Top

Creation date (CRTDATE)

Specifies, for a date-differentiated file (maintained by the System/36 environment), which instance

(member) of the file or files is saved. A date-differentiated file has the same name as another file but it

has a different file creation date. On this system, date-differentiated files are multiple-member physical

files.

*LAST

The most recently created member for the specified file or files are saved.

*ALL All members in the date-differentiated file are saved. If the file being saved is not date

differentiated, only the last member created in the file is saved. *ALL is valid only when *ALL or

a generic file name is specified for From file prompt (FROMFILE parameter).

file-creation-date

Specify the creation date of the date-differentiated file member to save. A file creation date is

valid only when a single file is saved, or a file name is specified on the From file prompt

(FROMFILE parameter).

Top

Examples

Example 1: Saving a Single File

SAVS36F FROMFILE(PETE) FROMLIB(QS36F) DEV(I1)

This command saves the file named PETE located in library QS36F. Assuming that I1 is the name of a

diskette device description, the file is saved on the diskette placed in the diskette drive. The diskette file

label is PETE (same as the FROMFILE name). If PETE is a date-differentiated physical file, the most

Save S/36 File (SAVS36F) 7

Page 24: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

recently created instance (member) of PETE is saved. The diskette file has a retention period of one day

(the retention period ends at midnight of the following day).

Example 2: Saving a Single File

SAVS36F FROMFILE(MSTRPAY) FROMLIB(PAYLIB) DEV(T1 T2)

TOLABEL(’PAY.MSTR’) RETAIN(999)

This command saves the file named MSTRPAY located in library PAYLIB. Assuming that T1 and T2 are

tape devices, the file is copied to the tapes on devices T1 and T2. The tape file label is PAY.MSTR and the

tape file is a permanent file. The last tape used for the save is rewound at the end of the save operation.

Example 3: Saving Multiple Files

SAVS36F FROMFILE(*ALL) FROMLIB(QS36F) DEV(T1 T2)

GROUP(*ALL) SET(ALLFL) RETAIN(999)

This command saves all database physical and logical files in library QS36F (including all files that

belong to a file group). If any of the files are date-differentiated files, only the last member created in

each file is saved. Assuming that T1 and T2 are tape devices, the files are copied to the tape volumes that

are placed in tape drives T1 and T2. The label of the tape files created are the same as the names of the

files that are saved. The first tape file created is located after the last sequence number on the tape. The

remaining files are located after that first file. The tape files created are permanent. The last tape used for

the save is rewound at the end of the save operation. The set identifier associated with this save all set is

ALLFL.

Example 4: Saving Multiple Files

SAVS36F FROMFILE(*ALL) FROMLIB(QS36F) DEV(T1 T2)

GROUP(*NONE) CRTDATE(*LAST) SET(NOGFL) RETAIN(999)

This command saves all database physical and logical files in library QS36F except those files that belong

to a file group. If any of the files are date-differentiated files, only the last member created in each file is

saved. Assuming that T1 and T2 are tape devices, the files are copied to the tape volumes that are placed

in tape drives T1 and T2. The label of the tape files created is the same as the names of the files that are

saved. The first tape file created is located after the last sequence number on the tape. The remaining files

are located after that first file. The tape files created are permanent. The last tape used for the save is

rewound at the end of the save operation. The set identifier associated with this save all set is NOGFL.

Example 5: Saving Multiple Files

SAVS36F FROMFILE(*ALL) FROMLIB(GRPLIB) DEV(I1)

GROUP(GRP) CRTDATE(*ALL)

This command saves all database physical and logical files in library GRPLIB that belong to file group

GRP (GRP.01, GRP.02, and so on). If any of the files are date-differentiated files, all members in the files

are saved. Assuming that I1 is a diskette drive, the files are copied to the diskette that is placed in the

diskette drive. The label of the diskette files created is the same as the names of the files that are saved.

The diskette files expire after one day. The set identifier associated with this save all set is #SAVE.

Example 6: Saving Multiple Files

8 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 25: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

SAVS36F FROMFILE(PAY*) FROMLIB(PAYROLL) DEV(I1)

SET(PAYSET) CRTDATE(*LAST)

VOL(PAYDKT) RETAIN(10)

This command saves all database physical and logical files in library PAYROLL whose names begin with

the characters PAY (PAY.01, PAYRATE, and so on). If any of the files are date-differentiated files, only the

last member created is saved. Assuming that I1 is a diskette drive, the files are copied to a diskette with a

volume identifier of PAYDKT. The label of the diskette files created is the same as the names of the files

that are saved. The diskette files expire after ten days. The set identifier associated with this save all set is

PAYSET.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2C4A

Device &1 not correct for command.

CPF2C4B

Duplicate device &1 specified in device name list.

CPF2C4C

Diskette device &1 included in multiple device specification.

CPF2C4F

Diskette format not correct for DTACPR(*YES).

CPF2C47

Existing file &1 or member &3 in library &2 not replaced.

CPF2C48

Input file &1 in &2 not correct for command.

CPF2C49

Output file &1 in &2 not correct for command.

CPF2C5B

Not all files were saved.

CPF2C5C

Save operation ended before all files were saved.

CPF2C5D

No files saved from library &1.

CPF2C5E

Input file &1 in &2 not correct for command.

CPF2C5F

Tape file sequence numbers beyond 9999 not allowed.

CPF2C50

File description for file &1 is not available.

CPF2C51

Member information for file &1 in library &2 is not available.

CPF2C52

Error occurred during attempt to create file &1 in library &2.

Save S/36 File (SAVS36F) 9

Page 26: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF2C54

FROMFILE name &1 too long to use for TOLABEL parameter.

CPF2C55

TOLABEL parameter value &1 contains embedded blank(s).

CPF2C56

Physical file name &1 too long.

CPF2C58

Diskette format not acceptable for System/36.

CPF2C59

FROMFILE name &1 too long.

CPF9810

Library &1 not found.

CPF9812

File &1 in library &2 not found.

CPF9814

Device &1 not found.

CPF9820

Not authorized to use library &1.

CPF9822

Not authorized to file &1 in library &2.

CPF9825

Not authorized to device &1.

CPF9826

Cannot allocate file &2.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

CPF9831

Cannot assign device &1.

CPF9845

Error occurred while opening file &1.

CPF9847

Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9848

Cannot open file &1 in library &2 member &3.

CPF9849

Error while processing file &1 in library &2 member &3.

*STATUS Messages

CPI2C13

Copying records from file &1 in library &2 member &3.

Top

10 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 27: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Save S/36 Library Members (SAVS36LIBM)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Save Library Members in System/36 Save/Restore Format (SAVS36LIBM) command creates a copy of

source file members in a file on diskette or tape that can be restored on a System/36, or into a database

physical file on this system that can be sent to a System/36. The saved member file is formatted like a

record-mode LIBRFILE created on a System/36 using the System/36 FROMLIBR system operator control

language (OCL) procedure (or the equivalent OCL use of the $MAINT SSP utility). On a System/36, the

diskette or tape or disk file can be restored using the TOLIBR system OCL procedure (or the equivalent

OCL use of the $MAINT SSP utility).

If a database physical file is specified using the Physical file prompt (PHYFILE parameter) but does not

exist, it is created.

This command is intended only for exchanging source and procedure data with a System/36. It provides

a simplified command interface for an i5/OS customer who migrated from a System/36, but is not

well-suited for backing up of i5/OS source files. Use the CL commands (SAVOBJ or SAVCHGOBJ) for

creating a backup copy of an i5/OS source file or individual source file members.

Restrictions:

1. The following authorities are required when running on a system using resource security:

v *USE authority for this command

v *USE authority for the library specified in the FROMLIB parameter

v *USE authority for file QS36SRC in the specified library if saving source library members

v *USE authority for file QS36PRC in the specified library if saving procedure library members

v *USE authority for the library specified in the PHYFILE parameter if saving to a physical file

v *CHANGE authority for the library specified in the PHYFILE parameter if saving to a physical file

and the file does not exist

v *CHANGE and *OBJMGMT authority for that file if saving to a physical file with MBROPT(*ADD)

v *ALL authority for the file if saving to a physical file with MBROPT(*REPLACE)

v *USE authority for the diskette device description object, *USE authority for device file QSYSDKT

in library QSYS if saving to diskette

v *USE authority for the tape device description object and *USE authority for device file QSYSTAP

in library QSYS if saving to tape2. All diskettes that are used to save the members should be initialized using the INZDKT CL command

or the equivalent System/36 environment function (INIT OCL procedure or $INIT SSP utility). For a

two-sided diskette, use a sector size of 256 or 1024. For a one-sided diskette, use a sector size of 128

or 512. If tape is used, each tape volume used should first be initialized with standard labels using the

INZTAP CL command or the equivalent System/36 environment function (TAPEINIT OCL procedure

or $TINIT SSP utility). Use a density of 1600 bits per inch when initializing the tape.

Note: If the tape or diskette has not been initialized as stated above, the System/36 will not be able to

process the media.

If a tape or diskette is used that has not been properly initialized, a message is sent to the system

operator that allows the operator to cancel the save or initialize the volume and continue.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 11

Page 28: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

3. Object-level functions, other than read operations, should not be used for files QS36SRC and

QS36PRC while members are being saved by SAVS36LIBM. If the necessary files cannot be allocated,

no members are saved.

Record-level functions, other than read operations, should not be used for members being saved.

Concurrent activity against a member (for example, adding or removing records) can cause the

member to be omitted from the save operation.

4. If saving a file to diskette, the diskettes used cannot contain an active file with the same name as the

TOLABEL parameter value, because the AS/400 system does not allow duplicate diskette file labels.

5. Only members from source files QS36SRC (for *SRC members) and QS36PRC (for *PRC members) in

the specified library can be saved using the SAVS36LIBM command. Only the member data is saved

from the source file member (that is, the source sequence number and change date fields are not

saved).

6. The specified member name or generic member name (FROMMBR parameter) must meet i5/OS

naming standards. When saving a member that has an extended name, the quotation mark characters

are not stored as part of the member name in the output file. For example, member ″A+B″ would be

saved as A+B.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

FROMMBR From member Generic name, name, *ALL Required,

Positional 1

FROMLIB From library Name Required,

Positional 2

DEV Device Single values: *PHYFILEOther values (up to 4 repetitions): Name

Required,

Positional 3

SRCMBRS S/36 source members *ALL, *SRC, *PRC Optional

TOLABEL File label Character value Optional

SEQNBR Sequence number 1-9999, *END Optional

VOL Volume identifier Values (up to 50 repetitions): Character value, *MOUNTED Optional

RETAIN Retention period 0-999, 1 Optional

EXCHTYPE Diskette file exchange type *E, *BASIC Optional

ENDOPT End of tape option *REWIND, *LEAVE, *UNLOAD Optional

PHYFILE Physical file Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: Physical file Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *CURLIB, *LIBL

MBROPT Data base member option *REPLACE, *ADD Optional

RCDLEN Record length 40-120, 120 Optional

Top

From member (FROMMBR)

Specifies the names of the members being saved.

This is a required parameter.

*ALL All members of the member type specified on the S/36 source members prompt (SRCMBRS

parameter) are saved.

12 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 29: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

member-name

Specify the member name of the members to be saved.

generic*-member-name

Specify the generic member name of the members to be saved. A generic name is a character

string that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*).

Top

From library (FROMLIB)

Specifies which library contains the members being saved.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Device (DEV)

Specifies the names of the devices used for the save operation. A maximum of four devices may be

specified.

This is a required parameter.

*PHYFILE

The output file is the database physical file specified by the Physical file prompt (PHYFILE

parameter).

device-name

Specify the name of the diskette unit or the names of one or more tape devices that are used for

the save operation. If more than one tape device is used, type the names of the devices in the

order in which they are used. A maximum of four tape device names can be specified.

Top

S/36 source members (SRCMBRS)

Specifies which source member types (source and procedure members on System/36) are saved.

*ALL System/36 source and procedure members (from QS36SRC and QS36PRC) that match the

member name specified on the From member prompt (FROMMBR parameter) are saved.

*SRC Only System/36 source members (from file QS36SRC) that match the member name specified on

the From member prompt (FROMMBR parameter) are saved.

*PRC Only System/36 OCL procedure members (from file QS36PRC) that match the member name

specified on the From member prompt (FROMMBR parameter) are saved.

Top

File label (TOLABEL)

Specifies the label value (eight characters maximum) of the output diskette or tape file. If *PHYFILE is

not specified on the Device prompt (DEV parameter), a value must be specified here.

Top

Save S/36 Library Members (SAVS36LIBM) 13

Page 30: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Sequence number (SEQNBR)

Specifies, only when tape is used, which sequence number is used for the save operation.

*END The specified members are saved starting after the last sequence number on the first tape (this

file is put after all other files currently on the tape volume). If the first tape is full, an error

message is issued and the operation ends. If the sequence number to be assigned to the specified

file is greater than 9999, an error message is issued and the operation ends.

file-sequence-number

Specify the sequence number of the tape file that is used when saving the specified members.

Valid values range from 1 through 9999.

If this sequence number already exists on the tape volume, the tape label at that sequence

number must match the TOLABEL parameter value. The existing data file at that sequence

number is overwritten, and all subsequent files on the volume are not accessible after the save

operation.

If a new tape file is added to the tape, the sequence number must be one greater than the

sequence number of the last tape file on that volume. No gaps are allowed in the series of

sequence numbers.

Top

Volume identifier (VOL)

Specifies the volume identifiers of the tape volumes on which the object data is to be saved. The volumes

must be placed in the device in the same order as the volume identifiers are specified for this parameter.

*MOUNTED

The volume currently placed in the device is used.

volume-identifier

Specify the volume identifiers of the tapes or diskettes used for saving the members. A maximum

of 50 volume identifiers can be specified.

Top

Retention period (RETAIN)

Specifies the retention period for the newly created tape or diskette file. The file is protected and cannot

be written over until the day after the retention period ends.

1 A retention period of one day is used.

retention-period

Specify the number of days the tape or diskette file should be kept. If a retention period of 999 is

specified, the tape or diskette file becomes a permanent file.

Top

Diskette file exchange type (EXCHTYPE)

Specifies the exchange type for the newly created diskette file.

*E The default is to create an E-exchange diskette file. An E-exchange file is a system save file that

can be restored on a System/36 using the TOLIBR procedure. It can also be restored to the

AS/400 system using the Restore System/36 Library Members (RSTS36LIBM) command.

14 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 31: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*BASIC

The output diskette file is to be in basic exchange format. A basic exchange format file can be

restored or copied to a System/34 or System/32 or any other system that supports the basic

exchange diskette format.

Top

End of tape option (ENDOPT)

Specifies, only when tape is used, what operation is automatically performed on the tape volume after

the save operation ends. This parameter applies only to the last reel used.

*REWIND

The tape is rewound, but not unloaded.

*LEAVE

The tape is not rewound.

*UNLOAD

The tape is automatically rewound and unloaded after the operation ends.

Top

Physical file (PHYFILE)

Specifies the name of the physical file that receives the copied source file member data.

If a file by this name does not exist, it is created in the current library if a library name was not specified,

as a non-keyed, program-described physical file with the record length specified by the Logical record

length prompt (RCDLEN parameter). If a file already exists by this name, it is used as long as it is a

non-keyed physical file with a record length in the range from 40 through 120. The copied records are put

in the first member of the physical file.

The possible library values are:

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current

library for the job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the library where the file is located.

Top

Data base member option (MBROPT)

Specifies whether the new records replace or are added to the existing records.

*REPLACE

The member is cleared before copying the first record.

*ADD The system adds the new records to the end of the existing records.

Top

Save S/36 Library Members (SAVS36LIBM) 15

Page 32: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Record length (RCDLEN)

Specifies the file record length (in bytes) used when copying the members.

120 This is the maximum record length allowed for System/36 source and procedure library

members.

record-length

Specify a record length in bytes.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Saving Single Procedure Member

SAVS36LIBM FROMMBR(XYZ1) FROMLIB(JOHNSON)

DEV(I1) SRCMBRS(*PRC) TOLABEL(XYZ1)

This command saves the single OCL procedure member XYZ1 (in source file QS36PRC) in library

JOHNSON. Assuming I1 is a diskette device, the member is saved to diskette file XYZ1. The file length is

120 and the retention period is one day.

Example 2: Saving All Source and Procedure Members

SAVS36LIBM FROMMBR(X*) FROMLIB(ORDER) DEV(*PHYFILE)

PHYFILE(NETLIB/S36SRC) MBROPT(*ADD)

This command saves all source and procedure members (members in QS36SRC and QS36PRC) with

names starting with the character ’X’ in library ORDER. The members are saved into database physical

file S36SRC in library NETLIB. The copied records are added after any records already in the file.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2C4A

Device &1 not correct for command.

CPF2C4B

Duplicate device &1 specified in device name list.

CPF2C4C

Diskette device &1 included in multiple device specification.

CPF2C43

Saved &2 members from library &1, &3 members not saved.

CPF2C44

No members saved from library &1.

CPF2C48

Input file &1 in &2 not correct for command.

16 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 33: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF2C49

Output file &1 in &2 not correct for command.

CPF2C5E

Input file &1 in &2 not correct for command.

CPF2C5F

Tape file sequence numbers beyond 9999 not allowed.

CPF2C50

File description for file &1 is not available.

CPF2C51

Member information for file &1 in library &2 is not available.

CPF2C52

Error occurred during attempt to create file &1 in library &2.

CPF2C55

TOLABEL parameter value &1 contains embedded blank(s).

CPF2C58

Diskette format not acceptable for System/36.

CPF9807

One or more libraries in library list deleted.

CPF9808

Cannot allocate one or more libraries on library list.

CPF9810

Library &1 not found.

CPF9812

File &1 in library &2 not found.

CPF9814

Device &1 not found.

CPF9820

Not authorized to use library &1.

CPF9822

Not authorized to file &1 in library &2.

CPF9825

Not authorized to device &1.

CPF9826

Cannot allocate file &2.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

CPF9845

Error occurred while opening file &1.

CPF9847

Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9849

Error while processing file &1 in library &2 member &3.

*STATUS Messages

Save S/36 Library Members (SAVS36LIBM) 17

Page 34: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPI2C13

Copying records from file &1 in library &2 member &3.

Top

18 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 35: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Save Save File Data (SAVSAVFDTA)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Save Save File Data (SAVSAVFDTA) command saves the contents of a save file to tape or optical

media. This command saves the save data in the save file to the device in a way that allows you to

restore objects directly from the device.

A save file containing data created by the Save Licensed Program (SAVLICPGM) command cannot be

saved by this command.

The information written on media by this command is similar to the data that was previously written to

the save file by the save command that originally created the save file data. This includes the object

descriptions, and object contents that existed when the original save operation was done.

This command uses only the save file and device description objects; it does not refer to or modify the

description or contents of the objects included in the file save data. Thus, objects included in the save file

are not locked during the running of this command, and the save history information (date, place, and

time when each object was last saved) is not updated by this command for each object in the save file.

The description of the save file is not included in the save operation (unless it was included with the

objects that were saved to create the save data in the file). In addition, this command does not update the

save history information for the save file object, so the last save operation date, time, and place always

identify the last save operation of the save file object description, not its contents.

Note: This command ignores all file overrides currently in effect for the job, except for the output file.

Restrictions:

v You must have use (*USE) authority for the save file and *USE authority for the tape or optical device

description.

v If a tape is used, it must have a standard label.

v The save file cannot be in use by a job running at the time the save operation occurs.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

SAVF Save file Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: Save file Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

DEV Device Values (up to 4 repetitions): Name Required,

Positional 2

VOL Volume identifier Single values: *MOUNTEDOther values (up to 75 repetitions): Character value

Optional,

Positional 3

SEQNBR Sequence number 1-16777215, *END Optional

ENDOPT End of media option *REWIND, *LEAVE, *UNLOAD Optional

OPTFILE Optical file Path name, * Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 19

Page 36: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

USEOPTBLK Use optimum block *YES, *NO Optional

CLEAR Clear *NONE, *ALL, *AFTER, *REPLACE Optional

EXPDATE File expiration date Date, *PERM Optional

COMPACT Data compaction *DEV, *NO Optional

OUTPUT Output *NONE, *PRINT, *OUTFILE Optional

OUTFILE File to receive output Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: File to receive

output

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

OUTMBR Output member options Element list Optional

Element 1: Member to

receive output

Name, *FIRST

Element 2: Replace or add

records

*REPLACE, *ADD

Top

Save file (SAVF)

Specifies the save file whose contents are to be saved.

Note: The save file must contain data written by a previous save command or an error message is sent,

and its contents are not saved to media.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Save file

name Specify the name of the save file whose contents are to be saved.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is used to locate the save file. If no current library entry exists

in the library list, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library where the save file is located.

Top

Device (DEV)

Specifies the name of the device used for the save operation. The device name must already be known on

the system by a device description.

This is a required parameter.

optical-device-name

Specify the name of the optical device used for the save operation.

tape-media-library-device-name

Specify the name of the tape media library device used for the save operation.

20 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 37: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

tape-device-name

Specify the names of one or more tape devices used for the save operation. If a virtual tape

device is used, it must be the only device specified. If multiple tape devices are used, they must

have compatible media formats and their names must be specified in the order in which they are

used. Using more than one tape device permits one tape volume to be rewound and unloaded

while another tape device processes the next tape volume.

Top

Volume identifier (VOL)

Specifies the volume identifiers of the volumes, or the cartridge identifiers of tapes in a tape media

library device, on which the data is saved. The volumes must be placed in the device in the same order

as specified for this parameter.

Single values

*MOUNTED

The data is saved on the volumes placed in the device. For a media library device, the volume to

be used is the next cartridge in the category mounted by the Set Tape Category (SETTAPCGY)

command.

Note: This value cannot be specified when using an optical media library device.

Other values (up to 75 repetitions)

character-value

Specify the identifiers of one or more volumes in the order in which they are placed in a device

and used to save the data.

Top

Sequence number (SEQNBR)

Specifies, when tape is used, the sequence number to use as the starting point for the save operation.

*END The save operation begins after the last sequence number on the first tape. If the first tape is full,

an error message is issued and the operation ends.

1-16777215

Specify the sequence number of the file to be used for the save operation.

Top

End of media option (ENDOPT)

Specifies the operation that is automatically done on the tape or optical volume after the save operation

ends. If more than one volume is used, this parameter applies only to the last volume used; all other

volumes are unloaded when the end of the volume is reached.

Note: This parameter is valid only if a tape or optical device name is specified for the DEV parameter.

For optical devices, *UNLOAD is the only special value supported, *REWIND and *LEAVE will be

ignored.

*REWIND

The tape is automatically rewound, but not unloaded, after the operation has ended.

Save Save File Data (SAVSAVFDTA) 21

Page 38: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*LEAVE

The tape does not rewind or unload after the operation ends. It remains at the current position on

the tape drive.

*UNLOAD

The tape is automatically rewound and unloaded after the operation ends. Some optical devices

will eject the volume after the operation ends.

Top

Optical file (OPTFILE)

Specifies the path name of the optical file that is used for the save operation, beginning with the root

directory of the volume.

For more information on specifying path names, refer to ″Object naming rules″ in the CL topic collection

in the Programming category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

* The system generates an optical file name in the root directory of the optical volume.

’optical-directory-path-name/*’

The system generates an optical file name in the specified directory of the optical volume.

Top

Use optimum block (USEOPTBLK)

Specifies whether or not the optimum block size is used for the save operation.

Note: Specifying USEOPTBLK(*YES) may result in a tape that can be duplicated only to a device that

supports the same block size.

*YES The optimum block size supported by the device is used for Save commands. If the block size

that is used is larger than a block size that is supported by all device types, then:

v Performance may improve.

v The tape file that is created is only compatible with a device that supports the block size used.

Commands such as Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) do not duplicate files unless the files are being

duplicated to a device which supports the same block size that was used.

v The value for the DTACPR parameter is ignored.

*NO The optimum block size supported by the device is not used. Save commands use the default

block size supported by all device types. The tape volume can be duplicated to any media format

using the Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) command.

Top

Clear (CLEAR)

Specifies whether active data on the media is automatically cleared or replaced. Active data is any file on

the media that has not expired. For saves to tape, clearing active data will make any files on the tape

volume beyond the last file written by the save operation no longer accessible. For saves to optical, the

files written by the save operation can be automatically replaced while other files on the volume remain

active, or all active files can be automatically cleared. Clearing does not erase the data, it just makes the

files no longer accessible.

22 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 39: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Notes:

1. Clearing a tape does not initialize it. You should initialize tapes to a standard label format before the

save command is issued by using the Initialize Tape (INZTAP) command and specifying a value for

the NEWVOL parameter.

2. Clearing an optical volume does initialize it.

3. If a volume that is not initialized is encountered during the save operation, an inquiry message is sent

and an operator can initialize the volume.

*NONE

None of the media is automatically cleared. If the save operation encounters active data on a tape

volume or in a save file, an inquiry message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the save

operation or clear the media. If the save operation encounters the specified optical file, an inquiry

message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the save operation or replace the file.

*ALL All of the media is automatically cleared.

If tapes are used and a sequence number is specified for the SEQNBR parameter, the first tape is cleared

beginning at that sequence number. All tapes following that first tape are completely cleared. To clear the

entire first tape, SEQNBR(1) must be specified.

*AFTER

All media after the first volume is automatically cleared. If the save operation encounters active

data on the first tape volume, an inquiry message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the

save operation or clear the media. If the save operation encounters the specified optical file on

the first volume, an inquiry message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the save

operation or replace the file.

*REPLACE

Active data on the media is automatically replaced. Optical volumes are not initialized. Other

media is automatically cleared in the same way as the *ALL value.

Top

File expiration date (EXPDATE)

Specifies the expiration date of the file created by the save operation. If a date is specified, the file is

protected and cannot be overwritten until the specified expiration date.

Notes:

1. This parameter is valid for tape and optical files.

2. Specifying this parameter does not protect against a later save operation specifying CLEAR(*ALL).

*PERM

The file is protected permanently.

date Specify the date when protection for the file ends.

Top

Data compaction (COMPACT)

Specifies whether device data compaction is performed.

*DEV Device data compaction is performed if the data is saved to tape and all tape devices specified

for the Device (DEV) parameter support the compaction feature.

*NO Device data compaction is not performed.

Save Save File Data (SAVSAVFDTA) 23

Page 40: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Output (OUTPUT)

Specifies whether a list with information about the saved objects is created. The information can be

printed with the job’s spooled output or directed to a database file.

*NONE

No output listing is created.

*PRINT

The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.

*OUTFILE

The output is directed to the database file specified for the File to receive output (OUTFILE)

parameter.

Note: You must specify a database file name for the File to receive output (OUTFILE) parameter

when OUTPUT(*OUTFILE) is specified.

Top

File to receive output (OUTFILE)

Specifies the database file to which the output of the command is directed. If the file does not exist, this

command creates a database file in the specified library. If the file is created, the public authority for the

file is the same as the create authority specified for the library in which the file is created. Use the

Display Library Description (DSPLIBD) command to show the library’s create authority.

Qualifier 1: File to receive output

name Specify the name of the database file to which the command output is directed.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file. If the file is not found, one is created in the current

library. If no current library exists, the file will be created in the QGPL library.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current

library for the thread, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Note: If a new file is created, the system uses the IBM-supplied file QASAVOBJ with format name

QSRSAV as a model.

Top

Output member options (OUTMBR)

Specifies the name of the database file member to which the output is directed when *OUTFILE is

specified for the Output (OUTPUT) parameter.

Element 1: Member to receive output

24 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 41: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*FIRST

The first member in the file receives the output. If OUTMBR(*FIRST) is specified and the member

does not exist, the system creates a member with the name of the file specified for the File to

receive output (OUTFILE) parameter.

name Specify the name of the file member that receives the output. If OUTMBR(member-name) is

specified and the member does not exist, the system creates it.

If the member exists, you can add records to the end of the existing member or clear the existing

member and add the records.

Element 2: Replace or add records

*REPLACE

The existing records in the specified database file member are replaced by the new records.

*ADD The new records are added to the existing information in the specified database file member.

Top

Examples

SAVSAVFDTA SAVF(ONLINE) DEV(TAP01) SEQNBR(1) CLEAR(*ALL)

This command saves the contents of save file ONLINE to the first file on the tape volume on device

TAP01. Files that have not ended on either the first tape volume or on subsequent volumes are

overwritten without an inquiry message because CLEAR(*ALL) is specified.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF3707

Save file &1 in &2 contains no data.

CPF3709

Tape devices do not support same densities.

CPF3727

Duplicate device &1 specified on device name list.

CPF3728

Device &1 specified with other devices.

CPF3733

&2 &1 in &3 previously damaged.

CPF3767

Device &1 not found.

CPF3768

Device &1 not valid for command.

CPF3782

File &1 in &2 not a save file.

CPF3793

Machine or ASP storage limit reached.

Save Save File Data (SAVSAVFDTA) 25

Page 42: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF3794

Save or restore operation ended unsuccessfully.

CPF3805

Objects from save file &1 in &2 not restored.

CPF3812

Save file &1 in &2 in use.

CPF3814

No objects from save file &1 in &2 saved to media.

CPF384E

USEOPTBLK(*YES) not valid for CD-ROM premastering.

CPF388B

Optical file path name not valid.

CPF5729

Not able to allocate object &1.

CPF9812

File &1 in library &2 not found.

CPF9822

Not authorized to file &1 in library &2.

CPF9825

Not authorized to device &1.

Top

26 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 43: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Save Security Data (SAVSECDTA)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Save Security Data (SAVSECDTA) command saves all security information without requiring a

system in a restricted state. The SAVSECDTA command saves the same security information that is saved

when a Save System (SAVSYS) command is run including the following:

v User Profiles

v Authorization Lists

v Authority Holders

Information saved with the SAVSYS or SAVSECDTA command can be restored using the Restore User

Profiles (RSTUSRPRF) and Restore Authority (RSTAUT) commands.

Restrictions:

v You must have save system (*SAVSYS) special authority to run this command.

v Changes made to user profiles while the SAVSECDTA command is being run may not be reflected on

the media, depending on when the changes occurred in relation to the save operation.

v Concurrent running of other SAVSECDTA commands is not allowed.

v If *YES is specified for the Object pre-check (PRECHK) parameter and a security object cannot be

saved, the save operation ends.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DEV Device Single values: *SAVFOther values (up to 4 repetitions): Name

Required,

Positional 1

VOL Volume identifier Single values: *MOUNTEDOther values (up to 75 repetitions): Character value

Optional

SEQNBR Sequence number 1-16777215, *END Optional

EXPDATE File expiration date Date, *PERM Optional

ENDOPT End of media option *REWIND, *LEAVE, *UNLOAD Optional

USEOPTBLK Use optimum block *YES, *NO Optional

SAVF Save file Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: Save file Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

OPTFILE Optical file Path name, * Optional

ASPDEV ASP device Name, *ALLAVL, *, *SYSBAS, *CURASPGRP Optional

CLEAR Clear *NONE, *ALL, *AFTER, *REPLACE Optional

PRECHK Object pre-check *NO, *YES Optional

DTACPR Data compression *DEV, *NO, *YES, *LOW, *MEDIUM, *HIGH Optional

COMPACT Data compaction *DEV, *NO Optional

OUTPUT Output *NONE, *PRINT, *OUTFILE Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 27

Page 44: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

OUTFILE File to receive output Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: File to receive

output

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

OUTMBR Output member options Element list Optional

Element 1: Member to

receive output

Name, *FIRST

Element 2: Replace or add

records

*REPLACE, *ADD

Top

Device (DEV)

Specifies the name of the device used for the save operation. The device name must already be known on

the system by a device description.

This is a required parameter.

Single values

*SAVF The save operation is done using the save file specified for the Save file (SAVF) parameter.

Other values

optical-device-name

Specify the name of the optical device used for the save operation.

tape-media-library-device-name

Specify the name of the tape media library device used for the save operation.

tape-device-name

Specify the names of one or more tape devices used for the save operation. If a virtual tape

device is used, it must be the only device specified. If multiple tape devices are used, they must

have compatible media formats and their names must be specified in the order in which they are

used. Using more than one tape device permits one tape volume to be rewound and unloaded

while another tape device processes the next tape volume.

Top

Volume identifier (VOL)

Specifies the volume identifiers of the volumes, or the cartridge identifiers of tapes in a tape media

library device, on which the data is saved. The volumes must be placed in the device in the same order

as specified for this parameter.

Single values

*MOUNTED

The data is saved on the volumes placed in the device. For a media library device, the volume to

be used is the next cartridge in the category mounted by the Set Tape Category (SETTAPCGY)

command.

Note: This value cannot be specified when using an optical media library device.

28 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 45: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Other values (up to 75 repetitions)

character-value

Specify the identifiers of one or more volumes in the order in which they are placed in a device

and used to save the data.

Top

Sequence number (SEQNBR)

Specifies, when tape is used, the sequence number to use as the starting point for the save operation.

*END The save operation begins after the last sequence number on the first tape. If the first tape is full,

an error message is issued and the operation ends.

1-16777215

Specify the sequence number of the file to be used for the save operation.

Top

File expiration date (EXPDATE)

Specifies the expiration date of the file created by the save operation. If a date is specified, the file is

protected and cannot be overwritten until the specified expiration date.

Notes:

1. This parameter is valid for tape and optical files.

2. Specifying this parameter does not protect against a later save operation specifying CLEAR(*ALL).

*PERM

The file is protected permanently.

date Specify the date when protection for the file ends.

Top

End of media option (ENDOPT)

Specifies the operation that is automatically done on the tape or optical volume after the save operation

ends. If more than one volume is used, this parameter applies only to the last volume used; all other

volumes are unloaded when the end of the volume is reached.

Note: This parameter is valid only if a tape or optical device name is specified for the DEV parameter.

For optical devices, *UNLOAD is the only special value supported, *REWIND and *LEAVE will be

ignored.

*REWIND

The tape is automatically rewound, but not unloaded, after the operation has ended.

*LEAVE

The tape does not rewind or unload after the operation ends. It remains at the current position on

the tape drive.

*UNLOAD

The tape is automatically rewound and unloaded after the operation ends. Some optical devices

will eject the volume after the operation ends.

Top

Save Security Data (SAVSECDTA) 29

Page 46: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Use optimum block (USEOPTBLK)

Specifies whether or not the optimum block size is used for the save operation.

Note: Specifying USEOPTBLK(*YES) may result in a tape that can be duplicated only to a device that

supports the same block size.

*YES The optimum block size supported by the device is used for Save commands. If the block size

that is used is larger than a block size that is supported by all device types, then:

v Performance may improve.

v The tape file that is created is only compatible with a device that supports the block size used.

Commands such as Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) do not duplicate files unless the files are being

duplicated to a device which supports the same block size that was used.

v The value for the DTACPR parameter is ignored.

*NO The optimum block size supported by the device is not used. Save commands use the default

block size supported by all device types. The tape volume can be duplicated to any media format

using the Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) command.

Top

Save file (SAVF)

Specifies the save file that is used to contain the saved data. The save file must be empty, unless *ALL is

specified for the Clear (CLEAR) parameter.

Note: A value must be specified for this parameter if *SAVF is specified for the Device (DEV) parameter.

Qualifier 1: Save file

name Specify the name of save file to be used.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is used to locate the save file. If no current library entry exists

in the library list, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library where the save file is located.

Top

Optical file (OPTFILE)

Specifies the path name of the optical file that is used for the save operation, beginning with the root

directory of the volume.

For more information on specifying path names, refer to ″Object naming rules″ in the CL topic collection

in the Programming category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

* The system generates an optical file name in the root directory of the optical volume.

30 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 47: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

’optical-directory-path-name/*’

The system generates an optical file name in the specified directory of the optical volume.

Top

ASP device (ASPDEV)

Specifies the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) device from which private authorities are to be saved.

*ALLAVL

The private authorities from the system ASP (ASP number 1), all basic user ASPs (ASP numbers

2-32), and all available independent ASPs are saved.

* The private authorities from the system ASP, all basic user ASPs, and, if the current thread has an

ASP group, all independent ASPs in the ASP group are saved.

*SYSBAS

The private authorities from the system ASP and all basic user ASPs are saved.

*CURASPGRP

If the current thread has an ASP group, the private authorities from all independent ASPs in the

ASP group are saved.

name Specify the ASP device name from which private authorities are to be saved.

Top

Clear (CLEAR)

Specifies whether active data on the media is automatically cleared or replaced. Active data is any file on

the media that has not expired. For saves to tape, clearing active data will make any files on the tape

volume beyond the last file written by the save operation no longer accessible. For saves to optical, the

files written by the save operation can be automatically replaced while other files on the volume remain

active, or all active files can be automatically cleared. Clearing does not erase the data, it just makes the

files no longer accessible.

Notes:

1. Clearing a tape does not initialize it. You should initialize tapes to a standard label format before the

save command is issued by using the Initialize Tape (INZTAP) command and specifying a value for

the NEWVOL parameter.

2. Clearing an optical volume does initialize it.

3. If a volume that is not initialized is encountered during the save operation, an inquiry message is sent

and an operator can initialize the volume.

*NONE

None of the media is automatically cleared. If the save operation encounters active data on a tape

volume or in a save file, an inquiry message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the save

operation or clear the media. If the save operation encounters the specified optical file, an inquiry

message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the save operation or replace the file.

*ALL All of the media is automatically cleared.

If tapes are used and a sequence number is specified for the SEQNBR parameter, the first tape is cleared

beginning at that sequence number. All tapes following that first tape are completely cleared. To clear the

entire first tape, SEQNBR(1) must be specified.

*AFTER

All media after the first volume is automatically cleared. If the save operation encounters active

Save Security Data (SAVSECDTA) 31

Page 48: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

data on the first tape volume, an inquiry message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the

save operation or clear the media. If the save operation encounters the specified optical file on

the first volume, an inquiry message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the save

operation or replace the file.

Note: The *AFTER value is not valid for save files.

*REPLACE

Active data on the media is automatically replaced. Optical volumes are not initialized. Other

media is automatically cleared in the same way as the *ALL value.

Top

Object pre-check (PRECHK)

Specifies whether the save operation should end if all objects specified by this command do not satisfy

the following conditions of the save operation: (1) the objects exist, (2) they were not previously found to

be damaged, (3) they are not locked by another job, and (4) the requester of the save operation has

authority to save the objects.

*NO The save operation continues, saving only those objects that can be saved.

*YES If, after all specified objects are checked, one or more objects cannot be saved, the save operation

ends before any data is written.

Top

Data compression (DTACPR)

Specifies whether data compression is used. If the save is running while other jobs on the system are

active and software compression is used, the overall system performance may be affected.

Note: If *DEV is specified for both this parameter and the Data compaction (COMPACT) parameter, only

device data compaction is performed if device data compaction is supported on the device. Otherwise,

data compression is performed.

If *YES is specified for this parameter and *DEV is specified for the COMPACT parameter, both device

data compaction and device data compression are performed if supported on the device.

*DEV If the save is to tape and the target device supports compression, hardware compression is

performed. Otherwise, no data compression is performed.

*NO No data compression is performed.

*YES If the save is to tape and the target device supports compression, hardware compression is

performed. If compression is not supported, or if the save data is written to optical media or to a

save file, software compression is performed. Low software compression is used for all devices

except optical DVD, which uses medium software compression.

*LOW If the save operation is to a save file or optical, software data compression is performed with the

SNA algorithm. Low compression is usually faster and the compressed data is usually larger than

if medium or high compression is used.

Note: This value is not valid for tape.

*MEDIUM

If the save operation is to a save file or optical, software data compression is performed with the

32 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 49: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

TERSE algorithm. Medium compression is usually slower than low compression but faster than

high compression. The compressed data is usually smaller than if low compression is used and

larger than if high compression is used.

Note: This value is not valid for tape.

*HIGH

If the save operation is to a save file or optical, software data compression is performed with the

LZ1 algorithm. High compression is usually slower and the compressed data is usually smaller

than if low or medium compression is used.

Note: This value is not valid for tape.

Top

Data compaction (COMPACT)

Specifies whether device data compaction is performed.

*DEV Device data compaction is performed if the data is saved to tape and all tape devices specified

for the Device (DEV) parameter support the compaction feature.

Note: If *DEV is specified for both the Data compression (DTACPR) parameter and this

parameter, only device data compaction is performed if device data compaction is supported on

the device. Otherwise, data compression is performed if supported on the device.

If *YES is specified for the DTACPR parameter and *DEV is specified for this parameter, both

device data compaction and device data compression are performed if supported on the device.

*NO Device data compaction is not performed.

Top

Output (OUTPUT)

Specifies whether a list with information about the saved objects is created. The information can be

printed with the job’s spooled output or directed to a database file.

*NONE

No output listing is created.

*PRINT

The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.

*OUTFILE

The output is directed to the database file specified for the File to receive output (OUTFILE)

parameter.

Note: You must specify a database file name for the File to receive output (OUTFILE) parameter

when OUTPUT(*OUTFILE) is specified.

Top

Save Security Data (SAVSECDTA) 33

Page 50: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

File to receive output (OUTFILE)

Specifies the database file to which the output of the command is directed. If the file does not exist, this

command creates a database file in the specified library. If the file is created, the public authority for the

file is the same as the create authority specified for the library in which the file is created. Use the

Display Library Description (DSPLIBD) command to show the library’s create authority.

Qualifier 1: File to receive output

name Specify the name of the database file to which the command output is directed.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file. If the file is not found, one is created in the current

library. If no current library exists, the file will be created in the QGPL library.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current

library for the thread, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Note: If a new file is created, the system uses the IBM-supplied file QASAVOBJ with format name

QSRSAV as a model.

Top

Output member options (OUTMBR)

Specifies the name of the database file member to which the output is directed when *OUTFILE is

specified for the Output (OUTPUT) parameter.

Element 1: Member to receive output

*FIRST

The first member in the file receives the output. If OUTMBR(*FIRST) is specified and the member

does not exist, the system creates a member with the name of the file specified for the File to

receive output (OUTFILE) parameter.

name Specify the name of the file member that receives the output. If OUTMBR(member-name) is

specified and the member does not exist, the system creates it.

If the member exists, you can add records to the end of the existing member or clear the existing

member and add the records.

Element 2: Replace or add records

*REPLACE

The existing records in the specified database file member are replaced by the new records.

*ADD The new records are added to the existing information in the specified database file member.

Top

34 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 51: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Examples

Example 1: Automatically Clearing Uncleared Tapes

SAVSECDTA DEV(TAP01) CLEAR(*ALL)

This command saves the security information, including user profiles, authorization lists, authority

holders. They are saved on the TAP01 tape drive. CLEAR(*ALL) automatically clears all uncleared tapes

when they are encountered.

Example 2: Sending Message When Storage Capacity Exceeded

SAVSECDTA DEV(TAP01) VOL(ABC)

This command saves the security information on the TAP01 tape drive, starting on the tape volume

labeled ABC. If the save operation exceeds the storage capacity of one tape, a message requesting that

another volume be put on the TAP01 tape drive is shown to the operator.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2206

User needs authority to do requested function on object.

CPF222E

&1 special authority is required.

CPF370A

Not all security objects saved to save file &3.

CPF3709

Tape devices do not support same densities.

CPF3727

Duplicate device &1 specified on device name list.

CPF3728

Device &1 specified with other devices.

CPF3731

Cannot use &2 &1 in library &3.

CPF3733

&2 &1 in &3 previously damaged.

CPF3735

Storage limit exceeded for user profile &1.

CPF3737

Save and restore data area &1 not found.

CPF3738

Device &1 used for save or restore is damaged.

CPF3767

Device &1 not found.

Save Security Data (SAVSECDTA) 35

Page 52: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF3768

Device &1 not valid for command.

CPF3782

File &1 in &2 not a save file.

CPF3793

Machine or ASP storage limit reached.

CPF3794

Save or restore operation ended unsuccessfully.

CPF3812

Save file &1 in &2 in use.

CPF384E

USEOPTBLK(*YES) not valid for CD-ROM premastering.

CPF388B

Optical file path name not valid.

CPF3893

Not all security objects saved.

CPF3894

Cancel reply received for message &1.

CPF38A4

ASP device &1 not correct.

CPF5729

Not able to allocate object &1.

CPF9809

Library &1 cannot be accessed.

CPF9812

File &1 in library &2 not found.

CPF9814

Device &1 not found.

CPF9833

*CURASPGRP or *ASPGRPPRI specified and thread has no ASP group.

CPF9845

Error occurred while opening file &1.

CPF9846

Error while processing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9847

Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9850

Override of printer file &1 not allowed.

CPF9851

Overflow value for file &1 in &2 too small.

CPF9860

Error occurred during output file processing.

CPFB8ED

Device description &1 not correct for operation.

36 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 53: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Save Security Data (SAVSECDTA) 37

Page 54: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

38 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 55: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Save Storage (SAVSTG)

Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT

*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Save Storage (SAVSTG) command saves a copy of the licensed internal code and the contents of

auxiliary storage (except unused space and temporary objects) to tape. This function is intended for

disaster recovery backup. Individual libraries or objects cannot be restored from a save storage tape.

This command issues the PWRDWNSYS (Power Down System) command with OPTION(*IMMED) and

RESTART(*YES) specified. While the system is powered down, a dedicated service tool (DST) that saves

all system storage is called. At that time, a standard labeled tape volume must be placed in the tape

device. Additional volumes are requested as needed. Hardware data compression is used if it is

supported by the tape device. After the save system storage function is complete, an initial program load

(IPL) takes place.

During the IPL after a save storage operation, a completion message is sent to the system operator

message queue. The save history information for the data area QSAVSTG in library QSYS is updated with

the date and time when the system storage data was saved. To show the information in this data area,

use the Display Object Description (DSPOBJD) command with DETAIL(*FULL).

The restore storage operation is done using the appropriate option on the DST menu. During the IPL,

after a restore storage operation, a completion message is sent to the system operator message queue, and

the last restore date and time history information in the QSAVSTG data area is updated with the current

date and time. In addition, the data portion of the QSAVSTG data area is updated with the date of the

save storage tape used in the restore system storage operation.

Note: Because media errors cause the save operation to start over from the last tape volume, use of this

command is recommended for smaller systems only.

Restrictions:

v You must have save system (*SAVSYS) special authority to run this command.

v The system cannot be running any other jobs; run the End Subsystem (ENDSBS) specifying SBS(*ALL)

or run the End System (ENDSYS) command to end all other jobs except the job running the SAVSTG

command.

v Tapes created using this command that will be used for installation should be initialized with a density

that is supported by the current alternate IPL device. If this is not done, the current IPL tape will have

to be changed to a tape device that supports the density of the created SAVSTG tapes before

installation can begin.

v Tapes created using the SAVSTG command should not be used for automatic installation.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DEV Tape device Name Required,

Positional 1

EXPDATE File expiration date Date, *PERM Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 39

Page 56: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

CLEAR Clear *NONE, *ALL Optional

Top

Tape device (DEV)

Specifies the tape device that is used for the save storage operation.

This is a required parameter.

name Specify the name of the tape device to be used.

Top

File expiration date (EXPDATE)

Specifies the expiration date of the file created by the save operation. If a date is specified, the file is

protected and cannot be overwritten until the specified expiration date.

*PERM

The tape files are protected permanently.

date Specify the date when protection for the tape files ends. The date must be specified in the job

date format.

Top

Clear (CLEAR)

Specifies whether uncleared tapes encountered during the save operation are automatically cleared. An

uncleared tape is one containing a file with an expiration date later than the date of the save operation,

which includes files protected permanently using EXPDATE(*PERM).

Note: This parameter does not control initializing the tapes. The tapes used to perform the save operation

should be initialized to a standard label format before the save command is issued. You can use the

Initialize Tape (INZTAP) command and specify a value for the NEWVOL parameter to initialize a tape to

a standard label format. If a tape volume that is not initialized is encountered during the save operation,

an inquiry message is sent and an operator can initialize the tape volume.

*NONE

None of the uncleared tapes encountered during the save operation are automatically cleared. If

the save operation cannot proceed because an uncleared tape is encountered, an inquiry message

is sent to the operator, who is allowed to end the save operation or to specify that the selected

tape be cleared so the operation can continue.

*ALL All uncleared tapes encountered during the save operation are automatically cleared.

Top

40 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 57: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Examples

Example 1: Specifying Expiration Date

SAVSTG DEV(TAP01) EXPDATE(122290) CLEAR(*ALL)

This command saves the system storage on the tape put on the TAP01 tape drive. Each uncleared tape is

cleared automatically. The tape files written are protected and cannot be overwritten until December 22,

1990.

Example 2: Saving System Storage

SAVSTG DEV(TAP02)

The system storage is saved on tape drive TAP02. CLEAR was not specified, so uncleared tapes

encountered during the save operation cause an inquiry message to be sent to the operator, who either

ends the save operation or specifies that the currently selected tape be cleared so the operation can

continue. Because EXPDATE also was not specified, the tape files being written are protected

permanently.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2206

User needs authority to do requested function on object.

CPF222E

&1 special authority is required.

CPF376A

System must not be in manual mode.

CPF3767

Device &1 not found.

CPF3768

Device &1 not valid for command.

CPF3785

Not all subsystems ended.

Top

Save Storage (SAVSTG) 41

Page 58: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

42 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 59: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Save System (SAVSYS)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Save System (SAVSYS) command saves a copy of the Licensed Internal Code and the QSYS library in

a format compatible with the installation of the operating system. It does not save objects from any other

library. In addition, it saves security and configuration objects that can also be saved using the Save

Security Data (SAVSECDTA) and Save Configuration (SAVCFG) commands.

To save the system data on offline storage, the system writes a copy of the objects onto the media. The

libraries and objects are not affected on the system. This command cannot be used to free any space

occupied by these objects. The history information for the data area QSAVUSRPRF in QSYS is updated

with the date, time, and place where user profiles are saved. The history information for the data area

QSAVSYS in QSYS is updated with the date, time, and place where the system is saved. The history

information for the data area QSAVCFG in QSYS is updated with the date, time, and place where

configuration objects are saved. The history information is not updated for the individual objects. To

display the information in these data areas, run the Display Object Description (DSPOBJD) command,

and specify DETAIL(*FULL). Save the information from the display of QSAVUSRPRF for the location

where the user profiles are saved.

When using this command, it is important to use the device on the system that is defined as the initial

program load (IPL) device. The IPL device was defined by the service representative when the system

was installed. If an IPL device is not used when using this command, then the system cannot be restored

using the SAVSYS media (if densities or media types are incompatible).

Restrictions:

1. You must have save system (*SAVSYS) special authority to run this command

2. All subsystems must be inactive before the SAVSYS command can be specified. The End System

(ENDSYS) or End Subsystem (ENDSBS) command can be used to make the subsystems inactive. You

must have job control (*JOBCTL) special authority to use the ENDSYS or the ENDSBS command.

3. Tapes created using this command that will be used for installation should be initialized with a

density that is supported by the current IPL tape unit. If this is not done, the current IPL tape will

have to be changed to a tape device that supports the density of the created SAVSYS tapes before

installation begins.

4. Tapes created using the SAVSYS command should not be used for automatic installation.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DEV Device Values (up to 4 repetitions): Name Required,

Positional 1

VOL Volume identifier Single values: *MOUNTEDOther values (up to 75 repetitions): Character value

Optional,

Positional 2

EXPDATE File expiration date Date, *PERM Optional

ENDOPT End of media option *REWIND, *LEAVE, *UNLOAD Optional

USEOPTBLK Use optimum block *YES, *NO Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 43

Page 60: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

OMIT Omit Single values: *NONEOther values (up to 2 repetitions): *CFG, *SECDTA

Optional

OUTPUT Output *NONE, *PRINT, *OUTFILE Optional

OUTFILE File to receive output Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: File to receive

output

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

OUTMBR Output member options Element list Optional

Element 1: Member to

receive output

Name, *FIRST

Element 2: Replace or add

records

*REPLACE, *ADD

ASPDEV ASP device Name, *ALLAVL, *, *SYSBAS, *CURASPGRP Optional

CLEAR Clear *NONE, *ALL, *AFTER, *REPLACE Optional

DTACPR Data compression *DEV, *NO, *YES, *LOW, *MEDIUM, *HIGH Optional

COMPACT Data compaction *DEV, *NO Optional

Top

Device (DEV)

Specifies the name of the device used for the save operation. The device name must already be known on

the system by a device description.

This is a required parameter.

optical-device-name

Specify the name of the optical device used for the save operation.

tape-media-library-device-name

Specify the name of the tape media library device used for the save operation.

tape-device-name

Specify the names of one or more tape devices used for the save operation. If a virtual tape

device is used, it must be the only device specified. If multiple tape devices are used, they must

have compatible media formats and their names must be specified in the order in which they are

used. Using more than one tape device permits one tape volume to be rewound and unloaded

while another tape device processes the next tape volume.

Top

Volume identifier (VOL)

Specifies the volume identifiers of the volumes, or the cartridge identifiers of tapes in a tape media

library device, on which the data is saved. The volumes must be placed in the device in the same order

as specified for this parameter.

Single values

*MOUNTED

The data is saved on the volumes placed in the device. For a media library device, the volume to

be used is the next cartridge in the category mounted by the Set Tape Category (SETTAPCGY)

command.

44 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 61: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Note: This value cannot be specified when using an optical media library device.

Other values (up to 75 repetitions)

character-value

Specify the identifiers of one or more volumes in the order in which they are placed in a device

and used to save the data.

Top

File expiration date (EXPDATE)

Specifies the expiration date of the file created by the save operation. If a date is specified, the file is

protected and cannot be overwritten until the specified expiration date.

*PERM

The files are protected permanently.

date Specify the date when protection for the files ends.

Top

End of media option (ENDOPT)

Specifies the operation that is automatically done on the tape or optical volume after the save operation

ends. If more than one volume is used, this parameter applies only to the last volume used; all other

volumes are unloaded when the end of the volume is reached.

Note: This parameter is valid only if a tape or optical device name is specified for the DEV parameter.

For optical devices, *UNLOAD is the only special value supported, *REWIND and *LEAVE will be

ignored.

*REWIND

The tape is automatically rewound, but not unloaded, after the operation has ended.

*LEAVE

The tape does not rewind or unload after the operation ends. It remains at the current position on

the tape drive.

*UNLOAD

The tape is automatically rewound and unloaded after the operation ends. Some optical devices

will eject the volume after the operation ends.

Top

Use optimum block (USEOPTBLK)

Specifies whether or not the optimum block size is used for the save operation.

Note: Specifying USEOPTBLK(*YES) may result in a tape that can be duplicated only to a device that

supports the same block size.

*YES The optimum block size supported by the device is used for Save commands. If the block size

that is used is larger than a block size that is supported by all device types, then:

v Performance may improve.

Save System (SAVSYS) 45

Page 62: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

v The tape file that is created is only compatible with a device that supports the block size used.

Commands such as Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) do not duplicate files unless the files are being

duplicated to a device which supports the same block size that was used.

v The value for the DTACPR parameter is ignored.

*NO The optimum block size supported by the device is not used. Save commands use the default

block size supported by all device types. The tape volume can be duplicated to any media format

using the Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) command.

Note: Not all files will be saved with optimum block size.

Top

Omit (OMIT)

Specifies what data to omit from the save system operation.

Single values

*NONE

All of the security data and configuration data are included in the save system operation.

Other values (up to 2 repetitions)

*CFG All of the configuration data is omitted from the save system operation. You can use the SAVCFG

(Save Configuration) command to save just the configuration object information.

*SECDTA

All of the security data is omitted from the save system operation. You can use the SAVSECDTA

(Save Security Data) command to save just the system security data.

Top

Output (OUTPUT)

Specifies whether a list with information about the saved objects is created. The information can be

printed with the job’s spooled output or directed to a database file.

*NONE

No output listing is created.

*PRINT

The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.

*OUTFILE

The output is directed to the database file specified for the File to receive output (OUTFILE)

parameter.

Note: You must specify a database file name for the File to receive output (OUTFILE) parameter

when OUTPUT(*OUTFILE) is specified.

Top

46 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 63: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

File to receive output (OUTFILE)

Specifies the database file to which the output of the command is directed. If the file does not exist, this

command creates a database file in the specified library. If the file is created, the public authority for the

file is the same as the create authority specified for the library in which the file is created. Use the

Display Library Description (DSPLIBD) command to show the library’s create authority.

Qualifier 1: File to receive output

name Specify the name of the database file to which the command output is directed.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file. If the file is not found, one is created in the current

library. If no current library exists, the file will be created in the QGPL library.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current

library for the thread, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Note: If a new file is created, the system uses the IBM-supplied file QASAVOBJ with format name

QSRSAV as a model.

Top

Output member options (OUTMBR)

Specifies the name of the database file member to which the output is directed when *OUTFILE is

specified for the Output (OUTPUT) parameter.

Element 1: Member to receive output

*FIRST

The first member in the file receives the output. If OUTMBR(*FIRST) is specified and the member

does not exist, the system creates a member with the name of the file specified for the File to

receive output (OUTFILE) parameter.

name Specify the name of the file member that receives the output. If OUTMBR(member-name) is

specified and the member does not exist, the system creates it.

If the member exists, you can add records to the end of the existing member or clear the existing

member and add the records.

Element 2: Replace or add records

*REPLACE

The existing records in the specified database file member are replaced by the new records.

*ADD The new records are added to the existing information in the specified database file member.

Top

ASP device (ASPDEV)

Specifies the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) device from which private authorities are to be saved.

Save System (SAVSYS) 47

Page 64: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*ALLAVL

The private authorities from the system ASP (ASP number 1), all basic user ASPs (ASP numbers

2-32), and all available independent ASPs are saved.

* The private authorities from the system ASP, all basic user ASPs, and, if the current thread has an

ASP group, all independent ASPs in the ASP group are saved.

*SYSBAS

The private authorities from the system ASP and all basic user ASPs are saved.

*CURASPGRP

If the current thread has an ASP group, the private authorities from all independent ASPs in the

ASP group are saved.

name Specify the ASP device name from which private authorities are to be saved.

Top

Clear (CLEAR)

Specifies whether active data on the media is automatically cleared or replaced. Active data is any file on

the media that has not expired. Clearing active data removes all files from the volume. Replacing active

data on optical media initializes the first volume, and replaces only the optical files created by this

operation on any volumes after the first volume.

Notes:

1. Clearing a tape does not initialize it. You should initialize tapes to a standard label format before the

save command is issued by using the Initialize Tape (INZTAP) command and specifying a value for

the NEWVOL parameter.

2. Clearing an optical volume does initialize it.

3. If a volume that is not initialized is encountered during the save operation, an inquiry message is sent

and an operator can initialize the volume.

*NONE

None of the media is automatically cleared. If the save operation encounters active data on the

first volume, an inquiry message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the save operation or

clear the media. If the save operation encounters active data after the first volume, an inquiry

message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the save operation, clear the tape, or replace

the optical file.

*ALL All of the media is automatically cleared.

*AFTER

All media after the first volume is automatically cleared. If the save operation encounters active

data on the first tape, an inquiry message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the save

operation or clear the media. If the save operation encounters the specified optical file on the first

volume, an inquiry message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the save operation or

replace the file.

*REPLACE

Active data on the media is automatically replaced. The first optical volume is initialized. Other

optical volumes are not initialized. Tapes are automatically cleared in the same way as the *ALL

value.

Top

48 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 65: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Data compression (DTACPR)

Specifies whether data compression is used. If the save is running while other jobs on the system are

active and software compression is used, the overall system performance may be affected.

Note: If *DEV is specified for both this parameter and the Data compaction (COMPACT) parameter, only

device data compaction is performed if device data compaction is supported on the device. Otherwise,

data compression is performed.

If *YES is specified for this parameter and *DEV is specified for the COMPACT parameter, both device

data compaction and device data compression are performed if supported on the device.

*DEV If the save is to tape and the target device supports compression, hardware compression is

performed. Otherwise, no data compression is performed.

*NO No data compression is performed.

*YES If the save is to tape and the target device supports compression, hardware compression is

performed. If compression is not supported, or if the save data is written to optical media or to a

save file, software compression is performed. Low software compression is used for all devices

except optical DVD, which uses medium software compression.

*LOW If the save operation is to a save file or optical, software data compression is performed with the

SNA algorithm. Low compression is usually faster and the compressed data is usually larger than

if medium or high compression is used.

Note: This value is not valid for tape.

*MEDIUM

If the save operation is to a save file or optical, software data compression is performed with the

TERSE algorithm. Medium compression is usually slower than low compression but faster than

high compression. The compressed data is usually smaller than if low compression is used and

larger than if high compression is used.

Note: This value is not valid for tape.

*HIGH

If the save operation is to a save file or optical, software data compression is performed with the

LZ1 algorithm. High compression is usually slower and the compressed data is usually smaller

than if low or medium compression is used.

Note: This value is not valid for tape.

Top

Data compaction (COMPACT)

Specifies whether device data compaction is performed.

*DEV Device data compaction is performed if the data is saved to tape and all tape devices specified

for the Device (DEV) parameter support the compaction feature.

Note: If *DEV is specified for both the Data compression (DTACPR) parameter and this

parameter, only device data compaction is performed if device data compaction is supported on

the device. Otherwise, data compression is performed if supported on the device.

If *YES is specified for the DTACPR parameter and *DEV is specified for this parameter, both

device data compaction and device data compression are performed if supported on the device.

*NO Device data compaction is not performed.

Top

Save System (SAVSYS) 49

Page 66: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Examples

Example 1: Tapes Cleared Automatically

SAVSYS DEV(TAP01) CLEAR(*ALL)

This command saves licensed internal code, system objects, all user profiles (including private authority

for objects), and all line, controller, and device descriptions. They are saved on the tape put on the TAP01

tape drive. Each uncleared tape is automatically cleared when it is encountered, and the save operation

continues without operator intervention.

Example 2: Operating Receives Message of Exceeded Storage Capacity

SAVSYS DEV(TAP01) VOL(ABCDE)

The system data is saved on the TAP01 tape drive, starting on the tape volume labeled ABCDE. If the

save operation exceeds the storage capacity of one tape, a message requesting that another volume be put

on the TAP01 tape drive is shown to the operator.

Example 3: Saving Data on Two Tape Drives in Alternating Order

SAVSYS DEV(TAP01 TAP02)

The system data is saved on tape drives TAP01 and TAP02 in alternating order. If the save operation

exceeds the storage capacity of two tapes, a message requesting that another volume be put on TAP01 is

shown to the operator. The tapes are rewound at the completion of the save system operation.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2206

User needs authority to do requested function on object.

CPF222E

&1 special authority is required.

CPF3703

&2 &1 in &3 not saved.

CPF3709

Tape devices do not support same densities.

CPF372B

Not all objects were saved.

CPF3727

Duplicate device &1 specified on device name list.

CPF3728

Device &1 specified with other devices.

50 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 67: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF3733

&2 &1 in &3 previously damaged.

CPF3735

Storage limit exceeded for user profile &1.

CPF3738

Device &1 used for save or restore is damaged.

CPF3767

Device &1 not found.

CPF3768

Device &1 not valid for command.

CPF3772

SAVSYS completed. One or more objects not saved.

CPF3785

Not all subsystems ended.

CPF3793

Machine or ASP storage limit reached.

CPF3794

Save or restore operation ended unsuccessfully.

CPF3797

Objects from library &3 not saved. Save limit exceeded.

CPF3798

Installation &2 &1 in &3 not found.

CPF384E

USEOPTBLK(*YES) not valid for CD-ROM premastering.

CPF3873

Licensed program &1 option &2 release &4 not saved.

CPF388B

Optical file path name not valid.

CPF3894

Cancel reply received for message &1.

CPF38A4

ASP device &1 not correct.

CPF9814

Device &1 not found.

CPF9833

*CURASPGRP or *ASPGRPPRI specified and thread has no ASP group.

CPF9845

Error occurred while opening file &1.

CPF9846

Error while processing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9847

Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9850

Override of printer file &1 not allowed.

Save System (SAVSYS) 51

Page 68: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF9851

Overflow value for file &1 in &2 too small.

CPF9860

Error occurred during output file processing.

CPFB8ED

Device description &1 not correct for operation.

Top

52 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 69: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Save System Information (SAVSYSINF)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Save System Information (SAVSYSINF) command saves a subset of system data and objects saved by

the Save System (SAVSYS) command. The system data and objects may be restored by the Restore System

Information (RSTSYSINF) command.

The history information for the data area QSYSINF in QSYS is updated with the date, time, and place

where the system information is saved.

SAVSYSINF is not to be considered a replacement for the SAVSYS command and is not to be used for

system upgrades or migrations.

Objects saved from QSYS include:

v *JOBD

v *JOBQ

v *EDTD

v *JRN

v *SBSD

v *CLS

v *MSGQ

v *TBL

v *IGCTBL

v *DTAARA

v *CMD objects changed since the last SAVSYS

v *MSGF objects changed since the last SAVSYS

Additional items saved include:

v System reply list

v Service attributes

v Environment variables

v Certain system values

v Network attributes

v PTFs applied since the last SAVSYS

Some items NOT saved as part of SAVSYSINF command:

v Licensed Internal Code

v QSYS library

v Security objects (use the SAVSECDTA command)

v Configuration objects (use the SAVCFG command)

v User profiles (use the SAVSECDTA command)

v System values related to date/time

v System values which cannot be changed. For system values which can be changed, refer to the i5/OS

Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 53

Page 70: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

v QPWDLVL (Password level) system value

Note: The SAVSYSINF command issues several save commands for saving objects. Parameters may or

may not be used for all save commands.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DEV Device Single values: *SAVFOther values (up to 4 repetitions): Name

Required,

Positional 1

VOL Volume identifier Single values: *MOUNTEDOther values (up to 75 repetitions): Character value

Optional

SEQNBR Sequence number 1-16777215, *END Optional

EXPDATE File expiration date Date, *PERM Optional

ENDOPT End of media option *REWIND, *LEAVE, *UNLOAD Optional

SAVF Save file Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: Save file Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

OPTFILE Optical file Path name, * Optional

USEOPTBLK Use optimum block *YES, *NO Optional

CLEAR Clear *NONE, *ALL, *AFTER, *REPLACE Optional

DTACPR Data compression *DEV, *NO, *YES, *LOW, *MEDIUM, *HIGH Optional

COMPACT Data compaction *DEV, *NO Optional

OUTPUT Output *NONE, *PRINT, *OUTFILE Optional

OUTFILE File to receive output Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: File to receive

output

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

OUTMBR Output member options Element list Optional

Element 1: Member to

receive output

Name, *FIRST

Element 2: Replace or add

records

*REPLACE, *ADD

Top

Device (DEV)

Specifies the name of the device used for the save operation. The device name must already be known on

the system by a device description.

This is a required parameter.

Single values

*SAVF The save operation is done using the save file specified for the Save file (SAVF) parameter.

Other values

54 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 71: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

optical-device-name

Specify the name of the optical device used for the save operation.

tape-media-library-device-name

Specify the name of the tape media library device used for the save operation.

tape-device-name

Specify the names of one or more tape devices used for the save operation. If a virtual tape

device is used, it must be the only device specified. If multiple tape devices are used, they must

have compatible media formats and their names must be specified in the order in which they are

used. Using more than one tape device permits one tape volume to be rewound and unloaded

while another tape device processes the next tape volume.

Top

Volume identifier (VOL)

Specifies the volume identifiers of the volumes, or the cartridge identifiers of tapes in a tape media

library device, on which the data is saved. The volumes must be placed in the device in the same order

as specified for this parameter.

Single values

*MOUNTED

The data is saved on the volumes placed in the device. For a media library device, the volume to

be used is the next cartridge in the category mounted by the Set Tape Category (SETTAPCGY)

command.

Note: This value cannot be specified when using an optical media library device.

Other values (up to 75 repetitions)

character-value

Specify the identifiers of one or more volumes in the order in which they are placed in a device

and used to save the data.

Top

Sequence number (SEQNBR)

Specifies, when tape is used, the sequence number to use as the starting point for the save operation.

*END The save operation begins after the last sequence number on the first tape. If the first tape is full,

an error message is issued and the operation ends.

1-16777215

Specify the sequence number of the file to be used for the save operation.

Top

File expiration date (EXPDATE)

Specifies the expiration date of the file created by the save operation. If a date is specified, the file is

protected and cannot be overwritten until the specified expiration date.

Notes:

1. This parameter is valid for tape and optical files.

Save System Information (SAVSYSINF) 55

Page 72: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

2. Specifying this parameter does not protect against a later save operation specifying CLEAR(*ALL).

*PERM

The file is protected permanently.

date Specify the date when protection for the file ends.

Top

End of media option (ENDOPT)

Specifies the operation that is automatically done on the tape or optical volume after the save operation

ends. If more than one volume is used, this parameter applies only to the last volume used; all other

volumes are unloaded when the end of the volume is reached.

Note: This parameter is valid only if a tape or optical device name is specified for the DEV parameter.

For optical devices, *UNLOAD is the only special value supported, *REWIND and *LEAVE will be

ignored.

*REWIND

The tape is automatically rewound, but not unloaded, after the operation has ended.

*LEAVE

The tape does not rewind or unload after the operation ends. It remains at the current position on

the tape drive.

*UNLOAD

The tape is automatically rewound and unloaded after the operation ends. Some optical devices

will eject the volume after the operation ends.

Top

Save file (SAVF)

Specifies the save file that is used to contain the saved data. The save file must be empty, unless *ALL is

specified for the Clear (CLEAR) parameter.

Note: A value must be specified for this parameter if *SAVF is specified for the Device (DEV) parameter.

Qualifier 1: Save file

name Specify the name of save file to be used.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is used to locate the save file. If no current library entry exists

in the library list, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library where the save file is located.

Top

Optical file (OPTFILE)

Specifies the path name of the optical file that is used for the save operation, beginning with the root

directory of the volume.

56 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 73: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

For more information on specifying path names, refer to ″Object naming rules″ in the CL topic collection

in the Programming category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

* The system generates an optical file name in the root directory of the optical volume.

’optical-directory-path-name/*’

The system generates an optical file name in the specified directory of the optical volume.

Top

Use optimum block (USEOPTBLK)

Specifies whether or not the optimum block size is used for the save operation.

Note: Specifying USEOPTBLK(*YES) may result in a tape that can be duplicated only to a device that

supports the same block size.

*YES The optimum block size supported by the device is used for Save commands. If the block size

that is used is larger than a block size that is supported by all device types, then:

v Performance may improve.

v The tape file that is created is only compatible with a device that supports the block size used.

Commands such as Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) do not duplicate files unless the files are being

duplicated to a device which supports the same block size that was used.

v The value for the DTACPR parameter is ignored.

*NO The optimum block size supported by the device is not used. Save commands use the default

block size supported by all device types. The tape volume can be duplicated to any media format

using the Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) command.

Top

Clear (CLEAR)

Specifies whether active data on the media is automatically cleared or replaced. Active data is any file on

the media that has not expired. For saves to tape, clearing active data will make any files on the tape

volume beyond the last file written by the save operation no longer accessible. For saves to optical, the

files written by the save operation can be automatically replaced while other files on the volume remain

active, or all active files can be automatically cleared. Clearing does not erase the data, it just makes the

files no longer accessible.

Notes:

1. Clearing a tape does not initialize it. You should initialize tapes to a standard label format before the

save command is issued by using the Initialize Tape (INZTAP) command and specifying a value for

the NEWVOL parameter.

2. Clearing an optical volume does initialize it.

3. If a volume that is not initialized is encountered during the save operation, an inquiry message is sent

and an operator can initialize the volume.

*NONE

None of the media is automatically cleared. If the save operation encounters active data on a tape

volume or in a save file, an inquiry message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the save

operation or clear the media. If the save operation encounters the specified optical file, an inquiry

message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the save operation or replace the file.

*ALL All of the media is automatically cleared.

Save System Information (SAVSYSINF) 57

Page 74: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

If tapes are used and a sequence number is specified for the SEQNBR parameter, the first tape is cleared

beginning at that sequence number. All tapes following that first tape are completely cleared. To clear the

entire first tape, SEQNBR(1) must be specified.

*AFTER

All media after the first volume is automatically cleared. If the save operation encounters active

data on the first tape volume, an inquiry message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the

save operation or clear the media. If the save operation encounters the specified optical file on

the first volume, an inquiry message is sent, allowing the operator to either end the save

operation or replace the file.

Note: The *AFTER value is not valid for save files.

*REPLACE

Active data on the media is automatically replaced. Optical volumes are not initialized. Other

media is automatically cleared in the same way as the *ALL value.

Top

Data compression (DTACPR)

Specifies whether data compression is used. If the save is running while other jobs on the system are

active and software compression is used, the overall system performance may be affected.

Note: If *DEV is specified for both this parameter and the Data compaction (COMPACT) parameter, only

device data compaction is performed if device data compaction is supported on the device. Otherwise,

data compression is performed.

If *YES is specified for this parameter and *DEV is specified for the COMPACT parameter, both device

data compaction and device data compression are performed if supported on the device.

*DEV If the save is to tape and the target device supports compression, hardware compression is

performed. Otherwise, no data compression is performed.

*NO No data compression is performed.

*YES If the save is to tape and the target device supports compression, hardware compression is

performed. If compression is not supported, or if the save data is written to optical media or to a

save file, software compression is performed. Low software compression is used for all devices

except optical DVD, which uses medium software compression.

*LOW If the save operation is to a save file or optical, software data compression is performed with the

SNA algorithm. Low compression is usually faster and the compressed data is usually larger than

if medium or high compression is used.

Note: This value is not valid for tape.

*MEDIUM

If the save operation is to a save file or optical, software data compression is performed with the

TERSE algorithm. Medium compression is usually slower than low compression but faster than

high compression. The compressed data is usually smaller than if low compression is used and

larger than if high compression is used.

Note: This value is not valid for tape.

*HIGH

If the save operation is to a save file or optical, software data compression is performed with the

LZ1 algorithm. High compression is usually slower and the compressed data is usually smaller

than if low or medium compression is used.

58 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 75: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Note: This value is not valid for tape.

Top

Data compaction (COMPACT)

Specifies whether device data compaction is performed.

*DEV Device data compaction is performed if the data is saved to tape and all tape devices specified

for the Device (DEV) parameter support the compaction feature.

Note: If *DEV is specified for both the Data compression (DTACPR) parameter and this

parameter, only device data compaction is performed if device data compaction is supported on

the device. Otherwise, data compression is performed if supported on the device.

If *YES is specified for the DTACPR parameter and *DEV is specified for this parameter, both

device data compaction and device data compression are performed if supported on the device.

*NO Device data compaction is not performed.

Top

Output (OUTPUT)

Specifies whether a list with information about the saved objects is created. The information can be

printed with the job’s spooled output or directed to a database file.

*NONE

No output listing is created.

*PRINT

The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.

*OUTFILE

The output is directed to the database file specified for the File to receive output (OUTFILE)

parameter.

Note: You must specify a database file name for the File to receive output (OUTFILE) parameter

when OUTPUT(*OUTFILE) is specified.

Top

File to receive output (OUTFILE)

Specifies the database file to which the output of the command is directed. If the file does not exist, this

command creates a database file in the specified library. If the file is created, the public authority for the

file is the same as the create authority specified for the library in which the file is created. Use the

Display Library Description (DSPLIBD) command to show the library’s create authority.

Qualifier 1: File to receive output

name Specify the name of the database file to which the command output is directed.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file. If the file is not found, one is created in the current

library. If no current library exists, the file will be created in the QGPL library.

Save System Information (SAVSYSINF) 59

Page 76: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current

library for the thread, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Note: If a new file is created, the system uses the IBM-supplied file QASAVOBJ with format name

QSRSAV as a model.

Top

Output member options (OUTMBR)

Specifies the name of the database file member to which the output is directed when *OUTFILE is

specified for the Output (OUTPUT) parameter.

Element 1: Member to receive output

*FIRST

The first member in the file receives the output. If OUTMBR(*FIRST) is specified and the member

does not exist, the system creates a member with the name of the file specified for the File to

receive output (OUTFILE) parameter.

name Specify the name of the file member that receives the output. If OUTMBR(member-name) is

specified and the member does not exist, the system creates it.

If the member exists, you can add records to the end of the existing member or clear the existing

member and add the records.

Element 2: Replace or add records

*REPLACE

The existing records in the specified database file member are replaced by the new records.

*ADD The new records are added to the existing information in the specified database file member.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Tapes Cleared Automatically

SAVSYSINF DEV(TAP01) CLEAR(*ALL)

This command saves the system information on the tape put on the TAP01 tape drive. Each uncleared

tape is automatically cleared when it is encountered, and the save operation continues without operator

intervention.

Example 2: Save File Cleared Automatically and Output Generated to a File

SAVSYSINF DEV(*SAVF) SAVF(QGPL/SAVF) CLEAR(*ALL)

OUTPUT(*OUTFILE) OUTFILE(QGPL/OUTPUT)

This command saves the system information to the save file named SAVF in library QGPL. The save file

will be cleared automatically. Information about what was saved will be written to the first member of

the file named OUTPUT in library QGPL; the file and member will be created if they do not exist.

60 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 77: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF38A7

SAVSYSINF completed. One or more objects not saved.

CPD37AD

Save file not found for PTF &1-&2 &3.

Top

Save System Information (SAVSYSINF) 61

Page 78: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

62 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 79: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Submit Data Base Jobs (SBMDBJOB)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Submit Database Jobs (SBMDBJOB) command allows you to submit jobs to job queues so they can be

run as batch jobs. The input stream is read either from a physical database file or from a logical database

file that has a single-record format. This command allows you to specify the name of this database file

and its member, the name of the job queue to be used, and to decide whether jobs being submitted can

be displayed by the Work with Submitted Jobs (WRKSBMJOB) command

A Submit Database Jobs operation reads the file once and ends when the end-of-file is read or when an

End Input (ENDINP) command is encountered. The ENDINP command (a delimiter) is not recognized if

it is within an inline file that ends with characters that are not default ending characters (as specified in

the ENDCHAR parameter of the Data (DATA) command). The SBMDBJOB operation can be canceled

either by canceling the request from the system request menu or by canceling the job in which the

process is running.

In contrast to a spool reader started with the Start Database Reader (STRDBRDR) command, the

SBMDBJOB command operates in the same process as the requesting function and does not do syntax

checking on the input stream.

Restriction: The specified database file either must consist of single-field records and must have an

arrival sequence access path, or it must be a standard database source file.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

FILE Data base file Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: Data base file Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

MBR Member Name, *FIRST Optional,

Positional 2

JOBQ Job queue Qualified object name Optional,

Positional 3 Qualifier 1: Job queue Name, QBATCH

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

DSPSBMJOB Show on submitted job list *YES, *NO Optional

Top

Data base file (FILE)

Specifies the database file from which the input stream is read.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Data base file

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 63

Page 80: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

name Specify the name of the database file that contains the input stream that you want to read.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no current library entry exists in the

library list, QGPL is used.

name Specify the name of the library where the file is located.

Top

Member (MBR)

Specifies the member in the specified file that contains the input stream to be read.

*FIRST

No member name is specified; the first member in the file is used.

name Specify the name of the member that contains the input stream to read.

Top

Job queue (JOBQ)

Specifies the job queue on which the job entries are placed. A job entry is placed on this queue for each

job in the input stream that has JOBQ(*RDR) specified on the Batch Job (BCHJOB) command. If *RDR is

not specified on the BCHJOB command, the job queue specified on the BCHJOB command or in the job

description is used. (The job queue for each job in the input stream can be different.) This parameter is

valid only if ACTION(*SUBMIT) is specified in the existing network job entry or in a subsequent Change

Network Job Entry (CHGNETJOBE) command.

Note: If both the user identified in the job description of the job being read and the user processing the

Submit Database Job (SBMDBJOB) command are not authorized to the job queue on which the job should

be placed, the job ends and a diagnostic message is placed in the job log. The input stream, continues to

be processed, starting with the next job. If either user is authorized to the job queue, the job runs without

error.

Qualifier 1: Job queue

QBATCH

The job entry is to be placed on the QBATCH job queue, which is the default job queue. This will

happen if *RDR is specified on the Job queue (JOBQ) parameter of the Batch Job (BCHJOB)

command. The Batch Job (BCHJOB) command is contained in the input stream itself.

name Specify the name of the job queue to which each job in the input stream will be sent. This will

happen if *RDR is specified on the JOBQ parameter of the Batch Job (BCHJOB) command.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the job queue.

name Specify the name of the library where the job queue is located.

Top

64 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 81: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Show on submitted job list (DSPSBMJOB)

Specifies whether the jobs being submitted are displayed on the submitted jobs display. If *YES is

specified here, these submitted jobs can be displayed when the Work with Submitted Jobs (WRKSBMJOB)

command is used.

*YES This job can be displayed by the Work with Submitted Jobs (WRKSBMJOB) command.

*NO This job is not displayed on any display produced by the Work with Submitted Jobs

(WRKSBMJOB) command.

Top

Examples

SBMDBJOB FILE(QGPL/BILLING)

This command submits jobs using input from the database file named BILLING, which is in the QGPL

library. The first member in the BILLING file contains the input stream to be processed. The default

system-supplied job queue QBATCH is used.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF1751

Error while processing job &3/&2/&1.

CPF1754

File &1 in library &2 not database file or DDM file.

CPF1760

Submit jobs command not allowed.

CPF2207

Not authorized to use object &1 in library &3 type *&2.

CPF3307

Job queue &1 in &2 not found.

CPF3330

Necessary resource not available.

CPF3363

Message queue &1 in library &2 not found.

CPF9802

Not authorized to object &2 in &3.

CPF9812

File &1 in library &2 not found.

CPF9815

Member &5 file &2 in library &3 not found.

Submit Data Base Jobs (SBMDBJOB) 65

Page 82: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF9845

Error occurred while opening file &1.

CPF9846

Error while processing file &1 in library &2.

*STATUS Messages

CPF1762

Reading job &3/&2/&1.

Top

66 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 83: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Submit Finance Job (SBMFNCJOB)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Submit Finance Job (SBMFNCJOB) command submits a batch job that lets your finance application

programs communicate with your 4701 or 4702 controller application programs.

Use the SBMFNCJOB command only if:

v Communicating with a 4701 or 4702 control unit

v A device table and a program table have been defined using the Work with Device Table

(WRKDEVTBL) and Work with Program Table (WRKPGMTBL) commands; defining a user table using

the Work with User Table (WRKUSRTBL) command is optional

v The user’s 4701 or 4702 control unit application program sends data (transactions) first and expects a

response

v The user’s 4701 or 4702 control unit application program passes data in the proper format

Restriction: This command is shipped with public *EXCLUDE authority.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DEVTBL Device table Name Required,

Positional 1

PGMTBL Program table Name Required,

Positional 2

USRTBL User table Name, *NONE Optional,

Positional 3

JOB Job name Name, QFNCJOB Optional

JOBD Job description Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: Job description Name, QFNC

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

MSGQ Message queue Single values: *WRKSTN, *NONEOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Message queue Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Top

Device table (DEVTBL)

Specifies the name of the device table that the finance job uses to determine which 4704 or 3624 devices it

controls. This is a required parameter.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 67

Page 84: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Program table (PGMTBL)

Specifies the name of the program table that the finance job uses to determine, from the program ID (sent

in the data stream with a finance transaction), which user program names will process the finance

transaction. This is a required parameter.

Top

User table (USRTBL)

Specifies the name of the user table that the finance job uses to verify a valid user when a finance sign-on

is received.

The possible values are:

*NONE

No user IDs are verified.

user-table-name

Specify the name of a user table that defines user IDs for the 4700 device.

Top

Job name (JOB)

Specifies the job name that is associated with the submitted finance job.

The possible values are:

QFNCJOB

The job name is submitted as QFNCJOB.

job-name

Specify the user-defined job name that is associated with the submitted finance job.

Top

Job description (JOBD)

Specifies the name and library of the job description that is used by the finance job.

The possible values are:

*QFNC

The submitted finance job uses the job description QFNC.

job-description-name

Specify the name and library of a job description that is used by the finance job. (If no library

name is given, the job description is found through the library list used by the job in which the

Submit Finance Job (SBMFNCJOB) command is entered.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL

The library list is used to locate the finance job.

*CURLIB

68 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 85: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The current library for the job is used to locate the finance job. If no library is specified as

the library for the job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the name of the library where the finance job is located.

Top

Message queue (MSGQ)

Specifies the name of the message queue, to which messages can be sent while the finance job is running.

The possible values are:

WRKSTN

The finance messages are sent to the message queue of the work station from which the finance

job was submitted.

*NONE

No finance messages are sent to a message queue.

message-queue-name

Specify the name and library of the user-defined message queue to which messages are sent. (If

no library name is given, the library list of the job issuing the Submit Finance Job (SBMFNCJOB)

command is used to find the queue.)

The possible library values are:

*LIBL The library list is used to find the name of the message queue.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to find the name of the message queue. If no

library is specified as the current library for the job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the name of the library where the name of the message queue is located.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Submitting a Batch Job that Communicates with Devices it Acquires

SBMFNCJOB DEVTBL(DEVTBL1) PGMTBL(PGMTBL1) USRTBL(USRTBL1)

This command submits batch job QFNCJOB. The job communicates with all devices it acquires from

device table DEVTBL1, allowing users whose user IDs are found in USRTBL1 to sign on the devices. Each

transaction sent by the finance devices is processed by determining, in PGMTBL1, which application

program must be called, then it calls that program.

The job description used by the finance job in this example is QFNC. Messages sent as a result of the

finance job are sent to the message queue of the work station from which the job was submitted.

Example 2: User IDs Not Verified

Submit Finance Job (SBMFNCJOB) 69

Page 86: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

SBMFNCJOB DEVTBL(DEVTBL2) PGMTBL(PGMTBL2)

JOB(CTFJOB) JOBD(CTFJOBD) MSGQ(*NONE)

This command submits batch job CTFJOB. CTFJOB runs under job description CTFJOBD and does not

send messages to any work station message queue while running. No verification of user IDs is

performed by the finance job.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF8382

Finance job cannot be processed.

Top

70 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 87: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Submit Job (SBMJOB)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Conditional

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Submit Job (SBMJOB) command allows a job that is running to submit another job to a job queue to

be run later as a batch job. Only one element of request data can be placed on the new job’s message

queue. The request data can be a CL command if the routing entry used for the job specifies a CL

command processing program (such as the IBM-supplied QCMD program).

Restrictions:

1. The user that issues the SBMJOB command must have:

v use (*USE) authority to the user profile specified on the User (USER) parameter.

v use (*USE) authority to the command specified on the Command to run (CMD) parameter and

execute (*EXECUTE) authority to the library containing that command.

v use (*USE) authority to the job description specified on the Job description (JOBD) parameter and

execute (*EXECUTE) authority to the library containing that job description.

v use (*USE) authority to the job queue specified on the Job queue (JOBQ) parameter and execute

(*EXECUTE) authority to the library containing that job queue.

v use (*USE) and add (*ADD) authority to the message queue specified on the Message queue

(MSGQ) parameter and execute (*EXECUTE) authority to the library containing that message

queue.

v job control (*JOBCTL) special authority to use the Submitted for (SBMFOR) parameter.

v use (*USE) authority to the Change Accounting Code (CHGACGCDE) command in order to specify

a character-value accounting code on the Accounting code (ACGCDE) parameter.2. The user for the submitted job must have:

v use (*USE) authority to the job description specified on the Job description (JOBD) parameter.

v read (*READ) authority to the output queue specified on the Output queue (OUTQ) parameter and

execute (*EXECUTE) authority to the library, in the submitted job’s name space, that contains that

output queue.

v use (*USE) authority to all the libraries specified on the System library list (SYSLIBL) parameter.

v use (*USE) authority to the library specified on the Current library (CURLIB) parameter.

v use (*USE) authority to all the libraries specified on the Initial library list (INLLIBL) parameter.

v use (*USE) authority to all auxiliary storage pool (ASP) device descriptions specified on the Initial

ASP group (INLASPGRP) parameter.

v use (*USE) authority to the sort sequence table specified on the Sort sequence (SRTSEQ) parameter

and execute (*EXECUTE) authority to the library, in the submitted job’s name space, that contains

that sort sequence table.3. This command is conditionally threadsafe. If a Job Notification Exit Point has been registered to send

a message to a DDM data queue whenever a Submit Job is done, the message will not be sent if

SBMJOB command is issued in a multithreaded job. For more information on the Job Notification

function, refer to the Job Notification Exit Point in the Work Management chapter of the System API

Reference manual.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 71

Page 88: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

CMD Command to run Command string Optional

JOB Job name Name, *JOBD Optional,

Positional 1

JOBD Job description Single values: *USRPRFOther values: Qualified object name

Optional,

Positional 2

Qualifier 1: Job description Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

JOBQ Job queue Single values: *JOBDOther values: Qualified object name

Optional,

Positional 4

Qualifier 1: Job queue Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

JOBPTY Job priority (on JOBQ) 1-9, *JOBD Optional

OUTPTY Output priority (on OUTQ) 1-9, *JOBD Optional

PRTDEV Print device Name, *CURRENT, *USRPRF, *SYSVAL, *JOBD Optional

OUTQ Output queue Single values: *CURRENT, *USRPRF, *DEV, *JOBDOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Output queue Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

USER User Name, *CURRENT, *JOBD Optional,

Positional 3

ACGCDE Accounting code Character value, *CURRENT, *USRPRF, *JOBD Optional

PRTTXT Print text Character value, *CURRENT, *JOBD, *SYSVAL, *BLANK Optional

RTGDTA Routing data Character value, QCMDB, *JOBD, *RQSDTA Optional

RQSDTA Request data or command Character value, *CMD, *JOBD, *NONE, *RTGDTA Optional

SYSLIBL System library list *CURRENT, *SYSVAL Optional

CURLIB Current library Name, *CURRENT, *USRPRF, *CRTDFT Optional

INLLIBL Initial library list Single values: *CURRENT, *JOBD, *SYSVAL, *NONEOther values (up to 250 repetitions): Name

Optional

INLASPGRP Initial ASP group Name, *CURRENT, *JOBD, *NONE Optional

LOG Message logging Element list Optional

Element 1: Level 0-4, *JOBD

Element 2: Severity 0-99, *JOBD

Element 3: Text *JOBD, *MSG, *SECLVL, *NOLIST

LOGCLPGM Log CL program commands *JOBD, *NO, *YES Optional

LOGOUTPUT Job log output *JOBD, *SYSVAL, *JOBLOGSVR, *JOBEND, *PND Optional

JOBMSGQMX Job message queue

maximum size

2-64, *JOBD, *SYSVAL Optional

JOBMSGQFL Job message queue full

action

*JOBD, *SYSVAL, *NOWRAP, *WRAP, *PRTWRAP Optional

INQMSGRPY Inquiry message reply *JOBD, *RQD, *DFT, *SYSRPYL Optional

HOLD Hold on job queue *JOBD, *NO, *YES Optional

SCDDATE Schedule date Date, *CURRENT, *MONTHSTR, *MONTHEND, *MON,

*TUE, *WED, *THU, *FRI, *SAT, *SUN

Optional

SCDTIME Schedule time Time, *CURRENT Optional

DATE Job date Date, *JOBD, *SYSVAL Optional

SWS Job switches Character value, *JOBD Optional

72 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 89: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DSPSBMJOB Allow display by

WRKSBMJOB

*YES, *NO Optional

SBMFOR Submitted for Single values: *CURRENTOther values: Qualified job name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Submitted for Name

Qualifier 2: User Name

Qualifier 3: Number 000000-999999

MSGQ Message queue Single values: *USRPRF, *WRKSTN, *NONEOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Message queue Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

SRTSEQ Sort sequence Single values: *CURRENT, *USRPRF, *SYSVAL, *HEX,

*LANGIDUNQ, *LANGIDSHROther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Sort sequence Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

LANGID Language ID Character value, *CURRENT, *USRPRF, *SYSVAL Optional

CNTRYID Country or region ID Character value, *CURRENT, *USRPRF, *SYSVAL Optional

CCSID Coded character set ID 1-65535, *CURRENT, *USRPRF, *SYSVAL, *HEX Optional

CPYENVVAR Copy environment variables *NO, *YES Optional

ALWMLTTHD Allow multiple threads *JOBD, *NO, *YES Optional

SPLFACN Spooled file action *CURRENT, *JOBD, *SYSVAL, *KEEP, *DETACH Optional

Top

Command to run (CMD)

Specifies a command that runs in the batch job, if the routing program used when this batch job is

initiated is the IBM-supplied default routing program (QCMD). Because this command is used for the

request data, this parameter is mutually exclusive with the Request data or command (RQSDTA)

parameter.

command-string

Specify the command that is run in the batch job. The command cannot be longer than 20000

characters.

Top

Job name (JOB)

Specifies the name that is associated with the job when it is processed by the system.

*JOBD

The simple name of the job description used with this job is the name of the job itself.

name Specify the simple name of the job that is used while it is being processed by the system.

Top

Submit Job (SBMJOB) 73

Page 90: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Job description (JOBD)

Specifies the job description used with the job.

Single values

*USRPRF

The job description in the user profile under which the submitted job initially runs is used as the

job description of the submitted job.

Qualifier 1: Job description

name Specify the name of the job description used for the job.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is used to locate the job description. If no library is specified as

the current library for the thread, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the library where the job description is located.

Top

Job queue (JOBQ)

Specifies the job queue in which this job is placed.

Single values

*JOBD

The submitted job is placed on the job queue named in the specified job description.

Qualifier 1: Job queue

name Specify the name of the job queue.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is used to locate the job queue. If no library is specified as the

current library for the thread, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the library where the job queue is located.

Top

Job priority (on JOBQ) (JOBPTY)

Specifies the job queue scheduling priority. The highest priority is 1 and the lowest priority is 9.

*JOBD

The scheduling priority specified in the job description is used for the job.

1-9 Specify the scheduling priority for the job.

Top

74 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 91: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Output priority (on OUTQ) (OUTPTY)

Specifies the output priority for spooled output files that are produced by this job. The highest priority is

1 and the lowest priority is 9.

*JOBD

The output priority specified in the job description is used for the job.

1-9 Specify the priority of the submitted job’s output files.

Top

Print device (PRTDEV)

Specifies the qualified name of the default printer device for this job. If the printer file being used to

create the output specifies to spool the file, the spooled file is placed on the device’s output queue, which

is named the same as the device.

Note: This assumes the defaults are specified on the Output queue (OUTQ) parameter of the printer file,

job description, user profile and work station.

*CURRENT

The same printer device being used by the job that is currently running is used by the submitted

job.

*USRPRF

The printer device specified in the user profile under which the submitted job initially runs is

used as the printer device for this job. The printer device name is obtained from the profile when

this command is run.

*SYSVAL

The printer device specified in the system value, QPRTDEV, when this command is run is used

for the submitted job.

*JOBD

The printer device specified in the job description is used for the submitted job.

name Specify the name of the printer device used for the submitted job.

Top

Output queue (OUTQ)

Specifies the qualified name of the output queue used for spooled files that specify OUTQ(*JOB). This

parameter applies only to printer files that have *JOB specified on the OUTQ parameter.

Single values

*CURRENT

The output queue used by the job that is currently running is used for the submitted job.

*USRPRF

The output queue in the user profile under which the submitted job initially runs is used as the

output queue for the submitted job. The output queue name is obtained from the profile when

this command is run.

*DEV The output queue associated with the printer specified on the Device (DEV) parameter of the

printer file is used. The output queue has the same name as the printer. The printer file DEV

Submit Job (SBMJOB) 75

Page 92: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

parameter is determined by the Create Printer File (CRTPRTF), Change Printer File (CHGPRTF),

or the Override with Printer File (OVRPRTF) commands.

Note: This assumes the defaults were specified on the OUTQ parameter for the printer file, job

description, user profile, and workstation.

*JOBD

The output queue named in the job description used with the submitted job is the job’s default

output queue.

Qualifier 1: Output queue

name Specify the name of the output queue that is used as the default output queue by the submitted

job.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is used to locate the output queue. If no library is specified as

the current library of the thread, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the library where the output queue is located.

Top

User (USER)

Specifies the name of the user profile for the job being submitted. If *RQD is specified in the job

description, *JOBD cannot be specified. Instead, *CURRENT or a user-name must be specified.

Note: The following IBM-supplied objects are not valid for this parameter:

v QDBSHR

v QDFTOWN

v QDOC

v QLPAUTO

v QLPINSTALL

v QRJE

v QSECOFR

v QSPL

v QSYS

v QTSTRQS

*CURRENT

The same user profile used by the job that is currently running is used for the submitted job.

*JOBD

The user profile named in the specified job description is used for the job being submitted.

name Specify the name of the user profile that is used for the job being submitted.

Top

76 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 93: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Accounting code (ACGCDE)

Specifies the accounting code that is used by the submitted job when logging the usage of system

resources in the system accounting journal QACGJRN.

*CURRENT

The accounting code used by the job that is currently running is used for the submitted job.

*USRPRF

The accounting code specified in the user profile under which the submitted job initially runs is

used.

*JOBD

The accounting code specified in the job description associated with the submitted job is used.

character-value

Specify the 15-character accounting code to be used by the submitted job. If less than 15

characters are specified, the string is padded on the right with blanks.

Top

Print text (PRTTXT)

Specifies the text that is printed at the bottom of each page of printed output and on separator pages.

*CURRENT

The same print text of the submitting job is used.

*JOBD

The value in the job description is used for this job.

*SYSVAL

The system value, QPRTTXT, is used.

*BLANK

No text is printed.

character-value

Specify the character string that is printed at the bottom of each page. A maximum of 30

characters can be entered, enclosed in apostrophes.

Top

Routing data (RTGDTA)

Specifies the routing data used to start the next routing step in the job. The routing data is used to

determine the routing entry that identifies the program that the job runs.

QCMDB

The routing data used by the IBM-supplied subsystems to route batch jobs to the IBM-supplied

control language processor QCMD is used.

*JOBD

The routing data specified in the job description is used.

*RQSDTA

The first 80 characters of the request data specified in the Request data or command (RQSDTA)

parameter of this command are used as the routing data for the job.

Submit Job (SBMJOB) 77

Page 94: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

character-value

Specify the character string that is used as the routing data for starting the job. A maximum of 80

characters can be entered, enclosed in apostrophes if necessary.

Top

Request data or command (RQSDTA)

Specifies the request data that is placed as the last entry in this job’s message queue. The request data can

be a CL command to be run or a string of characters used by another program.

*CMD The input from the Command to run (CMD) parameter is placed in this job’s message queue.

*JOBD

The request data specified in the job description used by the job is placed in this job’s message

queue.

*NONE

No request data is placed in the job’s message queue.

*RTGDTA

The routing data specified in the Routing data (RTGDTA) parameter of this command is placed

as the last entry in the job’s message queue.

character-value

Specify the character string that is placed as the last entry in the submitted job’s message queue.

A maximum of 3000 characters can be entered, enclosed in apostrophes if necessary.

Top

System library list (SYSLIBL)

Specifies the system portion of the initial library list that is used by the submitted job.

*CURRENT

The same system library list being used by the thread that is currently running is used for the

submitted job.

*SYSVAL

The system default system library list is used by the job. It contains the library names that were

specified in the system value, QSYSLIBL, at the time that the job is started.

Top

Current library (CURLIB)

Specifies the name of the current library associated with the submitted job.

*CURRENT

The current library being used by the thread that is currently running is used for the submitted

job.

*USRPRF

The current library in the user profile under which the submitted job initially runs is used as the

current library for the submitted job.

*CRTDFT

There is no current library for the submitted job. If objects are created in the current library,

QGPL is used as the default current library.

78 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 95: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

name Specify the library used as the current library of the submitted job.

Top

Initial library list (INLLIBL)

Specifies the initial user part of the library list that is used to search for any object names that were

specified without a library qualifier.

Note: Duplication of library names in the library list is not allowed.

Single values

*CURRENT

The library list being used by the thread that is currently running is used for the submitted job.

*JOBD

The library list in the job description used with this job is used as the initial user part of the

library list for the job.

*SYSVAL

The system default user library list is used by this job. It contains the library names that were

specified in the system value QUSRLIBL at the time that the job is started.

*NONE

The user portion of the initial library list is empty.

Other values (up to 250 repetitions)

name Specify the names of one or more libraries that are the user portion of the library list and are

used by this job. The libraries are searched in the same order as they are listed.

Top

Initial ASP group (INLASPGRP)

Specifies the initial setting for the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) group name for the initial thread of the

submitted job. A thread can use the Set ASP Group (SETASPGRP) command to change its library name

space. When an ASP group is associated with a thread, all libraries in the independent ASPs in the ASP

group are accessible and objects in those libraries can be referenced using regular library-qualified object

name syntax. The libraries in the independent ASPs in the specified ASP group plus the libraries in the

system ASP (ASP number 1) and basic user ASPs (ASP numbers 2-32) form the library name space for the

thread.

*CURRENT

The ASP group name for the current thread is used for the submitted job.

*JOBD

The initial ASP group name specified in the job description is used for the submitted job.

*NONE

Specifies the initial thread of the submitted job will be started with no ASP group. The library

name space will not include libraries from any ASP group. Only the libraries in the system ASP

and any basic user ASPs will be in the library name space.

name Specify the name of the ASP group to be set for the initial thread of the submitted job. The ASP

group name is the name of the primary ASP device within the ASP group. All libraries from all

ASPs in this ASP group will be included in the library name space.

Submit Job (SBMJOB) 79

Page 96: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Message logging (LOG)

Specifies the message logging values used to determine the amount and type of information sent to the

job log by this job. This parameter has three elements: the message (or logging) level, the message

severity, and the level of message text.

Element 1: Level

*JOBD

The value specified for message logging in the job description is used for this job.

0-4 Specify the message logging level used for this job’s messages. The possible logging levels are:

0 No messages are logged.

1 All messages sent to the job’s external message queue with a severity greater than or

equal to the message logging severity are logged. This includes the indications of job

start, job end, and job completion status.

2 The following information is logged:

v Logging level 1 information

v Request messages which result in a high-level message with a severity code greater

than or equal to the message logging severity. Both the request message and all

associated messages are logged.

Note: A high-level message is one that is sent to the program message queue of the

program that receives the request message. For example, QCMD is an IBM-supplied

request processing program that receives request messages.

3 The following information is logged:

v Logging level 1 and 2 information

v All request messages

v Commands run by a CL program are logged if it is allowed by the logging of CL

programs job attribute and the log attribute of the CL program.

4 The following information is logged:

v All request messages and all messages with a severity greater than or equal to the

message logging severity, including trace messages.

v Commands run by a CL program are logged if it is allowed by the logging of CL

programs job attribute and the log attribute of the CL program.

Element 2: Severity

*JOBD

The value specified for message logging in the job description is used for this job.

0-99 Specify the message severity that is used in conjunction with the logging level to determine

which error messages are logged in the job log.

Element 3: Text

*JOBD

The value specified for message logging in the job description is used for this job.

*MSG Only the message text is written to the job log.

80 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 97: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*SECLVL

Both the message text and the message help (cause and recovery) of the error message are written

to the job log.

*NOLIST

If the job ends normally, no job log is produced. If the job ends abnormally (if the job end code is

20 or higher), a job log is produced. The messages that appear in the job log contain both the

message text and the message help.

Top

Log CL program commands (LOGCLPGM)

Specifies whether the commands that are run in a control language program are logged to the job log by

way of the CL program’s message queue. This parameter sets the status of the job’s logging flag. If *JOB

has been specified for the Message logging (LOG) parameter in the Create CL Program (CRTCLPGM)

command, the flag set in the Log CL program commands (LOGCLPGM) parameter is used. Other values

for the Message logging (LOG) parameter override the Log CL program commands (LOGCLPGM)

parameter. The commands are logged in the same manner as the requests.

*JOBD

The value specified in the job description is used.

*NO The commands in a CL program are not logged to the job log.

*YES The commands in a CL program are logged to the job log.

Top

Job log output (LOGOUTPUT)

Specifies how the job log will be produced when the job completes. This does not affect job logs

produced when the message queue is full and the job message queue full action specifies *PRTWRAP.

Messages in the job message queue are written to a spooled file, from which the job log can be printed,

unless the Control Job Log Output (QMHCTLJL) API was used in the job to specify that the messages in

the job log are to be written to a database file.

The job log output value can be changed at any time until the job log has been produced or removed. To

change the job log output value for a job, use the Change Job (QWTCHGJB) API or the Change Job

(CHGJOB) command.

The job log can be displayed at any time until the job log has been produced or removed. To display the

job log, use the Display Job Log (DSPJOBLOG) command.

The job log can be removed when the job has completed and the job log has not yet been produced or

removed. To remove the job log, use the Remove Pending Job Log (QWTRMVJL) API or the End Job

(ENDJOB) command.

*JOBD

The value specified in the job description is used.

*SYSVAL

The value specified in the system value QLOGOUTPUT is used.

*JOBLOGSVR

The job log will be produced by a job log server. For more information about job log servers,

refer to the Start Job Log Server (STRLOGSVR) command.

Submit Job (SBMJOB) 81

Page 98: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*JOBEND

The job log will be produced by the job itself. If the job cannot produce its own job log, the job

log will be produced by a job log server. For example, a job does not produce its own job log

when the system is processing a Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command.

*PND The job log will not be produced. The job log remains pending until removed.

Top

Job message queue maximum size (JOBMSGQMX)

Specifies the maximum size of the job message queue.

*JOBD

The value specified in the job description determines maximum size of the job message queue.

*SYSVAL

The value in system value QJOBMSGQMX at the time the job is started is used as the maximum

size of the job message queue.

2-64 Specify the maximum size, in megabytes, of the job message queue.

Top

Job message queue full action (JOBMSGQFL)

Specifies the action that should be taken when the job message queue is full.

*JOBD

The value specified in the job description determines the action that should be taken.

*SYSVAL

The value specified for the QJOBMSGQFL system value is used.

*NOWRAP

The message queue does not wrap when it is full. This action ends the job.

*WRAP

The message queue wraps to the start of the message queue when full and starts filling the

message queue again.

*PRTWRAP

The message queue wraps the job message queue when full and prints the messages that are

being overlaid because of wrapping.

Top

Inquiry message reply (INQMSGRPY)

Specifies the way that predefined messages that are sent as a result of running this job are answered. You

can specify that the inquiry message reply control is taken from the job description, or that all inquiry

messages require a reply, or that a default reply is issued, or that the system reply list is checked for a

matching reply as each predefined inquiry message is sent.

*JOBD

The inquiry message reply control specified in the job description used with this job is used.

*RQD A reply is required by the receiver of the inquiry message for all inquiry messages that occur

when this command is run.

82 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 99: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*DFT The default message reply is used to answer any inquiry messages issued when this command is

run.

*SYSRPYL

The system reply list is checked to see if there is an entry for any inquiry message that is issued

as a result of running this job that has a message identifier and any comparison data that match

the inquiry message identifier and message data. If a match occurs, the reply value in that entry

is used. If no entry exists for that message, a reply is required.

Top

Hold on job queue (HOLD)

Specifies whether this job is held at the time that it is put on the job queue. A job placed on the job queue

in the hold state is held until it is released by the Release Job (RLSJOB) command or ended, either by the

End Job (ENDJOB) command or by the Clear Job Queue (CLRJOBQ) command.

*JOBD

The value specified in the job description determines whether the job is held when it is put on

the job queue.

*NO The job is not held when it is put on the job queue.

*YES The job is held when it is put on the job queue until it is released ended.

Top

Schedule date (SCDDATE)

Specifies the date on which the scheduled job is submitted to the job queue and is eligible to run.

If your system or your job is configured to use the Julian date format, *MONTHSTR and *MONTHEND

are calculated as if the system or job did not use the Julian date format.

*CURRENT

The submitted job becomes eligible to run on the current date.

*MONTHSTR

The submitted job becomes eligible to run on the first day of the month. If today is the first day

of the month and the time you specify on the SCDTIME parameter has not passed, the job

becomes eligible to run today. Otherwise, the job becomes eligible on the first day of the next

month.

*MONTHEND

The submitted job becomes eligible to run on the last day of the month. If today is the last day of

the month and the time you specify on the SCDTIME parameter has not passed, the job becomes

eligible to run today. Otherwise, if today is the last day of the month and the time you specify on

the SCDTIME parameter has passed, the job becomes eligible on the last day of the next month.

*MON

The job becomes eligible to run on Monday.

*TUE The job becomes eligible to run on Tuesday.

*WED The job becomes eligible to run on Wednesday.

*THU The job becomes eligible to run on Thursday.

*FRI The job becomes eligible to run on Friday.

*SAT The job becomes eligible to run on Saturday.

Submit Job (SBMJOB) 83

Page 100: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*SUN The job becomes eligible to run on Sunday.

date Specify a date in the job date format with or without separators.

Top

Schedule time (SCDTIME)

Specifies the time on the scheduled date at which the job becomes eligible to run.

Note: Although the time can be specified to the second, the load on the system may affect the exact time

at which the submitted job becomes eligible to run.

The order that job entries with identical SCDDATE and SCDTIME values appear on the job queue may

be different than the order in which they arrived. Likewise, these jobs may leave the job queue to be

processed in an order different than the order in which they were entered. Do not assume jobs are

entered or processed sequentially when they are scheduled to start at exactly the same time.

*CURRENT

The job is submitted at the current time.

time Specify the time you want the job to start. The time is specified in 24-hour format and can be

specified with or without a time separator:

v Without a time separator, specify a string of 4 or 6 digits (hhmm or hhmmss) where hh =

hours, mm = minutes, and ss = seconds. Valid values for hh range from 00 to 23. Valid values

for mm and ss range from 00 to 59.

v With a time separator, specify a string of 5 or 8 digits where the time separator specified for

your job is used to separate the hours, minutes, and seconds. If this command is entered from

the command line, the string must be enclosed in apostrophes. If a time separator other than

the separator specified for your job is used, this command will fail.

Top

Job date (DATE)

Specifies the date that is assigned to the job when it is started.

*JOBD

The date specified in the job description is the job date.

*SYSVAL

The value in the QDATE system value at the time the job is started is the job date.

date Specify the value that is used as the job date when the job is started; the date must be specified

in the job date format.

Top

Job switches (SWS)

Specifies the first settings for a group of eight job switches used with this job. These switches can be set

or tested in a CL program and used to control the flow of the program. Only 0’s (off) and 1’s (on) can be

specified in the 8-digit character string.

*JOBD

The value specified in the job description is the first setting for the job’s switches.

84 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 101: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

character-value

Specify any combination of eight zeros and ones that is used as the first switch setting for the

submitted job.

Top

Allow display by WRKSBMJOB (DSPSBMJOB)

Specifies whether the job being submitted is allowed to be shown on the Work with Submitted Jobs

panel. Any submitted job of the type specified by the Jobs submitted from (SBMFROM) parameter of

the Work with Submitted Jobs (WRKSBMJOB) command can be shown if the job is not prevented by this

parameter.

*YES This job can be shown by the WRKSBMJOB command.

*NO This job is not shown on any display produced by the WRKSBMJOB command.

Top

Submitted for (SBMFOR)

Specifies the job name to be used on the Jobs submitted from (SBMFROM) parameter of the Work with

Submitted Jobs (WRKSBMJOB) command.

Single values

*CURRENT

The name of the currently active job is used.

Qualifier 1: Submitted for

name Specify the name of the job.

Qualifier 2: User

name Specify the user name that identifies the user profile under which the job is run.

Qualifier 3: Number

000000-999999

Specify the job number.

Note: You must have job control (*JOBCTL) special authority to use this parameter.

Top

Message queue (MSGQ)

Specifies the message queue to which a completion message is sent when the submitted job has

completed running, either normally or abnormally. If an abnormal ending occurs, the help information

for the completion message specifies the possible causes.

Single values

*USRPRF

A completion message is sent to the message queue specified in the user profile of the submitter.

Submit Job (SBMJOB) 85

Page 102: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*WRKSTN

A completion message is sent to the work station message queue of the work station from which

the job was submitted. If the job is submitted by a batch job, no completion message is sent.

*NONE

No completion message is sent.

Qualifier 1: Message queue

name Specify the name of the message queue to which the completion message is sent.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is used to locate the message queue. If no library is specified as

the current library for the thread, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the library where the message queue is located.

Top

Sort sequence (SRTSEQ)

Specifies the sort sequence table to be used for string comparisons for this job.

Single values

*CURRENT

The sort table specified for the job that is currently running is used.

*USRPRF

The sort table specified in the user profile under which the submitted job initially runs is used.

The user profile is specified on the User (USER) parameter.

*SYSVAL

The system value QSRTSEQ is used.

*HEX A sort sequence table is not used. The hexadecimal values of the characters are used to determine

the sort sequence.

*LANGIDUNQ

A unique-weight sort table is used.

*LANGIDSHR

A shared-weight sort table is used.

Qualifier 1: Sort sequence

name Specify the name of the sort sequence table.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for

the thread, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the library where the sort sequence table is located.

Top

86 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 103: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Language ID (LANGID)

Specifies the language identifier to be associated with this job. The language identifier is used when

*LANGIDUNQ or *LANGIDSHR is specified on the Sort sequence (SRTSEQ) parameter. If the job

CCSID is 65535, this parameter is also used to determine the value of the job default CCSID (DFTCCSID).

*CURRENT

The language identifier specified for the job that is currently running is used.

*USRPRF

The language ID specified in the user profile under which the submitted job runs is used. The

user profile is specified on the User (USER) parameter.

*SYSVAL

The system value QLANGID is used.

character-value

Specify the language identifier to be used by the job.

Top

Country or region ID (CNTRYID)

Specifies the country or region identifier (ID) to be used by the job.

*CURRENT

The country or region ID specified for the job that is currently running is used.

*USRPRF

The country or region ID specified in the user profile under which the submitted job runs is used.

The user profile is specified on the User (USER) parameter.

*SYSVAL

The system value QCNTRYID is used.

character-value

Specify the country or region ID to be used by the job.

Top

Coded character set ID (CCSID)

Specifies the coded character set identifier (CCSID) used for the submitted job.

*CURRENT

The CCSID specified for the job that is currently running is used.

*USRPRF

The CCSID specified in the user profile where the submitted job initially runs is used.

*SYSVAL

The CCSID specified in the system value QCCSID at the time the job is started is used.

*HEX The CCSID 65535 is used.

1-65535

Specify the CCSID.

Top

Submit Job (SBMJOB) 87

Page 104: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Copy environment variables (CPYENVVAR)

Specifies whether the environment variables from the submitting job are copied to the new job.

*NO The environment variables are not copied.

*YES The environment variables are copied.

Top

Allow multiple threads (ALWMLTTHD)

Specifies whether or not the job is allowed to run with multiple user threads. This attribute does not

prevent the operating system from creating system threads in the job. This attribute is not allowed to be

changed after the job is submitted.

*JOBD

The value specified in the job description determines whether or not the job is allowed to run

with multiple user threads.

*NO The job is not allowed to run with multiple user threads.

*YES The job is allowed to run with multiple user threads.

Top

Spooled file action (SPLFACN)

Specifies whether or not spooled files are accessed through job interfaces after the job ends. Keeping

spooled files with jobs allows job commands such as Work with Submitted Jobs (WRKSBMJOB) to work

with the spooled files even after the job has ended. Detaching spooled files from jobs reduces the use of

system resources by allowing job structures to be recycled when the jobs end.

*CURRENT

The value from the current job is used for the submitted job.

*JOBD

The value in the job description is used.

*SYSVAL

The value specified in the system value QSPLFACN is used.

*KEEP

When the job ends, if spooled files for the job exist in the system auxiliary storage pool (ASP 1)

or in a basic user ASP (ASPs 2-32), the spooled files are kept with the job and the status of the job

is updated to indicate that the job has completed. When all remaining spooled files for the job are

in independent ASPs (ASPs 33-255), the spooled files will be detached from the job and the job

will be removed from the system.

*DETACH

When the job ends, the spooled files are detached from the job and the job is removed from the

system.

Top

88 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 105: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Examples

Example 1: Submitting a Job

SBMJOB JOB(SPECIAL) JOBD(MYLIB/MYJOBD) CMD(CALL MYPROG)

This command causes the job named SPECIAL to be submitted. Most of the attributes for the job are

taken from the job description MYJOBD, or the job that is currently running, except for the command.

The CALL command is placed on the submitted job’s message queue so that the program MYPROG can

be called and run later.

Example 2: Submitting a Job

SBMJOB JOB(PAYROLL) JOBD(PAYROLL) INQMSGRPY(*RQD)

This command submits a job named PAYROLL to the system. All the information needed for this job

(such as the job queue and routing data but not the inquiry message control value) is contained in the job

description PAYROLL, or the job that is currently running. The library list in effect for the job issuing this

command is used to find the job description. All inquiry messages sent during running of this job

requires the receiver of the inquiry message to reply.

Example 3: Submitting a Job to a Job Queue

SBMJOB JOBD(*USRPRF) JOB(COPY12) JOBQ(NIGHTQ)

CMD(CPYF FILEA FILEB)

This command submits the job COPY12, which uses the job description in the user profile of the

submitting job, to the job queue NIGHTQ. The CMD parameter provides the CL command necessary for

the job to run. A command such as this might be used to copy the file at night while the system is

unattended.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF133A

SBMJOB not allowed during IPL.

CPF1338

Errors occurred on SBMJOB command.

CPF1651

Sort sequence table not accessed.

Top

Submit Job (SBMJOB) 89

Page 106: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

90 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 107: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Submit Network Job (SBMNETJOB)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Submit Network Job (SBMNETJOB) command sends an input stream to another user on the SNADS

network. (The input stream is sent to another user where it can be filed, submitted, or rejected.) When the

input stream arrives, its placement is governed by the job action (JOBACN) network attribute. If the

value of JOBACN is *SEARCH, the entry in the network job table at the receiving system is used to

determine the action taken. At the receiving system, the job may be submitted immediately, filed for

placement by the receiving user, or rejected.

When the input stream arrives at the destination system, a message is sent to both the recipient of the

input stream as well as the originator of the input stream stating that the input stream arrived. This

command can only be used to send a batch input stream to a user on a remote system.

Restrictions:

1. To use this command, the user must have object operational and read authority to the file that is

submitted, and for the library that contains the file.

2. The user must be enrolled in the system distribution directory to use this command. (For information

on enrolling in the system distribution directory, see the SNA Distribution Services book, SC41-5410.

3. If the job action (JOBACN) network attribute on the receiving system is set to *SEARCH, there must

be an entry for the user in the network job table on the receiving system. The entry in this table

specifies a user profile on the receiving system that is used to verify that the user is authorized to

submit the job on that system. The user profile on the receiving system must be authorized to use the

job queues, and must have object operational authority for the job descriptions specified by the JOB

commands in the input stream.

4. The file that is submitted cannot contain more than approximately 2 billion bytes of data.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

FILE File Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: File Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

TOUSRID User ID Values (up to 50 repetitions): Element list Required,

Positional 2 Element 1: User ID Character value

Element 2: Address Character value

MBR Member Name, *FIRST Optional,

Positional 3

PTY Send priority *NORMAL, *HIGH Optional

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 91

Page 108: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

File (FILE)

Specifies the name and library of the physical file containing the input stream that is sent.

This is a required parameter.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current

library for the job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the library where the file is located.

Top

User ID (TOUSRID)

Specifies the two-part user ID of one or more users to whom the input stream is submitted, or the name

of one or more distribution lists containing the two-part user IDs of one or more users to whom the file is

to be sent. A combination of both user IDs and distribution lists can be specified on the same command.

Each user ID or distribution list is specified as a two-part name, and both parts are required.

NOTES:

1. Depending on the type of work station being used, the internal value for a user identifier may differ

from the characters shown by the Display Directory Entries (DSPDIRE) command. If the byte-string

value specified for the TOUSRID parameter does not match the rules for an internal user identifier

value, or if it does not match the internal value for any enrolled user, an error may be reported.

2. The user specified in this parameter, or in the distribution list, must be a remote user. The

SBMNETJOB command cannot be used to send input streams to local users.

You can enter multiple values for this parameter.

Top

Member (MBR)

Specifies the member that is sent from the file.

*FIRST

The first member (in creation order) in the file is submitted.

member-name

Specify the name of the file member that is submitted.

Top

Send priority (PTY)

Specifies the queuing priority used for the input stream when it is being routed through a SNADS

network.

The possible values are:

92 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 109: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*NORMAL

The input stream is sent with a service level priority of data low, which is used for most data

traffic. On a System i5, data low distributions are placed on the normal distribution queue

specified for the route.

*HIGH

The input stream is sent with a service level priority of data high, which is used for high priority

data traffic. On a System i5, data high distributions are placed on the data high distribution

queue specified for the route.

Top

Examples

SBMNETJOB FILE(PAYROLL) TOUSRID(PAYROLL SYSTEM1)

MBR(WEEKLY)

This command sends the input streams contained in member WEEKLY of file PAYROLL to user ID

PAYROLL SYSTEM1.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF8056

File &1 in &2 not a physical file.

CPF8058

File &1 is a spooled file.

CPF8063

Cannot assign necessary resource.

CPF8065

Input stream &1 in &2 member &3 not sent to any users.

CPF8066

One or more user identifiers on this command is not correct.

CPF8068

Error detected while processing file to be sent.

CPF8072

Object to be sent is greater than maximum size of 2GB.

CPF9005

System resource required to complete this request not available.

CPF9006

User not enrolled in system distribution directory.

CPF9803

Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.

CPF9807

One or more libraries in library list deleted.

Submit Network Job (SBMNETJOB) 93

Page 110: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF9808

Cannot allocate one or more libraries on library list.

CPF9810

Library &1 not found.

CPF9812

File &1 in library &2 not found.

CPF9820

Not authorized to use library &1.

CPF9822

Not authorized to file &1 in library &2.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

CPF9845

Error occurred while opening file &1.

CPF9846

Error while processing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9847

Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9848

Cannot open file &1 in library &2 member &3.

CPF9849

Error while processing file &1 in library &2 member &3.

Top

94 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 111: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Submit Network Server Command (SBMNWSCMD)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Submit Network Server Command (SBMNWSCMD) command submits a command to run on the

designated server. For SVRTYPE(*WINDOWS) or (*WINDOWSNT), command output is directed as

specified by the CMDSTDOUT parameter.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

CMD Command Character value, *NOLOGCMD Required,

Positional 1

SERVER Server Character value Required,

Positional 2

NOLOGCMD Command (not logged) Character value Optional

SVRTYPE Server type *NWSUSRA, *NWSA, *WINDOWS, *WINDOWSNT Optional

CMDTYPE Command type *SVRTYPE, *WINDOWS, *WINDOWSNT Optional

LODUSRPRF Load user profile *YES, *NO Optional

AUTDMN Authentication domain Character value, *PRIMARY, *LOCAL Optional

CMDSTDOUT Command standard output Path name, *JOBLOG, *PRINT Optional

CVTSTDOUT Convert standard output *YES, *NO Optional

Top

Command (CMD)

Specifies the command submitted to the network server. The syntax of the command string specified for

this parameter is not checked.

*NOLOGCMD

Specifies the user wants to submit a command string that is not logged in the joblog. This is

useful if the command string contains sensitive data such as passwords. If *NOLOGCMD is

specified, a command string must be entered on the NOLOGCMD parameter.

command

The command string that is to be submitted to the network server. This command string will be

shown in the joblog.

This is a required parameter.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 95

Page 112: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Server (SERVER)

Specifies the name of the server to which the command is submitted.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Command (not logged) (NOLOGCMD)

Specifies the command string to be submitted to the network server. This command string will not be

echoed to the joblog. Use this parameter to submit commands that contain sensitive data such as

passwords. This parameter is required if, and is only allowed when, CMD(*NOLOGCMD) is specified.

Note: Since the command is being executed on a server, the presence of this option does not prevent the

server from returning the command string as part of the output data. Thus, depending on the command,

it may still be returned and displayed in the job log or spool file.

Top

Server type (SVRTYPE)

Specifies the type of server to which the command is sent.

*NWSUSRA

The server type specified in the network server attributes (CHGNWSUSRA command) for the

user profile running the SBMNWSCMD is used.

*NWSA

The server type specified in the network server attributes (CHGNWSA command) is used.

*WINDOWS or *WINDOWSNT

The server type is Windows. Only Windows commands will run on a local Windows server.

Note: *WINDOWS should be used in V5R4 and later releases. The *WINDOWSNT value is

supported for compatibility with releases prior to V5R4.

Top

Command type (CMDTYPE)

Specifies the type of command string specified in the CMD parameter. This is used by the system to

determine what type of processing needs to occur for the command string.

Note: This parameter is ignored.

*SVRTYPE

The command string is processed based on the type of server specified in the SVRTYPE

parameter. If the server is a *WINDOWS or a *WINDOWSNT server, the command string is

assumed to be a Windows command.

*WINDOWS or *WINDOWSNT

The command string is a Windows command.

Note: *WINDOWS should be used in V5R4 and later releases. The *WINDOWSNT value is

supported for compatibility with releases prior to V5R4.

Top

96 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 113: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Load user profile (LODUSRPRF)

Specifies whether or not to load the user profile on the remote server as part of the login environment.

Note: This parameter is only valid when SVRTYPE(*WINDOWS) or (*WINDOWSNT) is specified.

*YES Load the user profile.

*NO Do not load the user profile.

Top

Authentication domain (AUTDMN)

Specifies the Windows domain where the user is authenticated.

Note: This parameter is only valid when SVRTYPE(*WINDOWS) or (*WINDOWSNT) is specified.

*PRIMARY

The user is authenticated on the primary domain of the server.

*LOCAL

The user is authenticated on the local server.

’domain-name’

Specify the domain name where the user is authenticated.

Top

Command standard output (CMDSTDOUT)

Specifies where the standard output returned from the command is to be stored, if any exists. Standard

output can be written to the job log of the job that issues this command, it can be written to a spooled

file, or it can be written to a file. The standard error returned from the command is always directed to the

job log of the job that issues this command, if any exists.

Note: This parameter is only valid when SVRTYPE(*WINDOWS) or (*WINDOWSNT) is specified.

*JOBLOG

The standard output of the network server command is directed to the job log of the job that

issues this command. It shares the job log with the standard error output of the network server

command. Both may be mixed in the job log, depending on the order by which the command

writes standard output and standard error information.

*PRINT

The standard output of the network server command is directed to a spooled file. If

CVTSTDOUT(*YES) is specified, certain control characters such as line feeds and carriage returns

are converted to new lines and other non-displayable control characters such as highlight and

underscore are converted to blanks.

’stream-file-path-name’

Specify the path name of the stream file to which the standard output of the network server

command is directed. The specified path must exist. If the stream file doesn’t exist, it is created. If

the stream file exists, all data is overlaid. Additional information about path name is in the

Integrated file system topic collection in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/ book.

Submit Network Server Command (SBMNWSCMD) 97

Page 114: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Convert standard output (CVTSTDOUT)

Specifies whether the standard output will be converted from the server’s code set to the CCSID of the

i5/OS user profile that submitted the command. For binary output, CVTSTDOUT(*NO) should be

specified.

Note: This parameter is only valid when CMDSTDOUT(*PRINT) or CMDSTDOUT(stream-file-path-name)

is specified.

*YES The output is converted from the server’s code set to the CCSID of the i5/OS user profile that

submitted the command.

*NO The output is not converted from the server’s code set.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Submitting a Windows Command

SBMNWSCMD CMD(’net config server’) SERVER(WINSVR)

CMDSTDOUT(*JOBLOG)

This command will display the Windows Server service settings on the Windows server WINSVR.

Standard output from the command is returned to i5/OS and directed to the job log.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPFA43F

Network server command not submitted.

CPFA46C

Unable to complete command processing on server &1.

CPFA46F

Network server description &1 not found.

Top

98 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 115: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Submit Remote Command (SBMRMTCMD)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Conditional

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Submit Remote Command (SBMRMTCMD) command sends a CL command through Distributed

Data Management (DDM) to be run on the target system specified by a DDM file. The DDM file

determines the communications line used, and indirectly identifies the target system that receives the

submitted command.

This command sends only CL commands to a remote system which supports the SBMRMTCMD

command language. It cannot send non-CL commands to a different system type (for example, OCL

commands cannot be sent to a target System/36).

The primary purpose of this command is to allow a source system user or program to perform file

management operations and file authorization activities on files located on a target system.

v Create or delete physical, logical, device, or source files

v Grant or revoke object authority to remote files

v Check, rename, or move files or other objects

v Save or restore files or other objects

Restrictions:

v File processing on the target system operates independently of processing on the source system.

Commands dependent on a specific recursion level or request level may not function as expected.

v Output (such as spooled files) generated by a submitted command exists only on the target system.

The output is not sent back to the source system. Therefore display commands or commands that are

used to service programs should not be sent because the output results remain at the target system.

v Translation is not performed for impromptu messages caused by target system errors, because they are

not stored on the system; the text for an impromptu message is sent directly to the source system and

displayed. The message identifier of all other message types generated on the remote system is sent

back to the source system. The message text that exists for the message identifier on the source system

is displayed as it would be for the same error on the source system.

v A maximum of 10 messages, generated during the running of a submitted command, can be sent by

the target system to the source system. If more than 10 messages are generated, an additional

informational message is sent that indicates that the messages exist in the job log for the target job on

the target system. If one of those messages is an escape message, the first nine messages of other types

are sent, followed by the informational message and the escape message.

v In multithreaded jobs, this command is not threadsafe and fails for DDM files of type *SNA.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

CMD Command to run Character value Required,

Positional 1

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 99

Page 116: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DDMFILE DDM file Qualified object name Required,

Positional 2 Qualifier 1: DDM file Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Top

Command to run (CMD)

Specifies a character string of up to 2000 characters that represents a command that is run on the target

system. The command must be allowed in both batch and interactive environments on the target system.

The command must be enclosed in apostrophes if it contains embedded blanks or special characters. The

command must use the syntax of the target system.

This is a required parameter.

Note: The normal rule of pairing apostrophes in quoted strings on the local system must be doubled when

the same string is submitted to a remote system. This is required to allow coding a quoted string within

another quoted string.

Top

DDM file (DDMFILE)

Specifies the name and library of the Distributed Data Management (DDM) file that is used to submit the

command to the target system. The DDM file is used only to determine the remote location representing

the target system. The remote file name associated with the DDM file is ignored by this command.

This is a required parameter.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current

library for the job, the QGPL library is used.

library-name

Specify the library where the file is located.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Deleting a File

SBMRMTCMD CMD(’DLTF LIBX/FRED’) DDMFILE(DENVER)

This command deletes the file named FRED in library LIBX on the target system that is associated with

the DDM file named DENVER.

Example 2: Creating a Physical File

100 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 117: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

SBMRMTCMD CMD(’CRTPF SALES/CAR QGPL/QDDSSRC MASTER’)

DDMFILE(DENVER)

This command creates the physical file CAR in library SALES using the data description specifications

(DDS) in the source file QDDSSRC and source member named MASTER in the QGPL library. The DDS

must already exist on the target system identified by the DDM file named DENVER in the target job’s

library list.

Example 3: Changing the Text Description

SBMRMTCMD CMD(’CHGDDMF FILE(LIBX/STANLEY)

TEXT(’’Don’’’’t forget to pair apostrophes.’’)’)

DDMFILE(SMITH)

This command changes the text in the description of the DDM file named STANLEY which is stored in

library LIBX. Because the submitted command requires an outside set of single apostrophes (for the CMD

parameter), each single or double apostrophe normally required in the TEXT parameter for local system

processing must be doubled for remote system processing. The coding above produces a single apostrophe

in the text when it is shown or printed on the remote system.

Example 4: Creating a DDM File

SBMRMTCMD CMD(’CRTDDMF FILE(SALES/MONTHLY)

RMTFILE(*NONSTD ’’CAR.SALES(JULY)’’

RMTLOCNAME(DALLAS)’)

DDMFILE(CHICAGO)

This command creates (on the target system identified by the information in the DDM file named

CHICAGO) another DDM file named MONTHLY. The new DDM file is stored in a library named SALES

on the CHICAGO system. The new DDM file on the CHICAGO system is used to access a file and

member on a different system named DALLAS. The accessed file is named SALES/CAR and the member

name in the file is JULY.

Note that this CRTDDMF command string contains three sets of single apostrophes: one set to enclose the

entire command being submitted, and a double set to enclose the file and member named in the

RMTFILE parameter. This is how any i5/OS file member name must be specified on the SBMRMTCMD

command, because of the parentheses needed to enclose the member name.

Example 5: Replacing a Portion of the Library List

SBMRMTCMD CMD(’RPLLIBL LIBL(QGPL QTEMP SALES EVANS)’)

DDMFILE(EVANS)

This command replaces the user’s portion of the library list being used by the target job associated with

the DDM file named EVANS, which is being used by the source job in which this SBMRMTCMD

command is being submitted. In that source job, if there are other open DDM files that specify the same

device and mode, this library list is used for them also.

Top

Submit Remote Command (SBMRMTCMD) 101

Page 118: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF9164

Target system does not support SBMRMTCMD.

CPF9165

File &1 in library &2 not a DDM File.

CPF917A

Error occurred on distributed file.

CPF917B

Target system &3 not available.

CPF9172

SBMRMTCMD command ended abnormally.

CPF9174

Error on call to user exit program on target system.

CPF9175

Error during processing of user exit program.

CPF9177

User exit program did not complete successfully.

CPF9178

Processing of the command specified by SBMRMTCMD failed.

CPF9182

Cannot start DDM communications.

Top

102 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 119: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Select (SELECT)

Where allowed to run:

v Batch program (*BPGM)

v Interactive program (*IPGM)

Threadsafe: Yes

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Select (SELECT) command begins a control structure to allow conditional processing of command

groups. The select group is ended with an End Select (ENDSELECT) command and must contain one or

more When (WHEN) commands and optionally an otherwise (OTHERWISE) command.

When a Select command is entered, the condition specified on the first When command is evaluated. If

the condition is true, the command specified on the THEN parameter is run. After the command or

group of commands is processed, control will pass to the matching ENDSELECT command. Only one

WHEN or the optional OTHERWISE will be processed within a SELECT group.

If the first WHEN condition is not true, subsequent WHEN commands are evaluated in the order

specified. If no WHEN command condition is true, control will pass to the command specified on the

OTHERWISE command, if OTHERWISE is specified.

Restrictions:

v This command is valid only within a CL program or ILE CL procedure.

v Up to 25 levels of nested SELECT commands are allowed.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters

None

Top

Examples

DCL VAR(&INT) TYPE(*INT) LEN(4)

:

SELECT

WHEN COND(&INT *LT 0) THEN(DO)

: (group of CL commands)

ENDDO

WHEN COND(&INT *EQ 0) /* Do nothing when zero */

WHEN COND(&INT *GT 0) THEN(CHGVAR &INT (&INT - 1)

ENDSELECT

The SELECT command group will evaluates the conditions of the WHEN commands in the order they

are encountered. When a COND parameter results in a true value, the command specified on the THEN

parameter is processed. After the command on the THEN parameter is processed, control passes to the

command following the ENDSELECT command.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 103

Page 120: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Error messages

None

Top

104 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 121: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Set ASP Group (SETASPGRP)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Set Auxiliary Storage Pool Group (SETASPGRP) command sets the auxiliary storage pool (ASP)

group for the current thread. Additionally, this command allows you to change the libraries in the library

list for the current thread. If an ASP group had already been set, this command will remove the old ASP

group from the current thread and set the specified ASP group for the current thread. Once the specified

ASP group has been set for the current thread, all libraries in the independent ASPs in the ASP group are

accessible and objects in those libraries can be referenced using regular library-qualified object name

syntax. The libraries in the independent ASPs in the specified ASP group plus the libraries in the system

ASP (ASP number 1) and basic user ASPs (ASP numbers 2-32) form the library name space for the thread.

All libraries in the library list need to be in the new library name space or the library list is not changed

and the new ASP group is not set.

Restrictions:

v You must have use (*USE) authority to all ASP device descriptions in the ASP group and to all the

specified libraries in the library list before the library name space and the library list are changed. If

you are not authorized to an ASP device description or to one of the libraries, the ASP group will not

be set and the library list will not be changed.

v When *CURUSR is specified for the ASP group (ASPGRP) or Libraries for current thread (USRLIBL)

parameter, you must have read (*READ) authority to the job description listed in your user profile and

execute (*EXECUTE) authority to the library where the job description is located.

v The SETASPGRP command is not allowed in the following:

– System jobs QPFRADJ, QJOBSCD, QSYSARB, QSYSARB3, QSYSARB4 and QLUS.

– All subsystem monitor jobs.

– DDM, DRDA, database host server and SQL server jobs once the initial namespace has been

established.

– Receive Journal Entry (RCVJRNE) and Delete Journal Receiver (DLTJRNRCV) command exit

programs.

– Management Central Registered Inventory Gathering Service (RIGS) Exit Programs (exit point

QIBM_QYIV_INVGTRSRV).

– Trigger or format selector programs that run as part of database I/O operations.

– Attention programs (the PGM parameter of the SETATNPGM command).

– Break handling programs (the PGM parameter of the CHGMSGQ command).

– Programming Development Manager (PDM) functions.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

ASPGRP ASP group Name, *CURUSR, *NONE Required,

Positional 1

SYSLIBL System library list *CURSYSBAS, *SYSVAL Optional

CURLIB Current library Name, *CURSYSBAS, *CURUSR, *CRTDFT Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 105

Page 122: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

USRLIBL Libraries for current thread Single values: *CURSYSBAS, *CURUSR, *SYSVAL,

*NONEOther values (up to 250 repetitions): Name

Optional

Top

ASP group (ASPGRP)

Specifies the name of the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) group to set for the current thread. The ASP group

name is the name of the primary ASP device within the ASP group.

This is a required parameter.

*CURUSR

The ASP group is set to the value defined for the Initial ASP group (INLASPGRP) in the default

job description of the user profile that the thread is currently running under.

*NONE

Specify for the current thread to have no ASP group. The library name space will not include

libraries from any ASP group. Only the libraries in the system ASP and any basic user ASPs will

be in the library name space.

name Specify the name of the primary ASP in the ASP group to be set for the current thread. All

libraries from all ASPs in this ASP group will be included in the library name space.

Top

System library list (SYSLIBL)

Specifies the system part of the library list for the thread in which the command is entered.

*CURSYSBAS

The libraries in the system part of the library list of the current thread that are found in the

system ASP (ASP number 1) or any configured basic user ASP (ASP numbers 2-32) are used as

the new system part of the library list.

*SYSVAL

The system part of the library list of the current thread is set from the current value of system

value QSYSLIBL.

Top

Current library (CURLIB)

Specifies the library to be used in the current library entry of the library list for the thread. If *CURUSR

or a library name is specified and the library cannot be found in the new library name space, an error

message is sent and the library list and ASP group are not changed.

*CURSYSBAS

The library name in the current library entry of the library list is used as the new current library

if the library is found in the system ASP (ASP number 1) or any configured basic user ASP (ASP

numbers 2-32). If the library name in the current entry is not found in the system ASP or any

basic user ASP, the current library entry will be removed from the library list.

106 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 123: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*CURUSR

The current library is set to the value defined for the Current library (CURLIB) attribute of the

user profile that the thread is currently running under.

*CRTDFT

Changes the library list to remove any name from the current library entry. If objects are created

specifying *CURLIB for the library name, library QGPL will be used.

name Specify the name of the library that replaces the current library entry in the library list.

Top

Libraries for current thread (USRLIBL)

Specifies the libraries that are placed in the user part of the library list. If *CURUSR or a list of library

names is specified and any of these libraries cannot be found in the new library name space, an error

message is sent and the library list and ASP group are not changed.

Single values

*CURSYSBAS

The libraries in the user part of the library list of the current thread that are found in the system

ASP (ASP number 1) or any configured basic user ASP (ASP numbers 2-32) are used as the new

user part of the library list.

*CURUSR

The user part of the library list for the thread is set to the value defined for the Initial library list

(INLLIBL) in the default job description of the user profile that the thread is currently running

under.

*SYSVAL

The user part of the library list is set from the current value of system value QUSRLIBL.

*NONE

Changes the user part of the library list to remove all library names.

Other values (up to 250 repetitions)

name Specify the names of the libraries to be used as the user part of the library list, in the order in

which they are to be searched.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Set New ASP Group

SETASPGRP ASPGRP(WAREHOUSE1) SYSLIBL(*SYSVAL) CURLIB(*CURUSR)

USRLIBL(*CURSYSBAS)

This command will set the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) group for the thread in which the command runs

to be WAREHOUSE1. This will change the library name space for the thread to include all libraries in

any of the independent ASPs in the ASP group identified by the independent ASP device named

WAREHOUSE1. The system part of the library list will be set from system value QSYSLIBL. The current

library entry of the library list will be set from the Current library value defined in the user profile that

Set ASP Group (SETASPGRP) 107

Page 124: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

the thread is currently running under. The user part of the library list will be set using the current user

part of the library list and removing any libraries that are not found in the system ASP or configured

basic user ASPs.

Example 2: Set to No ASP Group

SETASPGRP ASPGRP(*NONE) SYSLIBL(*CURSYSBAS) CURLIB(*CRTDFT)

USRLIBL(*NONE)

This command will remove any ASP group for the thread in which the command runs. This will change

the library name space for the thread to include only those libraries in the system ASP (ASP number 1)

and basic user ASPs (ASP numbers 2-32). The system part of the library list will be set using the current

system part of the library list and removing any libraries that are not found in the system ASP or

configured basic user ASPs. The current library entry of the library list will be changed to be empty

which will cause library QGPL to be used as the current library. The user part of the library list will be

changed to be empty.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPFB8E9

ASP group &1 not set for thread &2.

Top

108 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 125: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Set Attention Program (SETATNPGM)

Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT

*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Set Attention Program (SETATNPGM) command sets up a program that is called when the Attention

key is pressed. The setting is in effect for this recursion level and lower levels if more programs are

called, but it is no longer in effect if the job returns from this recursion level to the previous one. If the

Attention key handler’s status is on, the specified program is called when the key is pressed. No

parameters are passed to the Attention key handler when it is called. The Attention handling program

runs in the same process with the same job attributes, overrides, and group authorities as the program

that issued the SETATNPGM command. However, program adopted authority is not carried over.

The handling of the attention key does not change the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) group that is in effect.

The ASP group determines the library name space of the thread. If the attention handling program

resides in an independent ASP and if that ASP is not part of the library name space for the thread at the

time the attention key is handled, the intended program will not be found. To avoid potential problems

when applications change the library name space, the program should reside in the system ASP or a basic

user ASP.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

PGM Program Single values: *CURRENT, *PRVINVLVLOther values: Qualified object name

Required,

Positional 1

Qualifier 1: Program Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

SET Set attention key *ON, *OFF Optional,

Positional 2

Top

Program (PGM)

Specifies the qualified name of the program to be the Attention key handler at this recursion level.

This is a required parameter.

Single values

*CURRENT

The program name of the Attention key handler currently in effect is used as the value of this

parameter.

*PRVINVLVL

The Attention key handler in effect at the previous recursion level is reinstated as the Attention

key handler at this recursion level. The Set attention key (SET) parameter is not allowed if this

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 109

Page 126: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

special value is specified, because the SET status of the previous recursion level is also reinstated.

This option is used when a program has specified an Attention program and wants to revert back

to a previous level.

Qualifier 1: Program

name Specify the name of the Attention key handler program.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the thread’s library list are searched until a match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is used to locate the object. If no library is specified as the

current library for the thread, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the library where the attention program is located.

Top

Set attention key (SET)

Specifies whether the Attention key handler indicated in the Program (PGM) parameter is called when

the Attention key is pressed. This parameter is not allowed if *PRVINVLVL is specified for the PGM

parameter.

*ON The Attention key handler specified in the Program (PGM) parameter is called when the

Attention key is pressed.

*OFF The Attention key handler specified in the Program (PGM) parameter is not called when the

Attention key is pressed.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Setting the ATTN Key Handler

SETATNPGM PGM(QGPL/ATTN) SET(*ON)

This command causes the program QGPL/ATTN to become the ATTN key handler. Because SET(*ON) is

specified, the program is called when the ATTN key is pressed.

Example 2: Setting the Attention Key Off

SETATNPGM PGM(*CURRENT) SET(*OFF)

The current attention handling program has its status changed to SET(*OFF). Because the status is

SET(*OFF) when the ATTN key is pressed, the attention handling program is not called.

Example 3: Previous Recursion-Level Support

SETATNPGM PGM(*PRVINVLVL)

110 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 127: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The attention handling program and status that was in effect at the previous recursion level is reinstated

at this recursion level. If no attention handler is in effect, after this command is run nothing happens

when the ATTN key is pressed.

Example 4: Emulating the System Request Key

SETATNPGM PGM(QWSSYSRQ)

The system-supplied program QWSSYSRQ will be called when the ATTN key is pressed. This system

program allows the ATTN key to act as a system request key by showing the system request menu on the

display when the ATTN key is pressed.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF1318

Attention key program &1 in &2 not set.

Top

Set Attention Program (SETATNPGM) 111

Page 128: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

112 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 129: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Set Customization Data (SETCSTDTA)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Set Customization Data (SETCSTDTA) command can be used to copy and delete information in

order to customize data, such as work area content and mouse double-click action values, for Graphical

Operations support.

Using this command, administrators can set up users by getting information from a named user profile

and copying it to other user profiles. Administrators can also remove the customized values for a named

user, and choose to replace those customized values with data from a named user profile.

Note: Do not precede an entry with an asterisk unless that entry is a ″special value″ that is shown (on the

display itself or in the help information) with an asterisk.

Error messages for SETCSTDTA

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2204

User profile &1 not found.

CPF2217

Not authorized to user profile &1.

GUI0085

&1 does not have customization data.

GUI0087

Some user profiles did not have customization data copied successfully.

GUI0091

Some user profiles did not have customization data deleted successfully.

GUI0117

&1 is not valid for subset key.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

USRPRF User profile Values (up to 300 repetitions): Simple name Required,

Positional 1

VALUE Customization data to use Simple name, *NONE Required,

Positional 2

REPLACE Replace customization data *NO, *YES Optional,

Positional 3

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 113

Page 130: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

User profile (USRPRF)

Specifies the names of the user profiles for which customized values are to be set or removed with the

option to set them again. A maximum of 300 user profiles can be named.

You can enter multiple values for this parameter. If you are on an entry display and you need additional

entry fields to enter these multiple values, type a plus sign (+) in the entry field opposite the phrase ″+

for more″, and press the Enter key.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Customization data to use (VALUE)

Specifies the customization data value to which the user profile named on the User profile prompt

(USRPRF parameter) is to be set.

The possible values are:

*NONE

The customization data is to be removed from the user profile and no customization value is to

be set.

user-profile

Specify the name of the user profile from which the customization value data is to be copied and

set.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Replace customization data (REPLACE)

Specifies whether to replace existing customization data if the user profile named on the User profile

prompt (USRPRF parameter) has customization data.

The possible values are:

*NO The existing customization data is not replaced. An exception message is issued.

*YES The existing customization data is replaced with the customization data from the user profile

specified on the Customization data to use prompt (VALUE parameter).

Top

Examples

None

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

114 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 131: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF2204

User profile &1 not found.

CPF2217

Not authorized to user profile &1.

GUI0085

&1 does not have customization data.

GUI0087

Some user profiles did not have customization data copied successfully.

GUI0091

Some user profiles did not have customization data deleted successfully.

GUI0117

&1 is not valid for subset key.

Top

Set Customization Data (SETCSTDTA) 115

Page 132: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

116 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 133: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) command allows the user to override the PA (Program Attention)

and PF (Program Function) key assignment defaults provided by the system.

This command assigns the specified F-to-PF map to the device where the command was entered (if it is a

3270 display station device) or to the 3270 display station specified if the user has authority to that

device. More information on the user-assignment keyboard mapping is in Remote Work Station Support

book, SC41-5402 book.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DEV Device Name, *REQUESTER Optional,

Positional 1

PF1 PF1 key value *HELP, *ATTN, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF2 PF2 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF3 PF3 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF4 PF4 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF5 PF5 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF6 PF6 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF7 PF7 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 117

Page 134: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

PF8 PF8 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF9 PF9 key value *NONE, *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT,

*DSPATR, *TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF10 PF10 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF11 PF11 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF12 PF12 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF13 PF13 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF14 PF14 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF15 PF15 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF16 PF16 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF17 PF17 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF18 PF18 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF19 PF19 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

118 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 135: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

PF20 PF20 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF21 PF21 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF22 PF22 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF23 PF23 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PF24 PF24 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA1PF1 PA1-PF1 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA1PF2 PA1-PF2 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA1PF3 PA1-PF3 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA1PF4 PA1-PF4 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA1PF5 PA1-PF5 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA1PF6 PA1-PF6 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA1PF7 PA1-PF7 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 119

Page 136: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

PA1PF8 PA1-PF8 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA1PF9 PA1-PF9 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA1PF10 PA1-PF10 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA1PF11 PA1-PF11 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA1PF12 PA1-PF12 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA2PF1 PA2-PF1 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA2PF2 PA2-PF2 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA2PF3 PA2-PF3 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA2PF4 PA2-PF4 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA2PF5 PA2-PF5 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA2PF6 PA2-PF6 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA2PF7 PA2-PF7 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

120 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 137: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

PA2PF8 PA2-PF8 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA2PF9 PA2-PF9 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA2PF10 PA2-PF10 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA2PF11 PA2-PF11 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

PA2PF12 PA2-PF12 key value *ATTN, *HELP, *HLP3270, *CLEAR, *PRINT, *DSPATR,

*TEST, *DOWN, *UP, *NONE, *RESET, *SYSREQ,

*BCKSPC, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8,

*F9, *F10, *F11, *F12

Optional

Top

Device (DEV)

Specifies a valid 3270 display station that is assigned this keyboard mapping function.

The possible values are:

*REQUESTER

This mapping is assigned to the device where the command is entered.

device-name

Specify the name of the device to which the new keyboard mapping is to apply. You must have

allocation rights to the specified device.

Top

PF1 key value (PF1)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 121

Page 138: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

122 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 139: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

PF2 key value (PF2)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 123

Page 140: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF3 key value (PF3)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

124 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 141: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF4 key value (PF4)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 125

Page 142: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF5 key value (PF5)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

126 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 143: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF6 key value (PF6)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 127

Page 144: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF7 key value (PF7)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

128 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 145: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF8 key value (PF8)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 129

Page 146: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF9 key value (PF9)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

130 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 147: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 131

Page 148: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

PF10 key value (PF10)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

132 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 149: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF11 key value (PF11)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 133

Page 150: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF12 key value (PF12)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

134 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 151: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF13 key value (PF13)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 135

Page 152: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF14 key value (PF14)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

136 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 153: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF15 key value (PF15)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 137

Page 154: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF16 key value (PF16)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

138 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 155: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF17 key value (PF17)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 139

Page 156: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

140 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 157: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

PF18 key value (PF18)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 141

Page 158: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF19 key value (PF19)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

142 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 159: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF20 key value (PF20)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 143

Page 160: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF21 key value (PF21)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

144 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 161: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF22 key value (PF22)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 145

Page 162: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF23 key value (PF23)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

146 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 163: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PF24 key value (PF24)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 147

Page 164: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA1-PF1 key value (PA1PF1)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

148 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 165: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 149

Page 166: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

PA1-PF2 key value (PA1PF2)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

150 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 167: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA1-PF3 key value (PA1PF3)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 151

Page 168: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA1-PF4 key value (PA1PF4)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

152 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 169: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA1-PF5 key value (PA1PF5)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 153

Page 170: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA1-PF6 key value (PA1PF6)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

154 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 171: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA1-PF7 key value (PA1PF7)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 155

Page 172: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA1-PF8 key value (PA1PF8)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

156 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 173: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA1-PF9 key value (PA1PF9)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 157

Page 174: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

158 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 175: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

PA1-PF10 key value (PA1PF10)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 159

Page 176: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA1-PF11 key value (PA1PF11)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

160 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 177: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA1-PF12 key value (PA1PF12)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 161

Page 178: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA2-PF1 key value (PA2PF1)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

162 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 179: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA2-PF2 key value (PA2PF2)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 163

Page 180: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA2-PF3 key value (PA2PF3)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

164 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 181: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA2-PF4 key value (PA2PF4)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 165

Page 182: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA2-PF5 key value (PA2PF5)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

166 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 183: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 167

Page 184: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

PA2-PF6 key value (PA2PF6)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

168 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 185: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA2-PF7 key value (PA2PF7)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 169

Page 186: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA2-PF8 key value (PA2PF8)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

170 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 187: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA2-PF9 key value (PA2PF9)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 171

Page 188: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA2-PF10 key value (PA2PF10)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

172 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 189: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA2-PF11 key value (PA2PF11)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 173

Page 190: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

PA2-PF12 key value (PA2PF12)

Each valid key or key sequence is a separate parameter which, except for restrictions as noted, can be

assigned any function. If you do not specify a function for a particular key or key sequence, the function

currently assigned to that key or key sequence remains the same.

The possible functions that can be assigned are:

*HELP

5250 Help

*HLP3270

3270 Help Text (Display Active Keyboard Map)

*CLEAR

Clear Screen

174 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 191: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*PRINT

Print Screen

*DSPATR

Display Imbedded Attributes

*TEST Test Request

*DOWN

Roll Down

*UP Roll Up

*NONE

No Assignment

*RESET

Error Reset

*SYSREQ

System Request

*BCKSPC

Record Backspace

*ATTN

Attention

*F1-*F24

F1 through F24 Function Keys

Restrictions:

*HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET must be assigned to one of the following 12-key sets of function keys:

v PF1 through PF12

v PA1/PF1 through PF12

v PA2/PF1 through PF12

The *HELP, *HLP3270, and *RESET functions are required for 3270 display station device support to

function properly. Since not all 3270 keyboards have 24 PF keys, *HELP, *HLP3270, or *RESET may not be

assigned to keys PF13 through PF24, unless these functions are also assigned to one of the three sets

listed above.

It is recommended that *F1 and *SYSREQ both also be assigned to one of the three sets.

The value *ATTN cannot be explicitly assigned to a 3270 remote attach display station. If the default

value *ATTN is taken, the value *NONE is substituted. However, if the value *ATTN is explicitly chosen,

a diagnostic message is sent.

Top

Examples

SETKBDMAP PF1(*F1) PF2(*F2) PF3(*F3)

PF4(*F4) PF5(*HLP3270) PF9(*HELP)

Set Keyboard Map (SETKBDMAP) 175

Page 192: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This command reassigns the keyboard primarily for an application that makes frequent use of the 5250

CF keys F1, F2, F3, F4. All other PF key sequences are set to the default shown on the command prompt.

The above command is started in the program that started the application (thus tailoring the display

station to whatever application is run).

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF8701

Specified device &1 not a 3270 device type.

CPF8702

&1 function key not correctly defined.

CPF8703

Device &1 not ready.

Top

176 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 193: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Set Master Key (SETMSTKEY)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Yes

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Set Master Key (SETMSTKEY) command sets the specified master key from the parts already added.

Master key parts can be added with the Add Master Key Part (ADDMSTPART) CL command, the

Qc3LoadMasterKeyPart API, or Manage Master Keys panel in System i Navigator. Upon successful

completion of this command, any keys encrypted under this master key should be retranslated. In order

to save the master keys, a Save System (SAVSYS) command must be run.

For more information on master keys, refer to the Cryptographic Services Master Keys article in the

Cryptographic Services section of the APIs topic collection in the Programming category in the i5/OS

Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Restrictions:

v You must have all object (*ALLOBJ) and security administrator (*SECADM) special authorities to run

this command.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

MSTKEY Master key 1-8, *ASP, *SAVRST Required,

Positional 1

Top

Master key (MSTKEY)

Specifies the master key on which to perform the action.

This is a required parameter.

The action will be performed on:

*ASP The master key used for encrypting data stored on auxiliary storage pool (ASP) disk storage.

*SAVRST

The master key used for encrypting all the other master keys on a SAVSYS operation.

1-8 One of the eight general purpose master keys.

Top

Examples

SETMSTKEY MSTKEY(3)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 177

Page 194: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This command first moves the current version of Master Key 3 into the old version, and then moves the

new version (consisting of all parts added for Master Key 3 since the last Set Master Key) into the current

version.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF222E

&1 special authority is required.

CPF3CF2

Error(s) occurred during running of &1 API.

CPF9872

Program or service program &1 in library &2 ended. Reason code &3.

CPF9D88

An error occurred during exit program post-processing.

CPF9D89

An error occurred during exit program pre-processing.

CPF9D90

Master Key &1 was not set due to an exit program cancel.

CPF9D94

A pending value exists for a master key.

CPF9DB0

No key parts have been loaded.

CPF9DDA

Unexpected return code &1 from cryptographic service provider &2.

Top

178 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 195: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Set Object Access (SETOBJACC)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Set Object Access (SETOBJACC) command temporarily changes the speed of access to an object by

bringing the object into a main storage pool or purging it from all main storage pools. An object can be

kept main storage resident by selecting a pool for the object that has available space and does not have

jobs associated with it. Repeated use of the command can cause a set of objects to be resident in a main

storage pool.

Restrictions:

v You must have object operational (*OBJOPR) authority to all objects that are brought into a main

storage pool or purged from all main storage pools.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

OBJ Object Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: Object Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *USRLIBL, *CURLIB, *ALL, *ALLUSR

OBJTYPE Object type *FILE, *PGM Optional,

Positional 2

POOL Storage pool Element list Optional,

Positional 3 Element 1: Shared pool or

subsystem name

Name, *JOB, *BASE, *SHRPOOL1, *SHRPOOL2,

*SHRPOOL3, *SHRPOOL4, *SHRPOOL5, *SHRPOOL6,

*SHRPOOL7, *SHRPOOL8, *SHRPOOL9, *SHRPOOL10,

*SHRPOOL11, *SHRPOOL12, *SHRPOOL13,

*SHRPOOL14, *SHRPOOL15, *SHRPOOL16,

*SHRPOOL17, *SHRPOOL18, *SHRPOOL19,

*SHRPOOL20, *SHRPOOL21, *SHRPOOL22,

*SHRPOOL23, *SHRPOOL24, *SHRPOOL25,

*SHRPOOL26, *SHRPOOL27, *SHRPOOL28,

*SHRPOOL29, *SHRPOOL30, *SHRPOOL31,

*SHRPOOL32, *SHRPOOL33, *SHRPOOL34,

*SHRPOOL35, *SHRPOOL36, *SHRPOOL37,

*SHRPOOL38, *SHRPOOL39, *SHRPOOL40,

*SHRPOOL41, *SHRPOOL42, *SHRPOOL43,

*SHRPOOL44, *SHRPOOL45, *SHRPOOL46,

*SHRPOOL47, *SHRPOOL48, *SHRPOOL49,

*SHRPOOL50, *SHRPOOL51, *SHRPOOL52,

*SHRPOOL53, *SHRPOOL54, *SHRPOOL55,

*SHRPOOL56, *SHRPOOL57, *SHRPOOL58,

*SHRPOOL59, *SHRPOOL60, *PURGE

Element 2: Pool identifier 1-10

MBR Member Name, *FIRST Optional

MBRDATA Member data *BOTH, *ACCPTH, *DATA Optional

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 179

Page 196: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Object (OBJ)

Specifies the qualified name of the object to be brought into or deleted from main storage.

The name of the specified object can be qualified by one of the following library values:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, the QGPL library is used.

*USRLIBL

Only the libraries in the user portion of the job’s library list are searched.

*ALL All libraries on the system are searched.

*ALLUSR

All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are

searched except for the following:

#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB

#COBLIB #RPGLIB

#DFULIB #SDALIB

Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that

changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:

QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI

QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx

QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRINFSKR

QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSRNOTES

QMGTC2 QS36F QUSROND

QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSGS

QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPOSSA

QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRPYMSVR

QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCF QUSRRDARS

QRCL QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS

1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).

2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each

previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL

program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,

release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.

library-name

Specify the name of the library to be searched.

The possible values are:

object-name

Specify the name of the object.

Top

180 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 197: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Object type (OBJTYPE)

Specifies the type of object to be brought into or deleted from main storage.

The possible values are:

*FILE The object is a file.

*PGM The object is a program.

Top

Storage pool (POOL)

Specifies whether the object is brought into or purged from main storage.

The possible values are:

*JOB The object is brought into the pool associated with the job.

*BASE

The object is brought into the base pool.

*SHRPOOLn

The object is brought into a a general-purpose shared pool. Valid values range from 1 through 10.

*PURGE

The object is purged from all pools. Element 1: Subsystem

subsystem

Specify a subsystem name. Element 2: Pool Identifier

pool-identifier

Specify a subsystem pool identifier.

*PURGE

The object is purged from all pools.

Top

Member (MBR)

Specifies the database file member to be brought into or purged from main storage.

The possible values are:

*FIRST

The first member is selected.

file-member-name

Specify the member name.

Top

Member data (MBRDATA)

Specifies the member data to be brought into or purged from main storage.

The possible values are:

Set Object Access (SETOBJACC) 181

Page 198: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*BOTH

All parts of the object are selected.

*ACCPTH

The file member’s access path is selected.

*DATA

The file member’s data is selected.

Top

Examples

SETOBJACC OBJ(OBJA) OBJTYPE(*PGM) POOL(*JOB)

This command brings a program named OBJA to the pool associated with the job in which the command

is run.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF1858

The specified pool does not exist.

CPF1859

Use of an access path was requested but none exists.

CPF9855

File &1 in library &3 contains no members.

Top

182 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 199: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Set Program Information (SETPGMINF)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Set Program Information (SETPGMINF) command is used with the extended program model (EPM)

languages to associate all the program objects in an application. The SETPGMINF command defines the

application environment, based on the information you supply on the ROOTPGM, SUBPGM, and

LIBFILE parameters. The C/400*, FORTRAN/400*, and Pascal languages work within the extended

program model.

EPM programs that refer to external symbols in other EPM programs must be specified on the

SETPGMINF command. External symbols are calls to other compilation units or external storage. You do

not need to use this command if your program consists of only one compilation unit, or if the program

calls only non-EPM programs. If the programs you specify on the ROOTPGM and SUBPGM parameters

have not been successfully compiled, SETPGMINF fails.

Error messages for SETPGMINF

*ESCAPE Messages

PSE4017

Errors occurred in SETPGMINF command.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

ROOTPGM Root program Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: Root program Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

SUBPGM Sub-programs Values (up to 200 repetitions): Element list Optional,

Positional 2 Element 1: Program Qualified object name

Qualifier 1: Program Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

LIBFILE Library information files Values (up to 16 repetitions): Element list Optional,

Positional 3 Element 1: File Qualified object name

Qualifier 1: File Name, *SAME, *NONE, *PASLIB, *FTNLIB, *CLIB

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

LISTDETAIL Listing detail *NONE, *BASIC, *FULL Optional

PRTFILE Print file Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: Print file Name, QSYSPRT

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 183

Page 200: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

RUNATTR Run attributes Element list Optional

Element 1: Maximum

non-fatal errors

0-100, 20, *NOMAX

Element 2: Fatal error

severity

0-40, 40

Element 3: External Type

Checking

*YES, *NO

Element 4: Computational

Attributes

*LANG, *ALL, *NONE

PFROPT Performance options Element list Optional

Element 1: Access group

storage

*NONE, *ALL

HEAPSIZE Initial size of heap spaces Element list Optional

Element 1: Dynamic storage

heap

1024-16777216, 16000, *NONE

Element 2: Static storage

heap

1024-16777216, 32000

STACKSIZE Initial size of auto storage Element list Optional

Element 1: 1024-16777216, 16000

SSNATTR Session file attributes Element list Optional

Element 1: File size 8192-16000000, 32000

Element 2: Buffer size 80-1024, 160

DBGOPT Debug options Element list Optional

Element 1: Debug

initialization

*ON, *OFF

Top

Root program (ROOTPGM)

Specifies the name of the program which will contain the environment definition necessary to create the

EPM run-time environment. This program, called a default entry point or root program, contains the

references to external symbols. In C, the default entry point is usually the program that contains a main()

function. Pascal defines the main begin block of the program unit as the default entry point. FORTRAN

defines the main program (the program defined on the PROGRAM statement) as the default entry point.

*Change authority is required.

ROOTPGM is a required parameter.

program-name

The name of the EPM program object that contains the default entry point.

Possible library values are:

*LIBL The system searches the library list for the root program object.

*CURLIB

The current library is searched. If you have not specified the current library, QGPL is used.

library-name

Enter the name of the library where the root program object is located.

Top

184 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 201: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Sub-programs (SUBPGM)

Specifies a list of all the program objects that you want to include in the run-time environment for your

application. These programs can be either EPM or non-EPM program objects.

Up to 200 program objects can be specified on the SUBPGM parameter. You can specify more than 200

related program objects for 1 application if you nest SETPGMINF commands.

program-name

Enter the name of the program object. You can specify up to 200 program objects on one

SETPGMINF command.

Possible library values are:

*LIBL The system searches the library list for the library containing the program objects.

*CURLIB

The name of the current library is used. If you have not specified the current library, QGPL is

used.

library-name

Enter the name of the library where the program object is located.

These SUBPGMs are sought at run-time, according to the library specifications used when you specify the

SETPGMINF command. If you specify a specific library, or use *CURLIB, only that specific library is

searched for the program object. If the library designated as the current library changes between the time

you issue the SETPGMINF command and the time you run your program, not all of the program objects

will be found and you will receive an error message.

Top

Library information files (LIBFILE)

Specifies the library information file that contains information used to resolve any outstanding external

references after all of the program objects identified on the ROOTPGM and SUBPGM parameters have

been processed. Library information files are searched in the order that they are specified.

Several library information files are IBM-supplied. These files contain the EPM language library

functions.

You can create and update your own library information file with the Extract Program Information

(EXTPGMINF) command.

*SAME

Use the same library information file as was used in the last environment definition. If this is the

first time an environment is defined, the run-time library file for the language object specified on

the ROOTPGM parameter is used. For example, if your ROOTPGM was compiled using the

C/400 compiler, the default library information file is *CLIB.

*NONE

No library information file is used.

*PASLIB

The Pascal run-time library information file is used.

*CLIB The C/400 run-time library information file is used.

*FTNLIB

The FORTRAN/400 run-time library information file is used.

Set Program Information (SETPGMINF) 185

Page 202: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

file-name

Enter the name of the library information file. This library information file must exist. To create a

library information file, use the EXTPGMINF command.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL The system searches the library list for the specified library information file.

*CURLIB

The current library is used to locate the library information file. If you have not specified the

current library, QGPL is used.

library-name

Enter the name of the library that contains the library information file.

Top

Listing detail (LISTDETAIL)

Specifies whether a SETPGMINF listing is created. The listing will have the same name as the program

specified on the ROOTPGM parameter and is directed to the library and file specified on the PRTFILE

parameter.

The PRTFILE parameter is not displayed unless you request a listing (*BASIC or *FULL) on the

LISTDETAIL parameter.

*NONE

A listing is not created.

*BASIC

A listing is created that includes all of the symbol references and definitions that result from the

programs specified on the ROOTPGM and SUBPGM parameters.

*FULL A listing is created that includes all of the symbol references and definitions for the entire

application. This includes the symbol references and definitions for all the programs specified on

the LIBFILE parameter that are not explicitly referenced in your application.

Top

Print file (PRTFILE)

Specifies the name and library of the printer file where the SETPGMINF listing is directed. The file

should have a minimum length of 132. If you specify a file with a record length of less than 132,

information may be lost.

This parameter does not appear on the prompting display unless you change the default value on the

LISTDETAIL parameter to *BASIC or *FULL.

QSYSPRT

The SETPGMINF listing is placed in the file QSYSPRT.

file-name

Enter the name of the file where the SETPGMINF listing is to be placed.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL The system searches the library list.

186 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 203: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*CURLIB

The name of the current library is used. If you have not specified the current library, QGPL is

used.

library-name

Enter the name of the library where the file is stored.

Top

Run attributes (RUNATTR)

Specifies the number of times the non-fatal error counter is incremented before processing ends, and the

message severity-level that is interpreted as a fatal error at run-time. A fatal error is an error that stops

your application from running. You can also specify whether you want external type checking to take

place at program run-time. The computational attributes field allows you to set the attributes for

controlling floating point operations in the run-time environment.

20 The non-fatal error counter is incremented up to 20 times before the processing of your

application ends.

*NOMAX

The non-fatal error counter has no limit and will not stop the processing of your application.

counter-number

The number of non-fatal errors that are allowed before processing ends.

40 A message with a severity-level of 40 or higher is interpreted as a fatal error.

severity-level

The message severity-level that is interpreted as a fatal error. If a severity-level of 0 is specified,

your application stops running if any errors occur.

*YES External type checking is performed at program run-time.

*NO External type checking is not performed at program run-time. Any warning messages that occur

as a result of checking errors are not issued when you run your program.

*LANG

Computational attributes are set according to the semantics of the EPM language.

*ALL Floating point exceptions are disabled or masked.

*NONE

Floating point exceptions are enabled or unmasked.

Top

Performance options (PFROPT)

Specifies whether the space allocated for static, automatic, and dynamic program variables is part of the

process access group.

*NONE

The storage spaces created are not part of the process access group (PAG).

*ALL The storage spaces created are part of the process access group (PAG). This option can improve

the performance of programs that use limited program variable storage, and are run on a

non-dedicated system. Information on performance tools and CL commands you can use to

display and analyze the PAG can be found in the Performance Tools Guide.

Top

Set Program Information (SETPGMINF) 187

Page 204: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Initial size of heap spaces (HEAPSIZE)

Specifies the initial size of the heap spaces for the dynamic and static storage heap. The heap size

specified will expand as your application progresses.

The dynamic storage heap consists of the storage that you have allocated in your application with the

C/400 memory routines (malloc, calloc, realloc) or the NEW procedure in Pascal.

The static storage heap consists of the storage that you have allocated in your application with static and

external static variables.

16000 The initial size of the dynamic storage heap is 16000 bytes.

*NONE

No initial dynamic storage is allocated. Use *NONE only if you do not use any EPM memory

management functions in your application. If you specify *NONE and use any of the memory

functions, you will get pointer exceptions and your application will stop processing.

dynamic-storage-size

Enter the initial size of the dynamic storage heap. The initial size can be between 1024 and

16777216 bytes.

32000 The initial size of the static storage heap is 32000 bytes.

static-storage-size

Enter the initial size of the static storage heap. The initial size can be between 1024 and 16777216

bytes. If you use static variables extensively in your application your performance can improve if

you specify a larger storage heap than the default.

Top

Initial size of auto storage (STACKSIZE)

Specifies the initial size of the automatic storage stack. The stack size specified will expand as your

application progresses.

The automatic storage stack consists of the storage that you have allocated in your application with

automatic variables.

16000 The initial size of the automatic storage stack is 16000 bytes.

automatic-storage-size

Enter the initial size of the automatic storage stack. The initial size can be between 1024 and

16777216 bytes. If your application contains a large number of recursive calls, you should increase

the initial size of the stack.

Top

Session file attributes (SSNATTR)

Specifies the file session attributes for the file and buffer size.

32000 The default size for the file is 32000 bytes.

file-size

Specify a value for the file size between 8192 and 16000000 bytes. If your file exceeds the size you

specify, the information at the top rolls off the display. This information is lost.

160 The default size for the buffer is 160 bytes.

188 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 205: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

buffer-size

Specify a value for the buffer size between 80 and 1024 bytes.

Top

Debug options (DBGOPT)

Specifies the use of the extended program model (EPM) debug tool at run-time, if system debug mode is

active. To activate system debug mode, enter the STRDBG command.

*ON EPM debug starts at run-time if system debug mode is active.

*OFF EPM debug will not start at run-time. You can use system debug to debug your programs, but

EPM language variable names, statement numbers, and debugging commands are not available.

Top

Examples

None

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

PSE4017

Errors occurred in SETPGMINF command.

Top

Set Program Information (SETPGMINF) 189

Page 206: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

190 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 207: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Set Tape Category (SETTAPCGY)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Set Tape Category (SETTAPCGY) command sets the category for a tape device in a specified media

library device. The system automatically loads cartridges from the specified category in the order

specified on the cartridge order (CTGORDER) parameter.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DEV Library device Name Required,

Positional 1

OPTION Option *MOUNTED, *DEMOUNTED, *ASSIGN, *RELEASE Required,

Positional 2

CGY Category Single values: *SHARE400Other values: Element list

Optional

Element 1: Category name Character value, *NOSHARE, *IPL, *NL, *CNV

Element 2: Category system Character value, *CURRENT

CTGORDER Cartridge order *SEQ, *NEXTAVAIL Optional

TGTCGY Target category Single values: *SHARE400Other values: Element list

Optional

Element 1: Category name Character value, *CGY, *NOSHARE, *IPL, *NL

Element 2: Category system Character value, *CURRENT

MNTID Mount identifier Name, *NONE Optional

Top

Library device (DEV)

Specifies the media library device for which the category is set.

This is a required parameter.

name Specify the name of the media library device.

Top

Option (OPTION)

Specifies which option is set for the specified media library device.

This is a required parameter.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 191

Page 208: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*MOUNTED

The category specified on the CGY parameter is considered mounted and any tape operation

with VOL(*MOUNTED) specified uses the tape cartridges from the category that is mounted.

*DEMOUNTED

The category specified on the CGY parameter is no longer mounted. The use of

VOL(*MOUNTED) is not valid for the media library device.

*ASSIGN

The mounted category session specified on the MNTID parameter is assigned to the job issuing

the SETTAPCGY command. The mounted category session being assigned must have been

previously mounted and released.

*RELEASE

The mounted category session assigned to the job issuing the SETTAPCGY command is released

and is available for another job to assign.

Top

Category (CGY)

Specifies the category to be mounted.

Single values

*SHARE400

The cartridge identifier can be shared by other systems that are attached to the library device.

The cartridge identifiers are mounted in the order specified in the CTGORDER parameter.

Element 1: Category name

*NOSHARE

The cartridge identifiers cannot be shared with other systems that are attached to the same

device. The cartridge identifiers are mounted in the order specified in the CTGORDER parameter.

*IPL The cartridge identifiers can be used for an alternate initial program load (IPL) of the system. The

cartridge identifiers are mounted in the order specified in the CTGORDER parameter.

*NL The cartridge is used as a non-labeled tape. The cartridge identifiers are mounted in the order

specified in the CTGORDER parameter.

*CNV The cartridge identifier is used from the special convenience category. The cartridge identifiers

are mounted in the order specified in the CTGORDER parameter.

character-value

Specify the name of a user-defined category. The cartridge identifiers in the category specified are

mounted in the order specified in the CTGORDER parameter.

Element 2: Category system

The second part of the parameter specifies the name of the system to which the category belongs. The

system name is obtained from the pending system name field of a Display Network Attributes

(DSPNETA) command. If there is no pending system name, the current system name attribute is used.

* * * Attention * * *

If a system name is changed, the tape cartridges in

library devices that have the attribute of the system

name before it was changed are no longer valid.

192 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 209: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*CURRENT

The category belongs to the system currently running the command.

character-value

Specify the name of the system to which the category belongs.

Top

Cartridge order (CTGORDER)

Specifies the order in which the cartridges are mounted.

*SEQ The cartridges are mounted in the order they were added or changed to the category specified.

The operation ends if the next cartridge in the sequential order is not available.

*NEXTAVAIL

The cartridges are mounted in a sequential order, but if a cartridge in the order is not available,

the next available cartridge is used.

Top

Target category (TGTCGY)

Specifies the category to which a tape cartridge is changed after it is used. This parameter can be useful

when a scratch category is set for use during a save operation. Each cartridge is automatically changed to

the specified target category after it is used.

Single values

*SHARE400

The cartridge identifiers are changed to the *SHARE400 category.

Element 1: Category name

*CGY The cartridges remain in the category specified on the CGY parameter.

*NOSHARE

The cartridge identifiers are changed to the *NOSHARE category.

*IPL The cartridge identifiers are changed to the *IPL category.

*NL The cartridge identifiers are changed to the *NL category.

character-value

Specify the name of a user-defined category. The cartridge identifiers are changed to the specified

user-defined category.

Element 2: Category system

The second part of this parameter specifies the name of the system to which the target category belongs.

The system name is obtained from the pending system name field of the Display Network Attributes

(DSPNETA) command. If there is no pending system name, the current system name attribute is used.

* * * Attention * * *

If a system name is changed, the tape cartridges in

library devices that have the attribute of the system

name before it was changed are no longer valid.

Set Tape Category (SETTAPCGY) 193

Page 210: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*CURRENT

The system currently running the command is used.

character-value

Specify the name of the system that the category belongs to.

Top

Mount identifier (MNTID)

Specifies the identifier by which the mounted category session will be known. This parameter is valid

only when OPTION(*MOUNTED) or OPTION(*ASSIGN) is specified.

*NONE

This mounted category session is not assigned to any job and will be used by the first job that

issues a command to the media library with a volume identifier of *MOUNTED. The mount

identifier *NONE cannot be specified with OPTION(*ASSIGN).

name Specify a unique name to identify the mounted category session. A mounted category session

known by this mount identifier is created and assigned when the category is mounted. This

identifier is then used when assigning the session to another job. The session known by this

identifier is deleted when the category is demounted. The mount identifier can then be reused

when mounting another category to the media library.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Using Mounted Category Without a Mount Identifier

SETTAPCGY MLB(LIB01) OPTION(*MOUNTED) CGY(*NOSHARE *CURRENT)

CTGORDER(*SEQ) TGTCGY(*IPL)

This command sets the tape category to *NOSHARE for a resource in media library device LIB01 on the

system currently running this command. Each cartridge that is used is changed to the *IPL category. The

order in which the cartridges are used is the exact order in which they were added to or changed in the

category. As each cartridge is used and unloaded from the resource, the system automatically chooses

and loads the next sequential cartridge from the *NOSHARE category.

Example 2: Using Mounted Category with a Mount Identifer

SETTAPCGY DEV(LIB01) OPTION(*MOUNTED) CGY(*NOSHARE *CURRENT)

CTGORDER(*SEQ) TGTCGY(DAILY1) MNTID(DAILY)

This command sets the tape category to *NOSHARE for a resource in media library device LIB01 on the

system currently running this command. The mounted category session is identified by the mount

identifier DAILY. Each cartridge that is used is changed to the DAILY1 category. The order in which the

cartridges are used is the exact order in which they were added to or changed in the category. As each

cartridge is used and unloaded from the resource, the system automatically chooses and loads the next

sequential cartridge from the *NOSHARE category.

Example 3: Releasing a Category Session

SETTAPCGY MLB(LIB01) OPTION(*RELEASE)

194 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 211: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This command releases the category session assigned to the job issuing the command. The category is

still set to a resource in media library device LIB01 and is available for another job to assign.

Example 4: Assigning a Category Session

SETTAPCGY MLB(LIB01) OPTION(*ASSIGN) MNTID(DAILY)

This command assigns the mounted category session identified by the mount identifier DAILY to the job

issuing the command.

Example 5: Demounting a Mounted Category

SETTAPCGY MLB(LIB01) OPTION(*DEMOUNTED)

This command demounts the mounted category from a resource in media library device LIB01. The

mount identifier DAILY is now available to use to name another mounted category session.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF6711

Command not allowed

CPF6712

Category &4 not mounted.

CPF6713

Category not demounted.

CPF6745

Device &1 not a media library device.

CPF67A6

Category does not exist

CPF67AD

Category not assigned.

CPF67AE

Category not released.

CPF67E4

Library device function not successful

CPF9814

Device &1 not found.

CPF9825

Not authorized to device &1.

Top

Set Tape Category (SETTAPCGY) 195

Page 212: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

196 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 213: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Set Upgrade Environment (SETUPGENV)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Set Upgrade Environment (SETUPGENV) command prompts the user for information that is

required to help the user plan for and perform the upgrade. The information that is gathered is stored in

library QUPGRADE.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

UPGENV Upgrade environment Character value, *NEW, *UPGENVID Required,

Positional 1

TGTRLS Target release Character value Optional,

Positional 2

TGTPRC Target processor Character value, *DFT Optional,

Positional 3

MERGE Merge with Advanced/36 *NO, *YES Optional,

Positional 4

UPGENVID Upgrade environment

identifier

Name, *SRLNBR Optional,

Positional 5

Top

Upgrade environment (UPGENV)

Specifies whether a new upgrade environment is being created or if you want to work with an existing

environment.

*NEW Specifies a new upgrade environment is being created.

*UPGENVID

Specifies that you want to work with an existing upgrade environment. The identifier of the

existing upgrade environment is specified in the upgrade environment identifier field.

Top

Target release (TGTRLS)

Specifies the target release to which you intend to upgrade. This field is only valid when the Upgrade

Environment (UPGENV) value is *NEW.

target-release

Specify the release level in the format VxRxMx. Valid values depend on the current version,

release, and modification level, and they change with each new release.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 197

Page 214: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Target processor (TGTPRC)

Specify the feature code of the iSeries processor you expect for your target system. This field is only valid

when the Upgrade Environment (UPGENV) value is *NEW.

The processors listed are the valid target processors for upgrading your source iSeries system. Other valid

processors may be entered but the upgrade would represent an unsupported upgrade.

*DFT Specifies the smallest processor necessary to provide similar performance to that of the source

system.

target-processor

Specifies the four digit feature code of the target processor. Valid values depend on the source

and target releases.

Top

Merge with Advanced/36 (MERGE)

Indicates whether System/36 operating system (SSP) will be running as guest on the target system. This

field is only valid when the Upgrade Environment (UPGENV) value is *NEW

*NO Indicates this system will not be merged with a System/36

*YES Indicates this system will be merged with a System/36

Top

Upgrade environment identifier (UPGENVID)

Specifies the identifier associated with an upgrade environment. You may develop several upgrade

environments as you are planning the order for your upgrade. Each environment may use different

values and upgrade methods to help you decide which upgrade method and approach is best for you

and your business. Only one upgrade environment will be used for upgrade preparation and the

upgrade.

*SRLNBR

Specifies the default name for the upgrade environment. The upgrade environment identifier for

this environment will be the serial number of this system appended to the letter ’Q’, for example,

Q0100A12.

upgrade-environment-identifier

Specifies a character name as the upgrade environment identifier.

Top

Examples

None

Top

Error messages

Unknown

Top

198 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 215: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Sign Off (SIGNOFF)

Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT

*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Sign Off (SIGNOFF) command ends an interactive job or causes all jobs in a group to end. You enter

this command to sign off at a work station.

Restrictions:

1. This command is valid only in an interactive job.

2. If the SIGNOFF command is issued in a CL program, all subsequent commands in the CL program

are bypassed.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

LOG Job log *NOLIST, *LIST Optional,

Positional 1

DROP Drop line *DEVD, *YES, *NO Optional,

Positional 2

ENDCNN End connection *NO, *YES Optional,

Positional 3

Top

Job log (LOG)

Specifies whether the job log for this interactive job is deleted or is included in the job’s spooled output

for printing. This entry takes precedence over the log value specified for the job itself.

*NOLIST

The information in the job log, which has already been displayed throughout the job, is no longer

needed and is being deleted.

*LIST The job log is spooled for printing, along with the job’s remaining spooled output, if any.

Top

Drop line (DROP)

Specifies, for switched lines only, whether the switched line attached to the work station is disconnected

(dropped) if no other work stations on the same line are signed on. This parameter is ignored if the work

station is attached to a nonswitched line.

*DEVD

The value specified for the Drop line (DROP) parameter of the work station’s device description

is assumed.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 199

Page 216: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*YES The switched line is disconnected when the job is ended if no other work stations on the line are

signed on.

*NO The switched line is not disconnected when the job is ended.

Top

End connection (ENDCNN)

Specifies whether to end the connection to the current system. Ending the connection allows the user to

bypass the sign-on display of the target system and return to the source system. For communication

functions that do not support this option, this parameter is ignored.

*NO The connection does not end. The sign-on display of the target system is shown.

*YES The connection ends and the user is returned to the source system. No sign-on screen or error

messages are shown from the target system.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Signing Off and Ending an Interactive Job

SIGNOFF

This command signs off the user of the work station and ends the interactive job. The switched line is

dropped only if specified in the device description of this work station and if no other work station on

this line is active. An end-of-job message that gives the job start and stop times is written in the job’s log.

Example 2: Printing the Job Log

SIGNOFF LOG(*LIST) DROP(*NO)

This command ends the interactive job, but the switched line is not released. The job log is printed with

the job’s spooled output.

Example 3: Signing Off and Ending the Connection

SIGNOFF ENDCNN(*YES)

This command ends the connection and transfers the user back to the source system.

Top

Error messages

None

Top

200 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 217: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Select Command (SLTCMD)

Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT

*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Select Command (SLTCMD) command allows you to display a list of commands from one or more

libraries. From the Select Commands display, you can select a command that you want to prompt.

Restrictions:

v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority will be searched.

v Only the commands to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.

v To prompt a listed command, you must have *USE authority to the command.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

CMD Command Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: Command Generic name, name, *ALL

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Command (CMD)

Specifies the commands to be shown on the Select Command display.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Message queue

*ALL All commands are shown.

generic-name

Specify the generic name of the commands to be shown. A generic name is a character string that

contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, all

commands that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are shown.

name Specify the name of the command to be shown.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries

with the specified object name are shown.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for

the thread, the QGPL library is searched.

*USRLIBL

If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 201

Page 218: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,

only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.

*ALLUSR

All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are

searched except for the following:

#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB

#COBLIB #RPGLIB

#DFULIB #SDALIB

Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that

changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:

QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI

QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx

QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRINFSKR

QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSRNOTES

QMGTC2 QS36F QUSROND

QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSGS

QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPOSSA

QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRPYMSVR

QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCF QUSRRDARS

QRCL QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS

1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).

2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each

previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL

program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,

release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.

*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Examples

SLTCMD CMD(QSYS/*ALL)

This command shows a list of all commands in library QSYS. The option to prompt and run commands

is available.

Top

Error messages

None

Top

202 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 219: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send Break Message (SNDBRKMSG)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send Break Message (SNDBRKMSG) command is used to send an immediate message to one or

more work station message queues. An immediate message is a message that is not predefined and is not

stored in a message file. The command causes the message to be delivered always in break mode. The

DSPMSG display is shown for the message when it is received, regardless of the setting of the message

queue’s delivery mode, severity, and break handling program. However, the message may not be

displayed in some cases, depending on the BRKMSG job attribute. This command is primarily intended

for the system operator’s use.

Restrictions:

1. This command can be used to send break messages to work station message queues only.

2. This command cannot send inquiry messages (specified by MSGTYPE(INQ)) to multiple work

stations.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

MSG Message text Character value Required,

Positional 1

TOMSGQ To work station message

queue

Single values: *ALLWSOther values (up to 50 repetitions): Qualified object name

Required,

Positional 2

Qualifier 1: To work station

message queue

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL

MSGTYPE Message type *INFO, *INQ Optional,

Positional 3

RPYMSGQ Message queue to get reply Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: Message queue

to get reply

Name, QSYSOPR

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL

CCSID Coded character set ID 1-65535, *HEX, *JOB Optional

Top

Message text (MSG)

Specifies the immediate message that is being sent. The text must be enclosed in apostrophes if it

contains blanks or other special characters. A maximum of 512 characters can be specified.

Coded Character Set Identifier (CCSID) Considerations

The text supplied for the MSG parameter is assumed to be in the CCSID of the job running this

command unless a coded character set identifier is supplied for the CCSID parameter. For more

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 203

Page 220: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

information about the message handler and its use of CCSIDs, see the i5/OS globalization topic collection

in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

This is a required parameter.

Top

To work station message queue (TOMSGQ)

Specifies one or more work station message queues to which the break message is sent. Only the names

of work station message queues can be specified and only *LIBL or QSYS can be specified for the library

value.

Single values

*ALLWS

The break message is sent to all work station and Personal Computer message queues. *ALLWS

cannot be specified if *INQ is specified for the Message type (MSGTYPE) parameter.

Qualifier 1: To work station message queue

message-queue-name

Specify the name of the message queue to which the break message is to be sent.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

library-name

Specify the library where the message queue is located.

Top

Message type (MSGTYPE)

Specifies the type of message that is sent in break mode. Only informational or inquiry message types

can be specified. Inquiry messages may require a response.

*INFO

An information only message is sent in break mode.

*INQ An inquiry message is sent in break mode; the work station receiving the message is expected to

reply to it. An inquiry message cannot be sent to multiple queues with only one command.

Top

Message queue to get reply (RPYMSGQ)

Specifies, only if an inquiry message is sent, the message queue that the work station user’s reply is sent

to.

Qualifier 1: Message queue to get reply

QSYSOPR

The replies to the break message are sent to the system operator’s message queue, QSYSOPR.

204 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 221: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

message-queue-name

Specify the name of the message queue to which a reply to the break message is sent. Only a user

or work station message queue can be specified.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

library-name

Specify the library where the message queue is located.

Top

Coded character set ID (CCSID)

Specifies the coded character set identifier (CCSID) that the specified message text is in. The text supplied

by the MSG parameter is assumed to be in the CCSID supplied by this parameter. For more information

about the message handler and its use of CCSIDs, see the i5/OS globalization topic collection in the

i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

*JOB The message text is assumed to be in the CCSID of the job running this command.

*HEX The message text is not converted. CCSID 65535 is used.

coded-character-set-identifier

Specify a valid CCSID in which you want your message text to be considered in. Valid values

range from 1 through 65535. See the Globalization information in the iSeries Information Center

at http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter for a list of valid CCSID values. This

command will validate the CCSID.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Sending a Message

SNDBRKMSG MSG(’Inventory application shuts down at 4:00 PM.’)

This command sends the message ’The inventory application shuts down at 4:00 pm today.’ to all work

station message queues. If the work station is signed on, the message will be delivered in break mode

regardless of the delivery attribute setting of those message queues. The message is also added to the

work station message queues of those work stations that are not signed on.

Example 2: Sending an Immediate Message

SNDBRKMSG MSG(’Your printed output is ready.’)

TOMSGQ(GEORGEMSGQ)

This example shows a typical use of the SNDBRKMSG command by the system operator to send an

immediate message to a work station user.

Top

Send Break Message (SNDBRKMSG) 205

Page 222: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2428

Message queue parameter is not valid.

CPF2469

Error occurred when sending message&1.

CPF247E

CCSID &1 is not valid.

CPF9838

User profile storage limit exceeded.

Top

206 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 223: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send Distribution (SNDDST)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send Distribution (SNDDST) command allows you to send a distribution to a user, to a list of users,

or to a distribution list.

Restrictions:

v If you are working on behalf of another user, you must have been granted permission to work for that

user through the Grant User Permission (GRTUSRPMN) command.

v You need to be enrolled in the system distribution directory.

v You cannot request personal distribution if you are working for another user.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

TYPE Information to be sent *MSG, *DOC, *FILE, *IDP, *DSTID, *LMSG Required,

Positional 1

TOUSRID Recipient Values (up to 300 repetitions): Element list Optional,

Positional 2 Element 1: User ID Character value

Element 2: Address Character value

Element 3: Recipient type *PRI, *CC, *BCC

TOINTNET Internet Recipient Values (up to 300 repetitions): Element list Optional

Element 1: Internet address Character value, *NONE

Element 2: Recipient type *PRI, *CC, *BCC

DSTD Description Character value Optional,

Positional 3

MSG Message Character value, *NONE, *DSTIDMSG Optional

LONGMSG Long Message Character value, *NONE Optional

CFMDEL Confirmation of delivery *NO, *YES Optional

SENSITIV Sensitivity *NONE, *PRIVATE, *PERSONAL, *CONFIDENTIAL Optional

PERSONAL Personal *NO, *YES Optional

IMPORTANCE Content importance *NORMAL, *LOW, *HIGH Optional

PTY Priority *NORMAL, *HIGH, *LOW Optional

USRID User identifier Single values: *CURRENTOther values: Element list

Optional

Element 1: User ID Character value

Element 2: Address Character value

DOCFILE Document file Single values: *NONEOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Document file Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

DOCMBR Document member Name, *FIRST Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 207

Page 224: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DOCTYPE Document type 2-65535, *DFT, *FFT, *RFT Optional

SNDFMT Send format *NOCHG, *NOTE, *FINALFORM Optional

SYSCOD System code Character value, *DFT Optional

DOCCHRID Document character

identifier

Single values: *SYSVAL, *DEVDOther values: Element list

Optional

Element 1: Graphic character

set

Integer

Element 2: Code page Integer

DSTID Distribution identifier Character value, *NONE Optional

DSTIDEXN Distribution ID extension 0-99, *NONE Optional

DOC Document Character value, *DOCID Optional

FLR In folder Character value, *NONE Optional

DOCID Document identifier Character value, *NONE Optional

IDPFILE Profile file Single values: *NONE, *DOCFILE, *DSTIDIDPOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Profile file Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

IDPMBR Profile member Name, *FIRST Optional

DOCD Document description Character value, *DFT, *DSTD Optional

AUTHOR Author Single values: *NONE, *USRIDOther values (up to 50 repetitions): Character value

Optional

DOCCLS Document class Character value, *NONE Optional

KWD Keyword Single values: *NONEOther values (up to 50 repetitions): Character value

Optional

SUBJECT Subject Single values: *NONE, *DOCDOther values (up to 50 repetitions): Character value

Optional

DOCDATE Document date Date, *NONE, *CURRENT Optional

FILCAB File cabinet location Character value, *NONE Optional

CPYLST Copy list Single values: *NONEOther values (up to 50 repetitions): Character value

Optional

EXPDATE Expiration date Date, *NONE Optional

CRTDATE Creation date Date, *NONE, *CURRENT Optional

REFERENCE Reference Character value, *NONE Optional

ACTDATE Action due date Date, *NONE, *CURRENT Optional

RPYDATE Reply requested Element list Optional

Element 1: Date Date, *NONE, *CURRENT, *ANY

Element 2: Time Time, *ENDOFDAY

STATUS Document status Character value, *NONE Optional

CMPDATE Completion date Date, *NONE, *CURRENT Optional

PROJECT Project Character value, *NONE Optional

DOCLANGID Language ID Character value, *JOB Optional

DOCCNTRYID Country or region ID Character value, *JOB Optional

ALWALTRCP Allow alternate recipient *YES, *NO Optional

DISCLOSE Disclose recipient *YES, *NO Optional

ALWX400CNV Allow X.400 conversion *YES, *NO Optional

208 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 225: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

AUTUSR Authorizing user Single values: *NONEOther values: Element list

Optional

Element 1: User ID Character value

Element 2: Address Character value

DSTEXPDATE Distribution expiry indicator Element list Optional

Element 1: Date Date, *NONE

Element 2: Time Time, *ENDOFDAY

CMDCHRID Command character

identifier

Single values: *SYSVAL, *DEVDOther values: Element list

Optional

Element 1: Graphic character

set

Integer

Element 2: Code page Integer

Top

Information to be sent (TYPE)

Specifies the type of information that is sent and the parameters that are valid on this command.

*MSG Only the message specified on the Message prompt (MSG parameter) is sent.

*DOC The document specified on the Document prompt (DOC parameter) or the Document identifier

prompt (DOCID parameter) is sent. The user must have authority for the document before it can

be sent.

*FILE The database file specified on the Document file prompt (DOCFILE parameter) and the

Document member prompt (DOCMBR parameter) is sent. The database file is sent without any

changes. The user must have authority for the database file before it can be sent.

*IDP The interchange document profile (IDP) that is sent is specified on the Profile file prompt

(IDPFILE parameter) and the Profile member prompt (IDPMBR parameter), or is specified in the

document profile built by this command.

*DSTID

The mail entry that is identified by the distribution ID is distributed. The distribution ID is called

the distribution document name.

*LMSG

The text specified on the Long Message prompt (LONGMSG parameter) is sent as an final-form

text document (FFTDCA) note. LONGMSG allows up to 5000 characters, which is about one page

of text. The ″details″ parameters (Subject, Reference, Author, Due Date, etc.) are supported with

TYPE(*LMSG). The TOINTNET parameter is also supported with TYPE(*LMSG).

Top

Recipient (TOUSRID)

Specifies one of the following:

v The user ID and address of zero or more users to whom the distribution is being sent

v The distribution list name of zero or more distribution lists containing the user ID and address of one

or more users to whom the distribution is being sent.

A combination of user IDs and distribution lists can be used on the same command. Up to 300 user IDs

and addresses can be specified.

Send Distribution (SNDDST) 209

Page 226: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

If no user ID and address are specified for the TOUSRID parameter, an internet address must be specified

on the TOINTNET parameter.

The possible User ID or List ID values are:

user-ID

Specify the user ID of the user to whom the distribution is sent.

list-ID

Specify the distribution list of users to whom the distribution is sent.

The possible User Address or List Qualifier values are:

user-address

Specify the user address of the user (specified in Element 1) to whom the distribution is sent.

list-qualifier

Specify the distribution list qualifier of users (specified in Element 1) to whom the distribution is

sent.

The possible Recipient Type values are:

*PRI The user or distribution list is the primary recipient of the distribution.

*CC The user or distribution list is receiving a copy of the distribution sent to the primary recipient.

However, this copy recipient is not identified on the distribution as a receiver on the distribution.

*BCC The user or distribution list is receiving a copy of the distribution. However, this copy recipient is

not identified on the distribution as a receiver on the distribution.

Top

Internet Recipient (TOINTNET)

Specifies the internet address of one or more users to whom the distribution is being sent. If

TOINTNET(*NONE) is specified, at least one user ID and address must be specified on the TOUSRID

parameter. Up to 300 internet addresses can be specified.

The TOINTNET parameter is not allowed when the TYPE keyword is *MSG.

*NONE

No internet address is specified. This is a single value.

character-value

Specify the internet address of a person or organization to whom the distribution is being sent.

Up to 253 characters can be specified for each address.

The possible Recipient Type values are:

*PRI The internet address is the primary recipient of the distribution.

*CC The internet address will receive a copy of the distribution sent to the primary recipient.

*BCC The internet address will receive a copy of the distribution. However, this copy recipient is not

identified on the distribution as a receiver on the distribution.

Top

210 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 227: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Description (DSTD)

Specifies the description of the distribution. A maximum of 44 characters can be specified. This parameter

is required and can not start with a blank character or be all blank characters.

Top

Message (MSG)

Specifies whether a short message is sent with the distribution.

*NONE

No message is sent.

*DSTIDMSG

The message in the distribution document specified on the Distribution identifier prompt

(DSTID parameter) is sent with the distribution.

message-text

Specify the message (256 characters maximum) to send to the users.

Top

Message (LONGMSG)

Specify the text to send to the recipients as an final-form text document (FFTDCA).

*NONE

No text is sent. This is the default and required when TYPE is not *LMSG

long-message-text

Specify the text (5000 characters maximum) to send to the recipients. The text will be put into an

final-form text document (FFTDCA) that will be sent as a note.

The text must be formatted by using the following controls within the text.

v :/N - Will cause a new line (Carrier return).

v :/P - Will cause a new paragraph. New line plus a blank line. (Carrier return and Required

carrier return)

The document is setup with 10 characters to the inch, the font ID is 11, the left margin at position

1, and the right margin at position 75. If :/N is not used to start a new line, the text will continue

past the right margin and will not be viewable by some E-mail clients. Blanks are not removed

from the text, but left in place for indentation and alignment. No extra text (ie. Recipient List,

Date/Time, Subject, or Sender) is put into the document.

Technical note to programmers: Any of the FFTDCA controls (in hexadecimal) can be inserted in

the text to provide more control of the format if the controls above are not enough.

Top

Confirmation of delivery (CFMDEL)

Specifies whether the sender receives a confirmation of delivery notification when each receiver gets the

distribution. Even though confirmation of delivery is not requested, the sender is still informed when the

distribution is not delivered because of an user ID is not valid, a system failure, or a routing failure. If

confirmation of delivery is requested, the sender is informed when the receiver receives, deletes, or runs

Send Distribution (SNDDST) 211

Page 228: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

another command against the distribution. To get this information, the sender must use the Query

Distribution (QRYDST) command with *OUT specified on the Incoming or outgoing prompt (OPTION

parameter).

*NO Confirmation of delivery is not requested.

*YES Confirmation of delivery is requested.

Top

Sensitivity (SENSITIV)

Specifies the level of sensitivity defined by the X.400 standard. The four levels include normal, personal,

private and company confidential. Private distributions cannot be viewed by a user working on behalf of

another user.

*NONE

The distribution has no sensitivity restrictions.

*PERSONAL

The distribution is sent to the recipient as an individual.

*PRIVATE

The distribution contains information that should be accessed only by the recipient.

*CONFIDENTIAL

The distribution contains information that should be handled according to company procedures.

Top

Personal (PERSONAL)

Specifies whether the document distribution is private or not. This parameter is replaced by SENSITIV

but the PERSONAL parameter can still be used. However, because this parameter may be removed in a

later release, whenever possible use the SENSITIV parameter.

If PERSONAL(*YES) is used, the SENSITIV parameter must be omitted or it must be with the value

SENSITIV(*NONE). If the command is prompted without this parameter specified, this parameter is not

displayed.

*NO Only the owner and users that have authorization to the distribution document can get access to

distributions that are not sensitive. Users authorized to work on behalf of other users who have

access to the distribution can access documents that are not sensitive. This value will map to

SENSITIV(*NONE).

*YES Only the owner can get access to private distribution documents. Users authorized to work on

behalf of other users who have access to the distribution document cannot get access to the

distribution. This value will map to SENSITIV(*PRIVATE).

Top

Content importance (IMPORTANCE)

Specify low, normal or high importance. This is an indication to the recipient of the content importance of

the distribution. It is different from priority which relates to the speed with which the distribution was

sent.

*NORMAL

A distribution of normal importance.

212 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 229: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*HIGH

A very important distribution.

*LOW A low importance distribution.

Top

Priority (PTY)

Specifies whether the distribution is sent using low priority, normal priority or high priority. For

distributions to remote receivers, the priority determines which ’SNADS Next System Queue’ is used.

Normal priority distributions use the normal next system queue. Low priority distributions use the

normal next system queue with the lowest priority available within that queue. High priority uses the

priority next system queue. The difference between low, high and normal priority depends on

information, specified by the user, on the Configuration Distribution Services (CFGDSTSRV) command.

The handling of priority distributions by other office system nodes can vary, but generally the high

priority distributions take the faster path when there is a choice of paths. For distribution to local

receivers, the priority determines whether a message is sent to the receiver’s message queue to notify the

receiver of the distribution. No message is sent for normal distributions.

*NORMAL

Normal priority is used.

*HIGH

High priority is used.

*LOW Low priority is used.

Top

User identifier (USRID)

Specifies which user ID and user ID address should be associated with the request.

*CURRENT

You are performing the request for yourself.

user-ID

Specify another user’s user ID or your user ID. You must have been given permission to work on

behalf of another user or have *ALLOBJ authority.

user-ID-address

Specify another user’s address or your address. You must have been given permission to work on

behalf of another user or have *ALLOBJ authority.

Top

Document file (DOCFILE)

Specifies the names of the database file and the library that contains the document data. The database file

is a user-defined file or the output file specified in either the Receive Distribution (RCVDST) command or

the Retrieve Document (RTVDOC) command. If an output file is specified, only the data portion of the

document data record is read from the output file. The prefix is removed from the document data record.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

Send Distribution (SNDDST) 213

Page 230: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the database file. If no library is specified as the

library for the job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the library where the database file is located.

data-base-file-name

Specify the name of the database file that contains the document data.

Top

Document member (DOCMBR)

Specifies the document database file member that is used.

*FIRST

The first member created in the database file is used.

member-name

Specify the name of the database file member that is used.

Top

Document type (DOCTYPE)

Specifies the type of document being used. This identifier is used by the system to determine whether the

data stream can be handled properly.

*DFT The system creates the proper document type identifier based on the source of the data.

*FFT The document is in Final Form Text. This type of document is intended to be viewed and printed,

but not edited, by the receiver.

*RFT The document is in Revisable Form Text. This type of document can be viewed, printed, and

edited by the receiver.

document-type-number

Specify a document type identifier value ranging from 2 through 65,535. The numbers from 2

through 32,767 are controlled by registering them with the IBM Document Interchange

Architecture and are used for IBM-defined document types. The numbers ranging from 32,768

through 65,535 are not registered with IBM and can be used for non-IBM-defined document

types. The meaning of these document types must be determined by defining the value of the

system code on the System code prompt (SYSCOD parameter).

Top

Send format (SNDFMT)

Allows the user to specify the format of the document being sent.

*NOCHG

The document is sent in the current format.

*NOTE

The document is sent in a final form text document content architecture (FFTDCA) data stream as

a note.

*FINALFORM

The document is sent in FFTDCA.

214 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 231: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

System code (SYSCOD)

Specifies the text used with the value specified on the Document type prompt (DOCTYPE parameter) to

help uniquely identify the type of document being used. The receiver of the data stream determines the

document data stream and processing requirements to edit, view, print, or change the document.

*DFT The system supplies a default system code. If the value specified on the Document type prompt

(DOCTYPE parameter) is a number ranging from 2 through 32,767, the default is ’IBM System i5

CL’ and is retrieved from message CPX9026. If the value specified on the Document type prompt

(DOCTYPE parameter) is in the range from 32,768 through 65,535, a system code must be

specified.

system-code

Specify the text that uniquely identifies the type of document being sent. A maximum of 13

characters can be specified.

Top

Document character identifier (DOCCHRID)

Specifies the character identifier (graphic character set and code page) for the document data being used.

The character identifier is related to the display device used to create the document data.

*SYSVAL

The system determines the graphic character set and code page values for the command

parameters from the QCHRID system value.

*DEVD

The system determines the graphic character set and code page values from the display device

description where this command was entered. This option is valid only when entered from an

interactive job. If this option is specified in a batch job, an error occurs.

graphic-character-set code-page

Specify the graphic character set and code page values used to create the data being distributed.

Note: Both parts can be up to 5 digits in length.

Top

Distribution identifier (DSTID)

Specifies the unique distribution identifier of the distribution. The distribution identifier is assigned by

the system when the distribution is originated. Distribution identifiers can be found by using the Query

Distribution (QRYDST) command. Identifiers are also returned from the Send Distribution (SNDDST)

command.

*NONE

No distribution identifier is used.

distribution-id

Specify the 3-part distribution identifier which is composed of the second part of the sender’s

user ID (padded on the right to 8 characters), the first part of the sender’s user ID (padded on the

right to 8 characters), and a 4-digit zoned sequence number with leading zeros. For example,

’NEWYORK SMITH 0204’. This parameter is required when *DSTID is specified on the

Information to be sent prompt (TYPE parameter).

Send Distribution (SNDDST) 215

Page 232: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Distribution ID extension (DSTIDEXN)

Specifies the extension of the distribution identifier (if any) specified on the Distribution identifier

prompt (DSTID parameter). This extension uniquely identifies duplicate distributions. This 2-digit

extension has a value ranging from 00 through 99 that uniquely identifies duplicate distributions. For

incoming distributions, this extension ranges from 01 through 99. For confirmation of delivery

distributions, this extension must be 00.

*NONE

There is no duplicate distribution. *NONE is equivalent to an extension of 01.

distribution-id-extension

Specify the extension associated with the distribution. This is used to uniquely identify duplicate

distributions.

Top

Document (DOC)

Specifies the name of the document being sent.

document-name

Specify the user-assigned name (10 characters maximum) of the document to be sent.

*DOCID

The document being sent is identified by the library-assigned document name.

Top

In folder (FLR)

Specifies the name of the folder that contains the document being sent. This is the user-assigned name

given to the folder when it is created. If document name is specified on the Document prompt (DOC

parameter), then *DOCID must not be specified.

*NONE

The document is not located in a folder.

folder-name

Specify the name of the folder that contains the document being sent. A folder name can consist

of a series of folder names if the document being sent is located in a folder contained within

another folder or folders.

Top

Document identifier (DOCID)

Specifies the library-assigned name of the document. This is the name assigned to the document by the

system when it was created. Documents filed outside the local system have only library-assigned

document names. The library-assigned document names can be determined by using the Query

Document Library (QRYDOCLIB) command or by the message returned from the File Document

(FILDOC) command.

Library-assigned document names are 24 characters in length with the following format:

216 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 233: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

YYYYMMDDHHMNSSHSSNSNSNSN

where:

YYYY = year

MM = month

DD = day

HH = hour

MN = minute

SS = second

HS = hundredths of a second

SNSNSNSN = system name

*NONE

No library-assigned document name is required when the document is identified on the

Document prompt (DOC parameter).

library-assigned-document-name

Specify the library-assigned name of the document being sent.

Top

Profile file (IDPFILE)

Specifies where the document profile information is located. If you specify this parameter, the remaining

parameters after the Profile member prompt (IDPMBR parameter) are ignored, except the Command

character identifier prompt (CMDCHRID parameter) and the Document character identifier prompt

(DOCCHRID parameter).

*NONE

The interchange document profile (IDP) is supplied by other parameters on this command. There

is no database file containing the IDP information. If *NONE is specified, the Profile member

prompt (IDPMBR parameter) is ignored.

*DSTIDIDP

The IDP information associated with the distribution document is used. The Profile member

prompt (IDPMBR parameter) is ignored. This is valid only when TYPE (*DSTID) is specified.

*DOCFILE

The database file specified for the document also contains the profile information. If *DOCFILE is

specified, the Document fileprompt (DOCFILE parameter) and Document member prompt

(DOCMBR parameter) are used for the document profile information.

data-base-file-name

Specify the name of the database file that contains the IDP. The document profile database file

can be a user-defined file or the output file specified on the Receive Distribution (RCVDST) or

Retrieve Document (RTVDOC) commands. If you specify a user-defined file, it must have the

same format as the output file produced by RCVDST or RTVDOC. If an output file is specified,

only the data portion of the document profile record is read from the output file. The prefix is

removed from the document profile record.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the database file. If no current library is specified

as the library for the job, QGPL is used.

Send Distribution (SNDDST) 217

Page 234: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

library-name

Specify the library where the database file is located.

Top

Profile member (IDPMBR)

Specifies the interchange document file member name being used. This parameter is used only when a

database file name is also specified on the Profile file prompt (IDPFILE parameter).

*FIRST

The first member created in the database file is used.

member-name

Specify the name of the database file member being used.

Top

Document description (DOCD)

Specifies a description for the document being distributed. This information is in the Document

Interchange Architecture IDP document name field.

*DFT The system generates a document description. For database files, the default format is

library-name/file-name/member-name. For a description of a hard copy document, the default is

the distribution description. For a description of a distribution document, the default is the

document description associated with the distribution.

*DSTD

The distribution description specified on the Description prompt (DSTD parameter) is used for

the document description.

document-description

Specify the description of the document. A maximum of 44 characters can be specified.

Top

Author (AUTHOR)

Specifies the author or authors of the document.

You can enter multiple values for this parameter.

*NONE

No author is identified for the document.

*USRID

The user ID and address specified on the USRID parameter User identifier prompt(USRID

parameter) is used as the author’s name.

document-author-name

Specify the name of the author or authors. A maximum of 50 authors can be specified.

Top

Document class (DOCCLS)

Specifies the class associated with this document, such as MEMO, FORM, or SHEET.

218 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 235: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*NONE

No class is assigned to the document.

document-class

Specify the document class. A maximum of 16 characters can be specified.

Top

Keyword (KWD)

Specifies the keywords that describe the document.

You can enter multiple values for this parameter.

*NONE

No keywords are defined for this document.

document-keyword

Specify the keywords to describe the document. A maximum of 50 keywords can be specified.

Each keyword can have a maximum of 60 characters.

Top

Subject (SUBJECT)

Specifies the subject or subjects of the document.

You can enter multiple values for this parameter.

*NONE

No subject is defined for the document.

*DOCD

The document description is used as the subject for the document.

document-subject

Specify the subject or subjects of the document. A maximum of 50 subjects can be specified and

each subject can have a maximum of 60 characters of text.

Top

Document date (DOCDATE)

Specifies any date the user needs to assign to the document.

*NONE

No date is assigned to the document.

*CURRENT

The system assigns the current system date to the document.

document-date

Specify the document date. The date must be specified in the job date format.

Top

Send Distribution (SNDDST) 219

Page 236: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

File cabinet location (FILCAB)

Specifies the location of the document. This parameter is intended to describe the location of printed

documents. The interchange document profile (IDP) that refers to the printed document is distributed.

This parameter is required if *IDP is also specified on the Information to be sent prompt (TYPE

parameter) and *NONE is specified on the Profile file prompt (IDPFILE parameter).

*NONE

No filing cabinet reference is defined for this document.

filing-cabinet-reference

Specify the text that describes where the printed document is located. A maximum of 60

characters can be specified.

Top

Copy list (CPYLST)

Specifies the names of the users that receive this document.

You can enter multiple values for this parameter.

*NONE

No copy list is included for this document.

recipient-list

Specify the names of the users that receive the document. A maximum of 50 names can be

specified. Each name can have a maximum of 60 characters.

Top

Expiration date (EXPDATE)

Specifies the date on which the document is no longer needed.

*NONE

No document expiration date is specified.

expiration-date

Specify the document expiration date. The date must be specified in the job date format.

Top

Creation date (CRTDATE)

Specifies the date the document was created.

*NONE

No document creation date is specified.

*CURRENT

The current system date is used as the date the document was created.

create-date

Specify the document creation date. The date must be specified in the job date format.

Top

220 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 237: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Reference (REFERENCE)

Specifies a reference associated with the document.

*NONE

No reference field is included for this document distribution.

reference

Specify text that describes the reference associated with the document. A maximum of 60

characters can be used.

Top

Action due date (ACTDATE)

Specifies the due date for the requested action. If no action due date is specified and a reply request date

is specified the action due date is set from the reply request date.

*NONE

No action due date is specified.

*CURRENT

The current date is used.

action-due-date

Specify the value used as the action due date. The date must be specified in the format specified

by the system value QDATFMT.

Top

Reply requested (RPYDATE)

Specifies the date and time a reply to the distribution is requested. This applies only to primary

recipients.

The possible Reply by date values are:

*NONE

No reply is required.

*CURRENT

The current date is used. The time defaults to *ENDOFDAY and is set to 23:59:59.

*ANY A reply is requested but no date and time are specified.

reply-by-date

Specify the value used as the reply requested date. The date must be specified in the format

specified by the system value QDATFMT.

The possible Reply by time values are:

*ENDOFDAY

A reply is requested by the end of the specified date. The time is set to 23:59:59.

reply-by-time

Specify the value used as the reply requested time.

The time is specified in 24-hour format and can be specified with or without a time separator.

Send Distribution (SNDDST) 221

Page 238: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Without a time separator, specify a string of 4 or 6 digits (hhmm or hhmmss) where hh=hours,

mm=minutes, and ss=seconds. Valid values for hh range from 00 to 23. Valid values for mm and

ss range from 00 to 59.

With a time separator, specify a string of 5 or 8 digits (hours and minutes, or hours, minutes, and

seconds). The time separator specified by the system value QTIMSEM is used to separate the

hours, minutes, and seconds. If the command is entered from the command line, the string must

be entered in apostrophes. If a time separator other than the separator used for your job is used,

the command fails. Valid values for hh range from 00 to 23. Valid values for mm and ss range

from 00 to 59.

Top

Document status (STATUS)

Specifies the user-defined status of the document. Examples of status are: In Process, Pending Approval,

or Retired.

*NONE

No status is included in this document.

status-of-document

Specify text that describes the status of the document. A maximum of 20 characters can be

specified.

Top

Completion date (CMPDATE)

Specifies the date when the requested action is completed.

*NONE

No completion date is included.

*CURRENT

The current system date is used as the completion date.

date-complete

Specify the action completion date. The date must be specified in the job date format.

Top

Project (PROJECT)

Specifies the project associated with the document.

*NONE

No project field information is included in this document.

project

Specify text that describes the project of the document. A maximum of 10 characters can be

specified.

Top

Language ID (DOCLANGID)

Specifies the language identifier to be placed in this document’s interchange document profile (IDP).

222 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 239: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Note: This parameter is ignored if the Profile file prompt (IDPFILE parameter) is specified, or if *MSG or

*DOC is specified on the Information to be sent prompt (TYPE parameter).

*JOB The language identifier specified for the job in which this command is entered is used.

language-identifier

Specify a language identifier. Press the F4 key from the Language ID prompt (DOCLANGID

parameter) to see a list of valid identifiers.

Top

Country or region ID (DOCCNTRYID)

Specifies the country or region identifier to be placed in this document’s interchange document profile

(IDP).

Note: This parameter is ignored if the Profile file prompt (IDPFILE parameter) is specified, or if *MSG or

*DOC is specified on the Information to be sent prompt (TYPE parameter).

*JOB The country or region identifier specified for the job in which this command is entered is used.

country-or-region-identifier

Specify a country or region identifier. Press the F4 key from the Country or region ID prompt

(DOCCNTRYID parameter) to see a list of valid identifiers.

Top

Allow alternate recipient (ALWALTRCP)

Specify if the distribution can be delivered to an alternate recipient, determined by the receiving system.

This function is used only by X.400 network systems. This function provides the ability to direct certain

mail to a specific user.

The default of this field is *YES. Because the user might change the sensitivity field to private but might

not change the alternate recipient field to no, The user might send a private item to an alternate recipient.

No error message is generated for this condition.

*YES Specifies the distribution can be delivered to an alternate recipient.

*NO Specifies the distribution cannot be delivered to an alternate recipient.

Top

Disclose recipient (DISCLOSE)

Specifies whether or not each recipient gets a list of the other recipients.

*YES Disclose recipients.

*NO Do not disclose recipients.

Top

Send Distribution (SNDDST) 223

Page 240: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Allow X.400 conversion (ALWX400CNV)

Specifies whether an X.400 conversion is allowed on the distribution being submitted. In certain

circumstances, the end user knows the capabilities of the recipient and may indicate that the distribution

is not to be converted. The system administrator can define whether or not conversion is to take place.

This field allows the user to override that setting on a message by message basis. For example, if the

gateway allows conversion, the user could specify that conversion is to be prohibited. This will take

precedence over the gateway setting. The distribution would then not be converted.

Note: This field is valid only for X.400 support. This field will not affect System i5 data stream

transformations, such as RFT to FFTDCA.

*YES Conversion may be performed on the distribution by the receiving system.

*NO No conversion is permitted on the distribution by the receiving system.

Top

Authorizing user (AUTUSR)

Specifies the user ID and address of the user that authorized the content of this distribution. The

authorizing user will receive a copy of the distribution.

*NONE

No authorizing user.

The possible User ID value is:

user-ID

Specify the user ID of the user from whom the distribution is authorized.

The possible User Address value is:

user-address

Specify the user address of the user from whom the distribution is authorized.

Top

Distribution expiry indicator (DSTEXPDATE)

Specifies the date and time on which the distribution is no longer needed in the mail log.

The possible Distribution Expiration Date values are:

*NONE

The distribution has no expiration date.

dist-expiration-date

Specify the value to use as the expiration date for the distribution. The date must be in the

format specified by the system value QDATFMT.

The possible Distribution Expiration Time values are:

*ENDOFDAY

An expiration time is requested by the end of the specified date. The time is set to 23:59:59.

dist-expiration-time

Specify the value as the expiration time.

The time is specified in a 24-hour format and can be specified with or without a time separator.

224 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 241: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Without a time separator, specify a string of 4 or 6 digits (hhmm or hhmmss) where hh=hours,

mm=minutes, and ss=seconds. Valid values for hh range from 00 to 23. Valid values for mm and

ss range from 00 to 59.

With a time separator, specify a string of 5 or 8 digits (hours and minutes, or hours, minutes, and

seconds). The time separator specified by the system value QTIMSEM is used to separate the

hours, minutes, and seconds. If the command is entered from the command line, the string must

be enclosed in apostrophes. If a time separator other than the separator used for your job is used,

the command fails. Valid values for hh range from 00 to 23. Valid values for mm and ss range

from 00 to 59.

Top

Command character identifier (CMDCHRID)

Specifies the character identifier (graphic character set and code page) for the data being entered as

command parameter values. The character identifier is related to the display device used to enter the

command.

In some cases, the data is translated to a code page and character set that is interchangeable with other

IBM OfficeVision/400 products. The interchangeable character set and code page is ’697 500’, except for

the User identifier prompt (USRID parameter), Recipient prompt (TOUSRID parameter), and

Distribution identifier prompt (DSTID parameter), for which it is ’930 500’. In other cases, the code page

and character set are attached to the field and sent with the field to allow the receiving terminal to

correctly print and display the field.

The following parameters are translated:

v Recipient (TOUSRID)

v Internet Recipient (TOINTNET)

v User identifier (USRID)

v Distribution identifier (DSTID)

v Document system code (SYSCOD)

v Message (MSG)

v Description (DSTD)

The code page and character set is attached to the following parameters:

v Long Message (LONGMSG)

v Document description (DOCD)

v Author (AUTHOR)

v Document class (DOCCLS)

v Keyword (KWD)

v Subject (SUBJECT)

v File cabinet location (FILCAB)

v Copy list (CPYLST)

v Reference (REFERENCE)

v Document status (STATUS)

v Project (PROJECT)

Single values

Send Distribution (SNDDST) 225

Page 242: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*SYSVAL

The system determines the graphic character set and code page values for the command

parameters from the QCHRID system value.

*DEVD

The system determines the graphic character set and code page values from the display device

description where this command was entered. This option is valid only when entered from an

interactive job. If this option is specified in a batch job, an error occurs.

Element 1: Graphic character set

1-32767

Specify the graphic character set to use.

Element 2: Code page

1-32767

Specify the code page to use.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Sending a Distribution on Behalf of Another User

SNDDST TYPE(*FILE) TOUSRID((JACKSON RCH38DB))

DOCTYPE(20000) SYSCOD(BRANDX)

DOCFILE(DEPT46ELIB/XTEXT) DOCMBR(GOLD1IPFS)

PTY(*HIGH) USRID(JACOBSON RCH38NBS)

DSTD(’IPFS FOR GOLD1 PROJECT’) CFMDEL(*YES)

MSG(’Update section 1.2.4. Return for final printing’)

This command sends a distribution that is being sent by someone (such as a secretary) who is authorized

to work on behalf of JACOBSON. The document being sent is a BRANDX text document that is sent to

another user who also has the BRANDX text processor.

Example 2: Sending a Mail Log Entry

SNDDST TYPE(*DSTID) DSTID(’NEWYORK SMITH 0204’)

DSTIDEXN(02) TOUSRID((JACKSON RCH38DB))

MSG(*DSTIDMSG) CFMDEL(*YES)

This command sends a mail log entry that is identified by the distribution document name NEWYORK

SMITH 0204 that is distributed to user JACKSON at address RCH38DB. The message in the distribution

document is distributed with the distribution.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF8A87

Document name &2 not correct.

226 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 243: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF8A97

Folder name &1 not correct.

CPF89AA

*FINALFORM for send format (SNDFMT) valid only for *DOC for type (TYPE).

CPF89AB

Specify *IDP or *MSG for type (TYPE) only with *NOCHG for send format (SNDFMT).

CPF900B

User ID and address &1 &2 not in System Distribution Directory.

CPF900C

Sign on and verify of user failed.

CPF901A

Send distribution request failed.

CPF903D

Incorrect document identifier specified.

CPF905C

Error occurred trying to find a translation table.

CPF9096

Cannot use CMDCHRID(*DEVD), DOCCHRID(*DEVD) in batch job.

CPF9845

Error occurred while opening file &1.

CPF9846

Error while processing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9847

Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.

Top

Send Distribution (SNDDST) 227

Page 244: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

228 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 245: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send Distribution Queue (SNDDSTQ)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send Distribution Queue (SNDDSTQ) command is used:

v To send a distribution queue’s entries when the distribution queue is configured to be manually started

but no operator is available.

v To override any distribution queue scheduling attributes and begin sending a queue’s entries

immediately.

v To restart a SNADS sender job that failed abnormally.

The SNDDSTQ command is primarily intended for use in a batch CL program. The SNDDSTQ command

enables the same functions as option 2 (Send distribution queue) on the Work with Distribution Queue

(WRKDSTQ) command main list panel. The SNDDSTQ command allows the functions to be started from

a batch job instead of interactively.

Distribution queue names are translated to the graphic character set and code page 930 500, using the

job’s coded character set identifier (CCSID).

Restrictions:

v This command is shipped with public *EXCLUDE authority, and the QPGMR and QSYSOPR user

profiles have private authorities to use the command.v Messages that report errors about distribution queues may display or print different characters than

you entered for the distribution queue name because of internal system transformations. Similarly

(depending on the language used for the work station), the internal value for a distribution queue

name may differ from the characters shown for the Work with Distribution Queue (WRKDSTQ)

command. An error may be reported if the character-string value specified for the Distribution queue

prompt (DSTQ parameter) does not match the rules for an internal distribution queue value or if it

does not match the internal value for any defined distribution queue (ignoring case differences).

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DSTQ Distribution queue Character value Required,

Positional 1

PTY Priority *NORMAL, *HIGH Required,

Positional 2

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 229

Page 246: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Distribution queue (DSTQ)

Specifies the name of the distribution queue that is sent. The queue must have been previously

configured using the Configure Distribution Services (CFGDSTSRV) command or the Add Distribution

Queue (ADDDSTQ) command.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Priority (PTY)

Specifies whether the normal priority or high priority portion of the specified queue is sent.

The possible values are:

*NORMAL

The normal priority queue is for those distributions with a service level of data low.

*HIGH

The high priority queue is for those distributions with a service level of fast, status, or data high.

Note: This value is not valid for a SystemView distribution services (SVDS) type of distribution

queue.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Sending Distributions with Normal Priority

SNDDSTQ DSTQ(CHICAGO) PTY(*NORMAL)

This command sends distributions from the normal priority portion of the CHICAGO distribution queue.

Example 2: Sending Distributions with High Priority

SNDDSTQ DSTQ(ATLANTA) PTY(*HIGH)

This command sends distributions from the high priority portion of the ATLANTA distribution queue.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF8802

Distribution queue &1 was not found.

CPF8805

Special value for System name/Group not permitted or not used correctly.

230 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 247: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF8806

Value &1 not valid for system name or system group.

CPF881C

High priority queue not allowed for *SVDS distribution queue &1

CPF8812

Error occurred while processing distribution queues.

CPF8816

QSNADS communications subsystem is not active.

CPF8817

Distribution queue is held.

CPF9845

Error occurred while opening file &1.

CPF9846

Error while processing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9847

Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.

Top

Send Distribution Queue (SNDDSTQ) 231

Page 248: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

232 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 249: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send File (SNDF)

Where allowed to run:

v Batch program (*BPGM)

v Interactive program (*IPGM)

Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send File (SNDF) command is used by a CL program or ILE CL procedure to send a record to a

display device that is being used by an interactive user. The device can be any display station, including

the console. The command sends the data from the program’s CL variables to the display’s device file in

the specified record format. These variables were automatically declared in the program (one for each

field in the record format) when the CL source program was compiled and a Declare File (DCLF)

command was processed as part of the source.

Of the record formats specified in the DCLF command, only one can be specified in each SNDF

command. If the device file has not been opened, it is opened by this command. The file and record

format specified in this command can be overridden by an Override with Display File (OVRDSPF)

command if it is entered before the file is opened. However, care should be taken that the fields in the

overriding record format correspond to the CL variables declared in the program.

Restrictions:

v This command is valid only within a CL program or ILE CL procedure.

v This command is valid only for display files.

v This command cannot be used with database files.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DEV Display device Name, *FILE Optional,

Positional 1

RCDFMT Record format Name, *FILE Optional,

Positional 2

OPNID Open file identifier Simple name, *NONE Optional

Top

Display device (DEV)

Specifies the name of the display device to which the data in the CL variables for the specified record

format is to be sent.

*FILE The program’s data is to be sent to the device associated with the device file that was declared in

the FILE parameter of the DCLF command. If more than one device name is specified in the

device file, *FILE cannot be specified.

name Specify the name of the device or the name of the CL variable that contains the name of the

device to which the program’s data is to be sent.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 233

Page 250: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Record format (RCDFMT)

Specifies the name of the record format that is to be used to send data to the file. The format contains all

the fields in the record. This parameter must be coded with a record format name if there is more than

one record format name in the device file; *FILE cannot be coded if there is more than one. If the record

format contains the INVITE DDS keyword (optioned on), the SNDF functions as if SNDRCVF

WAIT(*NO) had been coded.

*FILE There is only one record format in the device file; that is the format in which the program’s data

is to be sent to the file.

name Specify the name of the record format in which the program’s data is to be sent to the file. A CL

variable cannot be used to specify the record format name.

Top

Open file identifier (OPNID)

Specifies the open file identifier that was declared on a preceding Declare File (DCLF) command in the

same CL program or ILE CL procedure. A CL variable cannot be specified for this parameter value.

*NONE

No open file identifier is provided. This command will use the file associated with the DCLF

command that had *NONE specified for the OPNID parameter. Only one file can be declared in a

CL program or ILE CL procedure with *NONE as the open file identifier.

simple-name

Specify a name that matches the OPNID parameter value on a preceding DCLF command in the

same CL program or ILE CL procedure.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Using Display File with One Record Format

DCLF FILE(MENU1)

:

SNDF

The record format in the device file MENU1 is sent to the device specified in the file. There is only one

record format in the file.

Example 2: Using Display File with Multiple Record Formats

DCLF FILE(SCREEN1) RCDFMT(REC1 REC2)

:

SNDF DEV(DISP3) RCDFMT(REC1)

The device file named SCREEN1 causes the display station named DISP3 to display the data sent by the

CL program or ILE CL procedure. The data is shown in the format specified by the REC1 record format.

234 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 251: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Example 3: Using Open File Identifier

DCLF FILE(SCREEN1) RCDFMT(REC1 REC2) OPNID(OUTDSP1)

DCLF FILE(SCREEN2) RCDFMT(REC3 REC4) OPNID(OUTDSP2)

:

SNDF DEV(*FILE) RCDFMT(REC2) OPNID(OUTDSP1)

The device file named SCREEN1 is used to send data to the display device named in the same device

file. The data is presented to the user in the format specified by record format REC2. The SNDF

command is associated with device file SCREEN1 because the open file identifier specified on the SNDF

command matches the open file identifier specified on the DCLF command for display file SCREEN1.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF0859

File override caused I/O buffer size to be exceeded.

CPF0861

File &1 in library &2 is not a display file.

CPF0864

End of file detected for file &1 in &2.

CPF0883

*FILE not valid in DEV parameter for file &1.

CPF0887

Data available from previous input request.

CPF4101

File &2 in library &3 not found or inline data file missing.

CPF5068

Program device &4 not found in file &2 in library &3.

CPF5070

File &2 in library &3 has no program devices acquired.

Top

Send File (SNDF) 235

Page 252: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

236 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 253: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send Journal Entry (SNDJRNE)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Yes

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send Journal Entry (SNDJRNE) command is used to write a single journal entry to a specific journal.

The entry can contain any information. The user may assign an entry type to the journal entry and may

also associate the journal entry with a specified journaled object.

If the journal currently has a state of *STANDBY, then the journal entry will not be deposited unless

OVRSTATE(*STANDBY) is specified.

The journal code for the entry is U, which indicates a user-specified journal entry.

Note: The Send Journal Entry (QJOSJRNE) Application Programming Interface (API) can also be used to

write a user-specified journal entry to a specific journal. Using this API may improve performance and

can provide additional function that is not available with this command. For more information, see the

APIs topic collection in the Programming category in the i5/OS Information Center at

http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Restrictions:

v If an object other than a file is specified, it must be currently journaled to the specified journal.

If a file object is specified, it must either be currently journaled to the specified journal or it must have

been last journaled to the specified journal.

v The specified journal cannot be a remote journal.

v The specified journal cannot have a journal state of *INACTIVE.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

JRN Journal Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: Journal Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

TYPE Journal entry type Character value, 00 Optional,

Positional 2

ENTDTA Entry data Character value, *BLANK Optional,

Positional 3

FILE Journaled physical file Single values: *NONEOther values: Element list

Optional

Element 1: Physical file Qualified object name

Qualifier 1: Physical file Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Element 2: Member Name, *FIRST, *NONE

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 237

Page 254: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

OBJ Object Single values: *NONEOther values: Element list

Optional

Element 1: Object Qualified object name

Qualifier 1: Object Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Element 2: Object type *FILE, *DTAARA, *DTAQ, *LIB

Element 3: Member Name, *FIRST, *NONE

OBJPATH Object Path name, *NONE Optional

OBJFID File identifier Hexadecimal value, *NONE Optional

FORCE Force journal entry *NO, *YES Optional

OVRSTATE Override journal state *NONE, *STANDBY Optional

Top

Journal (JRN)

Specifies the journal to contain the new journal entry.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Journal

journal-name

Specify the name of the journal to contain the new journal entry.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Journal entry type (TYPE)

Specifies the journal entry type of this journal entry.

00 The journal entry type is a ’00’ (hex F0F0).

entry-type

Specify a 2-character value or hex value used for the journal entry type. This value must be

greater than or equal to hex C000.

If a hexadecimal value is specified that does not represent characters, that value is not shown on

the DSPJRN display or on the printout.

Top

238 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 255: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Entry data (ENTDTA)

Specifies the user-specified data that is placed in the variable portion of the journal entry.

*BLANK

No user-specified data is placed in the journal entry.

’entry specific-data’

Specify up to 3000 characters, enclosed in apostrophes.

Top

Journaled physical file (FILE)

Specifies the database physical file and member with which this entry is associated.

If this parameter is specified, the parameters OBJ, OBJPATH or OBJFID cannot also be specified.

Single values

*NONE

There is no associated physical file for this entry.

Element 1: Physical file

Qualifier 1: Physical file

file-name

Specify the name of the physical file with which this entry is associated.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Element 2: Member

*FIRST

The entry is associated with the first member in the file.

*NONE

The entry is associated with the file, not with any member of the file.

member-name

Specify the name of the physical file member with which this entry is associated.

Top

Send Journal Entry (SNDJRNE) 239

Page 256: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Object (OBJ)

Specifies the object with which this entry is associated.

If this parameter is specified, the parameters FILE, OBJPATH or OBJFID cannot also be specified.

Single values

*NONE

There is no associated object for this entry.

Element 1: Object

Qualifier 1: Object

object-name

Specify the name of the object with which this entry is associated.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Element 2: Object type

*FILE The entry is associated with a database file or database file member.

*DTAARA

The entry is associated with a data area.

*DTAQ

The entry is associated with a data queue.

*LIB The entry is associated with a library.

Element 3: Member

*FIRST

The entry is associated with the first member in the file.

*NONE

The entry is associated with the file, not with any member of the file.

member-name

Specify the name of the physical file member with which this entry is associated.

Note: If the specified object type is not *FILE, the member name value is ignored.

Top

Object (OBJPATH)

Specifies the path-qualified object name with which this entry is associated. Only objects whose path

name identifies an object of type *STMF, *DIR or *SYMLNK that is in the ″root″ (/), QOpenSys, and

user-defined file systems are supported.

240 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 257: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Note: This parameter is Unicode-enabled. See ″Unicode support in CL″ in the CL topic collection in the

Programming category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/

for additional information.

If this parameter is specified, the parameters FILE, OBJ or OBJFID cannot also be specified.

*NONE

There is no associated object for this entry.

path-name

Specify the name of the object with which this entry is associated.

Top

File identifier (OBJFID)

Specifies the file-identifier (FID) with which this entry is associated. FIDs are a unique identifier

associated with integrated file system related objects. This field is input in Hexadecimal format. Only

objects whose FID identifies an object of type *STMF, *DIR or *SYMLNK that is in the ″root″ (/),

QOpenSys, and user-defined file systems are supported.

If this parameter is specified, the parameters FILE, OBJ or OBJPATH cannot also be specified.

*NONE

There is no associated object for this entry.

file-identifier

Specify the FID for the object with which this entry is associated.

Top

Force journal entry (FORCE)

Specifies whether the journal receiver is forced to auxiliary storage after the user entry is written to it.

*NO The journal receiver is not forced to auxiliary storage.

*YES The journal receiver is forced to auxiliary storage.

Top

Override journal state (OVRSTATE)

Specifies whether the journal entry will be deposited, overriding the current state of the journal.

*NONE

None of the journal state values are overridden. That is,

v The journal entry is deposited if the journal state is *ACTIVE.

v The journal entry is not deposited and an error is not sent if the journal state is *STANDBY.

*STANDBY

The journal entry is deposited even if the journal state is *STANDBY.

Top

Send Journal Entry (SNDJRNE) 241

Page 258: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Examples

Example 1: Forcing Journal Receivers to Auxiliary Storage

SNDJRNE JRN(JRNLA) TYPE(AB) ENTDTA(’PROGRAM COMPLETE’)

FILE(MYLIB/ORDERENT MBR1) FORCE(*YES)

If the journal currently has a journal state of *ACTIVE, this command places a journal entry of type AB

(hex C1C2) with the journal entry data ’PROGRAM COMPLETE’ in the current journal receivers attached

to journal JRNLA as found by using the library search list. The entry is associated with member MBR1 of

file ORDERENT in library MYLIB. The journal receiver is forced to auxiliary storage after the entry has

been placed in it.

Example 2: Sending a Journal Entry

SNDJRNE JRN(JRNLA) TYPE(x’C1F1’) OVRSTATE(*STANDBY)

If the journal currently has a journal state of *STANDBY or *ACTIVE, this command places a journal

entry of type ’A1’ (hex C1F1) with no journal entry data in the current journal receiver attached to

journal JRNLA as found by using the library search list. The entry is not associated with any physical file

member.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPFA0D4

File system error occurred. Error number &1.

CPF7002

File &1 in library &2 not a physical file.

CPF7003

Entry not journaled to journal &1. Reason code &3.

CPF7007

Cannot allocate member &3 file &1 in &2.

CPF7037

Object not journaled to journal &3.

CPF9801

Object &2 in library &3 not found.

CPF9802

Not authorized to object &2 in &3.

CPF9803

Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.

CPF9809

Library &1 cannot be accessed.

CPF9810

Library &1 not found.

242 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 259: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF9812

File &1 in library &2 not found.

CPF9815

Member &5 file &2 in library &3 not found.

CPF9820

Not authorized to use library &1.

CPF9822

Not authorized to file &1 in library &2.

Top

Send Journal Entry (SNDJRNE) 243

Page 260: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

244 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 261: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send Message (SNDMSG)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Yes

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send Message (SNDMSG) command is used by a display station user to send an immediate message

from his display station to one or more message queues. (An immediate message is a message that is not

predefined and is not stored in a message file.) The message can be sent to the system operator, to other

display station users, to a user’s message queue, all currently active users’ message queues or to the

system history log, QHST. The sender can require a reply from the message receiver. The primary users

of this command are display station users and the system operator.

Restrictions:

1. You must have object operational (*OBJOPR) and add (*ADD) authorities for the message queue.

2. You must have use (*USE) authority for the specified message queues and *USE authority for the

libraries in which they are located.

3. The SNDMSG command only allows a message of up to 512 characters of first-level message text to

be sent.

4. This command can only send inquiry messages (specified by MSGTYPE(*INQ)) to one message queue

or to two message queues if one of the queues is *HSTLOG.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

MSG Message text Character value Required,

Positional 1

TOUSR To user profile Name, *SYSOPR, *ALLACT, *REQUESTER Optional,

Positional 3

TOMSGQ To message queue Single values: *SYSOPROther values (up to 50 repetitions): Qualified object name

Optional,

Positional 2

Qualifier 1: To message

queue

Name, *HSTLOG

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

MSGTYPE Message type *INFO, *INQ Optional,

Positional 4

RPYMSGQ Message queue to get reply Single values: *WRKSTNOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Message queue

to get reply

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

CCSID Coded character set ID 1-65535, *HEX, *JOB Optional

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 245

Page 262: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Message text (MSG)

Specifies the immediate message that is being sent. The text must be enclosed in apostrophes if it

contains blanks or other special characters. A maximum of 512 characters can be specified.

Coded Character Set Identifier (CCSID) Considerations

The text supplied for the MSG parameter is assumed to be in the CCSID of the job running this

command unless the coded character set identifier is supplied for the CCSID parameter. For more

information about the message handler and its use of CCSIDs, see the i5/OS globalization topic collection

in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

This is a required parameter.

Top

To user profile (TOUSR)

Specifies that the message is to be sent to the message queue specified in the user profile for the user

named on this parameter. This parameter cannot be used if a value is specified for the To message

queue(TOMSGQ) parameter.

Either this parameter or the To message queue (TOMSGQ) parameter is required.

user-profile-name

Specify the user profile name of the user to whom the message is sent.

*SYSOPR

The message is sent to the system operator message queue, QSYS/QSYSOPR. Any message sent

to QSYSOPR automatically has a copy of the message sent to QHST.

*REQUESTER

The message is sent to the user profile message queue for interactive jobs or to the system

operator’s message queue (QSYS/QSYSOPR) for batch jobs.

*ALLACT

A copy of the message is sent to the user profile message queue of each user profile with an

interactive job currently running. *ALLACT cannot be specified with inquiry messages.

Top

To message queue (TOMSGQ)

Specifies one to fifty message queues to which an informational message is sent. For an inquiry message,

one message queue may be specified or two message queues may be specified if one of the queues is

*HSTLOG. This parameter cannot be used if a value is specified for the To user profile (TOUSR)

parameter.

Either this parameter or the To user profile (TOUSR) parameter is required.

Single values

*SYSOPR

The message is sent to the system operator message queue, QSYS/QSYSOPR. Any message sent

to QSYSOPR automatically has a copy of the message sent to QHST.

Qualifier 1: To message queue

246 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 263: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*HSTLOG

The message is sent to the system history log message queue, QSYS/QHST. If *HSTLOG is

specified more than once, only one message will be sent to QSYS/QHST. If *HSTLOG is specified

with QSYSOPR only one message is sent to QSYS/QHST.

message-queue-name

Specify the name of the message queue to which the message is to be sent.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the message queue. If no current library entry

exists in the library list, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the library where the message queue is located.

Top

Message type (MSGTYPE)

Specifies the type of message to be sent. Only an informational or inquiry message can be specified.

*INFO

An informational message is to sent.

*INQ An inquiry message is to be sent. The message queue receiving the message can reply to it.

Inquiry messages are sent to only one message queue at a time or a second queue can be

specified for TOMSGQ if the value is *HSTLOG.

Top

Message queue to get reply (RPYMSGQ)

Specifies, only if an inquiry message is sent, the message queue to which a reply is sent.

Single values

*WRKSTN

The reply to the message is sent to the display station message queue associated with the

sender’s display station.

Note: This value cannot be specified for batch jobs.

Qualifier 1: Message queue to get reply

message-queue-name

Specify the name of the message queue to which a reply is sent. Only a user message queue, a

display station message queue, or the system operator message queue can be specified.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the message queue. If no current library entry

exists in the library list, QGPL is used.

Send Message (SNDMSG) 247

Page 264: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

library-name

Specify the library where the message queue is located.

Top

Coded character set ID (CCSID)

Specifies the coded character set identifier (CCSID) that the supplied message text is in. For more

information about the message handler and its use of CCSIDs, see the i5/OS globalization topic collection

in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

*JOB The message text is assumed to be in the CCSID of the job running this command.

*HEX The message text is not converted. CCSID 65535 is used.

coded-character-set-identifier

Specify a valid CCSID in which you want your message text to be considered in. Valid values are

between 1 and 65535. This command validates the CCSID.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Sending Message to User Message Queue

SNDMSG MSG(’Do you want to update INV now?’) TOUSR(JONES)

MSGTYPE(*INQ) RPYMSGQ(SMITH)

This command sends a message to the user message queue JONES. When the message is answered, the

reply will be sent to the message queue SMITH.

Example 2: Sending Message to System’s History Log

SNDMSG MSG(’Errors on PAYROLL cost me 1 hour of run time.’)

TOMSGQ(QHST)

This command is used by the system operator to send an informational message to the system’s history

log, QHST, through the log’s message queue, which has the same name.

Example 3: Sending Message to System Operator

SNDMSG MSG(’Please make 2 copies of file LABORSTAT.’)

TOMSGQ(QSYSOPR)

This command shows a typical use of the SNDMSG command by a display station user. The user is

sending the message to the system operator.

Example 4: Sending Message that Requires a Reply

SNDMSG MSG (’How long will the system be up today?’)

TOMSGQ(*SYSOPR) MSGTYPE(*INQ)

248 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 265: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This command sends an inquiry message to the system operator. The message requires a reply. The

system operator displays the message by using the DSPMSG command and enters the reply on the

display. The reply is then sent to the display station user’s work station message queue. The display

station user enters another DSPMSG command to display the reply.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2428

Message queue parameter is not valid.

CPF2433

Function not allowed for system log message queue &1.

CPF2469

Error occurred when sending message&1.

CPF247E

CCSID &1 is not valid.

CPF2488

Reply message queue *WRKSTN not valid for batch job.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

CPF9838

User profile storage limit exceeded.

Top

Send Message (SNDMSG) 249

Page 266: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

250 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 267: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send Network File (SNDNETF)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send Network File (SNDNETF) command sends a save file or a member of a physical database file

to another user on the local system or on a remote system through the SNADS network. This command

can be used to:

v Send data files to a user.

v Send source files to a user. Source sequence information is kept in the file sent.

v Send other object types stored in a save file to a user.

When the file arrives at its destination, a notification message is sent to both the recipient and sender of

the file.

When a source physical file is sent, the source sequence number and change date in positions 1 through

12 of the record are sent with the file. These are kept if the file is received into a source physical file, and

are truncated if the file is received into a nonsource physical file. When a file that was originally a

nonsource physical file is received into a source physical file, the source sequence numbers are created

and placed in front of the records.

Note: Save files created on the System i5 cannot be distributed to System/38. However, save files created

on System/38 can be distributed to the System i5.

This command does not perform any CCSID translation on the contents of the file. However, the user ID

and address of both the recipient and the originator are translated from the current job CCSID to the

multinational character set 697/500.

Restrictions:

1. The user must be enrolled in the system distribution directory.

2. The maximum size of a file that can be sent using the SNDNETF command is approximately 2 billion

bytes.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

FILE File Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: File Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

TOUSRID User ID Values (up to 50 repetitions): Element list Required,

Positional 2 Element 1: User ID Character value

Element 2: Address Character value

MBR Member Name, *FIRST Optional,

Positional 3

TOTYPE To file type *FROMFILE, *DATA Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 251

Page 268: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

CLASS VM/MVS class A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U,

V, W, X, Y, Z, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

Optional

FORMAT Send format *V, *F, *U Optional

PTY Send priority *NORMAL, *HIGH Optional

Top

File (FILE)

Specifies the name and library of the file that is sent. The file being sent can be a physical file or a save

file; logical files and device files are not allowed. Overrides to the specified file are ignored.

This is a required parameter.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current

library for the job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the library where the file is located.

Top

User ID (TOUSRID)

Specifies the two-part user ID of one or more users to whom the file is being sent, or the name of one or

more distribution lists containing the user IDs of one or more users to whom the file is being sent. A

combination of user IDs and distribution lists can be specified on the same command. Each user ID or

distribution list is specified as a two-part name, and both parts are required.

This is a required parameter.

You can enter multiple values for this parameter.

Top

Member (MBR)

Specifies the member that is sent from the file. A member name is not allowed if the file is a save file.

*FIRST

The first member (in order of creation) in the file is sent.

member-name

Specify the name of the file member that is sent.

Top

252 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 269: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

To file type (TOTYPE)

Specifies, when you send a source file, whether the sequence numbers and date fields are to be removed

from the transmitted copy of the file. The source file is not changed. This parameter is not valid for

non-source files.

The possible values are:

*FROMFILE

The file type of the source file is used when sending the file. The transmitted file does not

change.

*DATA

The file is sent as a non-source file. The transmitted copy is sent without sequence numbers and

date fields.

Top

VM/MVS class (CLASS)

Specifies the VM/MVS SYSOUT class for distributions sent to a VM host system or to an MVS host

system.

The possible values are:

A The class is A.

B-Z, 0-9

Specify the distribution class. Valid values range from B through Z and 0 through 9.

Top

Send format (FORMAT)

Specifies the record format in which the network file is transmitted.

The possible values are:

*V The file is sent using variable-length records with trailing blanks removed from each record.

*F The file is sent as fixed-length records with no trailing blanks removed from the records.

Specifying this value affects only network files sent to a System/370. This value is not

recommended for sending files to another System i5.

*U If the file contains null capable fields, specifying this value causes SNDNETF to allow sending of

the file and to send the mapping information which indicates which fields are null capable. This

value for FORMAT will only produce the desired results when the file is sent to another AS/400

with OS/400 release VRM420 and later installed.

Note: Specifying FORMAT(*F) may increase the amount of storage and time required when

transmitting the network file. Specifying FORMAT(*U) also requires that the receiving system

must have a database file created with the identical field mappings as the file being sent, in order

to receive the file correctly.

Top

Send Network File (SNDNETF) 253

Page 270: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send priority (PTY)

Specifies the queuing priority used for this file when it is being routed through a SNADS network.

The possible values are:

*NORMAL

The file is sent with a service level priority of data low, which is used for most data traffic. On a

System i5, data low distributions are placed on the normal distribution queue specified for the

route.

*HIGH

The file is sent with a service level priority of data high, which is used for high priority data

traffic. On a System i5, data high distributions are placed on the data high distribution queue

specified for the route.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Sending a Member

SNDNETF TOUSRID((JONES SYSTEM1)) FILE(EMPLOYEE) MBR(PGMR)

This command sends member PGMR of file EMPLOYEE to the user identified to the network with a user

ID of (JONES SYSTEM1). The library list is used to locate the file.

Example 2: Sending a Nonsource File

SNDNETF TOUSRID((JONES SYSTEM2)) FILE(EMPLOYEE) MBR(PGMR)

TOTYPE(*DATA)

This command sends member PGMR of file EMPLOYEE to the user identified to the network with a user

ID of (JONES SYSTEM2). The library list is used to locate the file. The file is being sent as a nonsource

file removing the sequence numbers and date fields.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF8057

File &1 in &2 not a physical file or save file.

CPF8058

File &1 is a spooled file.

CPF8059

Member name not allowed for save file.

CPF8063

Cannot assign necessary resource.

CPF8064

File &1 in &2 member &3 not sent to any users.

254 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 271: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF8066

One or more user identifiers on this command is not correct.

CPF8068

Error detected while processing file to be sent.

CPF8072

Object to be sent is greater than maximum size of 2GB.

CPF9005

System resource required to complete this request not available.

CPF9006

User not enrolled in system distribution directory.

CPF9803

Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.

CPF9807

One or more libraries in library list deleted.

CPF9808

Cannot allocate one or more libraries on library list.

CPF9810

Library &1 not found.

CPF9812

File &1 in library &2 not found.

CPF9820

Not authorized to use library &1.

CPF9822

Not authorized to file &1 in library &2.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

CPF9845

Error occurred while opening file &1.

CPF9846

Error while processing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9847

Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9848

Cannot open file &1 in library &2 member &3.

CPF9849

Error while processing file &1 in library &2 member &3.

Top

Send Network File (SNDNETF) 255

Page 272: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

256 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 273: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send Network Message (SNDNETMSG)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send Network Message (SNDNETMSG) command sends a message to another user on the local or a

remote system through the SNADS network.

This message is sent as an informational message to the message queue that is defined for the recipient

on the receiving system.

Note: The recipient must have a valid message queue specified in his user profile. Messages sent with the

SNDNETMSG command are rejected if the recipient does not have a message queue specified in the user

profile. The message queue specified in the network attributes is not used. Additional information on

specifying a message queue when sending and receiving messages is in the CL topic collection in the

Programming category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

This command does not perform the CCSID translation of the messsage. However, it sends the job CCSID

to the receiving system.The message is translated upon receipt if needed. The user ID and address of

both the recipient and the originator are translated from the current job CCSID to the multinational

character set 697/500.

Restriction: The user must be enrolled in the system distribution directory. A description of the system

distribution directory is in the SNA Distribution Services book, SC41-5410.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

MSG Message text Character value Required,

Positional 1

TOUSRID User ID Values (up to 50 repetitions): Element list Required,

Positional 2 Element 1: User ID Character value

Element 2: Address Character value

Top

Message text (MSG)

Specifies the message text of the immediate message that is sent. An immediate message is a message

that is not stored in a message file. The text must be enclosed in apostrophes if it contains blanks or

special characters. A maximum length of 256 characters can be specified.

This is a required parameter.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 257

Page 274: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

User ID (TOUSRID)

Specifies one or more user IDs, or the name of one or more distribution lists containing user IDs of users

to whom the message is to be sent.

A combination of both user IDs and distribution lists can be specified on the same command. Each user

ID or distribution list is specified as a two-part name, and both parts are required. Up to 50 user IDs can

be specified.

Note: Depending on the type of work station being used, the internal value for a user identifier may

differ from the characters shown by the Display Directory Entries (DSPDIRE) command. If the byte-string

value specified for the TOUSRID parameter does not match the rules for an internal user identifier value,

or if it does not match the internal value for any enrolled user, an error may be reported.

This is a required parameter.

You can enter multiple values for this parameter.

Top

Examples

SNDNETMSG MSG(’I’’m updating the accounts receivable files.’)

TOUSRID((SMITH SYSTEM2))

This command sends the message specified in the MSG parameter to the user identified to the network

with a user ID of (SMITH SYSTEM2).

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF8063

Cannot assign necessary resource.

CPF8066

One or more user identifiers on this command is not correct.

CPF8069

Message not sent to any users.

CPF9005

System resource required to complete this request not available.

CPF9006

User not enrolled in system distribution directory.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

CPF9845

Error occurred while opening file &1.

CPF9846

Error while processing file &1 in library &2.

258 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 275: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF9847

Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.

Top

Send Network Message (SNDNETMSG) 259

Page 276: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

260 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 277: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send Network Spooled File (SNDNETSPLF)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send Network Spooled File (SNDNETSPLF) command sends a spooled file to another user on the

local system or on a remote system on the SNADS network. The file is placed on the output queue that is

specified in the user profile of the user to whom the spooled file was sent.

When the file arrives at the destination system, a message is sent to both the recipient and sending user

notifying them of the arrival of the spooled file.

This command does not perform any CCSID translation on the contents of the file. However, the user ID

and address of both the recipient and the originator are translated from the current job CCSID to the

multinational character set 697/500.

Restrictions:

1. The user must be enrolled in the system distribution directory to run this command. The sender must

have read, add, and delete authority to the receiving output queue when sending to user on the same

system.

2. One of the following must be true:

v The requester is the creator of the file.

v The requester has *READ authority to the output queue on which the file resides, and

DSPDTA(*YES) was specified on the CRTOUTQ command.

v The requester has *SPLCTL special authority.

v The requester has *JOBCTL special authority, and the output queue on which the file resides has

OPRCTL(*YES) specified on the CRTOUTQ command.

v The output queue has DSPDTA(*YES) specified on the CRTOUTQ command.

v The requester has owner authority to the output queue on which the file resides and the queue had

AUTCHK(*OWNER) and DSPDTA(*YES) or DSPDTA(*NO) specified on the CRTOUTQ command.

v The requester has *READ, *ADD, and *DELETE authority to the output queue on which the file

resides and the queue has AUTCHK(*DTAAUT) and DSPDTA(*YES) or DSPDTA(*NO) specified on

the CRTOUTQ command.3. DTAFMT(*RCDDATA) must be used when sending a spooled file to a release prior to Version 1

Release 3 Modification 0 (V1R3).

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

FILE Spooled file Name Required,

Positional 1

TOUSRID User ID Values (up to 50 repetitions): Element list Required,

Positional 2 Element 1: User ID Character value

Element 2: Address Character value

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 261

Page 278: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

JOB Job name Single values: *Other values: Qualified job name

Optional,

Positional 3

Qualifier 1: Job name Name

Qualifier 2: User Name

Qualifier 3: Number 000000-999999

SPLNBR Spooled file number 1-999999, *ONLY, *LAST, *ANY Optional,

Positional 4

JOBSYSNAME Job system name Name, *ONLY, *CURRENT, *ANY Optional

CRTDATE Spooled file created Single values: *ONLY, *LASTOther values: Element list

Optional

Element 1: Creation date Date

Element 2: Creation time Time, *ONLY, *LAST

DTAFMT Data format *RCDDATA, *ALLDATA Optional

CLASS VM/MVS class A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U,

V, W, X, Y, Z, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

Optional

PTY Send priority *NORMAL, *HIGH Optional

Top

Spooled file (FILE)

Specifies the name of the spooled file that is sent to the specified user. The file name is the name of the

device file that was used by the program to produce the spooled output file.

This is a required parameter.

Top

User ID (TOUSRID)

Specifies the two-part user ID of one or more users to whom the file is being sent, or the name of one or

more distribution lists containing the user IDs of one or more users to whom the file is being sent. A

combination of user IDs and distribution lists can be specified on the same command. Each user ID or

distribution list is specified as a two-part name, and both parts are required. The users in the distribution

list may be either remote or local.

Note: Depending on the type of work station being used, the internal value for a user identifier may

differ from the characters shown by the DSPDIRE command. If the byte-string value specified for the

TOUSRID parameter does not match the rules for an internal user identifier value, or if it does not match

the internal value for any enrolled user, an error may be reported.

This is a required parameter.

You can enter multiple values for this parameter.

Top

Job name (JOB)

Specifies the name of the job that created the spooled output file whose data records are to be sent.

262 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 279: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

* The job that issued this command is the job that created the spooled file.

qualified-job-name

Specify the qualified name of the job that created the spooled file. If no job qualifier is given, all

jobs currently in the system are searched for the simple job name.

Top

Spooled file number (SPLNBR)

Specifies the number of the spooled output file from the job whose data records are to be sent.

*ONLY

Only one spooled file in the job has the specified file name; therefore, the number of the spooled

file is not necessary.

*LAST

The spooled file with the highest number and the specified file name is used.

*ANY The spooled file number is not used to determine which spooled file is used. Use this value when

the job system name parameter or the spooled file create date and time parameter is to take

precedence over the spooled file number when selecting a spooled file.

spooled-file-number

Specify the number of the spooled file having the specified file name whose data records are to

be sent.

Top

Job system name (JOBSYSNAME)

Specifies the name of the system where the job that created the spooled file (JOB parameter) ran. This

parameter is considered after the job name, user name, job number, spooled file name, and spooled file

number parameter requirements have been met.

*ONLY

There is one spooled file with the specified job name, user name, job number, spooled file name,

spooled file number, and spooled file create date and time.

*CURRENT

The spooled file created on the current system with the specified job name, user name, job

number, spooled file name, spooled file number, and create date and time is used.

*ANY The job system name is not used to determine which spooled file is used. Use this value when

the spooled file create date and time parameter is to take precedence over the job system name

when selecting a spooled file.

name Specify the name of the system where the job that created the spooled file ran.

Top

Spooled file created (CRTDATE)

Specifies the date and time the spooled file was created. This parameter is considered after the job name,

user name, job number, spooled file name, spooled file number, and job system name parameter

requirements have been met.

Single values

Send Network Spooled File (SNDNETSPLF) 263

Page 280: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*ONLY

There is one spooled file with the specified job name, user name, job number, spooled file name,

spooled file number, and job system name.

*LAST

The spooled file with the latest create date and time of the specified job name, user name, job

number, spooled file name, spooled file number, and job system name is used.

Element 1: Creation date

date Specify the date the spooled file was created.

Element 2: Creation time

*ONLY

There is one spooled file with the specified job name, user name, job number, spooled file name,

spooled file number, job system name, and spooled file create date.

*LAST

The spooled file with the latest create time of the specified job name, user name, job number,

spooled file name, spooled file number, job system name, and spooled file create date is used.

time Specify the time the spooled file was created.

Top

Data format (DTAFMT)

Specifies the format in which to transmit the spooled file. This parameter is applicable only to spooled

print files. It is ignored for diskette files.

Spooled files that contain special device requirements cannot be sent using this command if *RCDDATA

is specified on the Data format prompt (DTAFMT parameter).

Note: The device requirements are listed as part of the attributes for the spooled file. To view the device

requirements, use the WRKSPLFA command or the attributes option on the WRKSPLF command. If any

of the device requirements are attributes of the file (if any of the device requirements on the display have

a ’Y’), the spooled file cannot be sent. Either specify DTAFMT(*ALLDATA) or copy the spooled file to a

database file using the Copy Spooled File (CPYSPLF) command and then use the Send Network File

(SNDNETF) command to send the file as a data file.

If *RCDDATA is specified on the Data format prompt (DTAFMT parameter), the following attributes of

the spooled file are kept:

v File name

v Number of copies

v Characters per inch

v Drawer

v Form type

v IGC data indicator

v Lines per inch

v Page length

v Page width

v Page rotation

v Font name

v Print text

264 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 281: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

v Diskette label

v Diskette creation and expiration dates

v Diskette code type

v Diskette exchange type

The possible values are:

*RCDDATA

The spooled file is sent in the existing lower function format. Some functions will be removed

from data that is sent in this format because the format does not support advanced functions. Use

this format for sending spooled files to a System/36, System/38, or a System/370.

*ALLDATA

The spooled file is sent as it exists, without loss of attributes. All spooled file attributes required

to reproduce the file on the receiving system are also sent. Use the *ALLDATA value to send

spooled files to Version 1, Release 3, Modification level 0 or later releases of the AS/400 system.

NOTES:

1. If a file will be printed on the receiving system, it must be printed on the same type of printer as it

was intended to be printed on the source system.

2. Spool files that require advanced function printing (AFP) resources may print differently on the

receiving system. To assure that spool files are printed in the same manner, the following must occur:

v Before using this command to send a file to a user on the same system, make sure that the libraries

containing non-IBM supplied AFP resources are in the library list.

v Before using this command to send a file to a different user or system, make sure that the libraries

containing non-IBM supplied AFP resources are in the initial library list of the user receiving the

spooled files.3. Use this format to send *LINE, *AFPDS, and *AFPDSLINE printer type device files to System 370.

Top

VM/MVS class (CLASS)

Specifies the VM/MVS SYSOUT class for distributions sent to a VM host system or to an MVS host

system.

The possible values are:

A The class is A.

B-Z, 0-9

Specify the distribution class. Valid values range from B through Z and 0 through 9.

Top

Send priority (PTY)

Specifies the queuing priority used for this spooled file when it is being routed through a SNADS

network.

The possible values are:

Send Network Spooled File (SNDNETSPLF) 265

Page 282: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*NORMAL

The spooled file is sent with a service level priority of data low, which is used for most data

traffic. On a System i5, data low distributions are placed on the normal distribution queue

specified for the route.

*HIGH

The spooled file is sent with a service level priority of data high, which is used for high priority

data traffic. On a System i5, data high distributions are placed on the data high distribution

queue specified for the route.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Sending a Spooled File

SNDNETSPLF FILE(QPRINT) TOUSRID((JDE SYS1))

JOB(142857/PAPER/PRINT)

SPLNBR(*LAST) DTAFMT(*ALLDATA)

This command sends the last (most recently created) copy of spooled file QPRINT from job

142857/PAPER/PRINT to the user with a user ID of JDE SYS1. All spooled file functions will be sent.

Example 2: Sending Print Attributes

SNDNETSPLF DTAFMT(*RCDDATA)

This command sends a limited set of print attributes.

Example 3: Sending All Print Attributes

SNDNETSPLF DTAFMT(*ALLDATA)

This command sends all print attributes. *ALLDATA is only valid when it is sent from one System i5 to

another System i5.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2207

Not authorized to use object &1 in library &3 type *&2.

CPF3205

File not created.

CPF3207

Member not added. Errors occurred.

CPF3303

File &1 not found in job &5/&4/&3.

266 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 283: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF3309

No files named &1 are active.

CPF3330

Necessary resource not available.

CPF3340

More than one file with specified name found in job &5/&4/&3.

CPF3342

Job &5/&4/&3 not found.

CPF3343

Duplicate job names found.

CPF3344

File &1 number &8 no longer in the system.

CPF3429

File &1 number &7 cannot be displayed, copied, or sent.

CPF3482

Copy request failed. Spool file &1 is open.

CPF3486

CHLVAL parameter value not valid.

CPF3492

Not authorized to spooled file.

CPF3493

CTLCHAR parameter not correct for file &1.

CPF3499

Records in file &1 preceded all assigned channel values.

CPF8055

Spooled file contains special device requirements. File not sent.

CPF8063

Cannot assign necessary resource.

CPF8066

One or more user identifiers on this command is not correct.

CPF8067

File &1 not sent to any users.

CPF8068

Error detected while processing file to be sent.

CPF8072

Object to be sent is greater than maximum size of 2GB.

CPF9005

System resource required to complete this request not available.

CPF9006

User not enrolled in system distribution directory.

CPF9820

Not authorized to use library &1.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

Send Network Spooled File (SNDNETSPLF) 267

Page 284: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF9845

Error occurred while opening file &1.

CPF9846

Error while processing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9847

Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9849

Error while processing file &1 in library &2 member &3.

Top

268 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 285: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send Program Message (SNDPGMMSG)

Where allowed to run: Compiled CL program or interpreted

REXX (*BPGM *IPGM *BREXX *IREXX)Threadsafe: Yes

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send Program Message (SNDPGMMSG) command sends a message to a named message queue or to

a call message queue. A call message queue can be the *EXT external message queue or a message queue

associated with a call stack entry. Each time a program or procedure is called a new message queue is

associated with its call stack entry. The message queue is identified by the name of its associated program

or procedure.

A program can send a message to its own message queue or to a message queue that is associated with a

different call stack entry.

This command can send both exception and non-exception messages.

Restrictions:

1. The SNDPGMMSG command allows a message of up to 512 characters to be sent. However, if the

message is sent to the *EXT message queue of an interactive job, only 76 characters are shown on the

Display Program Messages display. If the message is sent to a user’s, work station’s, or the system

operator’s message queue, the Display Message (DSPMSG) command allows all 512 characters to be

displayed.

2. This command can only send inquiry messages (specified by MSGTYPE(*INQ)) to one message queue

or to two nonprogram message queues if one of the queues is *HSTLOG.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

MSG Message text, or Character value Optional,

Positional 1

MSGID Message identifier Name Optional,

Positional 2

MSGF Message file Qualified object name Optional,

Positional 3 Qualifier 1: Message file Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

MSGDTA Message data field values Character value, *NONE Optional,

Positional 4

TOPGMQ Call stack entry message

queue

Single values: *EXTOther values: Element list

Optional

Element 1: Relationship *PRV, *SAME

Element 2: Call stack entry

identifier

Element list

Element 1: Call stack entry Character value, *

Element 2: Module Name, *NONE

Element 3: Bound program Name, *NONE

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 269

Page 286: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

TOMSGQ Send to non-pgm message

queue

Single values: *TOPGMQ, *SYSOPROther values (up to 50 repetitions): Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Send to

non-pgm message queue

Name, *HSTLOG

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

TOUSR To user profile Name, *SYSOPR, *ALLACT, *REQUESTER Optional

MSGTYPE Message type *INFO, *INQ, *RQS, *COMP, *DIAG, *NOTIFY, *ESCAPE,

*STATUS

Optional

RPYMSGQ Message queue to get reply Single values: *PGMQOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Message queue

to get reply

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

KEYVAR CL var for KEYVAR (4) Character value Optional

CCSID Coded character set ID 1-65535, *HEX, *JOB Optional

Top

Message text, or (MSG)

Specifies the message text that is to be sent. A maximum of 3000 characters can be specified or, if you are

prompting for this command in an interactive job, a maximum of 512 characters can be specified. The

string must be enclosed in apostrophes if special characters (including blanks) are used. If this parameter

is specified, a value cannot be specified for the Message identifier (MSGID) parameter, and *ESCAPE,

*NOTIFY, or *STATUS cannot be specified for the Message type (MSGTYPE) parameter. If this parameter

is specified, a value cannot be specified for the Message file (MSGF) parameter or the Message data

field values (MSGDTA) parameter, because these types require that a message identifier also be

specified.

Coded Character Set Identifier (CCSID) Considerations

The text supplied for the MSG parameter is assumed to be in the CCSID of the job running this

command unless a coded character set identifier is supplied in the CCSID parameter. For more

information about the message handler and its use of CCSIDs, see the i5/OS globalization topic collection

in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Top

Message identifier (MSGID)

Specifies the message identifier of a message description whose predefined message is being sent by the

program to a message queue. If this parameter is specified, a value cannot be specified for the Message

text, or (MSG) parameter.

Top

270 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 287: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Message file (MSGF)

Specifies the message file that contains the predefined message to be sent. This parameter is required if a

value is specified for the Message identifier (MSGID) parameter.

Qualifier 1: Message file

name Specify the name of the message file which contains the predefined message to be sent.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the message file. If no current library entry exists

in the library list, QGPL is used.

name Specify the library where the message file is located.

Top

Message data field values (MSGDTA)

Specifies the character string, or a CL variable that contains a character string, containing one or more

substitution values that are used as message data fields within the predefined message. The substitution

values take the place of the substitution variables that were defined in the message text when the

message was defined.

*NONE

There are no program-supplied substitution values used in the specified message.

character-string

Specify the character string that gives the substitution values in the specified predefined message

that is sent by the program, or specify the name of the CL variable that contains the character

string.

Coded Character Set Identifier (CCSID) Considerations

The text supplied for the MSGDTA parameter that corresponds to the *CCHAR type field is

assumed to be in the CCSID of the job running this command unless the coded character set

identifier is supplied in the CCSID parameter. All other text supplied for the MSGDTA parameter

is assumed to be 65535 and is not converted. For more information about the message handler

and its use of CCSIDs, see the i5/OS globalization topic collection in the i5/OS Information

Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/. For more information about the *CCHAR

type fields, see the Add Message Description (ADDMSGD) command.

Top

Call stack entry message queue (TOPGMQ)

Specifies the call message queue to which the specified message is to be sent. The message queue can be

the *EXT external queue or the call message queue associated with a call stack entry.

Single values

*EXT The message is sent to the external message queue of the job. The external message queue is used

to communicate with the external requester of the job, such as a display station user. *INQ

messages that are sent to *EXT wait for 24 hours before the default reply is sent.

Send Program Message (SNDPGMMSG) 271

Page 288: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Messages sent to this queue can be 512 characters in length, but only 76 characters of text are

shown on the Program Messages display.

Element 1: Relationship

Two parameter elements are used to specify the call stack entry message queue from which a message is

to be removed. The first element specifies whether the message queue is associated with the program or

procedure identified by the second element, or if it is associated with the caller of the program or

procedure.

*PRV The message is sent to the message queue of the call stack entry that is immediately previous to

the one identified by the second element of this parameter. However, if the message queue

immediately previous to the one identified by the second element is for an Integrated Language

Environment (ILE) program entry procedure (PEP), the message is sent to the message queue that

precedes the PEP message queue in the stack.

*SAME

The message is sent to the message queue of the call stack entry identified by the second element

of this parameter.

Element 2: Call stack entry identifier

The second element of this parameter has three elements. Element 1 specifies an OPM program or ILE

procedure name or a special value. Element 2 specifies an ILE module name which is used as a qualifier

for the value specified in element 1. Element 3 can specify either an OPM program name or an ILE

program name or a service program name, depending on what is specified in element 1. Element 3 is also

used as a qualifier for what is specified in element 1.

Element 1: Call stack entry

* Specifies the OPM program or ILE procedure running this command.

name Specify the name of the OPM program or ILE procedure used to identify the call stack

entry.

If this element identifies an OPM program, the name specified can be a maximum of 10

characters. If this element identifies an ILE procedure, the name specified can be a

maximum of 256 characters.

Nested procedure names can be specified by separating each procedure name with a

colon (:). When specifying nested procedure names, the outermost procedure name is

identified first, followed by its contained procedures. The innermost procedure name is

identified last in the string.

Partial names of programs or procedures can be specified by placing three less-than

symbols (<<<) at the beginning of the name or by placing three greater-than symbols

(>>>) at the end of the name. If both the greater-than symbols and the less-than symbols

are used, the program or procedure name specified is limited to 250 characters.

The system begins its search for the specified program or procedure name with the most

recently called program or procedure.

When searching for a partial program or procedure name:

v The less-than symbols (<<<) are truncated when specified only at the beginning of a

program or procedure name and the remaining character string is right-justified. The

remaining characters in the specified string are compared to the current program or

procedure on the call stack, starting with the last position of the program or procedure

name and comparing backward.

272 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 289: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

v The greater-than symbols (>>>) are truncated when specified only at the end of a

program or procedure name. The remaining characters in the specified string are

compared to the current program or procedure on the call stack, starting with the first

position of the program or procedure name.

v The less-than symbols (<<<) and the greater-than symbols (>>>) are truncated when

both are specified for a program or procedure name. The remaining characters are used

to scan and compare the entire length of the specified string with the current program

or procedure on the call stack.

Element 2: Module

*NONE

No ILE module qualifier is provided.

name Specify the ILE module name to be used to identify the message queue.

Element 3: Program

*NONE

No program qualifier is provided.

name Specify the program name to be used to identify the message queue.

The procedure name alone may not identify the correct procedure. Several different procedures with the

same name can run in a job. To further identify a procedure, the name specified can be qualified by a

module name, or by both a module name and a bound program name. The following special values can

be specified for the first qualifier of the second element of this parameter:

*CTLBDY

Specifies the call stack entry that is at the most recent control boundary. This entry will be

running in the same activation group as the CL program that is running the SNDPGMMSG

command. Note that a control boundary will not exist if all programs on the call stack are OPM

programs.

*PGMBDY

Specifies the program boundary of either the program that is using the SNDPGMMSG command

or the program whose name is specified for qualifier 3 of this parameter. If no name is specified

for qualifier 3, it is assumed that the program is the one using the command.

If it is an ILE program that is being specified, this special value identifies the call stack entry for

the program entry procedure (PEP) of that program, if the program was called by a dynamic call.

If the program was called by a procedure pointer, this special value identifies the call stack entry

for the procedure that was pointed to. If it is an ILE service program that is being specified, this

special value identifies the call stack entry for the first procedure that was called in that service

program.

If the program being specified is an OPM program, this special value has the same effect as

specifying the special value * or a program name for item 1. A difference will occur if the OPM

program has called itself recursively. In this case, this special value identifies the first recursion

level rather than the current recursion level as would be the case if the special value * or a

program name was used.

*PGMNAME

Specifies that the call stack entry will be identified only by using a program name and optionally

a module name. When this special value is used, qualifier 3 must specify an ILE program or

service program name or OPM program name. Qualifier 2 may contain either the special value

*NONE or an ILE module name.

Send Program Message (SNDPGMMSG) 273

Page 290: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This special value is used to send a message to the most recently called procedure that is part of

the specified ILE program or service program. When using this special value, it is not necessary

to explicitly provide a procedure name. If a module name is also provided, then this special value

is used to send a message to the most recently called procedure that is both part of the identified

program and the identified module.

This special value may also be used to send a message to an OPM program. In this case, using

this special value and providing the OPM program name in item 3 has exactly the same effect as

providing that program name here in item 1. Note that if this special value is being used to send

to an OPM program then the module name must be specified as *NONE.

Top

Send to non-pgm message queue (TOMSGQ)

Specifies up to 50 nonprogram message queues to which an informational message is sent. For an inquiry

message, one message queue may be specified or two message queues may be specified if one of the

queues is *HSTLOG. This parameter cannot be used if a value is specified for the To user profile

(TOUSR) parameter.

Single values

*TOPGMQ

The message is sent only to the call message queue specified for the Call stack entry message

queue (TOPGMQ) parameter.

*SYSOPR

The message is sent to the system operator message (message queue QSYSOPR in library QSYS).

Any message sent to message queue QSYSOPR in library QSYS automatically has a copy of the

message sent to the QHST (history log) message queue in library QSYS.

Qualifier 1: Send to non-pgm message queue

*HSTLOG

The message is sent to the system history log (message queue QHST in library QSYS). If

*HSTLOG is specified more than once, only one message will be sent to the system history log. If

*HSTLOG is specified with message queue QSYSOPR, only one message is sent to the system

history log.

name Specify the name of the message queue to which the message is to be sent. A maximum of fifty

message queues can be specified.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the message queue. If no current library entry

exists in the library list, QGPL is used.

name Specify the library where the message queue is located.

Top

To user profile (TOUSR)

Specifies that the message is to be sent to the message queue specified in the user profile for the user

named on this parameter. This parameter cannot be used if a value is specified for the Send to non-pgm

message queue (TOMSGQ) parameter or the Call stack entry message queue (TOPGMQ) parameter.

274 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 291: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*SYSOPR

The message is sent to the system operator (message queue QSYSOPR in library QSYS). Any

message sent to message queue QSYSOPR in library QSYS automatically has a copy of the

message sent to the QHST (history log) message queue in library QSYS.

*REQUESTER

The message is sent to the user profile message queue for interactive jobs or to the system

operator’s message queue (QSYSOPR in library QSYS) for batch jobs.

*ALLACT

A copy of the message is sent to the user profile message queue of each user profile with an

interactive job currently running. *ALLACT cannot be specified with inquiry messages.

name Specify the user profile name of the user to whom the message is to be sent.

Top

Message type (MSGTYPE)

Specifies which message type is assigned to this message when it is sent by this program.

Notes:

1. Inquiry messages can be sent only to the external queue or to a named message queue specified for

the TOUSR or TOMSGQ parameters. When sending an inquiry with the TOMSGQ parameter, a

second queue can be specified if the value is *HSTLOG.

2. Completion, diagnostic, escape, notify, and status messages can be sent only to a call message queue.

3. Escape messages cannot be sent to the external message queue.

*INFO

The message is sent as an informational message.

*INQ The message is sent as an inquiry message.

*COMP

A completion message is sent to a call message queue. A completion message indicates the status

of the work that is successfully performed.

*DIAG

A diagnostic message is sent to a call message queue. Diagnostic messages provide information

about errors detected by this program. The errors are either in the input sent to it, or are those

that occurred while it was running the requested function. An escape or notify message should

also be sent to inform the receiving program or procedure of the diagnostic messages that are on

its message queue.

*NOTIFY

A notify exception message is sent to a call message queue. A notify message describes a

condition for which corrective action must be taken before the sending program can continue. A

reply message is sent back to the sending program. After corrective action is taken, the sending

program can resume running and can receive the reply message from its message queue.

*ESCAPE

An escape exception message is sent to a call message queue. An escape message describes an

irrecoverable error condition. The sending program does not continue to run.

*RQS A request message is sent to a call message queue. A request message allows request data

received from device files to pass from this program to another program or procedure. An

immediate message, specified by the MSG parameter, must be used to send the request.

*STATUS

A status exception message is sent to a call message queue. The status message describes the

Send Program Message (SNDPGMMSG) 275

Page 292: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

status of work performed by the sending program. The first 28 characters of message data in the

MSGDTA parameter are used as the comparison data for message monitors (established by the

Monitor Message (MONMSG) command). If the status exception message is not being monitored,

control is returned to the sending program. If a status message is sent to the external message

queue of an interactive job, the message is shown on line 24, processing continues, and no

response is required.

Note: This value cannot be specified if the Message text, or (MSG) parameter, is specified.

Top

Message queue to get reply (RPYMSGQ)

Specifies, for inquiry and notify messages only, the call message queue or the non-program message

queue to which the reply message is to be sent.

Single values

*PGMQ

The reply to an inquiry or notify message is sent to the message queue associated with the call

stack entry of the program or procedure using this command.

Qualifier 1: Message queue to get reply

name Specify the name of the message queue to which the reply is sent.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the message queue. If no current library entry

exists in the library list, QGPL is used.

name Specify the library where the message queue is located.

Top

CL var for KEYVAR (4) (KEYVAR)

Specifies the name of the CL character variable, if any, that contains the message reference key that

identifies the message sent by the program containing this command. The message reference key is

assigned by the system when the message is sent and is placed in the variable specified here.

If a message is being sent to a message queue associated with a call stack entry, KEYVAR refers to that

message queue (specified for the Call stack entry message queue (TOPGMQ) parameter). If *INQ or

*NOTIFY is specified for the Message type (MSGTYPE) parameter, KEYVAR refers to the message queue

specified for the Message queue to get reply (RPYMSGQ) parameter. In all other cases, KEYVAR refers

to the message queue specified for the TOPGMQ parameter.

Any type of message can be assigned a key when it is being sent to a program message queue. For

messages sent to a nonprogram message queue, message reference keys are available for inquiry (*INQ)

messages only. If another message type is sent to a nonprogram queue, no message key is available and

blanks are returned for KEYVAR.

The variable must be a character variable having a length of 4 characters. If KEYVAR is not specified and

a reply is required, it can be received by the program in FIFO order.

276 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 293: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Coded character set ID (CCSID)

Specifies the coded character set identifier (CCSID) that the supplied message or message data is in. If a

message identifier is specified, the text supplied by the MSGDTA (message data) parameter that

corresponds to the *CCHAR type field is assumed to be in the CCSID specified by the CCSID parameter.

The data supplied that does not correspond to the *CCHAR type field is assumed to be 65535 and is not

converted. For more information about the *CCHAR type field see the Add Message Description

(ADDMSGD) command.

If no message identifier is specified, the text supplied by the MSG (message) parameter is assumed to be

in the CCSID supplied by the CCSID parameter. For more information about the message handler and its

use of CCSIDs, see the i5/OS globalization topic collection in the i5/OS Information Center at

http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

*JOB The message data or immediate text is assumed to be in the CCSID of the job running this

command.

*HEX The message data or immediate text is not converted. CCSID 65535 is used.

coded-character-set-identifier

Specify a valid CCSID in which you want your message or message data to be considered in.

Valid values range from 1 through 65535. This command validates the CCSID. See the

Globalization information in the iSeries Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter for a list of valid CCSID values.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Specifying Substitution Values

SNDPGMMSG MSGID(UIN0023) MSGF(INV) MSGDTA(’50 100’)

TOPGMQ(*EXT)

This command sends the message identified as UIN0023, which is stored in message file INV, to the

external message queue of the job (the Display Program Messages presents the message at a display

station). The data, which contains two substitution values specified in the MSGDTA parameter, is sent

with the message. This data can then be used as substitution values when the message is received, or it

can be used as data to be dumped, depending on how the message UIN0023 is defined in the message

file. Assuming that the variables &1 and &2 have been defined in the message file as character variables,

each 3 characters long, and that the first-level message text of the message UIN0023 is: ’Requested item

decreased by &1; current balance &2.’ The message text sent is: ’Requested item decreased by 50; current

balance 100.’

Example 2: Sending an Inquiry Message

SNDPGMMSG MSG(’Mount checks in printer before continuing’)

MSGTYPE(*INQ) TOMSGQ(*SYSOPR)

This command sends an inquiry message to the system operator. The operator looks at the message that

was sent by using the DSPMSG command and responds to the message directly on that display. A

Receive Message (RCVMSG) command is used in the program to accept the operator’s response.

Send Program Message (SNDPGMMSG) 277

Page 294: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Example 3: Sending an Escape Message

SNDPGMMSG MSGID(USR0001) MSGF(USRMSGR) TOPGMQ(*PRV *)

MSGTYPE(*ESCAPE)

This command is an example of how a message could be sent to the caller of a program or procedure to

cause an abnormal end. The message USR0001 could indicate that an invalid code was passed (such as a

nonnumeric code when numeric is required). Because the message being sent is an escape message, the

program or procedure that is sending the message cannot be resumed. The values *PRV and * did not

have to be coded on this command because they are the default values on the TOPGMQ parameter.

Example 4: Sending an Escape Message to an ILE Procedure

SNDPGMMSG MSGID(USR0001) MSGF(USRMSGR)

TOPGMQ(*SAME ACCOUNT_FINAL_TOTALS)

MSGTYPE(*ESCAPE)

This command sends a message to an ILE procedure. In this example, the call stack entry identifier is

more than 10 characters. Since no qualifier is specified, the actual module name and bound program

name associated with the procedure are not used in finding the procedure. The escape exception message

is sent to the message queue associated with ACCOUNT_FINAL_TOTALS because *SAME is specified for

Element 1.

Example 5: Sending an Escape Message using Qualifiers

SNDPGMMSG MSGID(USR0001) MSGF(USRMSGR)

TOPGMQ(*PRV FIRST_QTR_SUMMARY SUMQTRS REPORTS)

MSGTYPE(*ESCAPE)

This command sends an escape exception message to the caller of the procedure FIRST_QTR_SYMMARY.

The procedure is qualified by the module name SUMQTRS and the bound program name REPORTS. The

escape exception message interrupts the sending program and the sending program is not resumed.

Example 6: Sending a Completion Message using a Partial Procedure Name

SNDPGMMSG MSGID(USR0001) MSGF(USRMSGR)

TOPGMQ(*SAME ’MANAGE_SALES>>>’) MSGTYPE(*COMP)

This command sends a completion message to the most recent procedure whose name begins with

MANAGE_SALES.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF24CB

*PGMNAME requires a specified program name.

CPF2409

Specified message type not valid with specified program message queue.

278 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 295: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF2428

Message queue parameter is not valid.

CPF2453

Reply queue not sender’s program message queue.

CPF2469

Error occurred when sending message&1.

CPF247A

Call stack entry not found.

CPF247E

CCSID &1 is not valid.

CPF2499

Message identifier &1 not valid.

CPF2524

Exception handler not available because of reason code &1.

CPF2550

Exception message sent to a deleted program or procedure.

CPF2702

Device description &1 not found.

CPF7C08

No support network connection.

CPF8C0C

Content of problem record &1 not valid.

CPF8C0E

Library QGPL not found.

CPF8C01

Cannot connect to IBM service system. One session allowed.

CPF8C07

A parameter is not valid.

CPF8C08

Cannot specify *SELECT for the control point name.

CPF8C09

&1 not defined as a service provider.

CPF8C16

Error occurred while processing request.

CPF8C17

Sign-on failed.

CPF8C18

No support network connection.

CPF8C19

Remote support application failed.

CPF8C2A

Cannot connect to IBM service system.

CPF8C24

Error occurred while processing request.

Send Program Message (SNDPGMMSG) 279

Page 296: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF8C27

Alternate load device not found.

CPF8C32

PTF order cannot be processed.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

CPF9845

Error occurred while opening file &1.

CPF9846

Error while processing file &1 in library &2.

CPF9847

Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.

Top

280 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 297: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send Program Temporary Fix Order (SNDPTFORD) command allows you to prepare an order for:

v Individual PTFs

v Cumulative PTF package

v PTF Group

v Summary information for available PTFs

v Preventive Service Planning (PSP) information

Restrictions:

1. This command is shipped with public *EXCLUDE authority, and the QSRV and QSRVBAS user profiles

have private authority to use the command.

2. The following restrictions apply for the IMGDIR parameter:

v You must have *X authority to each directory in the path.

v You must have *WX authority to the directory that contains optical image.

3. The following restrictions apply for the IMGCLG parameter:

v You must have the authorities needed to run the Create Image Catalog (CRTIMGCLG) command.

v You must have read(*READ) and add(*ADD) authorities to the QUSRSYS library.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

PTFID PTF description Values (up to 20 repetitions): Element list Required,

Positional 1 Element 1: PTF identifier Character value, *CUMPKG, *HIPERGRP, *DB2GRP,

*BRSGRP, *JVAGRP, *HTTPGRP, *PFRGRP

Element 2: Product Character value, *ONLYPRD

Element 3: Release Character value, *ONLYRLS

PTFPART PTF parts *ALL, *CVRLTR Optional

RMTCPNAME Remote control point Communications name, *IBMSRV, *SELECT Optional

RMTNETID Remote network identifier Communications name, *NETATR Optional

DELIVERY Delivery method *LINKONLY, *ANY Optional

DLVRYFMT Delivery format *SAVF, *IMAGE Optional

ORDER Order *REQUIRED, *PTFID Optional

REORDER Reorder *NO, *YES Optional

CHKPTF Check PTF *NO, *YES Optional

IMGOPT Image option *DOWNLOAD, *ORDER Optional

IMGDIR Image directory Path name, *DFT Optional

IMGPFX Image prefix Character value, *SRVPVD Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 281

Page 298: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

IMGCLG Image catalog Name, *NONE Optional

Top

PTF identifier (PTFID)

Specifies the list of PTFs being ordered.

Element 1: PTF identifier

*CUMPKG

Order the latest level of the cumulative PTF package (SF99vrm) for the operating system release

that is installed on the system. HIPER and DB2 Universal Database (UDB) group PTFs are

automatically requested with this order. It cannot be ordered with any other PTF identifier or

special value.

*HIPERGRP

Order the latest level of HIPER PTF group for the operating system release that is installed on the

system.

*DB2GRP

Order the latest level of DB2 UDB PTF group for the operating system release that is installed on

the system.

*BRSGRP

Order the latest level of Backup Recovery Solutions PTF group for the operating system release

that is installed on the system.

*HTTPGRP

Order the latest level of IBM HTTP Server PTF group for the operating system release that is

installed on the system.

*JVAGRP

Order the latest level of Java PTF group for the operating system release that is installed on the

system.

*PFRGRP

Order the latest level of Performance Tools PTF group for the operating system release that is

installed on the system.

character-value

Specify the PTF identifier. Some PTFs must be ordered individually or within a list of PTFs with

the same prefix and not as part of a general list.

A cumulative PTF package is specified using the format SF99vrm and the Preventive Service

Planning (PSP) format is SF98vrm, where vrm is version-release-modification.

Element 2: Product

*ONLYPRD

The PTF identifier is associated with only one product.

Note: If this value and ORDER(*REQUIRED) are specified, requisites are sent for only that

product that is installed or supported on your system.

character-value

Specify the 7-character product identifier of the product that the PTF is associated with. If the

PTF identifier is associated with more than one product, the PTF order is limited to the product

specified.

282 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 299: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Element 3: Release

*ONLYRLS

The PTF identifier is associated with only one release.

Note: If this value and ORDER(*REQUIRED) are specified, requisites are sent for only that release

level that is installed or supported on your system.

character-value

Specify the 6-character release level in VxRyMz format where Vx is the version number, Ry is the

release number, and Mz is the modification level. The variables x and y can be a number from 0

through 9, and the variable z can be a number from 0 through 9 or a letter from A through Z.

Top

PTF parts (PTFPART)

Specifies whether PTFs or cover letters are being ordered.

*ALL PTFs and cover letters are being ordered.

*CVRLTR

Cover letters only are being ordered.

Top

Remote control point (RMTCPNAME)

Specifies the remote control point of the service provider to whom the service request is sent.

*IBMSRV

The service request is sent to IBM service support.

*SELECT

A list of service providers is shown so the user can select the destination for the service request.

communications-name

Specify the name of the remote control point.

Top

Remote network identifier (RMTNETID)

Specifies the remote name identifier of the service provider’s network.

*NETATR

The service provider is in the local network.

communications-name

Specify the network name of the service provider to whom the request is being sent.

Top

Delivery method (DELIVERY)

Specifies how the PTFs are delivered.

Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD) 283

Page 300: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*LINKONLY

PTFs are delivered by the electronic customer support service link only. If the PTFs are too large

to use service link, the command will fail.

*ANY PTFs are delivered by any available method. The service link is used for most PTFs. PTFs that are

too large for the service link are sent on the selected medium.

Top

Delivery format (DLVRYFMT)

Specifies the format of the delivered PTFs.

*SAVF PTFs are delivered through the electronic customer support service link as save files.

*IMAGE

PTFs are delivered through the electronic customer support service link as optical image files.

Optical image files will contain PTFs and cover letters. The optical image file will be stored in the

directory specified by the IMGDIR parameter.

Top

Order (ORDER)

Specifies the level of fixes that are being requested.

*REQUIRED

The PTF ordered and its requisites are being requested.

*PTFID

The specific PTF ordered is the one being requested. No requisites are sent.

Top

Reorder (REORDER)

Specifies whether a PTF that is currently loaded, applied, or on order should be ordered again.

*NO PTFs that are already loaded, applied, or on order are not reordered.

*YES PTFs that are already loaded, applied, or on order are reordered.

Note: A PTF is not reordered if the *SAVF delivery format is specified and a save file is available on the

system.

Top

Check PTF (CHKPTF)

Specifies whether checking is performed on the service requester system to determine if PTFs are ordered

based on whether or not the PTF product is installed or supported.

*NO The PTFs specified on the PTF identifier (PTFID) parameter are ordered even when the PTF

product is not installed or supported on the service requester.

*YES The PTFs specified on the PTF identifier (PTFID) parameter are ordered only if the PTF product

is installed or supported on the service requester.

284 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 301: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Image option (IMGOPT)

Specifies the option of the image order.

*DOWNLOAD

The optical image can be ordered and downloaded automatically when the optical image is ready

to download.

*ORDER

The optical image will be ordered but it will not be automatically downloaded. The Work with

PTF Order (WRKPTFORD) command can be used to display PTF orders information, download

or cancel the order.

Note: The user has up to 14 days to resume or cancel a PTF order because the Fix Service Provider will

close all orders after 14 days.

Top

Image directory (IMGDIR)

Specifies the directory where the optical image files are stored. If IMGCLG parameter is specified, the

directory specified will be associated with the image catalog.

*DFT The optical image files are stored in /QIBM/UserData/OS/Service/ECS directory.

path-name

:* @A1C From: Specify an existing directory. For more information on specifying path names,

refer to ″Object naming rules″ in the ″CL concepts and reference″ topic in the i5/OS Information

Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Top

Image prefix (IMGPFX)

Specifies a prefix for the optical image file names.

*SRVPVD

The files will be named by the Service Provider.

character-value

Specify the prefix that will be used when naming the optical images being stored. If multiple

images are received under one order, the files will be uniquely identified by a numerical suffix on

the image name. For more information on specifying file names, refer to ″Object naming rules″ in

the ″CL concepts and reference″ topic in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Top

Image catalog (IMGCLG)

Specifies the image catalog to create based on the PTFs ordered.

*NONE

No image catalog will be created.

Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD) 285

Page 302: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

name Specify the name that will be used when creating the image catalog. If the image catalog already

exists, it will be used to store the images download.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Sending Order for PTFs by PTF Number Only

SNDPTFORD PTFID((SI12345) (SI12346))

This command sends a request for PTF numbers SI12345 and SI12346.

Example 2: Sending Order for PTF by Product and Release

SNDPTFORD PTFID((SI12345 5722SS1 V5R3M0))

DELIVERY(*ANY) ORDER(*REQUIRED)

This command sends a request for PTF SI12345 for Version 5 Release 3 Modification 0 of the operating

system product (5722SS1). The PTF can be delivered by any available method. Any requisites are sent

with the PTFs.

Example 3: Sending Order for Latest Cumulative PTF

SNDPTFORD PTFID((*CUMPKG))

This command requests that the latest PTF cumulative package be sent for the operating system release

level that is installed on your system.

Example 4: Sending Order for a PTF Group

SNDPTFORD PTFID((SF99893))

This command sends a request for PTF group number SF99893.

Example 5: Sending Order for a DB2 UDB Group with *IMAGE Delivery Format

SNDPTFORD PTFID((*DB2GRP)) DELIVERY(*LINKONLY)

DLVRYFMT(*IMAGE)

This command sends a request for the latest level of the DB2 UDB PTF group for the operating system

release that is installed on your system. The PTF group will be stored in optical image files inside

/QIBM/UserData/OS/Service/ECS directory.

Example 6: Sending Order with *IMAGE Delivery Format

SNDPTFORD PTFID((*DB2GRP)) DELIVERY(*LINKONLY)

DLVRYFMT(*IMAGE) IMGOPT(*ORDER)

286 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 303: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This command sends a request for the latest level of the DB2 UDB PTF group for the operating system

release that is installed on your system. The PTF order will be ordered but it will not be donwloaded.

The status of this PTF order will be ″onorder″ and WRKPTFORD command can be used to display PTF

order information, download or cancel the order.

Example 7: Sending Order with Image Catalog Option

SNDPTFORD PTFID((*HIPERGRP)) DELIVERY(*LINKONLY)

DLVRYFMT(*IMAGE) IMGCLG(’MYCATALOG’)

This command sends a request for the latest level of the Hiper PTF group for the operating system

release that is installed on your system. The PTF image will be stored in the MYCATALOG image

catalog.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2702

Device description &1 not found.

CPF7C08

No support network connection.

CPF8C0C

Content of problem record &1 not valid.

CPF8C0E

Library QGPL not found.

CPF8C01

Cannot connect to IBM service system. One session allowed.

CPF8C07

A parameter is not valid.

CPF8C08

Cannot specify *SELECT for the control point name.

CPF8C09

&1 not defined as a service provider.

CPF8C16

Error occurred while processing request.

CPF8C17

Sign-on failed.

CPF8C18

No support network connection.

CPF8C19

Remote support application failed.

CPF8C2A

Cannot connect to IBM service system.

CPF8C24

Error occurred while processing request.

Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD) 287

Page 304: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF8C27

Alternate load device not found.

CPF8C32

PTF order cannot be processed.

CPF8C99

PTF &2-&1 &3 not ordered.

CPF9846

Error while processing file &1 in library &2.

Top

288 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 305: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send/Receive File (SNDRCVF)

Where allowed to run:

v Batch program (*BPGM)

v Interactive program (*IPGM)

Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send/Receive File (SNDRCVF) command is used by a CL program or ILE CL procedure to send data

to and receive data from a device that is being used interactively by a user. The data is passed between

the program in which the SNDRCVF command is used and the display device identified in the

command. The data is passed using the display device file that was declared in the program. (A Declare

File (DCLF) command included in the source used to compile the program was used to declare the file.)

The data for each send/receive operation is passed as one record in a format identified by the RCDFMT

parameter of this command (the format is defined in the data description specifications (DDS)). One CL

variable is used for each field of the record format to pass the data. The CL variables used (including

DDS indicators) are declared implicitly.

Of the record formats specified in the DCLF command, only one can be specified in each SNDRCVF

command. If the device file has not been opened, it is opened by this command. The file and record

format specified in this command can be overridden by an Override with Display File (OVRDSPF)

command if that command is entered before the file is opened. However, care should be taken that the

fields in the overriding record format correspond to the CL variables declared in the program.

Restrictions: This command is valid only within a CL program or ILE CL procedure and only for display

files. It cannot be used with database files.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DEV Display device Name, *FILE Optional,

Positional 1

RCDFMT Record format Name, *FILE Optional,

Positional 2

OPNID Open file identifier Simple name, *NONE Optional

WAIT Wait *YES, *NO Optional

Top

Display device (DEV)

Specifies the name of the display device that the data is to be sent to and the user’s data is to be received

from. A CL variable can be specified for this parameter so that the device name can be changed without

changing the command.

*FILE The data is to be sent to and received from the device associated with the device file (the device

file that was declared in the FILE parameter of the DCLF command). If more than one device

name is specified in the device file, *FILE cannot be specified.

name Specify the name of the device or the name of the CL variable that contains the name of the

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 289

Page 306: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

device that the CL program or ILE CL procedure is to send data to and receive data from. If a CL

variable name is used in this parameter, only one SNDRCVF command is needed in the program

to receive data from several devices.

Top

Record format (RCDFMT)

Specifies the name of the record format that is to be used to pass the data between the CL program or

ILE CL procedure and the user. The format contains all the fields in the record. This parameter must be

coded with a record format name if there is more than one record format in the device file; *FILE cannot

be coded if there is more than one. SNDRCVF ignores the INVITE DDS keyword.

*FILE There is only one record format in the device file; that format is to be used to send the data to

and receive the data from the user.

name Specifies the name of the record format in which the data is to be sent to and received from the

user. A CL variable name cannot be used to specify the record format name.

Top

Open file identifier (OPNID)

Specifies the open file identifier that was declared on a preceding Declare File (DCLF) command in the

same CL program or ILE CL procedure. A CL variable cannot be specified for this parameter value.

*NONE

No open file identifier is provided. This command will use the file associated with the DCLF

command that had *NONE specified for the OPNID parameter. Only one file can be declared in a

CL program or ILE CL procedure with *NONE as the open file identifier.

simple-name

Specify a name that matches the OPNID parameter value on a preceding DCLF command in the

same CL program or ILE CL procedure.

Top

Wait (WAIT)

Specifies whether the CL program or ILE CL procedure either waits to receive the data from the user’s

device or continues to process the commands that follow this SNDRCVF command. If WAIT(*NO) is

specified, the program must issue a WAIT command later in the program to complete the input

operation.

Note: A CL variable cannot be coded on this parameter.

*YES The program waits until the input operation from the device is completed; the next command is

not processed until then.

*NO The program does not wait for the input data; it continues to process commands until a WAIT

command is reached later in the program.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Using Display File with One Record Format

290 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 307: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

DCLF FILE(MENU1)

:

SNDRCVF

This command sends and receives user data by way of the device file MENU1. Only one record format

exists in the file. The device used is specified in the file.

Example 2: Using Display File with Multiple Record Formats

DCLF FILE(SCR) RCDFMT(REC8)

:

SNDRCVF RCDFMT(REC8)

The CL program or ILE CL procedure sends data to a user and receives data for the user who is using

the device named in the device file (*FILE is assumed because DEV is not specified). The data is passed

in the format specified by REC8 record format in the device file named SCR. The CL program or ILE CL

procedure waits for the user data before continuing.

Example 3: Using a CL Variable for Device Name

DCLF FILE(DF1) RCDFMT(REC8)

:

SNDRCVF DEV(&DN) RCDFMT(REC8) WAIT(*NO)

:

WAIT DEV(&DN)

This command sends and receives user data by way of the device file named DF1. Using the record

format REC8, the CL program or ILE CL procedure passes data between itself and the user who is at the

device named in the variable &DN, but it does not wait for a response to come back. If the procedure

sends and receives data from several devices, the same SNDRCVF command can be used. Only the

device specified by &DN for the DEV parameter must be changed. A WAIT command for each device

must be issued later in the procedure to ensure that all the devices respond.

Example 4: Using Open File Identifier

DCLF FILE(SCREEN1) RCDFMT(REC1 REC2) OPNID(OUTDSP1)

DCLF FILE(SCREEN2) RCDFMT(REC3 REC4) OPNID(OUTDSP2)

:

SNDRCVF DEV(*FILE) RCDFMT(REC2) OPNID(OUTDSP1) WAIT(*YES)

The device file named SCREEN1 is used to send data to the display device named in the same device file

and wait for input. The data is presented to the user in the format specified by record format REC2. The

SNDRCVF command is associated with device file SCREEN1 because the open file identifier specified on

the SNDRCVF command matches the open file identifier specified on the DCLF command for display file

SCREEN1.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

Send/Receive File (SNDRCVF) 291

Page 308: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF0859

File override caused I/O buffer size to be exceeded.

CPF0861

File &1 in library &2 is not a display file.

CPF0863

Value of binary data too large for decimal CL variable.

CPF0864

End of file detected for file &1 in &2.

CPF0883

*FILE not valid in DEV parameter for file &1.

CPF0886

Record contains a data field that is not valid.

CPF0887

Data available from previous input request.

CPF4101

File &2 in library &3 not found or inline data file missing.

CPF5068

Program device &4 not found in file &2 in library &3.

CPF5070

File &2 in library &3 has no program devices acquired.

Top

292 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 309: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send Reply (SNDRPY)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Yes

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send Reply (SNDRPY) command sends a reply message to the sender of an inquiry message. The

message that is answered is the one having the specified message reference key that was received at the

specified message queue.

A reply handling exit program can be registered in the system registration facility for exit point

QIBM_QMH_REPLY_INQ. A reply handling exit program can accept, reject or replace a reply value. If

the reply is rejected by an exit program, diagnostic message CPD2476 (Reply rejected by a reply handling

exit program) is sent to the program running this SNDRPY command. This is followed by an escape

message CPF2422 (Reply not valid). If the reply is replaced by an exit program, the send reply function

sends a diagnostic message to itself. The message is CPD2479 (Reply handling exit program requested to

replace a reply value). After the reply is sent, CPF2458 (Reply replaced by a reply handling exit program)

will be sent as a diagnostic message and a status message to the program running this SNDRPY

command. The status message can be monitored if the program needs to be aware of the condition when

a reply value other than what was specified was sent.

If the specified message queue is not allocated to the job in which this command is entered, it is

implicitly allocated by this command for the duration of the command.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

MSGKEY Message key Character value Required,

Positional 1

MSGQ Message queue Qualified object name Required,

Positional 2 Qualifier 1: Message queue Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

RPY Reply Character value, *DFT Optional,

Positional 3

RMV Remove message *YES, *NO Optional

RJTDFTRPY Reject default reply *NOALWRJT, *ALWRJT Optional

CCSID Coded character set ID 1-65535, *HEX, *JOB Optional

Top

Message key (MSGKEY)

Specifies the message reference key of the message that the reply answers.

This is a required parameter.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 293

Page 310: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Message queue (MSGQ)

Specifies the message queue that received the inquiry message to be answered.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Message queue

name Specify the name of the message queue.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the message queue. If no current library entry

exists in the library list, QGPL is used.

name Specify the library where the message queue is located.

Top

Reply (RPY)

Specifies the reply that the program sends as a response to the inquiry message.

*DFT The default reply stored in the message description of the inquiry message that was sent is sent

as the reply. If no default is specified in the message description of the inquiry message, the

system default reply, *N, is used.

’reply-text’

Enter the text (enclosed in apostrophes if it contains blanks or special characters) or a CL variable

that contains the text that is sent as the program’s reply to the inquiry message. The number of

characters allowed for the reply and their format are defined by the validity specifications given

in the Add Message Description (ADDMSGD) command for the specified inquiry message.

However, if no validity specifications are defined for replies in the ADDMSGD command, as

many as 132 characters can be used in the reply text.

Coded Character Set Identifier (CCSID) Considerations

If the inquiry message that this reply is being sent to is an immediate message, the text supplied

for the RPY parameter is assumed to be in the CCSID of the job running this command unless a

coded character set identifier is supplied in the CCSID parameter. If the inquiry message that this

reply is sent to is a predefined message, the text supplied in the RPY parameter is assumed to be

65535 and is not converted. For more information about the message handler and its use of

CCSIDs, see the i5/OS globalization topic collection in the i5/OS Information Center at

http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Top

Remove message (RMV)

Specifies whether the inquiry message and its reply are removed from the specified message queue.

*YES The message and its reply are removed from the message queue when the reply is sent.

*NO The message and its reply are held in the message queue. The inquiry message cannot be replied

to more than once, but it can be received or displayed multiple times.

Top

294 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 311: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Reject default reply (RJTDFTRPY)

Specifies whether a reply handling exit program will be allowed to reject a default reply. A default reply

is requested by using blanks as the value for the reply parameter. A reply handling exit program can be

registered via the system registration facility for exit point QIBM_QMH_REPLY_INQ. If a default reply is

not being sent, this parameter is ignored and a reply handling exit program can reject or replace the reply

value.

*NOALWRJT

A reply handling exit program will not be allowed to reject a default reply.

*ALWRJT

A reply handling exit program will be allowed to reject a default reply. If an exit program rejects

the reply, message CPD2476 (Reply rejected by a reply handling exit program) will be sent as a

diagnostic message to the program using this command. The CPD2476 will be followed by a

CPF2422 (Reply not valid) escape message that the program using this command should monitor

for to handle and recover from error situations.

Top

Coded character set ID (CCSID)

Specifies the coded character set identifier (CCSID) that the supplied reply text is in. If the inquiry

message that this reply is sent to is a predefined message, this parameter is ignored and the text supplied

for the RPY parameter is assumed to be 65535 and is not converted. For more information about the

message handler and its use of CCSIDs, see the i5/OS globalization topic collection in the i5/OS

Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

*JOB The reply text is assumed to be in the CCSID of the job running this command.

*HEX The reply text is not converted. CCSID 65535 is used.

coded-character-set-identifier

Specify a valid CCSID in which you want your reply text to be considered in. Valid values range

from 1 through 65535. This command will validate the CCSID. See the Globalization information

in the iSeries Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter for a list of

valid CCSID values.

Top

Examples

SNDRPY MSGKEY(&KEY) MSGQ(SMITH) RPY(YES)

This command sends a reply of YES to the message whose reference key is specified by &KEY, which

was received at message queue SMITH. Because the reply contains only one word, the reply does not

have to be enclosed in apostrophes.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

Send Reply (SNDRPY) 295

Page 312: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF2401

Not authorized to library &1.

CPF2403

Message queue &1 in &2 not found.

CPF2408

Not authorized to message queue &1.

CPF2410

Message key not found in message queue &1.

CPF2411

Not authorized to message file &1 in &2.

CPF2420

Reply already sent for inquiry or notify message.

CPF2422

Reply not valid.

CPF2432

Cannot send reply to message type other than *INQ or *NOTIFY.

CPF2433

Function not allowed for system log message queue &1.

CPF2460

Message queue &1 could not be extended.

CPF247E

CCSID &1 is not valid.

CPF2471

Length of field not valid.

CPF2477

Message queue &1 currently in use.

CPF2547

Damage to message file QCPFMSG.

CPF2548

Damage to message file &1 in &2.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

CPF9838

User profile storage limit exceeded.

*STATUS Messages

CPF2458

Reply replaced by reply handling exit program.

Top

296 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 313: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send Service Request (SNDSRVRQS)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send Service Request (SNDSRVRQS) command establishes a communications session and sends

problem information to your service support system or tests the communications link to your service

provider.

Restriction: To use this command, the user must be signed on as QSRV or QSRVBAS, or have *ALLOBJ

authority.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

ACTION Action *PREPARED, *OPENED, *TEST, *PRBID Required,

Positional 1

RMTCPNAME Remote control point Communications name, *IBMSRV, *SELECT Optional

RMTNETID Remote network identifier Communications name, *NETATR Optional

PRBID Problem identifier Character value Optional

Top

Action (ACTION)

Specifies the type of request.

*PREPARED

All records in the Problem Log with a status of PREPARED are sent to the remote service support

system.

*TEST A test is performed on the communications link to the remote service support system.

*OPENED

All records in the Problem Log with a status of OPEN are sent to the remote service support

system.

*PRBID

A specific record from the Problem Log with a status of PREPARED or OPENED will be sent to

the selected service provider.

Top

Remote control point (RMTCPNAME)

Specifies the service provider to whom the service request is sent. When *PREPARED is specified for the

Action (ACTION) parameter, only the problem log entries that have defined destinations will be

processed.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 297

Page 314: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*IBMSRV

The service request is sent to IBM service support.

*SELECT

A list of service providers is shown so the user can select the destination for the service request.

remote-control-point-name

Specify the remote control point name of the service provider to whom the request is sent.

Top

Remote network identifier (RMTNETID)

Specifies the remote name of the service provider’s network.

*NETATR

The service provider is in the local network.

remote-network-identifier

Specify the network name of the service provider to whom the request is being sent.

Top

Problem identifier (PRBID)

Specifies the specific problem record identifier. If the problem identifier is for a PREPARED problem, the

problem must have been prepared for the selected service provider.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Sending Prepared Records

SNDSRVRQS ACTION(*PREPARED)

This command establishes the communications link to the IBM service support system and sends all

records in the problem log with the status prepared. The result of each problem log entry reported may

be one of the following:

v PTFs sent to the system

v PTFs ordered from the code distribution center

v CE contacted automatically

v Service support center contacted automatically. The service support center representative will call you.

v Parts list

Example 2: Selecting a Service Provider

SNDSRVRQS ACTION(*OPENED) RMTCPNAME(*SELECT)

This command allows the user to select a service provider from a list. The service provider will receive

all records in the problem log with an opened status.

Top

298 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 315: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2702

Device description &1 not found.

CPF7C08

No support network connection.

CPF8C0A

Data received from &1 not recognized.

CPF8C0B

Test request routed to different system than specified.

CPF8C0C

Content of problem record &1 not valid.

CPF8C0E

Library QGPL not found.

CPF8C0F

Error indicated in reply to request.

CPF8C01

Cannot connect to IBM service system. One session allowed.

CPF8C06

No problems in problem log can be sent.

CPF8C07

A parameter is not valid.

CPF8C08

Cannot specify *SELECT for the control point name.

CPF8C09

&1 not defined as a service provider.

CPF8C16

Error occurred while processing request.

CPF8C17

Sign-on failed.

CPF8C18

No support network connection.

CPF8C19

Remote support application failed.

CPF8C2A

Cannot connect to IBM service system.

CPF8C2B

Error indicated in reply to request.

CPF8C2D

Problem &1 cannot be sent.

CPF8C24

Error occurred while processing request.

Send Service Request (SNDSRVRQS) 299

Page 316: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF8C27

Alternate load device not found.

CPF9824

Not authorized to command &1 in library &2.

CPF9846

Error while processing file &1 in library &2.

Top

300 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 317: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send TIE File (SNDTIEF)

Where allowed to run:

v Batch job (*BATCH)

v Batch program (*BPGM)

v Interactive program (*IPGM)

v Batch REXX procedure (*BREXX)

v Using QCMDEXEC, QCAEXEC, or QCAPCMD API

(*EXEC)

Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send Technical Information Exchange File (SNDTIEF) command allows you to send specified files to

the remote support network.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

FILE File Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: File Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

MBR Member Name, *FIRST Required,

Positional 2

TOUSRID User ID Name Required,

Positional 3

TONODE Node Name Required,

Positional 4

TOFILE To file Name, *FILE Optional

TYPE Type of contents of file *OTHER, *SYSTPLD Optional

PTY Priority 1, 2 Optional

Top

File (FILE)

Specifies the physical file to be sent to the remote support network.

This is a required parameter.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the database file.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the database file. If no library is specified as the

current library for the job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the name of the library where the database file is located.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 301

Page 318: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Member (MBR)

Specifies the name of the database file member being transmitted to the remote support network.

This is a required parameter.

*FIRST

The first member of the database file specified by the File prompt (FILE parameter) is

transmitted.

member-name

The specified member of the database file is transmitted.

Top

User ID (TOUSRID)

Specifies the user who will receive the database file.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Node (TONODE)

Specifies the system that will receive the database file.

This is a required parameter.

Top

To file (TOFILE)

Specifies the name the database file is to have on the receiving system.

*FILE The database file on the receiving system will have the name specified on the File prompt (FILE

parameter).

file-name

Specify the name the database file is to have on the receiving system.

Top

Type of contents of file (TYPE)

Specifies the contents of the database file.

*OTHER

The contents of the database file are not specified.

*SYSTPLD

The database file contains the system configuration (topology) description.

Top

302 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 319: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Priority (PTY)

Specifies the priority of the database file on the receiving system.

2 The data file has normal priority.

1 The file has the highest priority.

Top

Examples

SNDTIEF FILE(QSYS/MYTOPO) TOUSRID(INFSERV) TONODE(INFTIE)

TOFILE(ACMETOPO)

This command sends a file named MYTOPO from library QSYS to TIE. It is held in a mailbox for user

INFSERV on system INFTIE. When it is received by the user, it is named ACMETOPO.

Top

Error messages

None

Top

Send TIE File (SNDTIEF) 303

Page 320: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

304 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 321: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Send User Message (SNDUSRMSG)

Where allowed to run: Compiled CL program or interpreted

REXX (*BPGM *IPGM *BREXX *IREXX)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Send User Message (SNDUSRMSG) command is used by a program to send a message to a message

queue and optionally receive a reply to that message. The message sent using this command can be either

an impromptu or a predefined message and can be sent to a display station user in an interactive job or a

specific message queue. For inquiry messages, a CL variable can be specified to receive the reply value,

and the program using this command will wait for a response.

This command uses a combination of parameters available on the Send Program Message

(SNDPGMMSG) and Receive Message (RCVMSG) commands to allow a program to send and receive

messages by using a single command. Also, the SNDUSRMSG command provides validity checking and

uppercase translation for replies to inquiry messages.

Restrictions:

1. The SNDUSRMSG command allows a message of up to 512 characters of first-level message text to be

sent. However, if the message is sent to an external message queue (*EXT) in an interactive job, only

76 characters are shown on the Display Program Messages display. If the message is sent to a user’s,

work station’s, or system operator’s message queue, the Display Message (DSPMSG) command allows

all 512 characters to be displayed.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

MSG Message text, or Character value Optional,

Positional 1

MSGID Message identifier Name Optional

MSGF Message file Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: Message file Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

MSGDTA Message data field values Character value Optional

VALUES Valid reply values Values (up to 20 repetitions): Character value, *NONE Optional

DFT Default reply value Character value, *MSGDFT Optional

MSGTYPE Message type *INQ, *INFO Optional

TOMSGQ To message queue Single values: *, *EXT, *SYSOPROther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: To message

queue

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

TOUSR To user profile Name, *SYSOPR, *REQUESTER Optional

MSGRPY CL var for message reply Character value Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 305

Page 322: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

TRNTBL Translate table Single values: *NONEOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Translate table Name, QSYSTRNTBL

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

CCSID Coded character set ID 1-65535, *HEX, *JOB Optional

Top

Message text, or (MSG)

Specifies the message text of an immediate message that is sent by the program. A maximum of 512

characters can be specified. The text string must be enclosed in apostrophes if special characters

(including blanks) are used. If this parameter is specified, values cannot be specified for the Message

identifier (MSGID) parameter, Message file (MSGF) parameter, or Message data field values

(MSGDTA) parameter.

’text’ Specify the text of the immediate message to be sent.

Coded Character Set Identifier (CCSID) Considerations

The text supplied for the MSG parameter is assumed to be in the CCSID of the job running this

command unless a coded character set identifier is supplied in the CCSID parameter. For more

information about the message handler and its use of CCSIDs, see the i5/OS globalization topic collection

in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Top

Message identifier (MSGID)

Specifies the message identifier of a predefined message sent by the program to a message queue. If a

value is specified for this parameter, a value must also be specified for the Message file (MSGF)

parameter, and a value cannot be specified for the Message text, or (MSG) parameter.

identifier

Specify the message identifier of the message to be sent.

Top

Message file (MSGF)

Specifies the message file that contains the predefined message to be sent. This parameter is valid only if

a value is specified for the Message identifier (MSGID) parameter.

Qualifier 1: Message file

name Specify the name of the message file which contains the predefined message to be sent.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the message file. If no current library entry exists

in the library list, QGPL is used.

306 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 323: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

name Specify the library in which the message file is located.

Top

Message data field values (MSGDTA)

Specifies the character string or the CL variable that contains a character string used as the message data

in the predefined message. A character string that is specified contains one or more substitution values

that are used in place of the substitution variables that were defined in the message’s text when the

message was defined.

*NONE

No message data is specified for the predefined message.

message-data

Specify the character string that gives the substitution values in the specified predefined message

that is sent, or specify the name of the variable that contains the character string.

Coded Character Set Identifier (CCSID) Considerations

The text supplied for the MSGDTA parameter that corresponds to the *CCHAR type field is

assumed to be in the CCSID of the job running this command unless a coded character set

identifier is supplied in the CCSID parameter. All other text supplied for the MSGDTA parameter

is assumed to be 65535 and is not converted. For more information about the message handler

and its use of CCSIDs, see the i5/OS globalization topic collection in the i5/OS Information

Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/. For more information about the *CCHAR

type field, see the Add Message Description (ADDMSGD) command.

Top

Valid reply values (VALUES)

Specifies a list of valid replies to an inquiry message sent by this command. No more than 20 replies can

be specified in the list. If the reply to the inquiry message does not match one of the specified values, an

error message is sent to the reply’s sender and the inquiry message is sent again.

*NONE

No replies to inquiry messages are specified. Any reply to an inquiry message is valid.

allowable-values

Specify no more than 20 values that are compared to replies received for inquiry messages sent

by this command. The maximum length of each value is 32 characters. If this value is specified,

the CL var for message reply (MSGRPY) parameter must also be specified.

Top

Default reply value (DFT)

Specifies the value used as the reply to an inquiry message (sent by this command) if the inquiry

message is sent to a message queue that is in default delivery mode, or for any other reason the default

reply is sent.

*MSGDFT

The default value defined in the message description of the message ID (specified for the MSGID

parameter) is used. If no message ID is specified, the default value is *N.

Send User Message (SNDUSRMSG) 307

Page 324: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

’default-reply-value’

Specify the reply (enclosed in apostrophes) used as the default reply. This value can only be

specified if the CL var for message reply (MSGRPY) parameter is specified.

Top

Message type (MSGTYPE)

Specifies the type of message to be sent.

*INQ An inquiry message is sent and the message queue receiving the message must reply to it.

*INFO

An informational message is sent.

Top

To message queue (TOMSGQ)

Specifies the name of the message queue to which the message is to be sent. This parameter cannot be

used if a value is specified for the To user profile (TOUSR) parameter.

Single values

* In an interactive job, the message is to be sent to the external message queue (*EXT). In a batch

job, the message is to be sent to the system operator (message queue QSYSOPR in library QSYS).

*SYSOPR

The message is to be sent to the system operator (message queue QSYSOPR in library QSYS).

*EXT The message is to be sent to the job’s external message queue. For batch job inquiry messages, the

default reply is always received.

Qualifier 1: To message queue

name Specify the name of the message queue that is to receive the message being sent.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the message queue. If no current library entry

exists in the library list, QGPL is used.

name Specify the library where the message queue is located.

Top

To user profile (TOUSR)

Specifies that the message is to be sent to the message queue specified in the user profile for the user

named on this parameter. This parameter cannot be used if a value is specified for the To message queue

(TOMSGQ) parameter.

*SYSOPR

The message is to be sent to the system operator user profile message queue, QSYS/QSYSOPR.

308 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 325: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*REQUESTER

The message is to be sent to the user profile message queue for interactive jobs or to the system

operator’s message queue (QSYS/QSYSOPR) for batch jobs.

name Specify the user profile name of the user to whom the message is to be sent.

Top

CL var for message reply (MSGRPY)

Specifies the CL character variable (of up to 132 characters) that contains the reply received in response to

an inquiry message. This parameter is valid only if *INQ is specified for the Message type (MSGTYPE)

parameter.

Top

Translate table (TRNTBL)

Specifies the name of the translation table that is used if the reply value is being translated.

Qualifier 1: Translate table

QSYSTRNTBL

The translation table named QSYSTRNTBL is used to translate the reply value.

The IBM-supplied translation table QSYSTRNTBL table translates, for the English language only,

all lowercase characters in the range of X’81’ to X’A9’ to uppercase characters. All other

characters are not translated.

To use a different translation table, use the Create Table (CRTTBL) command and specify that

particular table for this parameter.

*NONE

The reply is not being translated.

name Specify the name of the translation table that is used to translate the message reply.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the translation table. If no current library entry

exists in the library list, QGPL is used.

name Specify the library where the translation table is located.

Top

Coded character set ID (CCSID)

Specifies the coded character set identifier (CCSID) that the message text supplied for the MSG (message)

or MSGDTA (message data) parameters is in. If a message identifier is specified, the text supplied by the

MSGDTA (message data) parameter that corresponds to the *CCHAR type field is assumed to be in the

CCSID supplied by this parameter. The data supplied that does not correspond to the *CCHAR type field

is assumed to be 65535 and is not converted. For more information about the *CCHAR type field see the

Add Message Description (ADDMSGD) command.

Send User Message (SNDUSRMSG) 309

Page 326: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

If no message identifier is specified, the text supplied by the MSG (message) parameter is assumed to be

in the CCSID supplied by this parameter. For more information about the message handler and its use of

CCSIDs, see the i5/OS globalization topic collection in the i5/OS Information Center at

http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

*JOB The text supplied by the MSGDTA (message data) or MSG (message) parameter is assumed to be

in the CCSID of the job running this command.

*HEX The text supplied by the MSGDTA (message data) or MSG (message) parameter is not converted.

CCSID 65535 is used.

coded-character-set-identifier

Specify a valid CCSID in which you want your text specified for the MSG (message) or MSGDTA

(message data) parameter to be considered in. Valid values range from 1 through 65535. This

command validates the CCSID. See the Globalization information in the iSeries Information

Center at http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter for a list of CCSID values.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Message Requiring Specific Reply

SNDUSRMSG MSG(’Data verified. Update master files (Y,N)?’)

TOMSGQ(*) VALUES(Y N) DFT(N) MSGRPY(&REPLY)

This command sends an inquiry message to the display station operator (if it is used in an interactive job)

or to the system operator (if it is used in a batch job). The valid replies are Y and N, and any other reply

is rejected. The reply is returned in the variable &REPLY. The default translation table, QSYSTRNTBL, is

used to translate the reply to uppercase characters.

Example 2: Message Requiring Any Reply

SNDUSRMSG MSG(’Enter any response when ready to continue.’)

TOMSGQ(WS01)

This command sends an inquiry message to a specific message queue. Any reply is valid. Because the

purpose of this example is simply to wait, no CL variable is provided to receive the reply.

Example 3: Sending an Information Message

SNDUSRMSG MSGID(USR0150) TOUSR(FRED) MSGF(QGPL/USRMSGF)

MSGDTA(&ACCTNO) MSGTYPE(*INFO)

This command sends a predefined message as an information message to the message queue specified in

the user profile of the specified user (FRED). The message data provided is included in the message.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

310 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 327: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF247E

CCSID &1 is not valid.

CPF2559

Error occurred in SNDUSRMSG command.

Top

Send User Message (SNDUSRMSG) 311

Page 328: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

312 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 329: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Display Mounted FS Information (STATFS)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Display Mounted File System Information (STATFS) command displays information about a mounted

file system.

This command can also be issued using the following alternative command name:

v DSPMFSINF

For more information about integrated file system commands, see the Integrated file system topic

collection in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Restrictions:

v The user must have execute (*X) authority to each directory in the path.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

OBJ Object Path name Required,

Positional 1

OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional

Top

Object (OBJ)

Specifies the path name of an object that is within the mounted file system whose statistics are to be

displayed. Any object in the mounted file system can be specified. For example, it can be a directory

(*DIR) or a stream file (*STMF).

For more information on specifying path names, refer to ″Object naming rules″ in the CL topic collection

in the Programming category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Output (OUTPUT)

Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed

with the job’s spooled output.

* The output is displayed for interactive jobs or printed with the job’s spooled output for

non-interactive jobs.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 313

Page 330: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*PRINT

The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.

Top

Examples

The alternative command name for STATFS is DSPMFSINF. The following examples use the alternative

command name, but STATFS can be replaced directly for DSPMFSINF in all of them.

Example 1: Displaying Statistics of a Mounted File System

DSPMFSINF OBJ(’/jsmith/file1’)

This command displays the statistics for the mounted file system that contains /jsmith/file1.

Example 2: Displaying QSYS.LIB File System Statistics

DSPMFSINF OBJ(’/QSYS.LIB/MYLIB.LIB/MYFILE.FILE’)

This command displays the statistics for the QSYS.LIB file system that contains *FILE object MYFILE in

library MYLIB.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPFA0A9

Object not found. Object is &1.

CPFA09C

Not authorized to object. Object is &1.

Top

314 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 331: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Agent Services (STRAGTSRV)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Agent Services (STRAGTSRV) command starts all of the agent services on this system that are

defined in a preferences file. Another preferences file is also used to help define how the services are

started. The preferences files are stream files named ableplatform.preferences and able.preferences that are

located in the directory specified for the Preferences file directory (PREFDIR) parameter.

You can use the End Agent Services (ENDAGTSRV) command to end the agent services started by this

command.

Restrictions:

v You must have all object (*ALLOBJ) and job control (*JOBCTL) special authorities to run this

command.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

PREFDIR Preferences file directory Path name, *DFT Optional

HOMEDIR Home directory Path name, *CURRENT Optional

CLASSPATH Additional classpath Path name, *NONE Optional

SBMJOBUSER User profile for SBMJOB Single values: *CURRENTOther values (up to 10 repetitions): Element list

Optional

Element 1: Pool identifier Character value

Element 2: User profile Name

Top

Preferences file directory (PREFDIR)

Specifies the directory that contains the preferences files that define the agent services to be started and

how they are started. The preferences files must be named ableplatform.preferences and able.preferences.

*DFT Use the preferences files located in /QIBM/ProdData/OS400/able/.

path-name

Specify the directory that contains the preferences files to be used to start the agent services.

Top

Home directory (HOMEDIR)

Specifies the directory to be used as the home directory of the agent services.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 315

Page 332: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*CURRENT

Use the home directory currently in effect for the job running this command. This is the home

directory defined for the current user profile of the job running the STRAGTSRV command.

path-name

Specify the path name of the directory to be used as the home directory for the Java Virtual

Machines (JVMs) which are used by the agents running in these services. The services use this

directory to find needed resources.

Top

Additional classpath (CLASSPATH)

Specifies the additional classpath to be appended to the classpath setting of each Java Virtual Machine

(JVM) to be started to run the agent services.

*NONE

No additional classpath will be appended.

path-name

Specify the path name of the additional classpath to be appended to the classpath setting of each

JVM.

Top

User profile for SBMJOB (SBMJOBUSER)

Specifies the user profile to be used for the Java Virtual Machine (JVM) jobs that will run the agent

services. You can specify that a particular JVM run under a different profile than the current user profile

of the job running the STRAGTSRV command.

You can specify an alternate user profile for up to 10 JVM jobs.

Single values

*CURRENT

All JVM jobs will run under the same user profile as the current user profile of the job running

this command.

Element 1: Pool identifier

character-value

Specify an identifier that matches a JVM that is defined in the preferences file specified for the

Preferences file directory (PREFDIR) parameter.

Element 2: User profile

name Specify the name of the user profile to be used on the Submit Job (SBMJOB) commands for the

JVMs. The JVM jobs will run under the specified user profile instead of the current user profile of

the job running this command.

Top

316 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 333: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Examples

Example 1: Starting with Shipped Default Values

STRAGTSRV

This command starts all of the agent services defined in the default ableplatform.preferences file in

’/qibm/prodData/OS400/able/’ in a way defined in the default able.preferences file in

’/qibm/prodData/OS400/able/’. The home directory of each agent service will be set to the Home

Directory of the current user. All jobs submitted to run the Java Virtual Machines will run under the

current profile.

Example 2: Starting with User-Specified Values

STRAGTSRV PREFDIR(’/qibm/userData/OS400/able/test/’)

HOMEDIR(’/qibm/userData/OS400/able/test/’)

CLASSPATH(’/qibm/userData/OS400/able/test/test.jar’)

SBMJOBUSER((POOL1 TESTPROF1) (POOL3 TESTPROF3))

This command starts all of the agent services defined in the ableplatform.preferences file in

’/qibm/userData/OS400/able/test/’ in a way defined in the default able.preferences file in

’/qibm/userData/OS400/able/test/’. The home directory of each agent service will be set to

’/qibm/userData/OS400/able/test/’. The Java Virtual Machines will have thier classpaths set to include

the test.jar Java Archive file in ’/qibm/userData/OS400/able/test/’. The jobs submitted to run the Java

Virtual Machines for POOL1 and POOL3 will run under the users TESTPROF1 and TESTPROF3

respectivley, all other JVMs will run under the current user profile.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF1890

*ALLOBJ authority required for requested operation.

CPF90FF

*JOBCTL special authority required to do requested operation.

Error messages from submitted job:

This command submits a batch job which, in turn, submits additional batch jobs where the agent services

will run. The following error messages could be signaled from this batch job:

CPF4B01

Agent Service not submitted. Reason code &1.

CPF4B02

The Java Virtual Machine(JVM) for the agent service was not started. Reason code &1

CPF4B03

Java Virtual Machine(JVM) exception has occurred.

Top

Start Agent Services (STRAGTSRV) 317

Page 334: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

318 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 335: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start ASP Balance (STRASPBAL)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start ASP Balance (STRASPBAL) command allows the user to start the auxiliary storage pool (ASP)

balancing function for one or more ASPs. Four types of ASP balancing can be started:

1. Capacity balancing - The data on all the units within the ASP will be balanced so each unit has an

equal percentage of used and unused space. This is useful when new units are added to an ASP.

Instead of having several units with the majority of the data and several new ones with no data, the

user can spread the data evenly across all the units.

2. Usage balancing - The ’low’ use data on each ’low’ utilized unit in the ASP is redistributed to balance

future use of the arm utilization of each unit within the specified ASP. *USAGE balancing cannot be

done until the trace controlled by the Trace ASP Balance (TRCASPBAL) command has collected usage

statistics. The TRCASPBAL command starts the trace function that will identify the ’high’ and ’low’

use data on each unit. After the usage balance activity has run to completion, the trace information

will be cleared. Usage balancing is useful when the ASP contains large capacity disk units.

3. Hierarchical Storage Management (HSM) balancing - The ’high’ use and ’low’ use data on each unit

in the ASP is redistributed so that the ’high’ use data resides on high performance units and the ’low’

use data resides on low performance units. The ASP being balanced in this manner must contain the

correct mixture of slow and fast units to perform this type of balance. This allows the ’low’ use data

on the high performance units to be moved to low performance units. Data that is ’high’ use that

resides on slow units will be moved to the fast disk units. HSM balancing cannot be done until the

trace controlled by the Trace ASP Balance (TRCASPBAL) command has collected usage statistics. The

TRCASPBAL command starts the trace function that will identify the ’high’ and ’low’ use data on

each unit. After the HSM balance activity has run to completion, the trace information will be cleared.

HSM balancing is useful when the ASP contains compressed disk units.

4. Move data from units - This option can be used to reduce the down time associated with removing a

disk unit. A unit that is scheduled for removal can be marked to end allocations by specifying

UNIT(unit-number) and TYPE(*ENDALC). This will keep new allocations away from this unit. For all

units marked *ENDALC, specifying TYPE(*MOVDTA) will move data from the marked units to other

units in the same ASP. To resume allocations for units marked *ENDALC, specify UNIT(unit-number)

and TYPE(*RSMALC). New allocations will once again be allowed to this unit. The Check ASP

Balance (CHKASPBAL) command can be used to determine which units are currently marked

*ENDALC.

The user may specify a time limit that the function is to run for each ASP being balanced or the balance

can be set to run to completion. If the balance function needs to be ended, use the End ASP Balance

(ENDASPBAL) command. A message will be sent to the system history (QHST) log when the balancing

function is started for each ASP. A message will also be sent to the QHST log when the balancing

function completes or is ended.

If the balance function is run for a few hours and then stopped, it will continue from where it left off

when the balance function restarts. This allows the balancing to be run during off hours over a several

day period.

For more information about ASP balancing, see the Hierarchical Storage Management Use, SC41-5351.

Restrictions:

v You must have all object (*ALLOBJ) special authority to run this command.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 319

Page 336: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

TYPE Balance type *CAPACITY, *USAGE, *HSM, *MOVDTA, *ENDALC,

*RSMALC

Optional,

Positional 2

ASP ASP number Single values: *ALLOther values (up to 32 repetitions): 1-32

Optional,

Positional 1

ASPDEV ASP device Single values: *ALLAVLOther values (up to 32 repetitions): Name

Optional

UNIT Storage unit Values (up to 300 repetitions): Integer Optional

TIMLMT Time limit 1-9999, *NOMAX Optional,

Positional 3

Top

Balance type (TYPE)

Specifies the type of auxiliary storage pool (ASP) balancing operation to be done.

Note: A value must always be specified for this parameter.

*CAPACITY

The capacity balance function will be started for the specified ASP (ASP or ASPDEV parameter).

*USAGE

The usage balance function will be started for the specified ASP (ASP or ASPDEV parameter) .

*HSM The hierarchical storage management balance function will be started for the specified ASP (ASP

or ASPDEV parameter).

*MOVDTA

Data will be moved off all units marked *ENDALC to other units in the same ASP. The Check

ASP Balance (CHKASPBAL) command can be used to determine which units are marked

*ENDALC.

*ENDALC

New allocations will no longer go to the specific units (UNIT parameter). However, the system

will use these units for new allocations to avoid ’Out of storage’ conditions.

*RSMALC

Resume allocations to the specified units (UNIT parameter). If the unit has a much lower

percentage used than other units in the ASP, run the STRASPBAL command again specifying

TYPE(*CAPACITY) for the ASP that contains the unit. This will keep new allocations balanced

across the units in the ASP, instead of going mostly to this unit.

Top

Auxiliary storage pool ID (ASP)

Specifies the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) for which the ASP balancing function is to be started.

Note: A value must be specified for either the ASP number (ASP) parameter or the ASP device

(ASPDEV) parameter if *CAPACITY, *USAGE, or *HSM is specified for the Balance type (TYPE)

parameter.

320 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 337: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Single values

*ALL ASP balancing will be started for the system ASP (ASP number 1) and all basic ASPs (ASP

numbers 2-32) defined to the system.

Other values (up to 32 repetitions)

1-32 Specify the number of the ASP for which ASP balancing is to be started.

Top

ASP device (ASPDEV)

Specifies the name of the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) device for which the ASP balancing is to be

started.

Note: A value must be specified for either the ASP number (ASP) parameter or the ASP device

(ASPDEV) parameter if *CAPACITY, *USAGE, or *HSM is specified for the Balance type (TYPE)

parameter.

Single values

*ALLAVL

ASP balancing will be started for all ASP devices that currently have a status of ’Available’.

Other values (up to 32 repetitions)

name Specify the name of the independent ASP device for which ASP balancing is to be started.

Top

Storage unit (UNIT)

Specifies the unit number for which new allocations are to be ended (if *ENDALC is specified for the

Balance type (TYPE) parameter) or for which new allocations are to resume (if *RSMALC is specified for

the TYPE parameter). Specifying TYPE(*MOVDTA) will start moving data off the units marked

*ENDALC.

Note: A value must be specified for this parameter if *ENDALC or *RSMALC is specified for the TYPE

parameter.

integer

Specify the unit number for which new allocations are to either end (if *ENDALC is specified) or

resume (if *RSMALC is specified). Up to 300 unit numbers may be specified.

Top

Time limit (TIMLMT)

Specifies the amount of time, in minutes, that the ASP balancing function will be allowed to run. When

the time limit is reached, the function will end. For example, if ASP(*ALL) is specified and the machine

has four ASPs configured and TIMLMT(60) is specified, four balance functions are started and each can

run 60 minutes. If the balancing of any ASP has not completed after 60 minutes, it will be forced to end.

This allows you to do ASP balancing incrementally. The balance function will not run across an IPL.

Note: A value must be specified for this parameter if *CAPACITY, *USAGE, *HSM, or *MOVDTA is

specified for the Balance type (TYPE) parameter.

Start ASP Balance (STRASPBAL) 321

Page 338: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*NOMAX

There is no time limit for the balance function. For a large ASP the balance function can take a

long time to complete. If you start the balance function with *NOMAX and you want to force the

function to end, you can use the End ASP Balance (ENDASPBAL) command.

1-9999 Specify the number of minutes that the balance function will be allowed to run.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Starting ASP Balancing for ASP 1

STRASPBAL ASP(1) TIMLMT(*NOMAX) TYPE(*CAPACITY)

This command starts the *CAPACITY ASP balance function for ASP 1. The balance function will run until

the capacity for each of the units has been balanced.

Example 2: Starting ASP Balancing with a Time Limit

STRASPBAL ASP(*ALL) TIMLMT(60) TYPE(*USAGE)

This command starts the *USAGE ASP balance function for the system ASP and each configured basic

ASP for which the TRCASPBAL command has been run. Each balance function will have a time limit of

sixty minutes. After sixty minutes, any balance functions which have not completed will be ended.

Example 3: Starting ASP Balancing for an ASP Device

STRASPBAL ASPDEV(MYASP1) TIMLMT(*NOMAX) TYPE(*CAPACITY)

This command starts the *CAPACITY ASP balance function for the ASP device named MYASP1. The

balance function will run until complete.

Example 4: Preparing to Remove Units

STRASPBAL UNIT(11 12 13) TYPE(*ENDALC)

STRASPBAL TYPE(*MOVDTA)

The first command marks units 11, 12 and 13 to no longer receive new allocations. The second command

begins to move data off the marked units. It is recommended that the *MOVDTA ASP balancing function

be done during an off-peak time.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

322 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 339: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF18AB

ASP balancing for ASP &1 already started.

CPF18AE

ASP &1 does not contain trace data.

CPF18B1

Trace function currently running for ASP &1.

CPF18AD

ASP &1 must contain more than a single unit.

CPF18AF

ASP &1 does not contain mixed unit types.

CPF18B3

Balance type not valid for ASP &1.

CPF1890

*ALLOBJ authority required for requested operation.

CPF9829

Auxiliary storage pool &1 not found.

Top

Start ASP Balance (STRASPBAL) 323

Page 340: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

324 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 341: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start CHT Server (STRCHTSVR)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Clustered Hash Table Server (STRCHTSVR) command is used to define a clustered hash table

server on each cluster node specified in the NODE parameter. Successful completion of this command

results in a job being started on each node defined in the cluster. Each node specified on the NODE

parameter will be in the clustered hash table servers domain.

The clustered hash table server enables sharing and replicating data between cluster nodes using the

Clustered Hash Table APIs. The data is stored within the clustered hash table server in non-persistent

storage.

You can use the End Clustered Hash Table Server (ENDCHTSVR) command to end the clustered hash

table server.

Restrictions:

v Cluster Resource Service must be active on the local node.

v All nodes specified in the NODE parameter must have Cluster Resource Services active.

v Requesting user profile must exist on all nodes specified in the NODE parameter.

v Requesting user must have change (*CHANGE) authority to the authorization list, if specified, on the

current node as well as all nodes specified for the Node (NODE) parameter to perform the start.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

SERVER Server Communications name Required,

Positional 1

RSPTIMO Request response timeout 1-300, 60 Optional

AUTL Authorization list Name, *SERVER Optional

NODE Node Values (up to 20 repetitions): Communications name,

*LOCAL

Optional

Top

Server (SERVER)

Specifies the clustered hash table server to be started.

This is a required parameter.

name Specify the name of the clustered hash table server to be started.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 325

Page 342: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Request response timeout (RSPTIMO)

Specifies the amount of time (in seconds) that the clustered hash table server has to complete a retrieve

request. An error will be returned to the requester of the retrieve if the clustered hash table server does

not get a response before the specified length of time. This parameter is ignored when the current cluster

version is 3 or greater.

60 The clustered hash table server starting on the nodes specified on the NODE parameter will wait

60 seconds for a response.

1-300 Specify the number of seconds the clustered hash table server waits for a response before

returning an error.

Top

Authorization list (AUTL)

Specifies an authorization list for the clustered hash table server. This defines the list of users authorized

to start, end and connect to the clustered hash table server. An authorization list by the same name must

exist on all nodes in the NODE parameter. The same authorization list name must be specified when

starting a clustered hash table server that is already active on other nodes in the cluster.

*SERVER

Use the same authorization list as the clustered hash table server being started if it is already

active on one of the nodes in the cluster. If the server does not exist in the cluster and this value

is specified then no special authority will be needed to start, end or connect to the server. This

value must be specified if the current cluster version is 2 or less.

name Specify the name of the authorization list which defines the list of users authorized to the

clustered hash table server. Users must have change (*CHANGE) authority to the named

authorization list to start and end the clustered hash table server. Users must have use (*USE)

authority to the named authorization list to connect to the clustered hash table server.

Management of the authorization list is the users responsibility.

Top

Node (NODE)

Specifies the list of cluster nodes that compose the clustered hash table domain. A server job will be

started on each of the cluster nodes specified. If the clustered hash table server already exists in the

cluster, the cluster nodes specified will be added to the clustered hash table domain and a job will be

started on the node specified. Nodes in this list must be unique.

The nodes must be active in the cluster.

*LOCAL

A clustered hash table server job will be started on the local node only. *LOCAL can be specified

only once.

name Specify the name of each cluster node that defines the clustered hash table domain. Up to 20

cluster nodes can be specified.

Top

326 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 343: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Examples

Example 1: Starting a Local Clustered Hash Table Server

STRCHTSVR SERVER(CHTSVR1)

This command starts clustered hash table server CHTSVR1 only on the local node. There is no authority

restriction on the clustered hash table server.

Example 2: Starting a Clustered Hash Table Server on Multiple Nodes

STRCHTSVR SERVER(CHTSVR2) AUTL(AUTHLIST) NODE(FRED BARNEY)

This command starts clustered hash table server CHTSVR2 on nodes FRED and BARNEY. The clustered

hash table server has access restricted by authorization list AUTHLIST.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPFBD02

Start clustered hash table server failed.

Top

Start CHT Server (STRCHTSVR) 327

Page 344: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

328 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 345: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command starts the cleanup operation, if allowed. Cleanup is allowed if

*YES is specified for the Allow cleanup (ALWCLNUP) parameter of the Change Cleanup (CHGCLNUP)

command.

A batch job is submitted to the job queue specified on the Change Cleanup (CHGCLNUP) command if

cleanup is allowed. This cleanup control job submits individual batch jobs to the same job queue each

day These batch jobs do the actual cleanup of the items specified on the CHGCLNUP command.

More information is in the Basic system operations topic collection in the i5/OS Information Center at

http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Restriction: You must have job control (*JOBCTL) special authority and have at least *USE authority to

the QPGMR user profile to use this command.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

OPTION Option *SCHED, *IMMED Optional,

Positional 1

Top

Option (OPTION)

Specifies when the cleanup operation is started.

*SCHED

The cleanup operation is started as scheduled for the Time cleanup starts each day (STRTIME)

parameter of the Change Cleanup (CHGCLNUP) command or as scheduled on the Change

Cleanup Options display.

*IMMED

The cleanup operation starts immediately.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 329

Page 346: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Examples

Example 1: Starting Cleanup Operation as Scheduled

STRCLNUP

This command starts the cleanup operation as specified.

Example 2: Starting Cleanup Operation as Specified on CHGCLNUP Command

STRCLNUP OPTION(*SCHED)

This command starts the cleanup operation as specified on the STRTIME parameter of the Change

Cleanup (CHGCLNUP) command or on the Change Cleanup Options panel.

Example 3: Starting Cleanup Operation Immediately

STRCLNUP OPTION(*IMMED)

This command starts the cleanup operation immediately.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF1E2A

Unexpected error in QSYSSCD job.

CPF1E2B

Power scheduler and cleanup options not found.

CPF1E3A

Not authorized to start cleanup.

CPF1E3C

Job queue &2/&1 not found.

CPF1E3D

Library &1 for JOBQ parameter not found.

CPF1E33

Cleanup options or power schedule in use by another user.

CPF1E34

Error occurred starting &1 job.

CPF1E36

Cleanup has not been started.

CPF1E37

Cleanup has already been started or is scheduled to run.

CPF1E38

Cleanup not allowed to run.

330 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 347: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF1E39

Not authorized to job queue used for cleanup.

CPF1E99

Unexpected error occurred.

Top

Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) 331

Page 348: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

332 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 349: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Communications Server (STRCMNSVR)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Communications Server (STRCMNSVR) command is used to start the target display station

pass-through server or the display station pass-through utilities server. The target display station

pass-through server processes display station pass-through, System i5 Access work station function

(WSF), and other 5250 emulation programs on programmable workstations. The display station

pass-through utilities server can reduce the time required to establish a session.

Restrictions You must have job control (*JOBCTL) special authority to use this command.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

SERVER Server type *PASTHR, *UTILSVR Optional,

Positional 1

NBRPASTHR Number of servers 1-100, *SYSVAL Optional,

Positional 2

Top

Server type (SERVER)

Specifies the type of server to be started.

*PASTHR

The target display station pass-through server is started in the QSYSWRK subsystem.

*UTILSVR

The display station pass-through utilities server is started in the QSYSWRK subsystem.

Top

Number of servers (NBRPASTHR)

Specifies the number of target display station pass-through server jobs to be started. This parameter is

only valid when *PASTHR is specified for the type of server (SERVER) parameter.

*SYSVAL

Specifies that the system value (QPASTHRSVR) is to be used to determine the number of servers.

1-100 Specify the number of servers. This will override the current system value (QPASTHRSVR).

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 333

Page 350: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Examples

Example 1: Starting Target Display Station Pass-through Server

STRCMNSVR

This command starts the target display station pass-through server. System value QPASTHRSVR is used

to determine how many server jobs are started.

Example 2: Starting Display Station Pass-through Utilities Server

STRCMNSVR SERVER(*UTILSVR)

This command starts the display station pass-through utilities server. The time required to establish new

sessions can be reduced.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF8946

Unexpected error ending target display station pass-through servers.

Top

334 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 351: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Communications Trace (STRCMNTRC)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Communications Trace (STRCMNTRC) command initiates a communications trace for a

specified line, a network interface or a network server description.

A communications trace continues until:

v The End Communications Trace (ENDCMNTRC) command is run.

v The Communications Trace function of the Start System Service Tools (STRSST) command is used to

end the trace.

v A physical line problem causes the trace to end.

v TRCFULL(*STOPTRC) is specified and the buffer becomes full.

v Automatically by the watch for trace event functionality.

Restrictions:

v The user must have *USE authority to the line, network interface, or network server to be traced.

v To use this command, you must have service (*SERVICE) special authority, or be authorized to the

Service trace function of i5/OS through System i Navigator’s Application Administration support. The

Change Function Usage (CHGFCNUSG) command, with a function ID of QIBM_SERVICE_TRACE, can

also be used to change the list of users that are allowed to perform trace operations.

v The following user profiles have authority to this command:

– QSECOFR

– QSRVv When the Watched job (WCHJOB) parameter is specified, the issuer of the command must be running

under a user profile which is the same as the job user identity of the job being watched, or the issuer

of the command must be running under a user profile which has job control (*JOBCTL) special

authority. Job control (*JOBCTL) special authority is also required if a generic user name is specified for

the WCHJOB parameter.

v If you specify a generic user name in the WCHJOB parameter, you must have all object (*ALLOBJ)

special authority, or be authorized to the Watch any job function of i5/OS through System i

Navigator’s Application Administration support. The Change Function Usage (CHGFCNUSG)

command, with a function ID of QIBM_WATCH_ANY_JOB, can also be used to change the list of users

that are allowed to start and end watch operations.

v You must have operational (*OBJOPR) and execute (*EXECUTE) authorities to the user exit program if

specified in Trace program (TRCPGM) parameter, and execute (*EXECUTE) authority to the library

where the program is located.

v You must have use (*USE) authority to the message queues specified in Watched message queue

(WCHMSGQ) parameter, and use (*USE) authority to the library where the message queue is located.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 335

Page 352: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

CFGOBJ Configuration object Name Required,

Positional 1

CFGTYPE Type *LIN, *NWI, *NWS Required,

Positional 2

MAXSTG Buffer size Integer, *MIN, *MAX, 128K, 256K, 2M, 4M, 6M, 8M, 16M,

32M, 64M, 128M, 256M, 512M, 1G

Optional

DTADIR Data direction *SND, *RCV, *BOTH Optional

TRCFULL Trace full *WRAP, *STOPTRC Optional

USRDTA Number of user bytes to

trace

Single values: *CALC, *MAXOther values: Element list

Optional

Element 1: Beginning bytes Decimal number

Element 2: Ending bytes Decimal number, *CALC

CMNTRCOPTS Communications trace

options

*ALLDTA, *RMTCTL, *RMTMAC, *RMTSAP, *LCLSAP,

*IPPCLNUM, *RMTIPADR

Optional

DDITRCOPTS DDI trace options *ALLDTA, *RMTCTL, *RMTMAC, *RMTSAP, *LCLSAP,

*IPPCLNUM, *RMTIPADR

Optional

RMTCTL Remote controller Name Optional

RMTMAC Remote MAC address Hexadecimal value Optional

RMTSAP Remote SAP Hexadecimal value Optional

LCLSAP Local SAP Hexadecimal value Optional

IPPCLNUM IP protocol number 0-255, *ICMP, *IGMP, *TCP, *EGP, *IGP, *UDP Optional

RMTIPADR Remote IP address Character value Optional

LMITRCOPTS LMI trace options *ALLDTA, *NOLMI, *LMIONLY Optional

NWSTRCOPTS NWS trace options *NETBIOS, *INTERNAL, *TCPIP Optional

WCHMSG Watch for message Single values: *NONEOther values (up to 5 repetitions): Element list

Optional

Element 1: Message

identifier

Name

Element 2: Comparison data Character value, *NONE

Element 3: Compare against *MSGDTA, *FROMPGM, *TOPGM

WCHMSGQ Watched message queue Values (up to 3 repetitions): Element list Optional

Element 1: Message queue Single values: *SYSOPR, *JOBLOG, *HSTLOGOther values: Qualified object name

Qualifier 1: Message queue Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL

WCHJOB Watched job Single values: *Other values (up to 5 repetitions): Element list

Optional

Element 1: Job name Qualified job name

Qualifier 1: Job name Generic name, name

Qualifier 2: User Generic name, name

Qualifier 3: Number 000001-999999, *ALL

336 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 353: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

WCHLICLOG Watch for LIC log entry Single values: *NONEOther values (up to 5 repetitions): Element list

Optional

Element 1: Major code Character value, *ALL

Element 2: Minor code Character value, *ALL

Element 3: Comparison data Character value, *NONE

Element 4: Compare against *ALL, *TDENBR, *TASKNAME, *SVRTYPE, *JOBNAME,

*JOBUSR, *JOBNBR, *THDID, *EXCPID, *MODNAME,

*MODRUNAME, *MODEPNAME, *MODOFFSET,

*MODTSP

WCHPAL Watch for PAL entry Single values: *NONEOther values (up to 5 repetitions): Element list

Optional

Element 1: System reference

code

Character value, *ALL

Element 2: Comparison data Character value, *NONE

Element 3: Compare against *RSCNAME, *RSCTYPE, *RSCMODEL

WCHTIMO Length of time to watch 1-43200, *NOMAX Optional

TRCPGM Trace program Single values: *NONEOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Trace program Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL

TRCPGMITV Time interval 1-9999, *NONE Optional

RUNPTY Run priority 1-99, 25 Optional

TEXT Trace description Character value, *BLANK Optional

Top

Configuration object (CFGOBJ)

Specifies the configuration object to be traced. The object is either a line description, a network interface

description, or a network server description.

name Specify the name of the configuration object to be traced.

Top

Type (CFGTYPE)

Specifies the type of configuration description to trace.

*LIN The configuration object is a line description.

*NWI The configuration object is a network interface description.

*NWS The configuration object is a network server description.

Top

Buffer size (MAXSTG)

Specifies the trace buffer size.

128K A trace buffer of 128 kilobytes is used.

*MIN The minimum trace buffer size is used.

Start Communications Trace (STRCMNTRC) 337

Page 354: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*MAX The maximum trace buffer size is used.

buffer-size

Specify the trace buffer size. Valid buffer sizes may be specified either as number of kilobytes, or

as one of the following special values which has a one-letter suffix of ’K’ for kilobytes, ’M’ for

megabytes, or ’G’ for gigabytes: 128K, 256K, 2M, 4M, 6M, 8M, 16M, 32M, 64M, 128M, 256M,

512M, 1G. The minimum trace buffer size is 128 kilobytes.

Top

Data direction (DTADIR)

Specifies the communication data to trace.

Note: For network server description traces, this parameter is ignored and *BOTH is used.

*BOTH

Data sent and received by the system is traced.

*SND Data sent by the system is traced.

*RCV Data received by the system is traced.

Top

Trace full (TRCFULL)

Specifies the action the system takes when the trace buffer is full of data.

*WRAP

The trace continues and overwrites the data in the buffer.

*STOPTRC

The trace stops.

Top

Number of user bytes to trace (USRDTA)

Specifies the amount of beginning and ending user data to trace.

Note: For network server description traces and binary synchronous lines, this parameter is ignored and

*CALC is used.

Single values

*CALC

The system determines the number of beginning and ending bytes to be traced. For LAN lines,

this is the first 100 bytes. For other line types, the whole frame is traced.

*MAX Trace as much of frames as possible. For non-LAN, *MAX will be the equivalent of *CALC.

Element 1: Beginning bytes

decimal-number

Specify the number of bytes of beginning user data to be traced.

Element 2: Ending bytes

338 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 355: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*CALC

The system determines the number of ending bytes to be traced.

decimal-number

Specify the number of bytes of ending user data to be traced.

Top

Communications trace options (CMNTRCOPTS)

Specifies the type of data to be traced.

*ALLDTA

All data is traced. No filtering is specified.

*RMTCTL

The data traveling to and from a remote controller is traced.

*RMTMAC

The data traveling to and from a remote medium access control (MAC) address is traced.

*RMTSAP

The data traveling to and from a remote service access point (SAP) is traced.

*LCLSAP

The data traveling to and from a local service access point (SAP) is traced.

*IPPCLNUM

The data within an Internet Protocol (IP) number is traced.

*RMTIPADR

The data traveling to and from a remote IP address is traced.

Top

DDI trace options (DDITRCOPTS)

The DDITRCOPTS parameter is supported for upward compatibility of CL programs which contain the

STRCMNTRC command. The CMNTRCOPTS parameter provides all of the same function as

DDITRCOPTS and should be used instead of DDITRCOPTS.

*ALLDTA

All data is traced. No filtering is specified.

*RMTCTL

The data traveling to and from a remote controller is traced.

*RMTMAC

The data traveling to and from a remote medium access control (MAC) address is traced.

*RMTSAP

The data traveling to and from a remote service access point (SAP) is traced.

*LCLSAP

The data traveling to and from a local service access point (SAP) is traced.

*IPPCLNUM

The data within an Internet Protocol (IP) number is traced.

*RMTIPADR

The data traveling to and from a remote IP address is traced.

Start Communications Trace (STRCMNTRC) 339

Page 356: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Remote controller (RMTCTL)

Specifies the remote controller receiving and sending the data to be traced.

name Specify the name of the remote controller.

Top

Remote MAC address (RMTMAC)

Specifies the remote medium access control address receiving and sending the data to be traced.

hexadecimal-value

Specify the remote medium access control address.

Top

Remote SAP (RMTSAP)

Specifies the remote service access point receiving and sending the data to be traced.

hexadecimal-value

Specify the remote service access point.

Top

Local SAP (LCLSAP)

Specifies the local service access point receiving and sending the data to be traced.

hexadecimal-value

Specify the local service access point.

Top

IP protocol number (IPPCLNUM)

Specifies the Internet Protocol (IP) number to be traced.

*ICMP

The Internet control message group is traced.

*IGMP

The Internet group management group is traced.

*TCP The transmission control group is traced.

*EGP The exterior gateway protocol group is traced.

*IGP A private interior gateway group is traced.

*UDP The user datagram group is traced.

0-255 Specify the Internet Protocol (IP) number to trace.

Top

340 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 357: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Remote IP address (RMTIPADR)

Specifies the remote Internet Protocol (IP) address to be traced.

character-value

Specify the remote IP address to be traced.

Top

LMI trace options (LMITRCOPTS)

Specifies the type of data to be placed in the trace buffer.

*ALLDTA

All data, including the local management interface (LMI), is placed in the trace buffer.

*NOLMI

All data, except LMI data, is placed in the trace buffer.

*LMIONLY

Only LMI data is placed in the trace buffer.

Top

NWS trace options (NWSTRCOPTS)

Specifies the type of data to be placed in the trace buffer.

*NETBIOS

All NetBIOS data is placed in the trace buffer.

*INTERNAL

The communications processor operating system data is placed in the trace buffer.

*TCPIP

All TCP/IP data for network server description applications is placed in the trace buffer.

Top

Watch for message (WCHMSG)

Specifies up to five message identifiers which are to be watched for. If a value other than *NONE is

specified, you must specify where to watch for the message on the WCHMSGQ parameter. When the

watched for message is added to the specified message queue or log, the trace exit program is called; if

no trace exit program is defined, the trace stops.

Single values

*NONE

No messages will be watched for.

Element 1: Message identifier

name Specify the 7-character message identifier to be watched for.

Element 2: Comparison data

Specify comparison data to be used if a message matching the specified message ID is added to the

specified message queue or log. If the message data, the ″From program″ or the ″To program″ includes

Start Communications Trace (STRCMNTRC) 341

Page 358: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

the specified text, the watched for condition is true. If the message data, the ″From program″ or the ″To

program″ does not contain the specified text, the trace function continues.

*NONE

No comparison data is specified. If a message matching the specified message ID is added to the

specified message queue or log, the watched for condition is true.

character-value

Specify the text string used to compare against the message data, the ″From program″ or the ″To

program″ of the watched for message. This text is case sensitive and can be quoted in order to

specify imbedded or trailing blanks.

Element 3: Compare against

Specify which part of the message the comparison data specified for element 2 is to be compared against.

*MSGDATA

The comparison data will be compared against the message replacement data.

*FROMPGM

The comparison data will be compared against the name of the program sending the message, or

the name of the ILE program that contains the procedure sending the message.

*TOPGM

The comparison data will be compared against the name of the program the message was sent to,

or the name of the ILE program that contains the procedure the message was sent to.

Top

Watched message queue (WCHMSGQ)

Specifies where to watch for the message identifiers specified on the WCHMSG parameter. You can

specify to watch the message being added to the system operator message queue, the history log, other

message queues, and job logs. Up to three message queues or special values can be specified.

Element 1: Message queue

Single values

*SYSOPR

Watch messages added to the system operator message queue (QSYSOPR message queue in

library QSYS).

*JOBLOG

Watch messages added to the job logs of the jobs specified for the Watched job (WCHJOB)

parameter.

*HSTLOG

Watch messages added to the history log (QHST message queue in library QSYS).

Qualifier 1: Message queue

name Specify the name of the message queue to watch.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is

found.

342 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 359: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

name Specify the name of the library where the message queue is located.

Top

Watched job (WCHJOB)

Specifies the job whose job log is watched for the messages specified on the WCHMSG parameter. The

specified job will only be watched if *JOBLOG is specified on the WCHMSGQ parameter. Up to five job

names may be specified.

Single values

* Only the job log of the job that issued this trace command is watched.

Element 1: Job name

Qualifier 1: Job name

generic-name

Specify the generic name of the job to be watched. A generic name is a character string of

one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. The asterisk

substitutes for any valid characters. A generic job name specifies all jobs with job names

that begin with the generic prefix.

name Specify the name of the job to be watched.

Qualifier 2: User

generic-name

Specify the generic name of the user name of the job to be watched. A generic name is a

character string of one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*.

The asterisk substitutes for any valid characters. A generic user name specifies all jobs

with the specified job name and with user names that begin with the generic prefix.

name Specify the user name of the job to be watched.

Qualifier 3: Number

*ALL All jobs with the specified job name and user name are watched.

000001-999999

Specify the job number to further qualify the job name and user name. You cannot

specify a job number if a generic job name or a generic user name qualifier is specified.

Top

Start Communications Trace (STRCMNTRC) 343

Page 360: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Watch for LIC log entry (WCHLICLOG)

Specifies up to five licensed internal code (LIC) log entry identifiers which are to be watched for. Each

LIC log entry contains a major and a minor code. The watched for condition will be met if a LIC log

entry is added that matches the specified major and minor codes and any comparison data specified.

When the watched for log entry is added to the LIC log, the trace exit program is called, even when the

comparison data specified does not match; if no trace exit program is defined, the trace stops.

Single values

*NONE

No LIC log entries will be watched for.

Element 1: Major code

*ALL Any LIC log entry major code will be considered to be a match. If *ALL is specified for the major

code, you cannot specify *ALL for the LIC log entry minor code.

character-value

Specify the LIC log major code to be watched for. You can specify either a hexadecimal digit or a

question mark for each character in the four-digit code. A question mark is a wildcard character

that will match any digit in that position. Up to three wildcard characters can be specified.

Element 2: Minor code

*ALL Any LIC log entry minor code will be considered to be a match. If *ALL is specified for the

minor code, you cannot specify *ALL for the LIC log entry major code.

character-value

Specify the LIC log minor code to be watched for. You can specify either a hexadecimal digit or a

question mark for each character in the four-digit code. A question mark is a wildcard character

that will match any digit in that position. Up to three wildcard characters can be specified.

Element 3: Comparison data

Specify comparison data to be used if a log entry matching the specified major and minor codes is added

to the licensed internal code (LIC) log. If this text is found in the LIC log entry data fields of the watched

for log entry, the watched for condition is true. If this text is not found in the LIC log entry data fields of

the watched for log entry and no exit program is specified on the TRCPGM parameter, the trace function

continues. If the log entry matches the specified major and minor codes and an exit program is specified

on the TRCPGM parameter, but the entry data does not contain the specified text, the exit program is

called to determine if the trace should continue or stop.

*NONE

No comparison data is specified. If a LIC log entry matching the specified major and minor codes

is added to the LIC log, the watched for condition is true.

character-value

Specify the text string used to compare against the entry data of the watched for log entry. If this

text is found in the LIC log entry data field specified for element 4, the watch condition is

considered to be true. This text is case sensitive. If *ALL is specified in the LIC log compare

against field, the LIC log fields which will be compared are TDE number, task name, server type,

job name, user ID, job number, thread ID, exception ID, LIC module compile timestamp, LIC

module offset, LIC module RU name, LIC module name, LIC module entry point name. The

comparison data cannot be used to match across two fields, and can match an entire field or a

substring of any field.

When watching for an exception ID, all four hexadecimal digits of the exception ID must be

specified. Also, the prefix MCH may be specified if you want to compare only against the

exception ID field and avoid possible substring matches with the other fields.

344 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 361: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Element 4: Compare against

Specify which part of the LIC log the comparison data specified for element 3 is to be compared against.

*ALL The LIC log comparison data will be compared against all the fields described below.

*TDENBR

The LIC log comparison data will be compared against the number of the task dispatching

element (TDE) which requested the LIC log entry.

*TASKNAME

The LIC log comparison data will be compared against the name of the task which requested the

LIC log entry. Task name is blank (hex 40s) if the LIC log entry is not requested by a task.

*SVRTYPE

The LIC log comparison data will be compared against the type of server that requested the LIC

log entry. Server type is blank (hex 40s) if the LIC log entry is not requested by a server.

*JOBNAME

The LIC log comparison data will be compared against the name of the job which requested the

LIC log entry. LIC job name is blank (hex 40s) if the LIC log entry is not requested by a job.

*JOBUSR

The LIC log comparison data will be compared against the user name of the job which requested

the LIC log entry. LIC user name is blank (hex 40s) if the LIC log entry is not requested by a job.

*JOBNBR

The LIC log comparison data will be compared against the job number (000001-999999) to further

qualify the job name and user name of the job which requested the LIC log entry. LIC job number

is blank (hex 40s) if the LIC log entry is not requested by a job.

*THDID

The LIC log comparison data will be compared against the thread which requested the LIC log

entry. Thread identifier is binary zeros if the LIC log entry is not requested by a thread.

*EXCPID

The LIC log comparison data will be compared against the exception that caused the LIC log

entry to be requested. This is a 2-byte hexadecimal field formed by concatenating to the

high-order 1-byte exception group number a low-order 1-byte exception subtype number.

Exception identifier is binary zeros if the LIC log entry is not requested as a result of an

exception.

*MODNAME

The LIC log comparison data will be compared against the LIC module name which requested

the LIC log entry. If the module name is greater than 64 characters, the LIC module name is

truncated to 64 characters.

*MODRUNAME

The LIC log comparison data will be compared against the LIC module replacement unit name.

LIC module RU name is always in upper case EBCDIC.

*MODEPNAME

The LIC log comparison data will be compared against the name of the entry point which

requested the LIC log entry. If the entry point name is greater than 128 characters, the LIC

module entry point name is truncated to 128 characters.

*MODOFFSET

The LIC log comparison data will be compared against the byte offset into the LIC module text

which requested the LIC log entry.

*MODTSP

The LIC log comparison data will be compared against the timestamp of when the LIC module

was compiled. The format for this field is the system time-stamp format.

Start Communications Trace (STRCMNTRC) 345

Page 362: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Watch for PAL entry (WCHPAL)

Specifies up to five Product Activity Log (PAL) entries which are to be watched for. When the watched

for PAL occurs, the trace exit program is called; if no trace exit program is defined, the trace stops.

Single values

*NONE

No PAL entries will be watched for.

Other values (up to 5 repetitions)

Element 1: System reference code

*ALL Any system reference code will be considered to be a match.

character-value

Specify the system reference code (SRC) to be watched for. You can specify either a hexadecimal

digit or a question mark for each character in the eight-digit code. A question mark is a wildcard

character that will match any digit in that position. Up to seven wildcard characters can be

specified. You can also specify a generic SRC that is a character string of one or more characters

followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. The asterisk substitutes for any valid characters. A

generic SRC specifies all PAL entries with system reference codes that begin with the generic

prefix.

Element 2: Comparison data

Specify comparison data to be used if a PAL entry matching the specified system reference code

occurs. If the field specified in element 3 matches the specified text, the watched for condition is

true. If the field specified in element 3 does not match the specified text, the watch function just

continues.

*NONE

No comparison data is specified. If a PAL entry matching the specified system reference code

occurs, the watched for condition is true.

character-value

Specify the text string used to compare against the field specified in element 3 of the watched for

PAL entry. This text is case sensitive.

You can specify question mark (?) and asterisk (*) wildcard characters in the text string. A

question mark is a single-character wildcard and will match any character in the same position.

For example, ’??123’ will match any value that is five characters long and ends with ’123’.

Multiple question mark wildcard characters can be specified for the comparison data value.

An asterisk is a multiple-character wildcard character. You can specify a single asterisk wildcard

character at the end of the comparison data value. For example, ’ABC*’ will match any value that

begins with the letters ’ABC’.

Element 3: Compare against

Specify which part of the PAL entry the comparison data specified for element 2 is to be

compared against.

346 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 363: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*RSCNAME

The comparison data will be compared against the name of the physical device that has the entry

in the log. A resource name is assigned at first by the system, but may have been changed to a

new value by a user.

*RSCTYPE

The comparison data will be compared against the number or word used to identify a product.

*RSCMODEL

The comparison data will be compared against the numbers or letters used to identify the feature

level of a product with a given type.

Top

Length of time to watch (WCHTIMO)

Specifies the time limit, in minutes, for watching for a message or a licensed internal code (LIC) log entry

or a Product Activity Log (PAL) entry. When the specified amount of time has elapsed, the trace exit

program is called (if one was specified on the TRCPGM parameter), the trace is ended, and message

CPI3999 is sent to the history log.

*NOMAX

There is no time limit for watching for a particular message or LIC log entry or PAL entry.

1-43200

Specify the number of minutes that the trace will remain active while none of the watched for

conditions have been met.

Top

Trace program (TRCPGM)

Specifies the program to be called for user-defined trace commands and procedures.

The trace program will be called:

v Before the application trace starts.

v After a match of a message identifier specified for the WCHMSG parameter, or a match of a Licensed

Internal Code (LIC) log entry specified for the WCHLICLOG parameter, or a match of a Product

Activity Log (PAL) entry specified for the WCHPAL parameter occurs.

v When the time interval specified on the TRCPGMITV parameter is reached.

v When the length of time to watch specified on WCHTIMO parameter is reached.

There are three input parameters and one output parameter associated with the trace program. The four

parameters are required:

1 Trace option setting Input Char(10)

2 Reserved Input Char(10)

3 Error detected Output Char(10)

4 Comparison data Input Char(*)

Allowed values for the ″Trace option setting″ parameter are:

*ON The watch for trace facility is starting when the collection of trace information is started.

*MSGID

A match on a message id specified on WCHMSG parameter occurred.

Start Communications Trace (STRCMNTRC) 347

Page 364: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*LICLOG

A match on a LIC log specified on the WCHLICLOG parameter occurred.

*CMPDATA

The major and minor code of a LIC log matched, but the comparison data did not.

*INTVAL

The time interval specified on TRCPGMITV parameter is elapsed.

*WCHTIMO

The length of time to watch specified on WCHTIMO parameter is elapsed.

*PAL A match on a PAL and any associated comparison data specified on the WCHPAL parameter

occurred.

The ″Reserved″ parameter must be set to blanks.

Allowed values for the ″Error detected″ parameter are:

*CONTINUE

The trace and the watch for trace event facility will continue running.

*STOP

The trace and the watch for trace event facility will be ended.

*ERROR

Error detected by customer trace program.

Allowed values for the ″Comparison data″ parameter when *MSGID is specified for the ″Trace option

setting″ parameter will be the following structure:

OFFSET TYPE FIELD

Dec Hex

0 0 BINARY(4) Length of trace information

4 4 CHAR(7) Message ID

11 B CHAR(9) Reserved

20 14 BINARY(4) Offset to comparison data

24 18 BINARY(4) Length of comparison data

* * CHAR(*) Message comparison data

Allowed values for the ″Comparison data″ parameter when *LICLOG or *CMPDATA is specified for the

″Trace option setting″ parameter will be the following structure:

OFFSET TYPE FIELD

Dec Hex

0 0 BINARY(4) Length of trace information

4 4 CHAR(4) LIC Log major code

8 8 CHAR(4) LIC Log minor code

12 C CHAR(8) LIC Log identifier

20 14 BINARY(4) Offset to comparison data

24 18 BINARY(4) Length of comparison data

* * CHAR(*) LIC log comparison data

Allowed values for the ″Comparison data″ parameter when *ON, *INTVAL or *WCHTIMO is specified

for the ″Trace option setting″ parameter will be the following structure:

OFFSET TYPE FIELD

Dec Hex

0 0 BINARY(4) Length of trace information (always 4).

348 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 365: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Allowed values for the ″Comparison data″ parameter when *PAL is specified for the ″Trace option

setting″ parameter will be the following structure:

OFFSET TYPE FIELD

Dec Hex

0 0 BINARY(4) Length of watch information

4 4 CHAR(8) System reference code

12 C CHAR(10) Device name

22 16 CHAR(4) Device type

26 1A CHAR(4) Model

30 1E CHAR(15) Serial number

45 2D CHAR(10) Resource name

55 37 CHAR(8) Log identifier

63 3F CHAR(8) PAL timestamp

71 47 CHAR(4) Reference code

75 4B CHAR(8) Secondary code

83 53 CHAR(8) Table identifier

91 5B CHAR(1) Reserved

92 5C BINARY(4) Sequence

96 60 BINARY(4) Offset to comparison data

100 64 BINARY(4) Length of comparison data

104 68 CHAR(10) PAL compare against

* * CHAR(*) PAL comparison data

For more information on the trace exit program interface, refer to the APIs topic collection in the

Programming category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/

Single values

*NONE

No trace exit program is defined. If a watched for message or licensed internal code (LIC) log

entry or Product Activity Log (PAL) entry is added, or if the specified watch time limit is

exceeded, the trace function ends.

Qualifier 1: Trace program

name Specify the name of the trace exit program.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the job’s library list are searched until the first match is found.

name Specify the name of the library where the user exit program is located.

Top

Time interval (TRCPGMITV)

Specifies how often the trace exit program will be called.

*NONE

No time interval is specified. The trace exit program will not be called because a time interval has

elapsed.

1-9999 Specify the interval of time, in seconds, of how often the trace exit program will be called. This

must be less than the amount of time specified for the Length of time to watch (WCHTIMO)

parameter.

Top

Start Communications Trace (STRCMNTRC) 349

Page 366: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Run priority (RUNPTY)

Specifies the priority of the job where the watch session work will be run.

25 A job priority of 25 will be used.

1-99 Specify the run priority of the job. For more information on job run priority, refer to the Work

management topic collection in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/

Top

Trace description (TEXT)

Specifies the text that briefly describes the object.

*BLANK

Text is not specified.

character-value

Specify up to 20 characters of text.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Start a Communications Trace for a Line Description

STRCMNTRC CFGOBJ(*QESLINE) CFGTYPE(*LIN)

This command starts a communications trace of line description QESLINE.

Example 2: Start a Trace and Watch for a Message to End the Trace

STRCMNTRC CFGOBJ(LINE001) CFGTYPE(*LIN) WCHMSG((MCH2804))

WCHMSGQ((*SYSOPR) (*JOBLOG))

WCHJOB((*ALL/MYUSER/MYJOBNAME))

TRCPGM(MYLIB/TRCEXTPGM)

This command starts a communications trace of line description LINE001. The trace will be ended when

MCH2804 message is found on the System Operator message queue or within the *ALL/MYUSER/MYJOBNAME job log. Also, MYLIB/TRCEXTPGM is specified as a trace exit program.

Example 3: Start a Trace and Watch for a LIC Log Entry to End the Trace

STRCMNTRC CFGOBJ(LINE001) CFGTYPE(*LIN)

WCHLICLOG((’99??’ 9932 MYJOBNAME))

WCHTIMO(*NOMAX)

This command starts a communications trace of line description LINE001. The trace will be ended when

a Licensed Internal Code (LIC) log entry that has a major code starting with 99 and a minor code of 9932

is generated on the system. Also, the LIC log information should contain the text ″MYJOBNAME″.

*NOMAX on WCHTIMO parameter indicates that the trace will be active until the event occurs or

ENDCMNTRC command is issued manually.

350 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 367: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2601

Line description &1 not found.

CPF2634

Not authorized to object &1.

CPF39AA

Trace &1 type &2 already exists

CPF39AB

Beginning or ending bytes exceeds maximum value

CPF39AC

Total of beginning and ending bytes exceeds maximum value

CPF39AD

&1 type &2 cannot be traced

CPF39A6

Storage could not be allocated

CPF39A7

Trace storage not available in communications processor

CPF39A8

Not authorized to communications trace service tool

CPF39A9

Error occurred during communications trace function

CPF39BD

Network interface description &1 not found

CPF39BF

Remote IP address not valid.

CPF39B6

Communications trace function cannot be performed

CPF39C0

Controller description &1 not found.

CPF39C1

Controller description &1 not valid.

CPF39C2

Number of user bytes to trace must be *CALC.

CPF39F1

Trace buffer size too large.

CPF39F2

Cannot allocate library &1

CPF98A2

Not authorized to &1 command or API.

Top

Start Communications Trace (STRCMNTRC) 351

Page 368: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

352 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 369: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Commitment Control (STRCMTCTL)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Yes

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Commitment Control (STRCMTCTL) command is used to establish either a job level or

activation group level commitment definition. The job’s current name space determines which

independent auxiliary storage pool (IASP) the commitment definition is created in. Files can be opened

under commitment control for this commitment definition either when the files reside in that same ASP

or when the files reside in *SYSBAS and the commitment definition has no resources registered.

This command also specifies the level of record locking that occurs for the commitment definition to be

started. Also, a notify object can be specified.

Before a commitment definition is established, the user must ensure that all database files that are to be

opened under commitment control for a single commitment transaction are journaled. If only the after

images are being journaled, the system implicitly begins journaling both the before and the after images

for the duration of the changes being made to files opened under this commitment definition.

A default journal can be specified. Entries that describe all journals and systems involved in a

commitment control operation can be placed in this journal.

More information on the use of journal management is in the Journal management topic collection in the

i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/. More information on

journaling related to commitment control is in the Commitment control topic collection in the i5/OS

Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Restrictions:

1. The user must have object operational and add authority to the object named on the NFYOBJ

parameter, if an object is specified.

2. The user must have object operational and add authority to the object named on the DFTJRN

parameter, if an object is specified.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

LCKLVL Lock level *CHG, *CS, *ALL Required,

Positional 1

NFYOBJ Notify object Single values: *NONEOther values: Element list

Optional,

Positional 2

Element 1: Object Qualified object name

Qualifier 1: Object Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Element 2: Object type Single values: *MSGQ, *DTAARAOther values: Element list

Element 1: (*MSGQ

*DTAARA or *FILE)

*FILE

Element 2: Member, if *FILE Name, *FIRST

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 353

Page 370: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

CMTSCOPE Commitment definition

scope

*ACTGRP, *JOB Optional

TEXT Text ’description’ Character value, *DFTTEXT Optional

DFTJRN Journal Single values: *NONEOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Journal Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

OMTJRNE Journal entries to be omitted *NONE, *LUWID Optional

Top

Lock level (LCKLVL)

Specifies the default level of record locking that occurs for the commitment definition to be started.

This is a required parameter.

*CHG Every record read for update (for a file opened under commitment control) is locked. If a record

is changed, added, or deleted, that record remains locked until the transaction is committed or

rolled back. Records that are accessed for update operations but are released without being

changed are unlocked.

*CS Every record accessed for files opened under commitment control is locked. A record that is read,

but not changed or deleted, is unlocked when a different record is read. Records that are

changed, added, or deleted are locked until the transaction is committed or rolled back.

*ALL Every record accessed for files opened under commitment control is locked until the transaction

is committed or rolled back.

Top

Notify object (NFYOBJ)

Specifies the name and type of the object where notification is sent regarding the status of a transaction

for a commitment definition. The commitment identifier of the last successful commit operation is sent to

the notify object only for the following conditions:

v For a job level commitment definition, if any of the following are true:

– A system failure occurs

– The job ends with uncommitted changes

– The job ends with a nonzero completion codev For an activation group level commitment definition, if any of the following are true:

– A system failure occurs

– The job ends with uncommitted changes

– The job ends with a nonzero completion code

– The activation group ends abnormally

– The activation group ends with uncommitted changes and the uncommitted changes are rolled back

For a system failure, the commitment identifier is placed in the notify object after the next successful

initial program load (IPL). For a job that ends with uncommitted changes or with a nonzero completion

354 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 371: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

code, the commitment identifier is placed in the notify object during end job processing. For an activation

group that ends with uncommitted changes or ends abnormally, the notification text is placed in the

notify object during activation group end processing.

A commitment identifier (specified for the Commit identification (CMTID) parameter on the Commit

(COMMIT) command) can be specified on each commit operation performed for a commitment

definition. If more than one job is concurrently using commitment control or there is more than one

commitment definition being used concurrently within a single job, then each commitment definition for

each job should use a unique notify object or the specified commit identifier should contain unique text

such that the text identifies a single commitment definition for a single job. If *NONE is specified for the

CMTID parameter of the Commit (COMMIT) command, this entry is ignored.

*NONE

No notification is sent after an abnormal system or process end.

object-name

Specify the name (library-name/object-name) of the object to receive notification of the last

transaction that is successfully committed. You must have correct authority for the object

specified.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the object. If no library is specified as the current

library for the job, the QGPL library is used.

library-name

Specify the library where the object is located.

The possible object type values are:

*MSGQ

The text identifying the last commitment boundary is placed on the specified message queue.

*DTAARA

The text identifying the last commitment boundary is placed in the specified data area. The data

area specified must be of type character, and unique to this job. The text is padded or truncated

to fit the data area.

*FILE The text identifying the last commitment boundary is added to the specified physical file.

The possible physical file member values are:

*FIRST

The first member of the physical file receives the notification.

member-name

Specify the name of the member of the physical file that receives the notification.

Top

Commitment definition scope (CMTSCOPE)

Specifies the scope for the commitment definition to be started.

*ACTGRP

An activation-group-level commitment definition is started for the activation group associated

with the program issuing the command.

Start Commitment Control (STRCMTCTL) 355

Page 372: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*JOB The job-level commitment definition is started for the job.

Top

Text ’description’ (TEXT)

Specifies text that briefly describes the commitment definition to be started. More information on this

parameter is in the CL Reference book, Appendix A.

*DFTTEXT

The system is to provide a default text description for the commitment definition.

’description’

Specify no more than 50 characters of text, enclosed in apostrophes.

Top

Journal (DFTJRN)

Specifies the default journal. The default journal contains entries identifying each of the resources

involved in a unit of work. Entries can also be placed when each unit of work starts or ends due to a

commit or rollback operation, depending on the OMTJRNE parameter value.

More information on the default journal is in the Commitment control topic collection in the i5/OS

Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

The default journal can be used when adding a resource through the Add Committable Resource

(QTNADDCR) Application Program Interface (API). If the special value *DFTJRN is specified for the

journal name when calling the API, the name specified on this DFTJRN parameter is used.

*NONE

No default journal is specified.

The name of the default journal can be qualified by one of the following values:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, the QGPL library is used.

library-name

Specify the name of the library to be searched.

journal-name

Specify the name of the default journal.

Top

Journal entries to be omitted (OMTJRNE)

Specifies the journal entries to omit from the default journal. If *NONE is specified on the DFTJRN

parameter, this parameter is ignored.

*NONE

No journal entries are omitted.

*LUWID

The journal entry that contains the Logical Unit of Work Identifier (LUWID) and all the resources

356 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 373: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

involved in the logical unit of work are omitted if the logical unit of work is committed or rolled

back successfully. If an error occurs while committing or rolling back the logical unit of work, the

entry will always be sent regardless of this value.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Defining Activation Group Level Commitment Control

STRCMTCTL LCKLVL(*CHG) CMTSCOPE(*ACTGRP) TEXT(’Blue Commit Group’)

This command described by the user as the Blue Commit Group starts the activation group level

commitment for the activation group associated with the program issuing the command.

Only records that are updated, inserted, or deleted are locked until the transaction is ended by a commit

or rollback operation. No identification for the commitment boundary is sent after the initial program

load (IPL) following an abnormal system end, after an abnormal end to an activation group for the job, or

when the job or activation group ends either with uncommitted changes or with a nonzero completion

code.

Example 2: Defining Job Level Commitment Control

STRCMTCTL LCKLVL(*ALL) NFYOBJ(RCVLIB/MYFILE *FILE IDSAVE)

CMTSCOPE(*JOB) DFTJRN(MGWLIB/MYJRN)

This command starts the job level commitment definition. All records accessed in files opened under

commitment control are locked until the commitment transaction is ended by a commit or rollback

operation. If a commitment transaction ends in a manner that a notify object is to be updated with the

commitment identifier of the last successful commit operation, the notify object to be updated is member

IDSAVE of file MYFILE in the library RCVLIB. When a commit or rollback is done, an entry that lists

information about all the resources involved in the logical unit of work is put into journal MYJRN in

library MGWLIB.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF8351

Commitment control already active.

CPF8352

Attribute in notify object &1 type *&4 not valid.

CPF8360

Not enough storage for commitment control operation.

CPF8366

Commitment definition &2 not created. Reason code &1.

CPF9801

Object &2 in library &3 not found.

Start Commitment Control (STRCMTCTL) 357

Page 374: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF9802

Not authorized to object &2 in &3.

CPF9807

One or more libraries in library list deleted.

CPF9808

Cannot allocate one or more libraries on library list.

CPF9810

Library &1 not found.

CPF9815

Member &5 file &2 in library &3 not found.

CPF9820

Not authorized to use library &1.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

Top

358 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 375: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Copy Screen (STRCPYSCN)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Copy Screen (STRCPYSCN) command allows you to copy the screens of another display station

on your display station to observe what is happening and diagnose problems.

If the STRCPYSCN command is used to copy displays from a source device that has the wide-display

feature to an output device with a regular-width display, the command is accepted, but wide-display

images are not shown and an informational message is sent to the target work station indicating that the

display was not shown.

If the STRCPYSCN command is used to copy displays from a source device that supports graphic DBCS

characters, the command is accepted and character information is shown, but graphic DBCS characters

appear as single byte. No message is sent.

If the output device is not the requesting device, then the output device cannot be signed on. If the

output device is signed on, a message is sent to the requester indicating that the device is not available

for copying. If the source device is signed off after display copy has begun, the function automatically

ends.

Note: The copy display function can be ended by the target device.

Restrictions:

v Permission must be given from the user of the source work station.

v When a request is made to begin display image copying, a break message is sent to the user of the

source work station to inform the user that the displays are going to be copied. The user must reply to

this message before any displays are copied.

v *REQUESTER is not valid for the SRCDEV or OUTDEV parameters when the command is submitted

to batch.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

SRCDEV Source device Name, *REQUESTER Required,

Positional 1

OUTDEV Output device Name, *REQUESTER, *NONE Required,

Positional 2

JOBQ Job queue Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: Job queue Name, QCTL

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

OUTFILE File to receive output Single values: *NONEOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: File to receive

output

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 359

Page 376: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

OUTMBR Output member options Element list Optional

Element 1: Member to

receive output

Name, *FIRST

Element 2: Replace or add

records

*REPLACE, *ADD

Top

Source device (SRCDEV)

Specifies the display station that is used as the source for the screen images to be copied.

This is a required parameter.

*REQUESTER

Specifies that the screens are to be copied from the display station that issued this command.

name Specify the name of the display station (other than the one that issued this command) whose

screens are to be copied.

Top

Output device (OUTDEV)

Specifies the output device for the copying process.

This is a required parameter.

*REQUESTER

Specifies that screens are to be copied to the work station from which this command is issued.

*REQUESTER cannot be specified here if it is also specified for the Source device (SRCDEV)

parameter.

*NONE

Specifies that the copied screens do not go to a display station. If *NONE is specified here, then a

value must be specified for the File to receive output (OUTFILE) parameter.

name Specify the name of the display station (other than the one that issued this command) that will

display the copied screens.

Top

Job queue (JOBQ)

Specifies the job queue used to submit the job which shows the screens from the source device on the

target device when the requesting device is not the target device. When *REQUESTER is specified on the

Output device (OUTDEV) parameter, this parameter is ignored, since it defaults to the values for the

target display station and then a submit job is not necessary.

Qualifier 1: Job queue

QCTL Job queue QCTL is to be used.

name Specify the name of the job queue where the job which will process the copied screens is to be

submitted.

360 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 377: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the job queue. If no current library entry exists in

the library list, QGPL is used.

name Specify the name of the library where the job queue is located.

Top

File to receive output (OUTFILE)

Specifies the database file to which the output of the command is directed. If the file does not exist, this

command creates a database file in the specified library. If the file is created, the public authority for the

file is the same as the create authority specified for the library in which the file is created. Use the

Display Library Description (DSPLIBD) command to show the library’s create authority.

Qualifier 1: File to receive output

name Specify the name of the database file to which the command output is directed.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file. If the file is not found, one is created in the current

library. If no current library exists, the file will be created in the QGPL library.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current

library for the thread, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Note: If a new file is created, system file QASCCPY in system library QSYS with a format name of

QSCCPY1 is used as a model.

Top

Output member options (OUTMBR)

Specifies the name of the database file member that receives the output of the command.

Element 1: Member to receive output

*FIRST

The first member in the file receives the output. If OUTMBR(*FIRST) is specified and the member

does not exist, the system creates a member with the name of the file specified for the File to

receive output (OUTFILE) parameter. If the member already exists, you have the option to add

new records to the end of the existing member or clear the member and then add the new

records.

name Specify the name of the file member that receives the output. If it does not exist, the system

creates it.

Element 2: Replace or add records

*REPLACE

The system clears the existing member and adds the new records.

Start Copy Screen (STRCPYSCN) 361

Page 378: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*ADD The system adds the new records to the end of the existing records.

Top

Examples

STRCPYSCN SRCDEV(WS2) OUTDEV(*REQUESTER)

This command sends an inquiry message to the user of work station, WS2. The message indicates that

the display station displays are about to be copied to another display station. If the user of that display

does not wish this to happen, then a cancel (C) reply prevents the operation from beginning. To allow the

operation to begin, the user responds with a go (G) reply to the message.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2207

Not authorized to use object &1 in library &3 type *&2.

CPF7AF4

Library QTEMP is not valid for OUTFILE keyword.

CPF7AF5

From device cannot be used with to device.

CPF7AF6

Device &1 not available.

CPF7AF7

Device name &1 not correct.

CPF9845

Error occurred while opening file &1.

CPF9860

Error occurred during output file processing.

*NOTIFY Messages

CPI7AF9

Screen image not displayed.

Top

362 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 379: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Debug (STRDBG)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Debug (STRDBG) command puts a job into debug mode and, optionally, adds as many as 20

programs and 20 service programs and 20 class files to debug mode. It also specifies certain attributes of

the debugging session. For example, it can specify whether database files in production libraries can be

updated while in debug mode.

The graphical system debugger will be launched instead of the traditional system debugger if the

STRDBG command is issued by a user registered for graphical debugging.

Debug can operate in three environments at the same time. They are OPM (Original Program Model), ILE

(Integrated Language Environment), and JAVA. Some parameters for this command are applicable for all

three environments. Some parameters for this command are applicable only for OPM, ILE, or JAVA.

There will be a statement in each parameter description stating the environment in which the parameter

is applicable.

The Change Debug (CHGDBG) command can be used later in the job to change the attributes of the

debug mode. Also, OPM programs can be added to or removed from the debugging session if they are

specified in the Add Program (ADDPGM) or Remove Program (RMVPGM) commands. OPM programs

added with the ADDPGM command will be in the OPM debug environment.

When one job is servicing another job, and STRDBG is entered, all debug commands are valid for the job

being serviced. If that job is held on a job queue, no further debug commands may be entered until that

job is allowed to run. When the job starts, an initial breakpoint screen is displayed. From this screen,

additional debug commands may be entered. To service another job, see the STRSRVJOB (Start Service

Job) command. More information about debugging one job from another job is in the CL topic collection

in the Programming category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Restrictions:

v You cannot use this command in debug mode. To end debug mode, refer to the End Debug (ENDDBG)

command.

v You cannot use this command if you are servicing another job, and that job is held, suspended, or

ending.

v This command is shipped with public *EXCLUDE authority and the QPGMR, QSRV, and QSRVBAS

user profiles have private authorities to use this command.

v You must have either *CHANGE authority to the program, or *USE authority to the program and

*SERVICE special authority.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 363

Page 380: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

PGM Program Single values: *NONEOther values (up to 20 repetitions): Qualified object name

Optional,

Positional 1

Qualifier 1: Program Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

DFTPGM Default program Name, *PGM, *NONE Optional

MAXTRC Maximum trace statements Integer, 200 Optional

TRCFULL Trace full *STOPTRC, *WRAP Optional

UPDPROD Update production files *NO, *YES Optional

OPMSRC OPM source level debug *NO, *YES Optional

SRVPGM Service program Single values: *NONEOther values (up to 20 repetitions): Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Service program Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

CLASS Class file Values (up to 20 repetitions): Path name, *NONE Optional

DSPMODSRC Display module source *PGMDEP, *NO, *YES Optional

SRCDBGPGM Source debug program Single values: *SYSDFTOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Source debug

program

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

UNMONPGM Unmonitored message

program

Single values: *NONEOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Unmonitored

message program

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Top

Program (PGM)

Specifies up to 20 programs to debug in the job. Before a program can be debugged, its name must be

specified on this parameter, in the Add Program (ADDPGM) command, or the Display Module Source

(DSPMODSRC) command.

This parameter is applicable in both OPM and ILE environments.

Single values

*NONE

No program names are specified at the start of the debugging session. The Add Program

(ADDPGM) command or the Display Module Source (DSPMODSRC) command can be used to

add programs later.

Other values (up to 20 repetitions)

Qualifier 1: Program

name Specify the name of the program to debug. You cannot debug two programs that have the same

name at the same time in the OPM debug environment. In the ILE debug environment, two

programs with the same name can be debugged if they are in different libraries.

364 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 381: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the program. If no library is specified as the

current library for the job, QGPL is used.

name Specify the library where the program is located.

Top

Default program (DFTPGM)

Specifies the original program model (OPM) program to use as the default program during debug mode.

The program specified here is used as the default program for any of the other debug commands for

which the user specified a value of *DFTPGM for the Program (PGM) parameter. That is, if a default

program was previously specified, this parameter can change it.

This parameter is applicable only in the OPM environment.

*PGM The program named on the PGM parameter of this command is to be the default program for the

job’s debugging session. If there is more than one program name specified on the PGM

parameter, the first OPM program named in the list that is added to the OPM debug

environment is the default program. If *NONE is specified on the PGM parameter, or is the

default, *NONE is also assumed when this value (*PGM) is specified.

*NONE

No program is specified as the default program; if a program was specified as a default program,

it is no longer the default program. If the job has no default program, *DFTPGM cannot be

specified on the PGM parameter of any other debug commands.

name Specify the name of the program to use as the default program during debug mode. The same

name (in qualified form) must also be specified for the PGM parameter of this command. You

cannot specify a bound program on this parameter.

Note: If OPMSRC(*YES) is specified, the OPM program may be added to either the OPM debug

environment or the ILE debug environment. If added to the ILE debug environment, then it

cannot be a default program for the OPM debug environment.

Top

Maximum trace statements (MAXTRC)

Specifies the maximum number of trace statements that the system puts into the job’s trace file before

either stopping tracing or wrapping around (overlaying) on the trace file. When the trace file contains the

maximum specified, the system performs the actions specified by the value supplied for the Trace full

(TRCFULL) parameter.

Note: Instruction stepping can be performed on a program being debugged in an interactive environment

by setting the maximum number of trace statements to 1 and the value for the TRCFULL parameter to

*STOPTRC.

This parameter is applicable only in the OPM environment.

200 Two hundred trace statements can be put into the file before tracing is stopped or wrapping

occurs.

Start Debug (STRDBG) 365

Page 382: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

integer

Specify the maximum number of trace statements that can be in the trace file.

Top

Trace full (TRCFULL)

Specifies what happens when the job’s trace file is full (that is, it contains the maximum number of trace

statements specified by the value supplied for the Maximum trace statements (MAXTRC) parameter.

This parameter is applicable only in the OPM environment.

*STOPTRC

In a batch environment, tracing stops but the program continues processing. In an interactive

environment, control is given to the user when a breakpoint occurs. If the user continues

processing, a breakpoint occurs before processing each subsequent statement within the range of

statements being traced, and the trace file is extended to contain the new entry.

*WRAP

The trace file is overlaid with new trace statements as they occur, wrapping from the beginning

of the file. The program will complete processing with no message to indicate that wrapping has

occurred. The trace file never has more than the maximum specified statements, and they are the

most recently recorded statements.

Top

Update production files (UPDPROD)

Specifies whether or not database files in a production library can be opened for updating records, or for

adding new records, while the job is in debug mode. If not, the files must be copied into a test library

before trying to run a program that uses the files.

This parameter is applicable in both OPM and ILE environments.

*NO Database files in production libraries cannot be updated while the job is in debug mode.

Database files can be opened for reading only. This protects database files from unwanted

updates while a program is being debugged. The exception to this is starting debug mode after a

production library is already opened. If this value is specified, some commands, which may

include function keys, menu options, or pulldowns, may not work properly.

*YES Database files in production libraries can be updated while the job is in debug mode.

Top

OPM source level debug (OPMSRC)

Specifies that original program model (OPM) programs are debugged using the system source debug

support (same as ILE source debug).

This parameter is valid for OPM CL, OPM RPG and OPM COBOL programs that were created with

OPTION(*SRCDBG) with CRTCLPGM, CRTRPGPGM and CRTCBLPGM commands. Additionally, this

parameter is valid for OPM CL, OPM RPG and OPM COBOL programs that were created with

OPTION(*LSTDBG) with the CRTCLPGM, CRTRPGPGM, CRTCBLPGM, CRTSQLRPG, CRTSQLCBL, and

CRTRPTRPG commands. If the OPM program is not CL, RPG or COBOL and was not compiled with a

valid debug option, then this parameter is ignored.

366 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 383: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This parameter is applicable in both OPM and ILE environment.

ILE functions will now operate on OPM programs. For example, source level debug.

*NO OPM debug functions are used for OPM programs.

*YES ILE debug functions are used for OPM programs.

Top

Service program (SRVPGM)

Specifies up to 20 service programs to debug in the job. Before a service program can be debugged, its

name must be specified on this parameter or the Display Module Source (DSPMODSRC) command.

This parameter is applicable only in the ILE environment.

Single values

*NONE

No service program names are specified at the start of the debugging session. The Display

Module Source (DSPMODSRC) command can be used to add service programs later.

Other values (up to 20 repetitions)

Qualifier 1: Service program

name Specify the name of the service program to debug.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the service program. If no library is specified as

the current library for the job, QGPL is used.

name Specify the library where the service program is located.

Top

Class file (CLASS)

Specifies up to 20 class files to debug in the job. Before a class file can be debugged, its name must be

specified on this parameter or the Display Module Source (DSPMODSRC) command.

This parameter is applicable only in the ILE environment.

*NONE

No class files are specified at the start of the debugging session. The Display Module Source

(DSPMODSRC) command can be used to add class files later.

path-name

Specify the path names of the class file to debug.

Top

Start Debug (STRDBG) 367

Page 384: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Display module source (DSPMODSRC)

Specifies whether the first display of the source debug program is shown when this command is

processed and no errors occur.

This parameter is applicable only in the ILE environment.

*PGMDEP

The showing of the source debug program display is dependent on the programs specified on the

Program (PGM) parameter. If any of the programs are ILE programs, the display is shown. If any

of the programs are OPM programs with source debug data, and OPMSRC(*YES) is specified, the

display is shown. If all of the programs are OPM programs and OPMSRC(*NO) is specified, the

display is not shown.

*NO The first display of the source debug program is not shown.

*YES The first display of the source debug program is shown.

Top

Source debug program (SRCDBGPGM)

Specifies the source debug program to be used. See the APIs topic collection in the Programming

category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/ for an

explanation of this parameter.

This parameter is applicable only in the ILE environment.

Single values

*SYSDFT

The system source debug program is used.

Qualifier 1: Source debug program

name Specify the name of the program to be used to debug programs.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Unmonitored message program (UNMONPGM)

Specifies the qualified name of the user-supplied program called when a message that is not monitored

occurs in the job being debugged. When the program specified is called, it is passed parameters that

identify the program name, the recursion level, the high-level language statement identifier, the machine

instruction number at which the breakpoint occurred, the message that was not monitored, the message

data, the length of the message data, and the message reference key.

This parameter is applicable only in the OPM environment.

368 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 385: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The passed parameters have the following formats:

1. Program name (10 bytes). Specifies the name of the program in which the breakpoint was reached.

2. Recursion level (5 bytes). Specifies the recursion level number of the program in which the breakpoint

was reached. This value is a 1- to 5-digit number padded on the right with blanks.

3. Statement Identifier (10 bytes). Specifies the high-level language program statement identifier that was

reached. This is the statement identifier specified on the Add Breakpoint (ADDBKP) command. If a

machine instruction number is used to specify the breakpoint, this parameter contains a slash (/)

followed by a 4-digit hexadecimal machine instruction number.

4. Instruction number (5 bytes). Specifies the machine instruction number that corresponds to the

high-level language statement at which the breakpoint was reached. No slash appears in front of the

machine instruction number. The value consists of 1 to 4 hexadecimal characters representing the MI

instruction number, followed by one or more blanks. If a machine instruction number is passed on the

third parameter, the numbers in the third and fourth parameters are the same.

5. Message ID (7 bytes). Specifies the ID of the message that was not monitored.

6. Message data (256 bytes). Specifies the first 256 bytes of message data sent with the message not

monitored.

7. Message data length (5 bytes). Specifies the length of the message data sent with the message not

monitored.

8. Message MRK (4 bytes). Specifies the message reference key (MRK) of the message not monitored.

All the parameter values are left-adjusted and padded on the right with blanks. When control returns to

the program with the message that was not monitored, processing continues.

Single values

*NONE

No program is called when a message that is not monitored occurs.

Qualifier 1: Unmonitored message program

name Specify the name of the user-supplied program called when a message that is not monitored

occurs in the job being debugged. After the program runs, control is returned to the interrupted

program.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Start Debug for Program

STRDBG PGM(TESTLIB/PAYROLL) UPDPROD(*NO)

This command starts debug mode to debug the program PAYROLL, which is in the test library TESTLIB.

If tracing is used, up to 200 trace statements can be stored in the trace before tracing stops. If program

Start Debug (STRDBG) 369

Page 386: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

PAYROLL is a bound program, the Display Module Source display will be shown, giving the source for

the module that contains the program entry point. Any database files updated by the PAYROLL program

must be in a test library.

Example 2: Start Debug for Class File

STRDBG CLASS(’financial.payapplet’)

This command starts debug mode to debug the class payapplet in the financial package.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF1999

Errors occurred on command.

Top

370 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 387: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Debug Server (STRDBGSVR)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Debug Server (STRDBGSVR) command starts the debug server router function. Only one debug

server router can be active at a time. Once started, the debug server router remains active until it is

ended using the ENDDBGSVR command.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters

None

Top

Examples

STRDBGSVR

This command starts the debug server router function.

Top

Error messages

None

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 371

Page 388: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

372 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 389: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Database Monitor (STRDBMON)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Conditional

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Database Monitor (STRDBMON) command starts the collection of database performance

statistics for a specified job, for all jobs on the system or for a selected set of jobs. The statistics are placed

in a user-specified database file and member. If the file or member do not exist, one is created based on

the QAQQDBMN file in library QSYS. If the file or member do exist, the record format of the specified

file is verified to insure it is the same.

For each monitor started using the STRDBMON command, the system generates a monitor ID that can be

used to uniquely identify each individual monitor. The monitor ID can be used on the ENDDBMON

command to uniquely identify which monitor is to be ended. The monitor ID is returned in the

informational message CPI436A which is generated for each occurrence of the STRDBMON command.

The monitor ID can also be found in column QQC101 of the QQQ3018 database monitor record.

Restrictions:

1. There are two types of monitors. A private monitor is a monitor over one, specific job (or the current

job). A public monitor is a monitor which collects data across multiple jobs. Only one (1) monitor can

be started on a specific job at a time (i.e. only one private monitor can be active over any specific job).

For example, STRDBMON JOB(*) followed by another STRDBMON JOB(*) within the same job is not

allowed. There can be a maximum of ten (10) public monitors active at any one time. For example,

STRDBMON JOB(*ALL) followed by another STRDBMON JOB(*ALL) is allowed providing the

maximum number of public monitors does not exceed 10. You may have 10 public monitors and 1

private monitor active at the same time for any specific job.

2. If multiple monitors specify the same output file, only one copy of the database statistic records will

be written to the specified output file for each job. For example, STRDBMON OUTFILE(LIB/TABLE1)

JOB(*) and STRDBMON OUTFILE(LIB/TABLE1) JOB(*ALL) both use the same output file. For the

current job, you will not get two copies of the database statistic records, one copy for the private

monitor and one copy for the public monitor. You will get only one copy of the database statistic

records.

3. QTEMP cannot be specified as the library on the OUTFILE parameter unless JOB(*) was also

specified.

4. This command is conditionally threadsafe. For multithreaded jobs, this command is not threadsafe

and may fail when the OUTFILE parameter is a distributed file or is a Distributed Data Management

(DDM) file.

5. Any public monitor requires the file specified for the OUTFILE parameter to be in a library that

resides in the system ASP.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

OUTFILE File to receive output Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: File to receive

output

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 373

Page 390: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

OUTMBR Output member options Element list Optional

Element 1: Member to

receive output

Name, *FIRST

Element 2: Replace or add

records

*REPLACE, *ADD

JOB Job name Single values: *Other values: Qualified job name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Job name Generic name, name, *ALL

Qualifier 2: User Generic name, name, *ALL

Qualifier 3: Number 000000-999999, *ALL

TYPE Type of records *BASIC, *DETAIL, *SUMMARY Optional

FRCRCD Force record write 0-32767, *CALC Optional

RUNTHLD Run time threshold 0-2147483647, *NONE Optional

STGTHLD Storage threshold 0-2147483647, *NONE Optional

INCSYSSQL Include system SQL *NO, *YES, *INI Optional

FTRFILE Filter by database file Single values: *NONEOther values (up to 10 repetitions): Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Filter by

database file

Generic name, name, *ALL

Qualifier 2: Library Generic name, name

FTRUSER Filter by user profile Generic name, name, *NONE, *CURRENT Optional

FTRINTNETA Filter by internet address Character value, *NONE, *LOCAL Optional

FTRLCLPORT Filter by local port number 0-65535, *NONE Optional

FTRQRYGOVR Filter by query governor *NONE, *ALL, *COND Optional

COMMENT Comment Character value, *BLANK Optional

Top

File to receive output (OUTFILE)

Specifies the file to which the performance statistics are to be written. If the file does not exist, it is

created based on model file QAQQDBMN in library QSYS.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: File to receive output

name Specify the name of the file.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the job’s library list are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

374 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 391: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Output member options (OUTMBR)

Specifies the name of the database file member that receives the output of the command.

Element 1: Member to receive output

*FIRST

The first member in the file receives the output. If OUTMBR(*FIRST) is specified and the member

does not exist, the system creates a member with the name of the file specified for the File to

receive output (OUTFILE) parameter. If the member already exists, you have the option to add

new records to the end of the existing member or clear the member and then add the new

records.

name Specify the name of the file member that receives the output. If it does not exist, the system

creates it.

Element 2: Replace or add records

*REPLACE

The system clears the existing member and adds the new records.

*ADD The system adds the new records to the end of the existing records.

Top

Job name (JOB)

Specifies the job(s) for which the database monitor is to be started.

Single values

* The database monitor for the job running the STRDBMON command is to be started.

*ALL All jobs on the system are monitored, including jobs waiting on job queues.

Qualifier 1: Job name

name Specify the name of the job whose database monitor is to be started. If no job user name or job

number qualifiers are specified, all of the jobs currently in the system are searched for the

specified simple job name. If duplicates of the specified job name are found, you need to specify

a job user name or job number that uniquely identifies the job to be changed.

generic-name

Specify the generic name of the jobs whose database monitor are to be started. All jobs matching

the specified generic name, including jobs waiting on job queues, will be monitored.

Qualifier 2: User

name Specify the name of the user of the job whose database monitor is to be started.

generic-name

Specify the generic name of the user whose jobs are to be monitored. All jobs matching the

specified generic name, including jobs waiting on job queues, will be monitored.

Qualifier 3: Number

000000-999999

Specify the number of the job whose database monitor is to be started.

Top

Start Database Monitor (STRDBMON) 375

Page 392: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Type of records (TYPE)

Specifies the type of database records to place in the outfile.

*BASIC

Only the basic database monitor records are collected.

*DETAIL

Both basic and detail database monitor records are collected. The detail database monitor record

(QQQ3019) contains a count of the number of synchronous and asynchronous reads and writes to

the database, as well as other database counts.

*SUMMARY

Only the basic database monitor records are collected.

Top

Force record write (FRCRCD)

Specifies the number of records to be held in the buffer before forcing the records to be written to the file

when running with a private monitor.

*CALC

The system will calculate the number of records to be held in the buffer.

number-of-records

Specify the number of records to be held. Valid values range from 0 through 32767.

Top

Run time threshold (RUNTHLD)

Specifies a filtering threshold based on the estimated run time of the SQL statement as calculated by the

query optimizer. Monitor records will be created only for those SQL statements whose estimated run time

meets or exceeds the specified run time threshold. If the estimated run time of the SQL statement is less

than the specified threshold then no monitor records will be created for that SQL statement.

*NONE

A run time threshold is not specified. All monitor records will be created.

runtime-threshold

Specify the run time threshold, in seconds. Monitor records will be created for all SQL statements

whose estimated run time meets or exceeds this value.

Top

Storage threshold (STGTHLD)

Specifies a filtering threshold based on the estimated temporary storage usage of the SQL statement.

Monitor records will be created only for those SQL statements whose estimated temporary storage meets

or exceeds the specified storage threshold. If the estimated temporary storage of the SQL statement is less

than the specified threshold then no monitor records will be created for that SQL statement.

*NONE

A storage threshold is not specified. All monitor records will be created.

storage-threshold

Specify the storage threshold, in megabytes. Monitor records will be created for all SQL

statements whose estimated temporary storage meets or exceeds this value.

376 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 393: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Include system SQL (INCSYSSQL)

Specifies whether or not monitor records will be created for system-generated SQL statements. Monitor

records will always be created for user-specified SQL statements. This option determines if monitor

records will also be created for SQL statements generated internally by the system.

*NO No monitor records will be created for system-generated SQL statements. Monitor records will

only be created for user-specified SQL statements.

*YES Monitor records will be created for both user-specified and system-generated SQL statements.

*INI Monitor records will be generated based on the value of the SQL_DBMON_OUTPUT option in

the current INI file. A value of *USER or *DEFAULT creates monitor records for just

user-specified SQL statements. A value of *SYSTEM creates monitor records for just

system-generated SQL statements. A value of *ALL creates monitor records for both user-specified

and system-generated SQL statements. If no INI file exists, then a default value of *NO will be

used for the INCSYSSQL option.

Top

Filter by database file (FTRFILE)

Specifies a filter based on the name of the file and library used within the SQL statement. Monitor

records will be created only for those SQL statements that use the qualified file. The specified file name

can be either the 10-byte short name or the 256-byte long name.

Single values

*NONE

No filtering by file is specified.

Qualifier 1: Data base file

*ALL Monitor records will be created for any SQL statement that uses any file in the specified library. If

none of the files used in the SQL statement come from the specified library, no monitor records

will be created for the SQL statement.

name Monitor records will be created only for those SQL statements that use the specified file. Monitor

records will not be created for any SQL statements that do not use the specified file.

generic-name

Monitor records will be created only for those SQL statements that use a file that matches the

generic prefix. If none of the files used in the SQL statement match the specified prefix, no

monitor records will be created for the SQL statement.

Qualifier 2: Library

name Monitor records will be created only for those SQL statements that use a file from the specified

library. Monitor records will not be created if none of the files used in the SQL statement come

from the specified library.

generic-name

Monitor records will be created only for those SQL statements that use a file from a library that

matches the generic prefix. If none of the files used in the SQL statement come from the generic

library, no monitor records will be created for the SQL statement.

Top

Start Database Monitor (STRDBMON) 377

Page 394: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Filter by user profile (FTRUSER)

Specifies a filter based on a user profile name. Monitor records will be created only for those SQL

statements that are executed by the specified user. Monitor records will not be created for SQL statements

executed by a different user.

*NONE

Filtering by user is not specified.

*CURRENT

Monitor records will be created only for those SQL statements that are executed by the user who

is invoking the STRDBMON command. Monitor records will not be created for SQL statements

executed by a different user.

user-name

Monitor records will be created only for those SQL statements that are executed by the specified

user. Monitor records will not be created for SQL statements executed by a different user.

generic-user-name

Monitor records will be created only for those SQL statements that are executed by a user whose

name starts with the specified prefix. Monitor records will not be created for SQL statements

executed by a different user.

Top

Filter by internet address (FTRINTNETA)

Specifies filtering based on the client’s TCP/IP address or client’s TCP/IP host name. Monitor records

will be created only for jobs running on behalf of the specified TCP/IP address or host name.

*NONE

Internet address filtering is not specified.

*LOCAL

Monitor records will be created for those jobs that have no TCP/IP client association.

character-value

Monitor records will be created for TCP/IP database server jobs. Jobs named QRWTSRVR and

QZDASOINIT are examples of these server jobs.

1. IP version 4 address in dotted decimal form. Specify an internet protocol version 4 address in

the form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where each nnn is a number in the range 0 through 255.

2. IP version 6 address in colon hexadecimal form. Specify an internet protocol version 6 address

in the form xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx where each xxxx is a hex number in the

range 0 through FFFF. IP version 6 includes the IPv4-mapped IPv6 address form (for example,

::FFFF:1.2.3.4). For IP version 6, the compressed form of the address is allowed.

3. IP host domain name. Specify an internet host domain name of up to 254 characters in length.

Top

Filter by local port number (FTRLCLPORT)

Specifies filtering based on the local TCP/IP port number. Monitor records will be created for TCP/IP

database server jobs running on behalf of the specified local TCP/IP port. Jobs named QRWTSRVR and

QZDASOINIT are examples of these server jobs.

378 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 395: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*NONE

Port filtering is not specified.

1-65535

Specify the number of the local port for which monitor records are to be created.

Top

Filter by query governor (FTRQRYGOVR)

Specifies filtering based on the query governor limits.

*NONE

Query governor filtering is not specified.

*ALL Monitor records will be collected when a query governor limit is exceeded, regardless if the

query is cancelled or not.

*COND

Monitor records will be collected when a query governor limit is exceeded based on one of the

following criteria:

1. Query governor exit program returns 2 indicating that exceeded limit should be ignored, but

Database Monitor records should be collected anyway.

2. Query governor exit program returns 3 indicating that the query should be cancelled.

3. Query governor exit program returns 0 indicating that the inquiry message should be issued

and the response to the inquiry message is to cancel the query.

4. Query governor exit program fails and the response to the inquiry message is to cancel the

query.

5. There is no query governor exit program in effect and the response to the inquiry message is

to cancel the query.

For more information on the query governor exit program, refer to the query governor exit

program (QIBM_QQQ_QUERY_GOVR) documentation in the i5/OS Information Center at

http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Top

Comment (COMMENT)

User-specified description that is associated with the database monitor. The description is stored in the

monitor record that has a record ID of 3018.

*BLANK

Text is not specified.

character-value

Specify up to 100 characters of text.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Starting Public Monitoring

STRDBMON OUTFILE(QGPL/FILE1) OUTMBR(MEMBER1 *ADD)

JOB(*ALL) FRCRCD(10)

Start Database Monitor (STRDBMON) 379

Page 396: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This command starts database monitoring for all jobs on the system. The performance statistics are added

to the member named MEMBER1 in the file named FILE1 in the QGPL library. Ten records will be held

before being written to the file.

Example 2: Starting Private Monitoring

STRDBMON OUTFILE(*LIBL/FILE3) OUTMBR(MEMBER2)

JOB(134543/QPGMR/DSP01) FRCRCD(20)

This command starts database monitoring for job number 134543. The job name is DSP01 and was started

by the user named QPGMR. The performance statistics are added to the member named MEMBER2 in

the file named FILE3. Twenty records will be held before being written to the file.

Example 3: Starting Private Monitoring to a File in a Library in an Independent ASP

STRDBMON OUTFILE(LIB41/DBMONFILE) JOB(134543/QPGMR/DSP01)

This command starts database monitoring for job number 134543. The job name is DSP01 and was started

by the user named QPGMR. The performance statistics are added to the member name DBMONFILE

(since OUTMBR was not specified) in the file named DBMONFILE in the library named LIB41. This

library may exist in more than one independent auxiliary storage pool (ASP); the library in the name

space of the originator’s job will always be used.

Example 4: Starting Public Monitoring For All Jobs That Begin With ’QZDA’

STRDBMON OUTFILE(LIB41/DBMONFILE) JOB(*ALL/*ALL/QZDA*)

This command starts database monitoring for all jobs that whose job name begins with ’QZDA’. The

performance statistics (monitor records) are added to member DBMONFILE (since OUTMBR was not

specified) in file DBMONFILE in library LIB41. This library may exist in more than one independent

auxiliary storage pool (ASP); the library in the name space of the originator’s job will always be used.

Example 5: Starting Public Monitoring and Filtering SQL Statements That Run Over 10 Seconds

STRDBMON OUTFILE(LIB41/DBMONFILE) JOB(*ALL) RUNTHLD(10)

This command starts database monitoring for all jobs. Monitor records are created only for those SQL

statements whose estimated run time meets or exceeds 10 seconds.

Example 6: Starting Public Monitoring and Filtering SQL Statements That Have an Estimated

Temporary Storage Over 200 Megabytes

STRDBMON OUTFILE(LIB41/DBMONFILE) JOB(*ALL) STGTHLD(200)

This command starts database monitoring for all jobs. Monitor records are created only for those SQL

statements whose estimated temporary storage meets or exceeds 200 megabytes.

Example 7: Starting Private Monitoring and Filtering Over a Specific File

STRDBMON OUTFILE(LIB41/DBMONFILE) JOB(*)

FTRFILE(LIB41/TABLE1)

380 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 397: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This command starts database monitoring for the current job. Monitor records are created only for those

SQL statements that use file LIB41/TABLE1.

Example 8: Starting Private Monitoring for the Current User

STRDBMON OUTFILE(LIB41/DBMONFILE) JOB(*) FTRUSER(*CURRENT)

This command starts database monitoring for the current job. Monitor records are created only for those

SQL statements that are executed by the current user.

Example 9: Starting Public Monitoring For Jobs Beginning With ’QZDA’ and Filtering Over Run Time

and File

STRDBMON OUTFILE(LIB41/DBMONFILE) JOB(*ALL/*ALL/QZDA*)

RUNTHLD(10) FTRUSER(DEVLPR1) FTRFILE(LIB41/TTT*)

This command starts database monitoring for all jobs whose job name begins with ’QZDA’. Monitor

records are created only for those SQL statements that meet all of the following conditions:

v The estimated run time, as calculated by the query optimizer, meets or exceeds 10 seconds

v Was executed by user ’DEVLPR1’.

v Use any file whose name begins with ’TTT’ and resides in library LIB41.

Example 10: Starting Public Monitoring and Filtering SQL Statements That Have Internet Address

9.10.111.77.

STRDBMON OUTFILE(LIB41/DBMONFILE) JOB(*ALL)

FTRINTNETA(9.10.111.77)

This command starts database monitoring for all jobs. Monitor records are created only for TCP/IP

database server jobs that are using the client IP version 4 address of 9.10.111.77.

Example 11: Starting Public Monitoring and Filtering SQL Statements That Have a Port Number of

8471

STRDBMON OUTFILE(LIB41/DBMONFILE) JOB(*ALL) FTRLCLPORT(8471)

This command starts database monitoring for all jobs. Monitor records are created only for TCP/IP

database server jobs that are using the local port number 8471.

Example 12: Starting Public Monitoring Based on Feedback from the Query Governor

CHGSYSVAL QQRYTIMLMT(200)

STRDBMON OUTFILE(LIB41/DBMONFILE) JOB(*ALL) FTRQRYGOVR(*COND)

This commands starts database monitoring for all jobs whose estimated run time is expected to exceed

200 seconds, based on the response to the query governor. In this example data will be collected only if

the query is cancelled or a return code of 2 is returned by a query governor exit program. The query can

Start Database Monitor (STRDBMON) 381

Page 398: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

be cancelled by a user response to the inquiry message CPA4259 (that is issued because the query

exceeded the query governor limits) or it can be cancelled by the program logic inside the registered

query governor exit program.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF1321

Job &1 user &2 job number &3 not found.

CPF222E

&1 special authority is required.

CPF4269

Not authorized to object &1 in &2 type *&3.

CPF436A

Record format for file &1 in &2 does not match model file.

CPF436B

&1 can not be specified on the OUTFILE parameter.

CPF436C

Job &4 is already being monitored.

CPF436E

Job &1 user &2 job number &3 is not active.

CPF43A2

Address specified on FTRINTNETA parameter is not valid.

*STATUS Messages

CPI436A

Database monitor started for job &1, monitor ID &2.

Top

382 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 399: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Data Base Reader (STRDBRDR)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Database Reader (STRDBRDR) command starts a spooling reader using a database file; the

reader reads a batch input stream from the database and places the jobs onto one or more job queues.

This command specifies the name of the database file and member from which the input stream is read,

the name of the reader, and the names of the job queue and message queue that are used.

More than one reader can be active at the same time (as determined by the spooled subsystem

description). Each database reader must have a unique reader name, and the specified file or member

must be available. The reader can also be held or canceled by using the Hold Reader (HLDRDR)

command or End Reader (ENDRDR) command.

Because each reader runs independently of the job that started it, the user can continue doing other work

on the system after he has started a reader.

Restriction: The specified database file either must consist of single-field records and must have an

arrival sequence access path, or it must be a standard database source file.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

FILE Data base file Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: Data base file Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

MBR Member Name, *FIRST Optional,

Positional 2

JOBQ Job queue Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: Job queue Name, QBATCH

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

MSGQ Queue for reader messages Single values: *REQUESTEROther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Queue for reader

messages

Name, QSYSOPR

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

RDR Reader Name, *FILE Optional

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 383

Page 400: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Data base file (FILE)

Specifies the database file from which the input stream is to be read. The file must be available for

allocation to the spooling reader before the reader can be started.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Data base file

name Specify the name of the file that contains the input stream read by the reader.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the file.

name Specify the name of the library where the file is located.

Top

Member (MBR)

Specifies the member in the specified file that contains the input stream.

*FIRST

The first member in the file is used.

name Specify the name of the member that contains the input stream to be read.

Top

Job queue (JOBQ)

Specifies the job queue where the spooling reader will place entries. This value is used if *RDR is

specified on the Job queue (JOBQ) parameter of the Batch Job (BCHJOB) command. (Note that the job

queue for each job within this input stream can be different.)

Qualifier 1: Job queue

QBATCH

The job entry is placed on the QBATCH job queue.

name Specify the name of the job queue to be used by this reader.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the job queue.

name Specify the name of the library where the job queue is located.

Top

384 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 401: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Queue for reader messages (MSGQ)

Specifies the message queue that will receive any messages that are created by the reader.

Single values

*REQUESTER

The messages are to be sent to the workstation message queue of the workstation of the user who

started this reader. If this value is used in a batch job, the message is changed to the system

operator’s message queue (QSYSOPR).

Qualifier 1: Queue for reader messages

QSYSOPR

The messages are sent to the system operator’s message queue (QSYSOPR).

name Specify the name of the message queue that you want to receive any messages.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the message queue. If no current library entry

exists in the library list, QGPL is used.

name Specify the name of the library where the message queue is located.

Top

Reader (RDR)

Specifies the reader to be started. Each reader name must be unique.

*FILE The name of the reader is the same as the name of the database file that is specified on the Data

base file (FILE) parameter.

name Specify the name that identifies the reader to be started.

Top

Examples

STRDBRDR FILE(QGPL/BILLING)

This command starts a spooled reader that reads its input from the database file named BILLING, which

is in the QGPL library. The reader name is also BILLING because the RDR parameter was not specified.

The first member in the BILLING file contains the input stream to be processed. The default job queue

QBATCH and the system-supplied system operator’s message queue QSYSOPR are used by the database

reader.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

Start Data Base Reader (STRDBRDR) 385

Page 402: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF1338

Errors occurred on SBMJOB command.

CPF2207

Not authorized to use object &1 in library &3 type *&2.

CPF3301

Reader &1 already started.

CPF3307

Job queue &1 in &2 not found.

CPF3330

Necessary resource not available.

CPF3362

Objects in QTEMP not valid for parameter values.

CPF3363

Message queue &1 in library &2 not found.

CPF3364

File &1 in library &2 not database file or DDM file.

CPF9812

File &1 in library &2 not found.

CPF9815

Member &5 file &2 in library &3 not found.

Top

386 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 403: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start DFU (STRDFU)

Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT

*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Control Language (CL) command STRDFU starts the data file utility (DFU).

Error messages for STRDFU

*ESCAPE Messages

DFU0005

The command failed.

DFU0018

The Run option is not valid.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

OPTION Option Element list Optional,

Positional 1 Element 1: DFU option 1-5, *SELECT

Element 2: Run option 1-2, *NONE

DFUPGM DFU program Qualified object name Optional,

Positional 2 Qualifier 1: DFU program Name, *PRV

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *PRV, *LIBL, *CURLIB

FILE Data base file Qualified object name Optional,

Positional 3 Qualifier 1: Data base file Name, *PRV, *SAME

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *PRV, *LIBL, *CURLIB

MBR Member Name, *PRV, *FIRST Optional,

Positional 4

Top

Option (OPTION)

Specifies the option to use as a value for the DFU main menu.

The possible values are:

*SELECT

The DFU main menu appears. You can select an option from the menu.

first-menu-option

Type a number between 1 and 5. Type 1 to run, 2 to create, 3 to change, or 4 to delete a DFU

program. Type 5 to run a temporary DFU program.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 387

Page 404: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

second-menu-option

If you type 1 (to run a DFU program), you can also type a second option. The second option

must be 1 or 2. Type 1 to change data, or 2 to display data without changing it.

Top

DFU program (DFUPGM)

Specifies the name of the DFU program to be run, created, changed, or deleted. You do not use this

parameter if you select option 5 (to run a temporary DFU program).

The possible values are:

*PRV DFU will use the program that was used in your last DFU session.

program-name

Type the qualified name of the DFU program to be used.

Top

Data base file (FILE)

Specifies the database file you want to change or display.

The possible values are:

*PRV DFU will use the file that was used in your last DFU session.

*SAME

DFU will use the file that was used to define the program. You can specify *SAME only if you

select option 1 (to run a DFU program) or option 3 (to change a DFU program).

file-name

Type the qualified name of the data file you want DFU to process. (If you do not specify a library

name, *LIBL is used.)

Note: Make sure the data-file name is different from the DFU program name.

Top

Member (MBR)

Specifies the member in the file you want to change or display.

The possible values are:

*PRV DFU will use the member that was used in your last DFU session.

member-name

Type the name of the member you want DFU to process.

Top

Examples

None

Top

388 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 405: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

DFU0005

The command failed.

DFU0018

The Run option is not valid.

Top

Start DFU (STRDFU) 389

Page 406: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

390 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 407: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start DIG Query (STRDIGQRY)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Yes

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start DIG Query (STRDIGQRY) command, or its alias DIG, starts the Domain Information Groper

tool.

DIG is a powerful query tool that allows you to retrieve information from or test the response of a

Domain Name System (DNS) server. You can verify that a DNS server is responding correctly before you

configure your system to use it. You can also retrieve DNS information about hosts, domains, and other

DNS servers.

Unless it is told to query a specific name server, DIG will try each of the servers listed in CHGTCPDMN.

Restrictions:

v You must have execute (*X) authority to the directories in the path of the batch input file.

v You must have read (*R) authority to the batch input file.

v You must have execute (*X) authority to the directories in the path of the key file.

v You must have read (*R) authority to the key file.

v You must have execute (*X) authority to the directories in the path of the trusted keys file.

v You must have read (*R) authority to the trusted keys file.

v You must have execute (*X) authority to the directories in the path of the output file.

v You must have write (*W) authority to the output file if it already exists.

v You must have read, write and execute (*RWX) authority to the output file’s parent directory if the

output file does not already exist.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

HOSTNAME Query name Character value, *DFT Optional,

Positional 1

TYPE Query type *A, *AAAA, *ANY, *AXFR, *CNAME, *MX, *NS, *PTR,

*SOA, *SRV, *TXT

Optional,

Positional 2

CLASS Query class *IN, *CH, *HS, *ANY Optional

REVERSE Reverse lookup *NO, *YES, *IP6INT Optional

DMNNAMSVR Domain name server Character value, *CFG Optional

PORT Domain name server port 1-65535, 53 Optional

TIMEOUT Query timeout 1-100, 5 Optional

USEDMNSCHL Use domain search list *YES, *NO Optional

DMNSCHLIST Domain search list Character value, *CFG, *NONE Optional

SRCADR Source address Character value, *DFT, *ANY4, *LOOPBACK4, *ANY6,

*LOOPBACK6

Optional

BCHFILE Batch input file Path name, *NONE Optional

IPVSN IP Version *ALL, *IPV4ONLY, *IPV6ONLY Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 391

Page 408: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

PROTOCOL Network protocol *UDP, *TCP Optional

SETRDFLAG Recursion desired *YES, *NO Optional

SETAAFLAG Authoritative answers only Character value, *NO, *YES Optional

SETADFLAG Authentic data *NO, *YES Optional

SETCDFLAG Disable DNSSEC checking *NO, *YES Optional

MULTILINE Print multiple lines *NO, *YES Optional

SHORT Print short answer *NO, *YES Optional

IDENTIFY Print server in short answer *NO, *YES Optional

PRTQRY Print query *NO, *YES Optional

PRTCLASS Print RR class *YES, *NO Optional

PRTTTL Print RR TTL *YES, *NO Optional

PRTALL Print all query detail *YES, *NO Optional

CMD Print query command *DFT, *YES, *NO Optional

COMMENTS Print query comments *DFT, *YES, *NO Optional

STATS Print query statistics *DFT, *YES, *NO Optional

QUESTION Print question section *DFT, *YES, *NO Optional

ANSWER Print answer section *DFT, *YES, *NO Optional

AUTHORITY Print authority section *DFT, *YES, *NO Optional

ADDITIONAL Print additional section *DFT, *YES, *NO Optional

KEYFILE Key file Path name, *NONE Optional

KEYNAME Key name Character value, *NONE Optional

STOPFAIL Stop on SERVFAIL *YES, *NO Optional

UDPTRUNC Ignore truncated responses *RETRY, *IGNORE Optional

NSSCH List authoritative servers *NO, *YES Optional

TRACE Trace delegation path *NO, *YES Optional

UDPTRIES Times to try UDP query 1-100, 3 Optional

UDPNBRRTY UDP retry 0-100, 2 Optional

NBRDOTS Number of dots 0-10, 1 Optional

BUFSIZE UDP buffer size for EDNS 0-65535, 0 Optional

EDNS Set EDNS version 0-255, 0 Optional

NOEDNS Clear EDNS version *NO, *YES Optional

BESTEFFORT Best effort display *NO, *YES Optional

DNSSEC Request DNSSEC records *NO, *YES Optional

SIGCHASE Chase DNSSEC chains *NO, *YES Optional

TRUSTEDKEY Trusted keys file Path name, *NONE Optional

TOPDOWN DNSSEC top down

validation

*NO, *YES Optional

TOSTMF Output file Path name, *STDOUT Optional

Top

392 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 409: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Query name (HOSTNAME)

Specifies the name that you want the Domain Name System (DNS) server to supply information about.

You can use either a name or an IP address to identify the resource record. For example, a name could be

’mycomputer.mycompany.com’ An IP address could be an IPv4 address like ’10.0.1.100’ or an IPv6

address like ’2001:D88::1’. You can use either the name to obtain the address, or the address to obtain the

name.

*DFT Query the root ’.’ servers.

domain-name

Specify the name to use for the DNS server query. This is usually a hostname (like

mycomputer.mycompany.com) or domain (like mycompany.com) that you want to query.

internet-address

Specify the IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation or a colon-delimited IPv6 address. If you use

an IP address, consider using the REVERSE(*YES) parameter to simplify PTR (pointer) type

queries. See the examples for this command for more information.

Top

Query type (TYPE)

Specifies the type of the query. The default type is *A. The list of supported query types changes with

time, and not all servers support all the types that exist. This list provides some common query types for

convenience and is not a complete list. If you do not see a query type you want in this list, you can still

type in a character string that represents that query type. If the type is unknown by this BIND version,

the query will default to an *A query with any corresponding results.

*A IPv4 Address record. This is the character string ’a’.

*AAAA

IPv6 address record. This is the character string ’aaaa’.

*ANY Any resource record. This is the character string ’any’.

*AXFR

Zone transfer. This is the character string ’axfr’.

*CNAME

Canonical name record. Returns a list of aliases for the true (canonical) host name, if any exist.

This is the character string ’cname’.

*MX Mail exchange record. This is the character string ’mx’.

*NS Name server (DNS server) information for the zone. This is the character string ’ns’.

*PTR Pointer record. Returns a name for an IP address. This is the character string ’ptr’.

*SOA Start of authority record. This is the character string ’soa’.

*SRV Services location selection. This is the character string ’srv’.

*TXT Text record. This is the character string ’txt’.

Top

Query class (CLASS)

Specifies the protocol group of the information.

*IN The Internet class.

Start DIG Query (STRDIGQRY) 393

Page 410: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*CH The CHAOS class. The server provides some helpful diagnostic information through a number of

built-in zones under the CHAOS class.

version

If your BIND server named.conf has the ’version’ option configured, then you can query

for it using the CHAOS class. This is the version the server should report via a query of

the name ’version.bind’ with type TXT, class CHAOS. The default is the real version

number of this server.

DIG HOSTNAME(’version.bind’) TYPE(*TXT) CLASS(*CH)

hostname

If your BIND server named.conf has the ’hostname’ option configured, then you can

query for it using the CHAOS class. This is the hostname the server should report via a

query of the name ’hostname.bind’ with type TXT, class CHAOS. This defaults to the

hostname of the machine hosting the name server. The primary purpose of such queries

is to identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually answering your queries.

DIG HOSTNAME(’hostname.bind’) TYPE(*TXT) CLASS(*CH)

server-id

If your BIND server named.conf has the ’server-id’ option configured, then you can query

for it using the CHAOS class. This is the ID of the server should report via a query of the

name ’ID.SERVER’ with type TXT, class CHAOS. The primary purpose of such queries is

to identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually answering your queries. The

default server-id is none.

DIG HOSTNAME(’ID.SERVER’) TYPE(*TXT) CLASS(*CH)

*HS Specifies the MIT Athena Hesiod class. Hesiod, developed by MIT Project Athena, is an

information service built upon BIND. Its intent is to furnish information about users, groups,

network-accessible file systems, printcaps, and mail service throughout an installation. In other

words, it holds arbitrary data stored as text strings. Queries that use the HS class retrieve data

stored as TXT Resource Records. You cannot specify root servers for the Hesiod class (generally

the ones at MIT) in your list of root name servers.

*ANY This says to query any class, and is a wildcard query.

Top

Reverse lookup (REVERSE)

Specifies if the value specified for the Query name (HOSTNAME) parameter is to be used as part of a

reverse (PTR) query. A reverse lookup is when you map an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation or a

colon-delimited IPv6 address to a name. Reverse lookups require the name to be in either the

’in-addr.arpa’ (IPv4) or ’ip6.arpa’ (IPv6) zone.

Reverse lookups are simplified by this option as there is no need format the NAME parameter or provide

the TYPE and CLASS parameters. For an IPv4 address like 10.0.1.100, DIG will reverse the IP address

using byte (8-bit) format and sets the NAME parameter to 100.1.0.10.in-addr.arpa. DIG also sets the TYPE

and CLASS parameters to *PTR and *IN, respectively.

By default, IPv6 addresses are queried using nibble (4-bit) format under the zone ip6.arpa (and not zone

ip6.int). Thus, for an IPv6 address like 2001:D88::1, DIG will set the NAME parameter to

1.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.8.8.d.0.1.0.0.2.ip6.arpa. DIG also sets the TYPE and CLASS

parameters to *PTR and *IN, respectively.

Note: For IPv4, a reverse lookup name is normally the IP address written in reverse order, separated by a

dot at every 8-bit boundary (a ’byte’ boundary) and it is delegated within the zone in-addr.arpa (i.e.

394 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 411: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

100.1.0.10.in-addr.arpa.). The notation for IPv6 is a bit different, it is also the IP address written

backwards with dots as separators, but it is separated at every 4-bit boundary (a ’nibble’ boundary) and

the delegation is done within the zone ip6.arpa. (e.g. 8.8.d.0.1.0.0.2.ip6.arpa.). In the past, the delegation

for IPv6 addresses was done in the zone ip6.int, therefore today it might still be common and often

necessary to query a delegation like 8.8.d.0.1.0.0.2.ip6.int.

*NO No reverse lookup will be performed.

*YES A reverse lookup will be performed.

*IP6INT

An IPv6 address reverse lookup in the zone ip6.int will be performed. This zone is deprecated,

but may still be required to query IPv6 backbone prefixes.

Top

Domain name server (DMNNAMSVR)

Specifies the name or the IP address of the DNS server that DIG will use as its current server for the

query session. You can specify any DNS server to which your TCP/IP network has access.

DIG retrieves information from DNS servers. It needs an active DNS server to send its queries to. If you

do not specify a DNS server with DMNNAMSVR when you start the tool, it will attempt to set one of

the following as its default DNS server for the session:

1. DNS server your system is configured to use (*CFG), or

2. The DNS server that is running on your local system.

*CFG Try all the DNS servers currently designated for use by this system. These server internet

addresses can be seen by prompting the Change TCP/IP Domain (CHGTCPDMN) command and

looking at the values shown for the INTNETADR parameter.

server-domain-name

Specify the name of a DNS server.

server-internet-address

Specify the IP address of a DNS server.

Top

Domain name server port (PORT)

Specifies the default TCP/UDP name server port to use.

53 The default port is 53.

1-65535

Specify a valid port number.

Top

Query timeout (TIMEOUT)

Specifies the timeout interval, in seconds, to wait for a response.

5 A timeout value of 5 seconds is used.

1-100 Specify a valid timeout value in seconds.

Top

Start DIG Query (STRDIGQRY) 395

Page 412: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Use domain search list (USEDMNSCHL)

Specifies whether or not to use the search list defined by the Domain search list (DMNSCHLIST)

parameter. The search list is not used by default.

*NO Do not use a search list.

*YES Use the search list specified by the DMNSCHLIST parameter.

Top

Domain search list (DMNSCHLIST)

Specifies a single domain name for the search list. The default search list is set by running the Change

TCP/IP Domain (CHGTCPDMN) command and specifying the DMNSCHLIST parameter. If more than

one domain name is found, only the first domain name is used.

If DMNSCHLIST is specified, USEDMNSCHL(*YES) must also be specified.

*CFG Use the first domain name found in the search list specified for the DMNSCHLIST parameter on

the CHGTCPDMN command.

*NONE

Do not specify a search list.

character-value

Specify a valid domain name string to use. Only one domain name can be specified.

Top

Source address (SRCADR)

Specifies the source IP address to use when sending the query. Some DNS servers are configured to only

allow queries from certain source addresses. This parameter allows you use a specific source address if

your system has multiple network interfaces.

*DFT Uses the default supplied by the stack.

*ANY4

Any IPv4 address, or ’0.0.0.0’.

*LOOPBACK4

IPv4 loopback, or ’127.0.0.1’.

*ANY6

Any IPv6 address, or ’::’.

*LOOPBACK6

IPv6 loopback, or ’::1’.

character-value

Specify an IP address to use as the source IP address for the query.

Top

396 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 413: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Batch input file (BCHFILE)

Specifies the file containing a list of query requests to be used as batch input. The file contains a number

of queries, one per line. Each entry in the file should be organized in the same way they would be

presented as queries to DIG using the PASE command-line interface. The purpose of using a file is to

allow batch mode or scripting operation.

*NONE

Do not specify a batch query file.

path-name

Specify the path for a stream file from which input is read. The contents of the stream file lines

are as follows:

Format: [@global-server] [domain] [q-type] [q-class] {q-opt}

or

{global-d-opt} domain [@local-server] {local-d-opt}

or

[domain [@local-server] {local-d-opt} [...]]

Where:

domain is in the Domain Name System

q-type is one of (a,any,mx,ns,soa,...) [default:a]

(Use ixfr=version for type ixfr)

q-class is one of (in,hs,ch, ...) [default: in]

q-opt is one of:

-x dot-notation (shortcut for in-addr lookups)

-i (IP6.INT reverse IPv6 lookups)

-f filename (batch mode)

-b address[#port] (bind to source address/port)

-p port (specify port number)

-q name (specify query name)

-t type (specify query type)

-c class (specify query class)

-k keyfile (specify tsig key file)

-y [hmac:]name:key (specify named base64 tsig key)

-4 (use IPv4 query transport only)

-6 (use IPv6 query transport only)

d-opt is of the form +keyword[=value], where keyword is:

+[no]vc (TCP mode)

+[no]tcp (TCP mode, alternate syntax)

+time=### (Set query timeout) [5]

+tries=### (Set number of UDP attempts) [3]

+retry=### (Set number of UDP retries) [2]

+domain=### (Set default domainname)

+bufsize=### (Set EDNS0 Max UDP packet size)

+ndots=### (Set NDOTS value)

+edns=### (Set EDNS version)

+[no]search (Set whether to use searchlist)

+[no]showsearch (Search with intermediate results)

+[no]defname (Ditto)

+[no]recurse (Recursive mode)

+[no]all (Set or clear all display flags)

+[no]qr (Print question before sending)

+[no]nssearch (Search authoritative nameservers)

+[no]identify (ID responders in short answers)

+[no]trace (Trace delegation down from root)

+[no]dnssec (Request DNSSEC records)

+[no]sigchase (Chase DNSSEC signatures)

+trusted-key=#### (Trusted Key chasing DNSSEC sigs)

+[no]topdown (Do DNSSEC validation top down)

+[no]multiline (Print records in expanded format)

global d-opts and servers (before domain) affect all queries

local d-opts and servers (after domain) affect only that query

For example, you could put these lines into a file:

ibm.com aaaa in

Start DIG Query (STRDIGQRY) 397

Page 414: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

aol.com mx

-q microsoft.com -t aaaa -c in

+recurse cisco.com @10.0.0.1 @10.0.0.2

@10.0.0.1 aa.com

Top

IP Version (IPVSN)

Specifies whether to limit the query to IPv4 or IPv6 networks.

*ALL Do not limit queries to IPv4 or IPv6.

*IPV4ONLY

Only send queries out IPv4 network interfaces.

*IPV6ONLY

Only send queries out IPv6 network interfaces.

Top

Network protocol (PROTOCOL)

Specified whether to use TCP or UDP when sending requests to the server.

*UDP Use UDP to send the query. However, TCP will be automatically selected for queries that require

it, such as zone transfer (AXFR) requests.

*TCP Use TCP to send the query.

Top

Recursion desired (SETRDFLAG)

Specifies whether or not to set the Recursion Desired (RD) flag in the query. This tells the current DNS

server to query other DNS servers if the current server does not have the information.

*YES Set the RD flag.

*NO Do not set the RD flag.

Top

Authoritative answers only (SETAAFLAG)

Specifies whether or not to set the Authoritative Answers (AA) flag in the query. This indicates that you

want the response to be from an authoritative server and not from the cache of a non-authoritative server.

Authoritative servers own the domain being queried.

*NO Do not set the AA flag.

*YES Set the AA flag.

Top

398 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 415: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Authentic data (SETADFLAG)

Specifies whether or not to set the Authentic Data (AD) flag in the query. The AD bit currently has a

standard meaning only in responses, not in queries, but the ability to set the bit in the query is provided

for completeness.

*NO Do not set the AD flag.

*YES Set the AD flag.

Top

Disable DNSSEC checking (SETCDFLAG)

Specifies whether or not to set the Checking Disabled (CD) flag in the query. This requests the server to

not perform DNSSEC validation of responses.

*NO Do not set the CD flag.

*YES Set the CD flag.

Top

Print multiple lines (MULTILINE)

Specifies whether or not to print records, like the SOA record, in a verbose multi-line format with

human-readable comments.

*NO Do not use multi-line format. Print each record on a single line, which can facilitate machine

parsing of the output.

*YES Use multi-line format.

Top

Print short answer (SHORT)

Specifies whether or not DIG should provide a terse answer.

*NO Do not print a terse answer. Print the answer in a verbose form.

*YES Print a terse answer.

Top

Print server in short answer (IDENTIFY)

Specifies whether or not to display the IP address and port number of the server that supplied the

answer when the SHORT(*YES) parameter is specified.

Note: This parameter is ignored if SHORT(*NO) is specified.

*NO Do not print the IP address and port number of the server providing the answer.

*YES Print the IP address and port number of the server providing the answer.

Top

Start DIG Query (STRDIGQRY) 399

Page 416: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Print query (PRTQRY)

Specifies whether or not to print the query as it is sent.

*NO Do not print the query as it is sent.

*YES Print the query as it is sent.

Top

Print RR class (PRTCLASS)

Specifies whether or not to print the CLASS when printing the record.

*YES Print the CLASS in the record output.

*NO Do not print the CLASS in the record output.

Top

Print RR TTL (PRTTTL)

Specifies whether or not to print the Time To Live (TTL) in the record output.

*YES Print the TTL in the record output.

*NO Do not print the TTL in the record output.

Top

Print all query detail (PRTALL)

Specifies whether to set or clear all print flags. You use this parameter in conjunction with other print

parameters. This allows you to print only the output you are interested in. The shipped default is *YES

for the CMD, COMMENTS, STATS, QUESTION, ANSWER, AUTHORITY and ADDITIONAL parameters.

*YES Set all print flags.

*NO Clear all print flags.

For example, you could use the PRTALL parameter as follows:

DIG PRTALL(*NO) QUESTION(*YES) ANSWER(*YES)

The PRTALL(*NO) parameter turns off all print flags, and the QUESTION(*YES) and ANSWER(*YES)

flags override the PRTALL(*NO) parameter to print only the question and answer sections of the DIG

output.

Top

Print query command (CMD)

Specifies whether to print the initial comment in the output identifying the version of DIG and the query

options that have been applied.

*DFT Use the value specified for the Print all query detail (PRTALL) parameter.

*YES Print the initial comment.

400 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 417: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*NO Do not print the initial comment.

Top

Print query comments (COMMENTS)

Specifies whether to print comment lines in the output.

*DFT Use the value specified for the Print all query detail (PRTALL) parameter.

*YES Print the comment lines.

*NO Do not print the comment lines.

Top

Print query statistics (STATS)

Specifies whether to print query statistics, like when the query was made or the size of the reply.

*DFT Use the value specified for the Print all query detail (PRTALL) parameter.

*YES Print the query statistics.

*NO Do not print the query statistics.

Top

Print question section (QUESTION)

Specifies whether to print the question section of a reply.

*DFT Use the value specified for the Print all query detail (PRTALL) parameter.

*YES Print the question section of a reply.

*NO Do not print the question section of a reply.

Top

Print answer section (ANSWER)

Specifies whether to print the answer section of a reply.

*DFT Use the value specified for the Print all query detail (PRTALL) parameter.

*YES Print the answer section of a reply.

*NO Do not print the answer section of a reply.

Top

Print authority section (AUTHORITY)

Specifies whether to print the authority section of a reply.

*DFT Use the value specified for the Print all query detail (PRTALL) parameter.

*YES Print the authority section of a reply.

*NO Do not print the authority section of a reply.

Start DIG Query (STRDIGQRY) 401

Page 418: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Print additional section (ADDITIONAL)

Specifies whether to print the additional section of a reply.

*DFT Use the value specified for the Print all query detail (PRTALL) parameter.

*YES Print the additional section of a reply.

*NO Do not print the additional section of a reply.

Top

Key file (KEYFILE)

Specifies a Transaction Signature (TSIG) key file to sign the DNS queries. The DNS server that is queried

needs to be configured with the TSIG key and algorithm that is being used or the transaction will fail.

This key must be a base-64 encoding of an HMAC-MD5 key.

Note: If this parameter is specified, the KEYNAME parameter cannot be specified.

*NONE

Do not specify a key path name.

path-name

Specify the path name of a stream file which contains the keys to be used. For example,

’/QIBM/UserData/OS400/DNS/_DYN/my-tsig-key._KID’.

The DNS server being queried needs to include this key name and algorithm in its configuration

in order to accept this TSIG key from clients.

Top

Key name (KEYNAME)

Specifies a Transaction Signature (TSIG) key to sign the DNS queries. The key is a base-64 encoded string.

The DNS server that is queried needs to be configured with the TSIG key and algorithm that is being

used or the transaction will fail.

Note: If this parameter is specified, the KEYFILE parameter cannot be specified.

*NONE

Do not specify a key name.

character-value

Specify the Transaction Signature key to use. The format is name:key where name is the key name,

and key is the actual key as a base-64 encoded string. Example:

my-tsig-key:JNvcpnxysbJ2hsdOqQ5qrQ==

The key name in this case is ’my-tsig-key’ and the base-64 encoded key is

’JNvcpnxysbJ2hsdOqQ5qrQ==’.

The DNS server being queried needs to include this key and algorithm in its configuration in

order to accept this TSIG key from clients.

402 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 419: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Stop on SERVFAIL (STOPFAIL)

Specifies whether to stop or try the next server if you receive a SERVFAIL response. The default is to not

try the next server, which is the reverse of normal stub resolver behaviour.

*YES Do not try the next server if a SERVFAIL response is received. This is the reverse of normal stub

resolver behaviour.

*NO Try the next server if a SERVFAIL response is received.

Top

Ignore truncated responses (UDPTRUNC)

Specifies whether to ignore truncation in UDP responses or retry with TCP.

*RETRY

Retry queries using TCP if UDP responses are truncated.

*IGNORE

Ignore truncation in UDP responses. Do not retry queries using TCP if UDP responses are

truncated.

Top

List authoritative servers (NSSCH)

Specifies whether or not DIG should attempt to find the authoritative DNS servers for the zone

containing the name being looked up (HOSTNAME parameter) and print the Start of Authority (SOA)

record that each name server has for the zone.

*NO Do not search for the SOA records of all DNS servers for the zone containing the HOSTNAME.

*YES Search for the SOA records of all DNS servers for the zone containing the HOSTNAME.

Top

Trace delegation path (TRACE)

Specifies whether or not to tracing the delegation path from the root name servers for the name being

looked up. When tracing is enabled, DIG makes iterative queries to resolve the name being looked up. It

will follow referrals from the root servers, showing the answer from each server that was used to resolve

the lookup. You must have access to the root servers for this option.

*NO Do not trace the delegation path from the root servers for the name being looked up

(HOSTNAME parameter).

*YES Trace the delegation path from the root servers for the name being looked up (HOSTNAME

parameter).

Top

Times to try UDP query (UDPTRIES)

Specifies how many times to try UDP queries to the current DNS server before attempting TCP queries.

Start DIG Query (STRDIGQRY) 403

Page 420: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

3 Try UDP queries three times before attempting TCP queries.

1-100 Specify the number of times to try UDP queries before attempting TCP queries. If you use this

parameter, you do not need to use the UDPNBRRTY parameter.

Top

UDP retry (UDPNBRRTY)

Specifies the number of times to retry UDP queries to the current DNS server before attempting TCP

queries.

2 Two UDP retries will be used. This is in addition to the initial query.

0-100 Specify the number of UDP retries. You normally only need to retry a query 3 to 5 times. If you

use this parameter, you do not need to use the UDPTRIES parameter.

Top

Number of dots (NBRDOTS)

Specifies the number of dots (period characters) that have to appear in a domain name for it to be

considered absolute.

Names with fewer dots are interpreted as relative names and will be searched for in the domains listed in

the DMNSCHLIST parameter.

1 If the domain name contains one dot it is considered an absolute name.

0-10 Specify the number of dots that must be in a domain name for the domain name to be considered

to be an absolute name.

Top

UDP buffer size for EDNS (BUFSIZE)

Specifies the UDP message buffer size advertised using EDNS(0).

0 The UDP message buffer size is 0.

0-65535

Specify the number of bytes to use as the UDP message buffer size. You typically want to set this

buffer size to avoid truncated packets in UDP. By default, UDP sends a maximum packet size of

512 bytes unless overridden by this option. This is useful if TCP connections are blocked by

firewalls.

Top

Set EDNS version (EDNS)

Specifies the EDNS version to use with queries. Setting the EDNS version will cause an EDNS query to

be sent. The Clear EDNS version (NOEDNS) parameter clears the remembered EDNS version.

If EDNS is specified, the NOEDNS parameter must not be specified.

0 Version 0 is traditionally used to allow UDP packets larger than 512 bytes for clients and servers

that support it.

404 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 421: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

0-255 Values other than 0 have uses in DNSSEC zones.

Resolvers and servers can negotiate with other servers to set a UDP message size larger than the 512 byte

default. Typically, they will attempt to negotiate a 4096 byte UDP packet size with a remote server. This

negotiation requires the remote server to support EDNS. If the remote server does not support EDNS,

then the original 512 byte limit remains the UDP default.

You can use the BUFSIZE parameter to control the size of the negotiated UDP packets.

Top

Clear EDNS version (NOEDNS)

Specifies that the value set by a previous DIG invocation with the Set EDNS version (EDNS) parameter

specified is to be cleared.

If NOEDNS is specified, the EDNS parameter must not be specified.

*NO Do not clear the remembered EDNS version.

*YES Clear the remembered EDNS version.

Top

Best effort display (BESTEFFORT)

Specifies whether or not to attempt to print the contents of messages which are malformed.

*NO Do not print malformed answers.

*YES Attempt to print malformed answers.

Top

Request DNSSEC records (DNSSEC)

Specifies whether or not to request DNSSEC records be sent by setting the DNSSEC OK bit (DO) in the

OPT record in the additional section of the query.

*NO Do not request any DNSSEC records.

*YES Request any DNSSEC records.

Top

Chase DNSSEC chains (SIGCHASE)

Specifies whether or not to chase DNSSEC signature chains. This attempts to verify SIG records that

belong to the record and further will try to verify them recursively for all the keys and DS that form the

chain of trust all the way up to any self-signed or unsigned key.

*NO Do not chase DNSSEC signature chains.

*YES Chase DNSSEC signature chains.

If SIGCHASE(*YES) is specified, DNSSEC(*YES) must also be specified.

Top

Start DIG Query (STRDIGQRY) 405

Page 422: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Trusted keys file (TRUSTEDKEY)

Specifies a file containing trusted keys to be used with the SIGCHASE parameter. Each DNSKEY record

must be on its own line.

If a value other than *NONE is specified, SIGCHASE(*YES) must also be specified.

*NONE

Do not specify a trusted key.

path-name

Specify the path name for a stream file with the trusted keys.

Top

DNSSEC top down validation (TOPDOWN)

Specifies, when chasing DNSSEC signature chains, whether or not to perform a top down validation

(from the root ’.’ to the leaf nodes).

If TOPDOWN(*YES) is specified, SIGCHASE(*YES) must also be specified.

*NO Do not do top down validation.

*YES Do top down validation.

Top

Output file (TOSTMF)

Specifies the name of a stream file where all command output is written.

*STDOUT

All command output goes to the standard output device (normally the display).

path-name

Specify the path for a stream file where output should be written.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Forward Lookup Example - Long

STRDIGQRY HOSTNAME(’ibm.com’)

DMNNAMSVR(*CFG)

This command illustrates a simple query for a domain named ’ibm.com’. It will use the configured DNS

server on the system. By default it will look up record type *A and class *IN. The output from this

command might look like this:

; <<>> DiG 9.4.1.i5/OS.V6R1M0 <<>> ibm.com @10.0.1.100

; (1 server found)

;; global options: printcmd

;; Got answer:

;; ->>HEADER<<- opcode: QUERY, status: NOERROR, id: 510

;; flags: qr rd ra; QUERY: 1, ANSWER: 3, AUTHORITY: 3, ADDITIONAL: 3

;; QUESTION SECTION:

406 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 423: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

;ibm.com. IN A

;; ANSWER SECTION:

ibm.com. 9559 IN A 129.42.18.103

ibm.com. 9559 IN A 129.42.16.103

ibm.com. 9559 IN A 129.42.17.103

;; AUTHORITY SECTION:

ibm.com. 9559 IN NS leda2.ibm.com.

ibm.com. 9559 IN NS castor.ibm.com.

ibm.com. 9559 IN NS pollux.ibm.com.

;; ADDITIONAL SECTION:

leda2.ibm.com. 9559 IN A 9.14.1.3

castor.ibm.com. 9559 IN A 9.78.1.2

pollux.ibm.com. 9559 IN A 9.46.1.2

;; Query time: 13 msec

;; SERVER: 10.0.1.100#53(10.0.1.100)

;; WHEN: Sat Aug 5 11:11:18 2006

;; MSG SIZE rcvd: 183

Example 2: Forward Lookup Example - Short

DIG HOSTNAME(’ibm.com’)

DMNNAMSVR(*CFG)

SHORT(*YES)

IDENTIFY(*YES)

This command illustrates a the same query as in example 1, but with shorter output.

129.42.18.103 from server 10.0.1.100 in 1 ms.

129.42.16.103 from server 10.0.1.100 in 2 ms.

129.42.17.103 from server 10.0.1.100 in 2 ms.

Example 3: Reverse Lookup Example

DIG HOSTNAME(’10.0.1.100’)

REVERSE(*YES)

This command illustrates a simple reverse query for a host with IPv4 address ’10.0.1.100’. It will use the

configured DNS server on the system (seen with the CHGTCPDMN command). By default it will look up

name ’100.1.0.10.in-addr.arpa.’ and record type PTR and class *IN. This is equivalent to the following

command:

DIG HOSTNAME(’100.1.0.10.in-addr.arpa’)

TYPE(*PTR)

CLASS(*IN)

The output from this type of query might look like this:

; <<>> DiG 9.4.1.i5/OS.V6R1M0 <<>> -x 10.0.1.100 @10.0.1.100

; (1 server found)

;; global options: printcmd

;; Got answer:

;; ->>HEADER<<- opcode: QUERY, status: NOERROR, id: 609

;; flags: qr rd ra; QUERY: 1, ANSWER: 1, AUTHORITY: 1, ADDITIONAL: 1

;; QUESTION SECTION:

;100.1.0.10.in-addr.arpa. IN PTR

;; ANSWER SECTION:

Start DIG Query (STRDIGQRY) 407

Page 424: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

100.1.0.10.in-addr.arpa. 86400 IN PTR mydns1.i5os.ibm.com.

;; AUTHORITY SECTION:

0.10.in-addr.arpa. 86400 IN NS mydns1.i5os.ibm.com.

;; ADDITIONAL SECTION:

mydns2.i5os.ibm.com. 47409 IN A 10.0.2.200

;; Query time: 994 msec

;; SERVER: 10.0.1.100#53(10.0.1.100)

;; WHEN: Sat Aug 5 11:32:16 2006

;; MSG SIZE rcvd: 119

Example 4: DIG with Searchlist

STRDIGQRY HOSTNAME(time)

TYPE(*ANY)

CLASS(*IN)

USESCHDMNL(*YES)

DMNSCHLIST(nist.gov)

This command queries for any records associated with the name ’time’. If this query fails, then DIG will

retry the query by appending the domain ’ibm.com’ from the searchlist to the name.

The output from this type of query might look like this:

; <<>> DiG 9.4.1.i5/OS.V6R1M0 <<>> -q time -t any -c in @10.0.1.100

+search +domain=nist.gov

; (1 server found)

;; global options: printcmd

;; Got answer:

;; ->>HEADER<<- opcode: QUERY, status: NOERROR, id: 1336

;; flags: qr rd ra; QUERY: 1, ANSWER: 1, AUTHORITY: 2, ADDITIONAL: 2

;; QUESTION SECTION:

;time.nist.gov. IN ANY

;; ANSWER SECTION:

time.nist.gov. 287 IN A 192.43.244.18

;; AUTHORITY SECTION:

nist.gov. 65982 IN NS ns1.nist.gov.

nist.gov. 65982 IN NS dns-x.boulder.nist.gov.

;; ADDITIONAL SECTION:

ns1.nist.gov. 283 IN A 129.6.13.2

dns-x.boulder.nist.gov. 40652 IN A 132.163.4.9

;; Query time: 1038 msec

;; SERVER: 10.0.1.100#53(10.0.1.100)

;; WHEN: Sat Aug 5 11:36:18 2006

;; MSG SIZE rcvd: 125

Example 5: Suppression of Response Sections

DIG HOSTNAME(time.nist.gov)

TYPE(*ANY)

CLASS(*IN)

PRTALL(*NO)

QUESTION(*YES)

ANSWER(*YES)

This command is similar to Example 4, except we suppressed most of the response sections using the

PRTALL(*NO) paramter, and then overrode that setting for the question section using QUESTION(*YES)

and the answer section using ANSWER(*YES).

408 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 425: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The output from this type of query might look like this:

;time.nist.gov. IN ANY

time.nist.gov. 673 IN A 192.43.244.18

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

DNS0013

Error processing command parameters.

DNS0065

Option 33 of i5/OS is required, but is not installed.

TCP7124

Program &1 in library &2 type *PGM ended abnormally.

Top

Start DIG Query (STRDIGQRY) 409

Page 426: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

410 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 427: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Directory Shadowing (STRDIRSHD)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Directory Shadowing (STRDIRSHD) command submits a job to start the directory shadowing

environment in the system work subsystem (QSYSWRK). The system administrator can use this

command to restart the directory shadowing environment if it is not already active. Only one active

directory shadowing environment per system is allowed. If the directory shadowing environment is

already active, a warning message is issued.

The system work subsystem (QSYSWRK) automatically starts the directory shadowing environment as a

prestart job when the subsystem is started.

To ensure the job submitted with this command is successful, use the Work with Jobs (WRKJOB)

command using the job number returned in the message after issuing the STRDIRSHD command.

There are no parameters for this command.

Restriction: You must have job control (*JOBCTL) authority to use this command.

Top

Parameters

None

Top

Examples

STRDIRSHD

This command submits a job to start the directory shadowing environment in the system work subsystem

QSYSWRK.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF89A8

Unable to start job that controls directory shadowing.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 411

Page 428: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

412 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 429: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start NSLOOKUP Query (STRDNSQRY)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Conditional

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start NSLOOKUP Query (STRDNSQRY) command, or its alias NSLOOKUP, starts the Name Server

Lookup tool. This tool is deprecated and is only provided for backwards compatibility. The recommended

tool is now DIG which can be run using the Start DIG Query (STRDIGQRY or DIG) command. In

addition, another simpler tool, HOST, is also recommended which can be run using the Start HOST

Query (STRHOSTQRY or HOST) command.

NSLOOKUP is an interactive query tool that allows you to retrieve information from or test the response

of a Domain Name System (DNS) server. You can verify that a DNS server is responding correctly before

you configure your system to use it. You can also retrieve DNS information about hosts, domains, and

other DNS servers.

NSLOOKUP asks for (queries) information from DNS servers. To begin a NSLOOKUP query session, an

active DNS server must be designated the ’current’ server for the query session. The current server is the

DNS server that NSLOOKUP sends all queries to unless you tell it otherwise. All references in the

following help to ’the current server’, or ’the current DNS server’, refer only to the current DNS server

for the current NSLOOKUP query session.

NSLOOKUP retrieves information from DNS servers. It needs an active DNS server to which it can send

its queries. If you do not specify a DNS server with DMNNAMSVR when you start the tool, it will

attempt to set one of the following as its current DNS server for the session:

1. The DNS server your system is configured to use

2. The DNS server that is running on your local system.

If neither of these conditions exist, NSLOOKUP will not be able to retrieve any information until you

specify a DNS server to query. DMNNAMSVR allows you to start the query session and set the DNS

server of your choice as the default server for the session.

Following is a list of NSLOOKUP subcommands that can be used once the query session is started.

host Look up information for host and query the current DNS server.

host dns-server

Look up information for host, but query dns-server instead of the current DNS server.

Allows you to direct the query to a DNS server other than the current DNS server for the query

session.

server dns-server

Change the current DNS server to dns-server, using the current DNS server to get the IP address

of dns-server.

lserver dns-server

Change the current DNS server to dns-server, using the initial DNS server to get the IP address of

dns-server.

Useful if you switched default DNS servers during your query session, and the current DNS

server cannot resolve the new DNS server name. lserver allows you to make the switch using

your initial DNS server instead of the current one. If the initial DNS server also cannot resolve

the new DNS name, substitute the IP address for the name, if you know it. If you do not know

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 413

Page 430: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

the IP address for the new DNS server, try restarting the NSLOOKUP session using the

DMNNAMSVR parameter to specify the new DNS server as the current server for the query

session.

root This interactive command is not implemented.

finger This interactive command is not implemented.

ls This interactive command is not implemented.

view This interactive command is not implemented.

help This interactive command is not implemented.

? This interactive command is not implemented.

exit Exits interactive mode.

set keyword

set keyword=value

This command is used to change state information that affects the lookups.

set all Displays the current values of the frequently used options to set. Information about the

current DNS server and host is also displayed.

set class=value

Change the default query class to one of the following values:

v IN (the Internet class)

v CH (the CHAOS class)

v HS (the Hesiod class)

v ANY (wildcard - any class)

The class specifies the protocol group of the information. The initial default query class is

IN.

set debug

Turn debugging mode on. A lot more information is displayed about the packet sent to

the current DNS server and the resulting answer.

set nodebug

Turn debugging mode off.

set d2 Turn exhaustive (verbose) debugging mode on. A lot more information is displayed about

the packet sent to the current DNS server and the resulting answer.

set nod2

Turn exhaustive (verbose) debugging mode off.

set domain=name

Set default domain to name.

set search

Append the name in the domain search list to the request.

set nosearch

Do not append the name in the domain search list to the request.

set port=X

Use port ’X’ to query the current DNS server, where ’X’ is a numerical port number. The

default value is 53.

Note: The well-known port number for DNS servers is 53 and most DNS servers use it.

You do not normally need to set the port value unless the DNS server you want to query

is not using port 53. Other ports are sometimes used under special circumstances.

414 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 431: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

set querytype=X

set type=X

Sets the record type that used in the query. Replace ’X’ with one of the DNS record types

(A, CNAME, MX, PTR, AAAA, etc.).

set recurse

Tell the current DNS server to query other DNS servers if the current server does not

have the information.

set norecurse

Tell the current DNS server to not query other DNS servers if the current server does not

have the information.

set retry=X

Set the number of retries to X (where X is a numerical value). The default value for

number of retries is 1.

Note: The retry value works together with the timeout value, which is the time in

seconds that NSLOOKUP waits before making the first retry. Retry values are usually set

to 1 or 2.

set timeout=X

Set the timeout interval to X seconds (where X is a numerical value). The default value is

5 seconds.

Note: Timeout determines how long NSLOOKUP waits before making the first retry if no

reply is received on the first query. The timeout value doubles after each unsuccessful

retry.

set vc Use TCP for queries instead of UDP.

set novc

Use UDP for queries instead of TCP.

Restrictions:

v This command is not threadsafe when run in interactive mode.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

HOSTNAME Query name Character value, *NONE Optional,

Positional 1

DMNNAMSVR Domain name server Character value, *CFG Optional,

Positional 2

Top

Query name (HOSTNAME)

Specifies the name that you want the Domain Name System (DNS) server to supply information about.

You can use either a name or a numerical IP address. For example, a name could be

″mycomputer.mycompany.com″ or ″mycompany.com″. A numerical IP address could be ″64.236.1.107″.

Use either the name to obtain the address, or use the address to obtain the name.

Start NSLOOKUP Query (STRDNSQRY) 415

Page 432: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*NONE

No host name is provided. If *NONE is specified or passed as the default for this parameter, an

interactive NSLOOKUP session will be started.

Note: This value is only valid if the STRDNSQRY command is run in an interactive job.

host-name

Specify the name to use for the DNS server query.

host-internet-address

Specify the IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation or a colon-delimited IPv6 address of a host to

use for the DNS server query.

Top

Domain name server (DMNNAMSVR)

Specifies the name or the IP address of the DNS server that NSLOOKUP will use as its current server for

the query session. You can specify any DNS server to which your TCP/IP network has access. Or, if you

want to test the response of a DNS server prior to designating it for use by your system, specify that

server.

NSLOOKUP retrieves information from DNS servers. It needs an active DNS server to send its queries to.

If you do not specify a DNS server with DMNNAMSVR when you start the tool, it will attempt to set

one of the following as its current DNS server for the session:

1. DNS server your system is configured to use (*CFG), or

2. The DNS server that is running on your local system.

If neither of these conditions exist, NSLOOKUP will not be able to retrieve any information until you

specify a DNS server to query. DMNNAMSVR allows you to start the query session and set the DNS

server of your choice as the current server for the session.

*CFG Use the DNS server that is currently designated for use by this system. These server internet

addresses can be seen by prompting the Change TCP/IP Domain (CHGTCPDMN) command and

looking at the values shown for the INTNETADR parameter.

server-domain-name

Specify the name of a DNS server.

server-internet-address

Specify the IP address of a DNS server.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Simple DNS Lookup

STRDNSQRY HOSTNAME(’64.236.1.107’)

DMNNAMSVR(*CFG)

This command starts a DNS query using the host located at IP address 64.236.1.107 and the DNS server

that is currently designated for use by this system.

The output from this type of query might look like this:

416 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 433: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Server: 10.0.1.100

Address: 10.0.1.100#53

Non-authoritative answer:

107.1.236.64.in-addr.arpa name = any-ext.ns.aol.com.

Authoritative answers can be found from:

1.236.64.in-addr.arpa nameserver = dns-02.atdn.net.

1.236.64.in-addr.arpa nameserver = dns-01.atdn.net.

dns-02.atdn.net internet address = 205.188.157.236

dns-01.atdn.net internet address = 152.163.159.236

Example 2: DNS Lookup of an Internet Address

NSLOOKUP HOSTNAME(aol.com)

DMNNAMSVR(’64.236.1.107’)

This command starts a DNS query to the local machine to find the the internet address for aol.com.

The output from this type of query might look like this:

Server: 64.236.1.107

Address: 64.236.1.107#53

aol.com

origin = dns-01.ns.aol.com

mail addr = hostmaster.aol.net

serial = 2006080400

refresh = 1800

retry = 300

expire = 604800

minimum = 600

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

DNS0013

Error processing command parameters.

DNS0065

Option 33 of i5/OS is required, but is not installed.

TCP7124

Program &1 in library &2 type *PGM ended abnormally.

Top

Start NSLOOKUP Query (STRDNSQRY) 417

Page 434: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

418 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 435: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Disk Reorganization (STRDSKRGZ)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Disk Reorganization (STRDSKRGZ) command allows the user to start the disk reorganization

function for one or more auxiliary storage pools (ASPs). The user specifies a time limit that the function

is to run for each ASP being reorganized. A message will be sent to the system history (QHST) log when

the reorganization function is started for each ASP.

Unused space will be collected together within the ASP. This allows future large disk allocations to be

done more efficiently.

Restriction: You must have *ALLOBJ special authority to use this command.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

ASP ASP number Single values: *ALLOther values (up to 32 repetitions): 1-32

Optional,

Positional 2

ASPDEV ASP device Values (up to 32 repetitions): Name, *ALLAVL Optional

TIMLMT Time limit 1-9999, *NOMAX Required,

Positional 1

Top

Auxiliary storage pool ID (ASP)

Specifies for which auxiliary storage pools the disk reorganization function is to be started.

*ALL Disk reorganization will be started for the system ASP (ASP number 1) and all basic ASPs (ASP

numbers 2-32) defined to the system.

auxiliary-storage-pool-number

Specify the ASP for which disk reorganization is to be started. Valid ASP numbers are 1 to 32. Up

to 32 ASP numbers may be specified.

Top

ASP device (ASPDEV)

Specifies the name of the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) device for which the disk reorganization is to be

started. A value must be specified for the ASP parameter or the ASPDEV parameter.

*ALLAVL

Disk reorganization will be started for all ASP devices that currently have a status of ’Available’.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 419

Page 436: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

auxiliary-storage-device-name

Specify the name of the independent ASP device for which disk reorganization is to be started.

Up to 32 ASP device names may be specified.

Top

Time limit (TIMLMT)

Specifies the amount of time, in minutes, that the reorganization function is allowed to run. When the

time limit is reached the function ends. The time limit specified is for each ASP being reorganized. For

example, if ASP(*ALL) is specified and the machine has four ASP’s configured and TIMLMT(60) is

specified, four reorganization functions are started and each can run 60 minutes. If reorganization of any

ASP has not completed after 60 minutes, it will be forced to end. This allows you to do disk

reorganization incrementally.

*NOMAX

There is no time limit for the reorganization function. For a large ASP that has many small

unused disk areas, the reorganization function can take a long time to complete. If you start the

reorganization function with *NOMAX and you want to force the function to end, you can use

the End Disk Reorganization (ENDDSKRGZ) command.

time-limit

Specify the time limit that the reorganization function is allowed to run. Valid values range from

1 to 9999 minutes.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Starting Disk Reorganization for ASP 1

STRDSKRGZ ASP(1) TIMLMT(*NOMAX)

This command allows the user to start the disk reorganization function for ASP 1. The reorganization

function will run until the ASP has been reorganized or it is ended through the ENDDSKRGZ command.

Example 2: Starting Disk Reorganization with a Time Limit

STRDSKRGZ ASP(*ALL) TIMLMT(60)

This command allows the user to start the disk reorganization function for each ASP on the system. Each

reorganization function will have a time limit of sixty minutes. After sixty minutes, any reorganization

functions which have not completed will be ended.

Example 3: Starting Disk Reorganization for an ASP Device

STRDSKRGZ ASPDEV(MYASP1) TIMLMT(*NOMAX)

This command allows the user to start the disk reorganization function for ASP device MYASP1. The

reorganization function will run until the ASP has been reorganized or it is ended through the

ENDDSKRGZ command.

420 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 437: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF1888

Disk reorganization for ASP &1 already started.

CPF1890

*ALLOBJ authority required for requested operation.

CPF1891

Disk reorganization cannot be started on an ASP with only one unit.

Top

Start Disk Reorganization (STRDSKRGZ) 421

Page 438: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

422 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 439: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Disk Watcher (STRDW)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Disk Watcher (STRDW) command starts the collection of disk performance data. It allows the

user to obtain data including counts and durations of input/output (I/O) operations to disk units. In

addition, it provides useful run-time data regarding which objects are being read from disk or written to

disk, and which jobs, threads, or LIC tasks are causing the operations. The collected data is written to a

set of database files. The file names all begin with the letters ’QAPYDW’.

Restrictions:

v To use this command, you must have service (*SERVICE) special authority, or be authorized to the

Disk Watcher function of the Operating System through System i5 Navigator’s Application

Administration support. The Change Function Usage (CHGFCNUSG) command, with a function ID of

QIBM_SERVICE_DISK_WATCHER, can also be used to change the list of users that are allowed to use

this command.

v You must have execute (*EXECUTE) authority to the library specified in the Library (LIB) parameter.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DFN Definition Name, *SELECT Optional

COL Collection Name, *GEN Optional

LIB Library Name, QPFRDATA Optional

TEXT Text ’description’ Character value, *DFN, *BLANK Optional

RPLDTA Replace data *NO, *YES Optional

COLITV Collection interval 1-3600, *DFN, *DYN Optional

ENDCOL End collection Values (up to 3 repetitions): Element list Optional

Element 1: Option *NBRSEC, *DASDMB, *NBRITV

Element 2: Value Integer, 60

HDWF Hardware file *NO, *YES Optional

Top

Definition (DFN)

Specifies the Disk Watcher definition to use when starting a new Disk Watcher collection. The definition

identifies the disk I/O data to be collected. A new Disk Watcher definition can be created using the Add

Disk Watcher Definition (ADDDWDFN) command.

*SELECT

The user will be prompted to select from a list of existing Disk Watcher definitions.

name Specify the name of the Disk Watcher definition to use for this collection.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 423

Page 440: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Collection (COL)

Specifies the name of the collection. The name of the collection is the name of the database file member

to which the output data is to be written. If a member by this name does not exist in each Disk Watcher

database file, one will be created with the specified name. If a member by this name already exists, you

must specify *YES on the Replace data (RPLDTA) parameter in order to write over the data in the

existing member.

*GEN The collection name will be generated based on when the STRDW command was run. The format

of the collection name will be Qdddhhmmss where ddd is the Julian day (001-366) and hhmmss

is the hour (01-24), minute (00-59) and second (00-59) the disk I/O data collection was started.

name Specify the name of the collection.

Top

Library (LIB)

Specifies the library where the database files for the Disk Watcher data are to exist. Each file that is not

found in the specified library is automatically created in that library.

QPFRDATA

The database files will be located in library QPFRDATA.

name Specify the name of the library where the database files will be located.

Top

Text ’description’ (TEXT)

Specifies the text to be used for each member across the set of Disk Watcher database files associated

with the collection.

*DFN Disk Watcher database file members will have the same text description as the Disk Watcher

definition that was selected on the Definition (DFN) parameter.

*BLANK

Disk Watcher database file members will have no text description.

character-value

Specify the text description for this set of Disk Watcher database file members. The description

should be no more that 50 characters of text, enclosed in apostrophes.

Top

Replace data (RPLDTA)

Specifies whether an existing set of Disk Watcher database file members should be replaced with a new

set of members with the same name.

*NO The existing Disk Watcher database file members will not be replaced. A new Disk Watcher

collection will not begin if the specified member already exists.

*YES The existing Disk Watcher database file members will be replaced with data from the new

collection.

Top

424 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 441: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Collection interval (COLITV)

Specifies the interval between retrieval of disk I/O data.

*DFN The collection interval specified in the Disk Watcher definition will be used for this collection.

*DYN The time interval between samples is dynamic. This indicates that the interval seconds will be

adjusted to the optimal value and may change during the collection. The optimal value is the

largest interval time that can be used without missing data.

1-3600 Specify the number of seconds between intervals.

Top

End collection (ENDCOL)

Specifies the criteria which will end the collection. This parameter allows you to specify multiple

conditions which will end the collection of data. If more than one ending criteria is specified, disk I/O

data collection will end the first time any one of specified criteria has been met.

You can specify 3 values for this parameter.

Element 1: Option

*NBRSEC

End the collection after a number of seconds has elapsed. Specify the time limit in element 2 of

this parameter.

*DASDMB

End the collection when a number of megabytes of data have been written to the Disk Watcher

database files. Specify the megabyte limit in element 2 of this parameter.

*NBRITV

End the collection when a number of collection intervals have occurred. Specify the number of

intervals in element 2 of this parameter.

Element 2: Value

60 If the default of *NBRSEC is used for element 1 of this parameter, the collection will end after

sixty seconds of disk I/O data is collected.

integer

Specify the number of seconds (for *NBRSEC) or the number of megabytes (for *DASDMB) or the

number of intervals (for *NBRITV) to use as the ending criteria for disk I/O data collection.

Top

Hardware file (HDWF)

Specifies whether data will be written to the QAPYDWHDWR file for this collection. This file contains

storage device resource information provided by the Display Hardware Resources (DSPHDWRSC)

command.

*NO Storage device resource information will not be written to the QAPYDWHDWR file for this

collection.

*YES Storage device resource information will be written to the QAPYDWHDWR file for this

collection. The name of the QAPYDWHDWR file member will be the name specified on the

Collection (COL) parameter.

Start Disk Watcher (STRDW) 425

Page 442: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Examples

Example 1: Start a Disk Watcher Collection

STRDW DFN(MYDFN) COL(TEST) LIB(MYLIB)

This command will start Disk Watcher using definition MYDFN to determine which data should be

collected. Assuming the shipped default of ENDCOL(*NBRSEC 60) is used, data collection will end after

60 seconds. Collected data will be written to the Disk Watcher database files in library MYLIB in member

TEST. The Disk Watcher database file names all begin with ’QAPYDW’.

Example 2: Start Disk Watcher Using a Collection Interval

STRDW DFN(MYDFN) COLITV(5) ENDCOL((*NBRITV 200))

This command will start Disk Watcher to collect data using the definition called MYDFN. Data will be

collected at an interval of 5 seconds, overriding the interval specified in the definition. Data collection

will end after 200 intervals have been collected. Data will be written to the Disk Watcher database files in

library QPFRDATA in a member name which will be generated by Disk Watcher based on the date and

time the collection started.

Example 3: Start Disk Watcher, Prompting to Select a Definition

STRDW DFN(*SELECT) COL(TEST) LIB(MYLIB)

ENDCOL((*DASDMB 100))

This command will open a prompt panel listing all Disk Watcher definitions which currently exist on the

system. The definition selected on this panel will be used to determine what data will be collected. Data

collection will end after 100 megabytes of data have been written to the Disk Watcher database files in

library MYLIB in member TEST.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2401

Not authorized to library &1.

CPF9810

Library &1 not found.

CPFB511

Disk Watcher could not start due to reason code &1.

CPFB512

Start Disk Watcher did not complete successfully.

CPFB513

The user does not have the required authority.

426 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 443: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPFB514

Member already exists.

CPFB515

Not enough storage in machine pool.

CPFB51B

Option *SELECT is only valid if the command is being run interactively.

Top

Start Disk Watcher (STRDW) 427

Page 444: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

428 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 445: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Education (STREDU)

Where allowed to run:

v Interactive job (*INTERACT)

v Interactive program (*IPGM)

v Interactive REXX procedure (*IREXX)

Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Education (STREDU) command starts the online education session.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters

None

Top

Examples

STREDU

This command shows the following menus:

v The Start Education Administration menu is shown for the Administrator.

v The Select Course Option menu is shown for the new student that was enrolled by the Administrator.

v The Specify your Name data entry screen is shown for the new student that was not enrolled.

v The Select Course Option menu is shown for the enrolled student.

Top

Error messages

None

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 429

Page 446: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

430 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 447: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start 3270 Display Emulation (STREML3270)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start 3270 Display Emulation (STREML3270) command starts a 3270 device emulation session for a

display device to a binary synchronous communications (BSC) or Systems Network Architecture (SNA)

host system. The user can type this command on the command line or from any display station that

allows CL commands to be specified. This command can also be issued from a batch job by specifying

the display device (DSPDEV) parameter.

The STREML3270 command can be in a CL program specified as the INLPGM for a user profile that is

run when the user signs on the display device.

More information on device emulation is in the 3270 Device Emulation Support book, SC41-5408.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

EMLCTL Emulation controller, or Name Optional,

Positional 1

EMLDEV Emulation device, or Name Optional,

Positional 2

EMLLOC Emulation location Communications name Optional,

Positional 3

DSPDEV Display device, batch only Name, *CURRENT Optional

PAGEUP Page Up (Roll Down) key *PA2, *PA1, *PA3, *NONE, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7,

*F8, *F9, *F10, *F11, *F12, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17,

*F18, *F19, *F20, *F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *CLEAR,

*ERASEINP, *CSRSLT

Optional

PAGEDOWN Page Down (Roll Up) key *PA1, *PA2, *PA3, *NONE, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7,

*F8, *F9, *F10, *F11, *F12, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17,

*F18, *F19, *F20, *F21, *F22, *F23, *F24, *CLEAR,

*ERASEINP, *CSRSLT

Optional

TESTREQ Test Request key *DFT, *CLEAR, *ERASEINP Optional

CSRSLT Cursor Select key *NONE, *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5, *F6, *F7, *F8, *F9, *F10,

*F11, *F12, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16, *F17, *F18, *F19, *F20,

*F21, *F22, *F23, *F24

Optional

IGCEMLPC SNA DBCS 3270PC

emulation

*NO, *YES Optional

EMLPRTDEV Emulation printer device Name, *NONE, *EMLCTL, *EMLLOC Optional

INZWAIT Timeout wait for host 1-32767, 120, *NOMAX Optional

NUMLCK Numeric lock keyboard *EMLDEV, *NO, *YES Optional

NULLS Handle nulls *BLANK, *REMOVE Optional

LOGON Host signon/logon

command

Character value, *NONE Optional

WAITRSP Wait response *NO, *YES Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 431

Page 448: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

ENDCOND End emulation conditions Single values: *NONEOther values (up to 2 repetitions): *DACTLU, *UNBIND

Optional

ATNEMLMNU Attention emulation menu *YES, *NO Optional

FKEYPGM Function key program Single values: *NONEOther values: Element list

Optional

Element 1: Program Qualified object name

Qualifier 1: Program Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Element 2: Function keys Single values: *ALLFKEYSOther values (up to 24 repetitions): *F1, *F2, *F3, *F4, *F5,

*F6, *F7, *F8, *F9, *F10, *F11, *F12, *F13, *F14, *F15, *F16,

*F17, *F18, *F19, *F20, *F21, *F22, *F23, *F24

KBDTYPE Keyboard language type *DSPDEV, *SYSVAL, *LCL, AGB, AGE, AGI, AGM, ALI,

ALM, BGB, BGE, BLI, BLM, BRB, BRE, CAB, CAE, CAI,

CAM, CLB, CLE, CSB, CSE, CYB, DMB, DME, DMI,

DMM, ESB, FAB, FAE, FAI, FAM, FNB, FNE, FNI, FNM,

FQB, FQI, GKB, GNB, GNE, HIB, HNB, HNE, ICB, ICE,

ICI, ICM, INB, INI, IRB, ITB, ITE, ITI, ITM, JEB, JEI, JKB,

JPB, JPE, JUB, KAB, KOB, LAE, LTB, LVB, MKB, MKE,

NCB, NCE, NEB, NEE, NEI, NEM, NWB, NWE, NWI,

NWM, PLB, PKE, PLE, PRB, PRE, PRI, PRM, RCB, RMB,

RME, ROB, ROE, RUB, RUE, SFI, SFM, SGI, SGM, SKB,

SKE, SPB, SPE, SPI, SPM, SQB, SQE, SSB, SSI, SSE, SSM,

SWB, SWE, SWI, SWM, TAB, THB, THE, TKB, TKE, TRB,

TRE, UAE, UKB, UKE, UKI, UKM, USB, USE, USI, USM,

VNE, YGI, YGM, *TRNTBL

Optional

TRNTBLOUT Outgoing translation table Single values: *KBDTYPEOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Outgoing

translation table

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

TRNTBLIN Incoming translation table Single values: *KBDTYPEOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Incoming

translation table

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

EMLCFGE Configuration entry Name, QEMDFTCFGE, *NONE Optional

Top

Emulation controller (EMLCTL)

Specifies the name of a binary synchronous communications (BSC) controller description or Systems

Network Architecture (SNA) controller description that has attached 3270 emulation device descriptions.

When this parameter is specified, the requesting display device is linked to an available 3270 emulation

device on the emulation controller. At least one device attached to the controller must be available, and

the requester of the command must be authorized to use the controller and device.

Either this parameter, the Emulation device prompt (EMLDEV parameter), or the Emulation location

prompt (EMLLOC parameter) is required.

Top

432 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 449: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Emulation device (EMLDEV)

Specifies the name of a binary synchronous communications (BSC) or any System Network Architecture

(SNA) device emulation (3278) that is linked to the requesting display device to emulate a 3270 display

device. The requester must be authorized to this device, and the device must be available.

Either this parameter, the Emulation controller (EMLCTL) parameter, or the Emulation location

(EMLLOC) parameter is required.

Top

Emulation location (EMLLOC)

Specifies the remote location name that describes the location of the 3270 display emulation devices. This

name is defined during device description configuration, and it refers to the remote location where

communication takes place. When this parameter is specified, the requesting display device is linked to

an available 3270 emulation device referred to by the remote location. At least one of the emulation

devices referred to by the remote location must be available, and the requester of the command must be

authorized to use the device. A remote location can refer to as many as 1,016 emulation display devices.

Either this parameter, the Emulation controller prompt (EMLCTL parameter), or the Emulation device

prompt (EMLDEV parameter) is required.

Top

Display device, batch only (DSPDEV)

Specifies the name of the display device used for display emulation when the command is in a batch job.

The 3270 support tries to acquire the display device by this name; if the display device is acquired, the

3270 device emulation is active on that display device.

*CURRENT

The current display device name is used for device emulation. This parameter is used when the

command is in an interactive job.

display-device-name

Specify the display device name used for device emulation. This parameter is used when the

command is in a batch job.

Top

Page Up (Roll Down) key (PAGEUP)

Specifies a 3270 function for the Page Up (Roll Down) key on the 5250 type keyboard when 3270 device

emulation is active. This assignment is in effect when the number of input fields is not larger than the

maximum number of input fields.

*PA-key

Specify the 3270 PA key assigned to the Page Up (Roll Down) key. The default is the *PA2 key.

*NONE

No function is assigned to the Page Up (Roll Down) key. When there are fewer input fields on

the display than allowed by the 5250 display device, this key has no function.

*F-key Specify the 3270 F key assigned to the Page Up (Roll Down) key.

Start 3270 Display Emulation (STREML3270) 433

Page 450: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*CLEAR

The 3270 CLEAR key is assigned to the Page Up (Roll Down) key.

*ERASEINP

The 3270 ERASE INPUT key is assigned to the Page Up (Roll Down) key.

*CSRSLT

The 3270 CURSOR SELECT key is assigned to the Page Up (Roll Down) key and does not allow

the real Cursor Select key to be used.

Top

Page Down (Roll Up) key (PAGEDOWN)

Specifies an added function for the Page Down (Roll Up) key on the 5250 type keyboard when 3270

device emulation is active. This assignment is in effect when the number of input fields is not larger than

the maximum number of input fields.

*PA-key

Specify the 3270 PA key assigned to the Page Down (Roll Up) key. The default is the *PA1 key.

*NONE

No function is assigned to the Page Down (Roll Up) key. When there are fewer input fields on

the display than allowed by the 5250 display device, the key has no function.

*F-key Specify the 3270 F key assigned to the Page Down (Roll Up) key.

*CLEAR

The 3270 CLEAR key is assigned to the Page Down (Roll Up) key.

*ERASEINP

The 3270 ERASE INPUT key is assigned to the Page Down (Roll Up) key.

*CSRSLT

The 3270 CURSOR SELECT key is assigned to the Page Down (Roll Up) key and does not allow

the real Cursor Select key to be used.

Top

Test Request key (TESTREQ)

Specifies an added function for the Test Request key on the 5250 keyboard when 3270 device emulation is

active.

*DFT Normal function is assigned to the Test Request key. This is the system default. The normal

function depends on whether the 3270 emulation display device uses binary synchronous

communications (BSC) or Systems Network Architecture (SNA) protocol. BSC defaults to a 3270

Test Request function, while SNA defaults to a 3270 System Request function.

*CLEAR

The 3270 CLEAR key is assigned to the Test Request key.

*ERASEINP

The 3270 ERASE INPUT key is assigned to the Test Request key.

Top

434 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 451: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Cursor Select key (CSRSLT)

Specifies one of several physical function keys to be used as the Cursor Select key. When 3270 emulation

is active, the specified key can be used to select or reject selectable fields.

*NONE

A physical function key is not assigned to emulate the cursor select key. The real Cursor Select

key is used.

*F-key Specify the function key assigned to emulate the Cursor Select key. The use of the real Cursor

Select key is not allowed.

Top

SNA DBCS 3270PC emulation (IGCEMLPC)

Specifies whether System Network Architecture (SNA) double-byte character set (DBCS) 3270PC

emulation or 3270 device emulation is used. This parameter is valid only when using a S/55 Personal

Computer.

*NO SNA DBCS 3270PC emulation is not used.

*YES SNA DBCS 3270PC emulation is used.

Top

Emulation printer device (EMLPRTDEV)

Specifies the emulation printer device that is used for SNA DBCS 3270PC emulation. The printer

emulation device is selected after the device emulation is selected. This parameter is valid only when

*YES is specified on the SNA DBCS 3270PC emulation prompt (IGCEMLPC parameter).

*NONE

SNA DBCS 3270PC printer emulation with device emulation is not used. No printer emulation

device is selected.

emulation-device-description-name

Specify the printer emulation device with the selected display emulation device for SNA DBCS

3270PC emulation.

*EMLCTL

The first available printer emulation device on the specified controller on the Emulation

controller prompt (EMLCTL parameter) is used.

*EMLLOC

The first available printer emulation device from the specified location on the Emulation location

prompt (EMLLOC parameter) is used.

Top

Timeout wait for host (INZWAIT)

Specifies the initial amount of time (in seconds) that 3270 emulation waits for the first display data from

the host system. If the host system does not send the first display in this time, the emulation session is

ended, and a message is returned to the requester.

120 3270 emulation waits 120 seconds for the first display from the host system.

Start 3270 Display Emulation (STREML3270) 435

Page 452: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*NOMAX

There is no limit on the amount of time 3270 emulation waits for the first display from the host

system. This value can be used when the user is not sure when the host system is active to this

session. The request can be ended by using the system request and ending request functions.

number-of-seconds

Specify the length of time (in seconds) that the 3270 emulation waits for the first display from the

host system. Valid values range from 1 through 32767 seconds.

Top

Numeric lock keyboard (NUMLCK)

Specifies whether numeric input fields will only allow numeric data on a 5250 keyboard.

*EMLDEV

Numeric lock is specified in the EMLNUMLCK field of the emulation device description. You can

use the DSPDEVD command to display the current EMLNUMLCK value for the emulation

device. The value can be changed using the BSC commands CRTDEVBSC or CHGDEVBSC or the

SNA commands CRTDEVHOST or CHGDEVHOST.

*NO 3270 emulation will allow any data to be typed in the numeric input fields.

*YES 3270 emulation will only allow numeric data to be typed in the numeric input fields. Numeric

data that can be typed include the characters 0 through 9, and symbols ″ + - , . ″ and the blank

symbol, which is the character b with a slash on the stem.

Top

Handle nulls (NULLS)

Specifies how beginning and embedded nulls within the 3270 data stream sent from a 5250 display

station are handled. Beginning nulls are those that occur before a character that is not null. Embedded

nulls are those that occur between characters that are not null.

*BLANK

Beginning and embedded nulls are changed to blanks within the 3270 data stream.

*REMOVE

Beginning and embedded nulls are removed from the 3270 data stream.

Top

Host signon/logon command (LOGON)

Specifies the sign-on text that is sent to the host system after SNA 3270 emulation is started. This text can

be used to sign on to a specific host application.

This parameter is not allowed if specified for BSC 3270 emulation, SNA 3270 display station

pass-through, or SNA DBCS 3270PC emulation.

*NONE

No text is sent to the host system after 3270 emulation is started.

host-logon-command

Specify text that is sent to the host system after 3270 emulation is started. The text must be

enclosed in apostrophes if it contains blanks or other special characters. All apostrophes within

the text must be represented by two apostrophes. A maximum of 256 characters can be specified.

436 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 453: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Wait response (WAITRSP)

Specifies whether the 3270 emulation device waits until the data received is shown on the workstation

display to send a positive response to the host system. The response time recorded by the System i5 may

be longer than the time recorded by the host when the emulation device does not wait.

*NO The emulation device does not wait to send a positive response. It sends the response as soon as

the data is received to the workstation display.

*YES The emulation device waits until the data received is shown on the workstation display to send a

positive response.

Top

End emulation conditions (ENDCOND)

Specifies additional ways in which the SNA 3270 device emulation session can end.

This parameter is not allowed if specified for BSC 3270 emulation, SNA 3270 display station

pass-through, or SNA DBCS 3270PC emulation.

The possible values are:

*NONE

No additional ways to end 3270 device emulation are requested.

*DACTLU

The 3270 emulation session will end if it receives an SNA DACTLU from the host system. Please

consider the following before selecting this end condition:

v There are certain host system applications that issue a DACTLU before starting, such as Time

Sharing Option (TSO), which will end the 3270 emulation session before the desired application

is accessed. This end condition should be avoided when trying to access these applications.

*UNBIND

The 3270 emulation session will end if it receives an SNA UNBIND from the host system.

Consider the following items before selecting this end condition:

v This end condition should be used only when you need to access one host application for the

duration of the session. An UNBIND will occur while switching from one application to the

next, and the 3270 session will end before accessing the second application.

v This end condition should only be used when the communication path to the host system is a

simple one. A simple communication path is one that only involves accessing the System i5

where the Start 3270 Display Emulation (STREML3270) command is run, and accessing the

host system that contains the desired application. Intermediate systems can exist along this

simple path as long as they are not accessed. If intermediate systems are accessed, an UNBIND

will occur while switching from one system to the next, and the 3270 display emulation session

will end before accessing the desired application.

v There are certain host system applications that issue an UNBIND before starting, such as Time

Sharing Option (TSO), which will end the 3270 display emulation session before the desired

application is accessed. This end condition should be avoided when trying to access these

applications.

Top

Start 3270 Display Emulation (STREML3270) 437

Page 454: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Attention emulation menu (ATNEMLMNU)

Specify whether you want the Select 3270 Emulation Option for SNA menu or the Select 3270 Emulation

Option for BSC menu to be displayed when the Attention key is pressed.

This parameter is not allowed if specified for either SNA 3270 display station pass-through or SNA DBCS

3270PC emulation.

The possible values are:

*YES The Select 3270 Emulation Option for SNA or BSC menu is displayed when you press the

Attention key.

*NO The Select 3270 Emulation Option for SNA or BSC menu is not displayed when you press the

Attention key. The attention program (if any) currently active in the job will get control when the

Attention key is pressed. You can still display the Select 3270 Emulation Option for SNA or BSC

menu by pressing the System Request key sequence and then selecting the Display 3270

emulation options menu option from the System Request menu.

Top

Function key program (FKEYPGM)

Specifies a user-exit program and one or more function keys that call the program. When a specified

function key is pressed during the 3270 display emulation session and is sent to the host system, the

user-exit program is called. When the user-exit program ends, control is returned to the 3270 display

emulation session at the point where the function key was pressed.

This parameter is not valid if specified for either BSC 3270 display emulation, SNA 3270 display station

pass-through, or SNA DBCS 3270PC emulation.

The user-exit program is called only if the function key is successfully sent to the host system. If the

function key fails to be received, an error reset message appears at the bottom of the display suggesting

you try again.

The user-exit program must be coded to allow for input parameters. The following parameters are passed

to the program in the specified order:

1. The function key identifier (10 characters). The identifier of the function key that was pressed. If

function key 1 is pressed, the parameter value is *F1. If function key 2 is pressed, the parameter value

is *F2, and so on, up to function key 24. The value is left-justified within the parameter.

2. The display name (10 characters). The name of the display on which the 3270 display emulation

running. The value is left-justified within the parameter.

3. The cursor location (6 characters). The screen location of the cursor at the time the function key was

pressed. The first three characters are the row position of the cursor location. The second three

characters are the column position of the cursor location. For example, if the cursor location is row 24,

column 1 when the function key is pressed, the value of the parameter is 024001. The row and

column can be extracted from the variable using substring logic.

The possible program name values are:

*NONE

A user-exit program is not associated with any function key.

program-name

Specify the name and library of the user-exit program that is called when one of the specified

function keys is pressed. The program cannot be a system program.

438 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 455: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the user and system portions of the job’s library list are searched until the first

match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the program. If no library is specified as the

current library for the job, QGPL is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

The possible function key values are:

*ALLFKEYS

All function keys call the specified user-exit program.

function-key

Specify a function key to call the user-exit program. A maximum of 24 values can be specified on

this parameter.

Top

Keyboard language type (KBDTYPE)

Specifies the 3-character keyboard language identifier which represents a specific full character identifier

(CHRID - comprised of a character set and code page) that is used on the display station. To determine

the full CHRID from the keyboard language identifier, see the CHRID Values table in the Create Device

Display (CRTDEVDSP) command in the CL Reference.

This parameter does not apply when running SNA 3270 display station pass-through.

*DSPDEV

If a local display device is specified for the STREML3270 display device (DSPDEV) parameter,

then use the specified display’s device description current KBDTYPE value. If a remote display

device is specified for the STREML3270 DSPDEV parameter, then use the current QKBDTYPE

system value.

*SYSVAL

Use the current QKBDTYPE system value. This value is valid for both local and remote displays.

*LCL The display device that requested 3270 device emulation is a local display device. The keyboard

type is determined from the display device description.

*TRNTBL

Allows user-defined translation tables to be used. The character translation is defined in the

translation tables specified by the Outgoing translation table prompt (TRNTBLOUT parameter)

and the Incoming translation table prompt (TRNTBLIN parameter).

If a local display device is specified for the STREML3270 Display Device (DSPDEV) parameter,

then use the specified display’s device description current KBDTYPE value to determine the

CHRID to be used. If a remote display device is specified for the STREML3270 DSPDEV

parameter, then use the current QKBDTYPE system value.

keyboard-language-identifier

Specify the keyboard language identifier to be used.

Top

Start 3270 Display Emulation (STREML3270) 439

Page 456: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Outgoing translation table (TRNTBLOUT)

Specifies the outgoing translation table that is used to translate characters sent from the host system to

3270 Emulation. If *TRNTBL is specified on the Keyboard language type prompt (KBDTYPE parameter),

the Incoming translation table prompt (TRNTBLIN parameter), must also be specified.

*KBDTYPE

Translation is done using the language specified on the Keyboard language type prompt

(KBDTYPE parameter).

table-name

Specify the name and library of the table that is used for outgoing translation.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the user and system portions of the job’s library list are searched until the first

match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the outgoing translation table. If no library is

specified as the current library for the job, QGPL is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Incoming translation table (TRNTBLIN)

Specifies the incoming translation table that is used to translate characters sent from 3270 Emulation to

the host system. If *TRNTBL is specified on the Keyboard language type prompt (KBDTYPE parameter),

the Outgoing translation table prompt (TRNTBLOUT parameter), must also be specified.

*KBDTYPE

Translation is done using the language specified on the Keyboard language type prompt

(KBDTYPE parameter).

table-name

Specify the name and library of the table used for incoming translation.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the user and system portions of the job’s library list are searched until the first

match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the incoming translation table. If no library is

specified as the current library for the job, QGPL is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Configuration entry (EMLCFGE)

Specifies whether a configuration entry is used for this session. Configuration entries indicate 3270

emulation configuration options. Configuration entries are created with the Add Emulation Configuration

Entry (ADDEMLCFGE) command.

The possible values are:

440 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 457: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*NONE

No configuration entry is named and the configuration entry defaults are used.

QEMDFTCFGE

The default configuration entry QEMDFTDFGE is used. This entry is shipped with configuration

entry defaults, and can be updated with the Change Emulation Configuration Entry

(CHGEMLCFGE) command.

configuration-entry-name

Specify the name of the configuration entry to be used. If the configuration entry named does not

exist in the configuration file, the configuration entry defaults are used.

Top

Examples

STREML3270 EMLCTL(TSOHOST) PAGEUP(*F7) PAGEDOWN(*F8)

This command places the display device into an emulation session that uses the first available device on

the controller description TSOHOST for which the user has authority. When there are fewer input fields

on the display than the maximum allowed by the 5250 display device and the Page Up key is pressed, an

F7 key value is sent to the host system. When the Page Down key is pressed, an F8 key value is sent to

the host system.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2619

Table &1 not found.

CPF269A

Library parameter is not set to ″QSYS ″ on call.

CPF269B

T.61 conversion table not found.

CPF85EA

Screen address received from host is larger than screen size.

CPF85EB

3270 device emulation session ended.

CPF85EC

Specifying text on the LOGON parameter is not supported.

CPF85ED

Values other than ENDCOND(*NONE) are not supported.

CPF85E2

3270 display emulation is already active at this job.

CPF85E4

Not authorized to translation table &1 in library &2.

CPF85E5

3270 emulation device &1 is reserved for device &2.

Start 3270 Display Emulation (STREML3270) 441

Page 458: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF85E6

Translation table &1 in library &2 was not found.

CPF8503

Emulation controller &1 not found.

CPF8504

Controller &1 does not support 3270 emulation.

CPF8505

Emulation device &2 not found.

CPF8506

Emulation location &1 not found.

CPF8507

Display emulation cannot open required file.

CPF8508

Host system did not respond.

CPF851A

Maximum number of shift in and shift out characters exceeded.

CPF8510

Internal error occurred on device &1.

CPF8511

Emulation ended by errors on device &2.

CPF8512

Emulation ended because device &2 was held.

CPF8513

Emulation ended by errors on device &2.

CPF8514

Error recovery stopped on device &1.

CPF8515

3270 emulation session ended by host.

CPF8516

No match between host and device &2.

CPF8517

Received more than maximum number of fields allowed.

CPF8518

Emulation ended because of internal failure in system.

CPF8519

Function check in 3270 emulation.

CPF852A

Values other than FKEYPGM(*NONE) are not supported.

CPF852B

Program &1 not found.

CPF852C

Not authorized to program &1.

CPF8521

Not authorized to controller &1.

442 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 459: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF8522

Not authorized to emulation device &2.

CPF8523

*NO on the ATNEMLMNU parameter is not supported.

CPF8524

Emulation cannot open its required display file.

CPF8525

KBDTYPE(*LCL) not allowed for remote display devices.

CPF8526

No 3270 display emulation devices available.

CPF8527

Emulation device &2 not available.

CPF8528

Device &2 is not a display emulation device.

CPF8530

Not authorized to use any display emulation device.

CPF8533

Display device not specified in a batch job.

CPF8534

Display device &1 is not available.

CPF8535

Display device &1 not found.

CPF8536

Not authorized to display device &1.

CPF8539

&1 keyboard type not supported by 3270 emulation.

CPF8546

No 3270 display emulation devices available.

CPF8547

No 3270 printer emulation devices available.

CPF8550

Emulation ended due to time-out internal failure.

CPF8551

Emulation ended with error code &1.

CPF8552

Emulation ended because of return code.

CPF8553

BSC controller or device not allowed without translation.

CPF8565

Emulation device &1 not found.

CPF8568

Device &1 not printer emulation device.

CPF8569

Not authorized to use any printer emulation device.

Start 3270 Display Emulation (STREML3270) 443

Page 460: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF8571

No 3270 printer emulation devices available.

CPF8572

Emulation device &1 not available.

Top

444 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 461: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start EPM Environment (STREPMENV)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start EPM Environment (STREPMENV) command is used with extended program model (EPM)

languages to create a user-controlled environment. The C/400*, FORTRAN/400*, and Pascal languages

are part of the extended program model.

You can use this command to create a run-time environment for an EPM language entry point that you

are calling from another language program. See the Extended Program Model User’s Guide and

Reference for more detailed information on the EPM and this command.

Error messages for STREPMENV

None

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

EPMENV Environment Name Character value Required,

Positional 1

ROOTPGM Environment Program Qualified object name Required,

Positional 2 Qualifier 1: Environment

Program

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Top

Environment Name (EPMENV)

Specifies the name of the user-controlled environment that is to be created. The environment name must

be unique.

environment-name

Enter a name for the environment.

Top

Environment Program (ROOTPGM)

Specifies the name of the program and library that contains the environment definition information that

is necessary in order to create the EPM run-time environment.

program-name

Enter the name of the EPM language program object that contains the environment definition

information.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 445

Page 462: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

The possible values for library are:

*LIBL The library list is searched to locate the specified program object.

*CURLIB

The current library is searched to locate the specified program object.

library-name

Enter the name of the library that contains the specified program object.

Top

Examples

None

Top

Error messages

None

Top

446 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 463: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Font Management Aid (STRFMA)

Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT

*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Font Management Aid (STRFMA) command displays the Font Management Aid (FMA) menu.

From this menu, you can ″Work With″ user defined characters (24 X 24 dot matrix) in the DBCS font

table with a workstation font file ($SYS1Z24.FNT). ″Work With″ means to copy user defined characters in

the workstation font file to DBCS font table, or copy user defined characters in DBCS font table to

workstation font file. FMA is also used to get a copy of the workstation user-font/dictionary file from the

other workstation.

There are no parameters for this command.

Error messages for STRFMA

None

Top

Parameters

None

Top

Examples

None

Top

Error messages

None

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 447

Page 464: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

448 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 465: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start HOST Query (STRHOSTQRY)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Yes

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start HOST Query (STRHOSTQRY) command, or its alias HOST, is a simple utility for performing

Domain Name System (DNS) lookups. It is normally used to convert names to IP addresses and vice

versa.

Restrictions:

v You must have execute (*X) authority to the directories in the path of the output file.

v You must have write (*W) authority to the output file if it already exists.

v You must have read, write and execute (*RWX) authority to the output file’s parent directory if the

output file does not already exist.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

HOSTNAME Query name Character value Required,

Positional 1

TYPE Query type *A, *AAAA, *ANY, *AXFR, *CNAME, *MX, *NS, *PTR,

*SOA, *SRV, *TXT

Optional,

Positional 2

CLASS Query class *IN, *CH, *HS, *ANY Optional

DMNNAMSVR Domain name server Character value, *CFG Optional

SOA Display SOA records *NO, *YES Optional

AXFR List all hosts *NO, *YES Optional

IP6INT Use IP6.INT domain *NO, *YES Optional

SETRDFLAG Recursion desired *YES, *NO Optional

PROTOCOL Network protocol *UDP, *TCP Optional

DEBUG Show debug information *NO, *YES Optional

IPVSN IP Version *ALL, *IPV4ONLY, *IPV6ONLY Optional

NBRDOTS Number of dots 0-10, 1 Optional

TIMEOUT Query timeout 1-100, 5 Optional

UDPNBRRTY UDP retry 0-100, 2 Optional

TOSTMF Output file Path name, *STDOUT Optional

Top

Query name (HOSTNAME)

Specifies the name that you want the Domain Name System (DNS) server to look up. It can also be a

dotted-decimal IPv4 address or a colon-delimited IPv6 address, in which case HOST will by default

perform a reverse lookup for that address.

This is a required parameter.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 449

Page 466: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

domain-name

Specify a valid domain name.

internet-address

Specify a valid IPv4 or IPv6 address.

Top

Query type (TYPE)

Specifies the type of the query. The default type is *A. The list of supported query types changes with

time, and not all servers support all the types that exist. This list provides some common query types for

convenience and is not a complete list. If you do not see a query type you want in this list, you can still

type in a character string that represents that query type. If the type is unknown by this BIND version,

the query will default to an *A query with any corresponding results.

*A IPv4 Address record. This is the character string ’a’.

*AAAA

IPv6 address record. This is the character string ’aaaa’.

*ANY Any resource record. This is the character string ’any’.

*AXFR

Zone transfer. This is the character string ’axfr’.

*CNAME

Canonical name record. Returns a list of aliases for the true (canonical) host name, if any exist.

This is the character string ’cname’.

*MX Mail exchange record. This is the character string ’mx’.

*NS Name server (DNS server) information for the zone. This is the character string ’ns’.

*PTR Pointer record. Returns a name for an IP address. This is the character string ’ptr’.

*SOA Start of authority record. This is the character string ’soa’.

*SRV Services location selection. This is the character string ’srv’.

*TXT Text record. This is the character string ’txt’.

Top

Query class (CLASS)

Specifies the protocol group of the information.

*IN The Internet class.

*CH The CHAOS class. The server provides some helpful diagnostic information through a number of

built-in zones under the CHAOS class.

version

If your BIND server named.conf has the ’version’ option configured, then you can query

for it using the CHAOS class. This is the version the server should report via a query of

the name ’version.bind’ with type TXT, class CHAOS. The default is the real version

number of this server.

HOST HOSTNAME(’version.bind’) TYPE(*TXT) CLASS(*CH)

hostname

If your BIND server named.conf has the ’hostname’ option configured, then you can

query for it using the CHAOS class. This is the hostname the server should report via a

450 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 467: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

query of the name ’hostname.bind’ with type TXT, class CHAOS. This defaults to the

hostname of the machine hosting the name server. The primary purpose of such queries

is to identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually answering your queries.

STRHOSTQRY NAME(’hostname.bind’) TYPE(*TXT) CLASS(*CH)

server-id

If your BIND server named.conf has the ’server-id’ option configured, then you can query

for it using the CHAOS class. This is the ID of the server should report via a query of the

name ’ID.SERVER’ with type TXT, class CHAOS. The primary purpose of such queries is

to identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually answering your queries. The

default server-id is none.

HOST HOSTNAME(’ID.SERVER’) TYPE(*TXT) CLASS(*CH)

*HS The MIT Athena Hesiod class. Hesiod, developed by MIT Project Athena, is an information

service built upon BIND. Its intent is to furnish information about users, groups,

network-accessible file systems, printcaps, and mail service throughout an installation. In other

words, it holds arbitrary data stored as text strings. Queries that use the HS class retrieve data

stored as TXT Resource Records. You cannot specify root servers for the Hesiod class (generally

the ones at MIT) in your list of root name servers.

*ANY Query any class. This is a wildcard query.

Top

Domain name server (DMNNAMSVR)

Specifies the name or the IP address of the DNS server that HOST will use as its current server for the

query session. You can specify any DNS server to which your TCP/IP network has access.

HOST retrieves information from DNS servers. It needs an active DNS server to send its queries to. If

you do not specify a DNS server with DMNNAMSVR when you start the tool, it will attempt to set one

of the following as its default DNS server for the session:

1. DNS server your system is configured to use (*CFG), or

2. The DNS server that is running on your local system.

*CFG Use the DNS server that is currently designated for use by this system. These server internet

addresses can be seen by prompting the Change TCP/IP Domain (CHGTCPDMN) command and

looking at the values shown for the INTNETADR parameter.

server-domain-name

Specify the name of a DNS server.

server-internet-address

Specify the IP address of a DNS server.

Top

Display SOA records (SOA)

Specifies whether or not to print the SOA records for zone name from all the listed authoritative name

servers for that zone. The list of name servers is defined by the NS records that are found for the zone.

*NO Do not print SOA records.

*YES Attempt to print SOA records.

Top

Start HOST Query (STRHOSTQRY) 451

Page 468: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

List all hosts (AXFR)

Specifies whether or not to make HOST perform a zone transfer for zone specified in the HOSTNAME

parameter. A zone transfer is when all domain information in the zone is returned. HOST will display the

NS, PTR and address records (A/AAAA).

*NO Do not perform a zone tranfer.

*YES Perform a zone transfer.

Top

Use IP6.INT domain (IP6INT)

Specifies whether or not to qualify the reverse lookup to be in the ip6.int zone and not the ip6.arpa zone.

*NO The normal ip6.arpa zone reverse lookup will be performed.

*YES An IPv6 address reverse lookup in the ip6.int zone will be performed. This zone is deprecated,

but may still be required to query IPv6 backbone prefixes.

Top

Recursion desired (SETRDFLAG)

Specifies whether or not to set the Recursion Desired (RD) flag in the query. This should mean that the

name server receiving the query will not attempt to resolve name. This enables HOST to mimic the

behaviour of a name server by making non-recursive queries and expecting to receive answers to those

queries that are usually referrals to other name servers.

*YES Set the RD flag.

*NO Do not set the RD flag.

Top

Network protocol (PROTOCOL)

Specified whether to use TCP or UDP when sending requests to the server.

*UDP Use UDP to send the query. However, TCP will be automatically selected for queries that require

it, such as zone transfer (AXFR) requests.

*TCP Use TCP to send the query.

Top

Show debug information (DEBUG)

Specifies whether or not to turn debugging mode on. More information is displayed about the packet

sent to the server and the resulting answer when debugging mode is on.

*NO Turn off debugging messages.

*YES Turn on debugging messages.

Top

452 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 469: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

IP Version (IPVSN)

Specifies whether to limit the query to IPv4 or IPv6 networks.

*ALL Do not limit queries to IPv4 or IPv6.

*IPV4ONLY

Only send queries out IPv4 network interfaces.

*IPV6ONLY

Only send queries out IPv6 network interfaces.

Top

Number of dots (NBRDOTS)

Specifies the number of dots (period characters) that have to appear in a domain name for it to be

considered absolute. Names with fewer dots are interpreted as relative names and will be searched for in

the domains listed in the DMNSCHLIST parameter.

1 If the domain name contains one dot it is considered an absolute name.

0-10 Specify the number of dots that must be in a domain name for the domain name to be considered

to be an absolute name.

Top

Query timeout (TIMEOUT)

Specifies the timeout interval, in seconds, to wait for a response.

5 A timeout value of 5 seconds is used.

1-100 Specify a valid timeout value in seconds.

Top

UDP retry (UDPNBRRTY)

Specifies the number of times to retry UDP queries to the current DNS server before attempting TCP

queries.

2 Two UDP retries will be used. This is in addition to the initial query.

0-100 Specify the number of UDP retries. You normally only need to retry a query 3 to 5 times.

Top

Output file (TOSTMF)

Specifies the name of a stream file where all command output is written.

*STDOUT

All command output goes to the standard output device (normally the display).

path-name

Specify the path for a stream file where output should be written.

Top

Start HOST Query (STRHOSTQRY) 453

Page 470: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Examples

Example 1: Looking Up Internet Address for Domain Name

STRHOSTQRY HOSTNAME(ibm.com)

This command attempts to find information about the domain ’aol.com’. This includes A and MX records,

althought the output is formatted in a different style than other query tools (e.g. DIG). Sample output

from this query might look like this:

Using domain server:

Name: 9.5.176.200

Address: 9.5.176.200#53

Aliases:

aol.com has address 64.12.50.151

aol.com has address 205.188.142.182

aol.com mail is handled by 15 mailin-01.mx.aol.com.

aol.com mail is handled by 15 mailin-02.mx.aol.com.

aol.com mail is handled by 15 mailin-03.mx.aol.com.

aol.com mail is handled by 15 mailin-04.mx.aol.com.

Example 2: Lookup with a Zone Transfer

HOST HOSTNAME(i5os.ibm.com) AXFR(*YES)

This command attempts to do a zone transfer. Sample output from this query might look like this:

Using domain server:

Name: 10.0.1.100

Address: 10.0.1.100#53

Aliases:

i5os.ibm.com name server MYDNS1.IBM.COM.

i5os.ibm.com name server MYDNS2.IBM.COM.

i5os.ibm.com has address 10.0.1.100

i5os.ibm.com has address 10.0.2.200

box1.i5os.ibm.com has address 10.0.2.201

box2.i5os.ibm.com has address 10.0.2.202

This command attempts to do the same zone transfer, but fails because the user is not authorized to do

transfers. Sample output from this query might look like this:

Using domain server:

Name: 10.0.1.100

Address: 10.0.1.100#53

Aliases:

Host i5os.ibm.com not found: 9(NOTAUTH)

; Transfer failed.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

DNS0013

Error processing command parameters.

454 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 471: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

DNS0065

Option 33 of i5/OS is required, but is not installed.

TCP7124

Program &1 in library &2 type *PGM ended abnormally.

Top

Start HOST Query (STRHOSTQRY) 455

Page 472: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

456 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 473: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Host Server (STRHOSTSVR)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Host Server (STRHOSTSVR) command is used to start the optimized host server daemons and

the server mapper daemon.

There is one server daemon for each of the host server types. In addition, there is one server mapper

daemon for all host servers which provides support for client applications to obtain a particular host

server daemon’s port number. This port number is then used by the client application to connect to the

host server’s daemon. The daemon accepts the incoming connection request and routes it to the server

job for further processing.

The daemons are batch jobs submitted to either the QSYSWRK or QSERVER subsystem, depending on

the value or values specified for the SERVER keyword. All daemon jobs are submitted to the QSYSWRK

subsystem with the exception of the *DATABASE and *FILE server daemons which are submitted to the

QSERVER subsystem.

In order for the server daemons and the server mapper daemon to start successfully, the QSYSWRK

subsystem and, for *DATABASE and *FILE server, the QSERVER subsystem must be active. If the

required subsystem is not active, then the submission of the daemon job will fail. Additionally, the

QUSRWRK subsystem or the user-defined subsystem must be active in order to start the associated

server jobs. All associated server jobs can run in the QUSRWRK subsystem or a user-defined subsystem,

except for the following:

v Server jobs QPWFSERVSO and QPWFSERVSS - these jobs run in the QSERVER subsystem or a

user-defined subsystem

v Server job QPWFSERVS2 - this job runs in the QSERVER subsystem

v Server job QIWVPPJT - this job runs in the QSYSWRK subsystem

v Server job QTFPJTCP - this job runs in the QSERVER subsystem.

There are no server jobs associated with the server mapper daemon.

The server daemons must be active in order to allow client applications to establish a connection with the

host server using sockets communication support. Once started, the server daemons and the server

mapper daemon remain active until they are ended explicitly using the End Host Server (ENDHOSTSVR)

command or an error occurs.

Restrictions:

v This command is used only for enabling client applications to communicate with any of the host

servers using sockets communication support. This command does not start any of the APPC host

servers; these are started as a result of a program start request.

v Only one server daemon can be active for a specific server type. Requests to start a server daemon that

is already active will result in an informational message to the user issuing this command.

Error messages for STRHOSTSVR

*ESCAPE Messages

PWS300D

Unable to start host server daemon jobs.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 457

Page 474: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

PWS3006

Errors occurred starting server daemon jobs.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

SERVER Server type Single values: *ALLOther values (up to 8 repetitions): *CENTRAL,

*DATABASE, *DTAQ, *FILE, *NETPRT, *RMTCMD,

*SIGNON, *SVRMAP

Required,

Positional 1

RQDPCL Required protocol *ANY, *NONE, *TCP Optional

Top

Server type (SERVER)

Specifies the host server daemons to be started by this command.

The possible values are:

*ALL All of the server daemons and the server mapper daemon are started.

*CENTRAL

The central server daemon is started in the QSYSWRK subsystem. The daemon job is named

QZSCSRVSD. The associated server job is named QZSCSRVS.

*DATABASE

The database server daemon is started in the QSERVER subsystem. The daemon job is named

QZDASRVSD. The associated server jobs are named QZDASOINIT, QZDASSINIT, and

QTFPJTCP.

*DTAQ

The data queue server daemon is started in the QSYSWRK subsystem. The daemon job is named

QZHQSRVD. The associated server job is named QZHQSSRV.

*FILE The file server daemon is started in the QSERVER subsystem. The daemon job is named

QPWFSERVSD. The associated server jobs are named QPWFSERVSO, QPWFSERVSS, and

QPWFSERVS2.

*NETPRT

The network print server daemon is started in the QSYSWRK subsystem. The daemon job is

named QNPSERVD. The associated server jobs are named QNPSERVS and QIWVPPJT.

*RMTCMD

The remote command and distributed program call server daemon is started in the QSYSWRK

subsystem. The daemon job is named QZRCSRVSD. The associated server job is named

QZRCSRVS.

*SIGNON

The signon server daemon is started in the QSYSWRK subsystem. The daemon job is named

QZSOSGND. The associated server job is named QZSOSIGN.

*SVRMAP

The server mapper daemon is started in the QSYSWRK subsystem. The daemon job is named

QZSOSMAPD.

458 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 475: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Required protocol (RQDPCL)

Specifies which communication protocols are required to be active for the host server daemons to start.

Single Values

*ANY: The TCP/IP communication protocol must be active at the time the STRHOSTSVR command is

issued. If TCP/IP is not active, escape message PWS300D will be issued and the host server

daemons will not be started. A diagnostic message (PWS3008) will be issued if TCP/IP is found

to be inactive.

*NONE:

No communication protocols need to be active at the time the STRHOSTSVR command is issued

for the host server daemons to start. No messages will be issued for protocols which are inactive.

*TCP: The TCP/IP communication protocol must be active at the time the STRHOSTSVR command is

issued. If TCP/IP is not active, diagnostic message PWS3008 and escape message PWS300D will

be issued and the host server daemons will not be started.

Top

Examples

None

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

PWS300D

Unable to start host server daemon jobs.

PWS3006

Errors occurred starting server daemon jobs.

Top

Start Host Server (STRHOSTSVR) 459

Page 476: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

460 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 477: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start IDDU (STRIDD)

Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT

*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Interactive Data Definition Utility (STRIDD) command runs the main Interactive Data

Definition (IDDU) menu. From this menu, you can select from options that allow you to work with data

definitions, data dictionaries, files, and libraries, or use related commands and office tasks.

Top

Parameters

None

Top

Examples

STRIDD

This commands displays the main IDDU menu.

Top

Error messages

None

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 461

Page 478: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

462 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 479: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start IP over SNA Interface (STRIPSIFC)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start IP over SNA Interface (STRIPSIFC) command is used to start an AF_INET sockets over SNA

interface (an IP address by which this local host is known on the SNA transport).

Restriction: Only eight (8) AF_INET sockets over SNA interfaces can be active on a single host. If the

maximum number of interfaces is active and you want to start another interface, you must first end one

or more interfaces using the End IP over SNA Interfaces (ENDIPSIFC) CL command.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

INTNETADR Internet address Character value Required,

Positional 1

Top

Internet address (INTNETADR)

Specifies the internet address of an inactive (ended) interface that had previously been added to the IP

over SNA configuration with the ADDIPSIFC CL command. The internet address is specified in the form

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where nnn is a decimal number ranging from 0 through 255. If the internet address is

entered from a command line, the address must be enclosed in apostrophes.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Examples

STRIPSIFC INTNETADR(’9.5.1.248’)

This command activates (starts) the interface with IP address 9.5.1.248.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPFA10F

IP over SNA interface &1 not started.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 463

Page 480: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

464 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 481: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start ITF (STRITF)

Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT

*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Interactive Terminal Facility (STRITF) command allows the user to send and receive data and

file members for 5250 work stations using asynchronous communications. You can also send documents

using the Interactive Terminal Facility (ITF). Before you can use ITF, you must start asynchronous

communications.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

RMTLOCNAME Remote location Communications name Required,

Positional 1

Top

Remote location (RMTLOCNAME)

Specifies the name of the remote location with which you want to communicate. This name is the same

as the remote location name specified during configuration.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Examples

STRITF CHICAGO

This command allows the user to communicate with the remote location CHICAGO.

Top

Error messages

None

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 465

Page 482: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

466 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 483: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Journal (STRJRN)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Yes

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Journal (STRJRN) command is used to start journaling changes (made to an object or list of

objects) to a specific journal. The object types which are supported through this interface are Data Areas

(*DTAARA), Data Queues (*DTAQ), Stream Files (*STMF), Directories (*DIR), and Symbolic Links

(*SYMLNK). Only objects of type *STMF, *DIR or *SYMLNK that are in the ″root″ (/), QOpenSys, and

user-defined file systems are supported. For more information about the possible journal entries which

can be sent, see the Journal management topic collection in the i5/OS Information Center at

http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/. Search for ″journal entry finder″.

The user can specify that only the after image or both the before and the after images of an object of type

*DTAARA be journaled. Before images are necessary to remove journaled changes using the Remove

Journaled Changes (RMVJRNCHG) command.

After journaling begins for the object, the user should save the journaled object to preserve its journal

attribute information. Also, the object must be saved because, for example, journaled changes cannot be

applied to a version of the object that was saved before journaling was in effect.

For other ways to start journaling see the following commands:

v Access Paths - Start Journal Access Path (STRJRNAP)

v Physical Files - Start Journal Physical File (STRJRNPF)

v Libraries - Start Journal Library (STRJRNLIB)

v Other Objects - Start Journal Object (STRJRNOBJ)

Restrictions:

v The object must not be journaling changes to another journal.

v The maximum number of objects that can be associated with one journal is either 250,000 or 10,000,000.

To get 10,000,000, the value of *MAX10M must have been specified for the JRNOBJLMT parameter on

either the Create Journal (CRTJRN) command or on the Change Journal (CHGJRN) command. Once the

number of objects is greater than or equal to this maximum, journaling does not start for any more

objects.

v The specified journal must be a local journal. Although all object types which can be journaled to a

local journal can also have their changes sent to a remote journal, this is accomplished by a two step

process. First start journaling to the local journal. Then connect the local journal to a remote instance.

To initiate such a connection, use the Add Remote Journal (ADDRMTJRN) command or the Add

Remote Journal (QjoAddRemoteJournal) API. For information about remote journaling, see the Journal

management topic collection in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

v The specified journal and object must reside in the same auxiliary storage pool (ASP).

v Stream files that are currently memory mapped, are virtual volume files, or are being used as IXS

network storage spaces cannot be journaled.

v Objects that are internally marked as not eligible for journaling cannot be journaled. The system may

mark system working directories that are created inside of user directories as not eligible for

journaling.

v For data areas, only local external data area objects may be journaled. The special data areas (*LDA,

*GDA, *PDA) and DDM data areas cannot be journaled.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 467

Page 484: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

v For data queues, only local data queues are supported. DDM data queues cannot be journaled.

v At least one of parameter OBJ or OBJFID must be specified.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

OBJ Objects Values (up to 300 repetitions): Element list Optional

Element 1: Name Path name

Element 2: Include or omit *INCLUDE, *OMIT

OBJFID File identifier Values (up to 300 repetitions): Hexadecimal value Optional

JRN Journal Path name Optional

SUBTREE Directory subtree *NONE, *ALL Optional

PATTERN Name pattern Values (up to 20 repetitions): Element list Optional

Element 1: Pattern Character value, *

Element 2: Include or omit *INCLUDE, *OMIT

INHERIT New objects inherit

journaling

*NO, *YES Optional

IMAGES Images *AFTER, *BOTH Optional

OMTJRNE Omit journal entry *NONE, *OPNCLOSYN Optional

LOGLVL Logging level *ERRORS, *ALL Optional

Top

Objects (OBJ)

Specifies a maximum of 300 objects for which changes are to be journaled. Only objects whose path name

identifies an object of type *STMF, *DIR, *SYMLNK, *DTAARA or *DTAQ are supported.

Element 1: Name

’object-path-name’

Specify the path name of the object for which changes are to be journaled.

A pattern can be specified in the last part of the path name. An asterisk (*) matches any number

of characters and a question mark (?) matches a single character. If the path name is qualified or

contains a pattern, it must be enclosed in apostrophes. Symbolic links within the path name will

not be followed. If the path name begins with the tilde character, then the path is assumed to be

relative to the appropriate home directory.

Additional information about path name patterns is in the Integrated file system topic collection

in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Note: This parameter is Unicode-enabled. See ″Unicode support in CL″ in the CL topic collection

in the Programming category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/ for additional information.

Element 2: Include or omit

The second element specifies whether names that match the pattern should be included or omitted from

the operation. Note that in determining whether a name matches a pattern, relative name patterns are

always treated as relative to the current working directory.

468 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 485: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*INCLUDE

The objects that match the object name pattern are to be journaled, unless overridden by an

*OMIT specification.

*OMIT

The objects that match the object name pattern are not be journaled. This overrides an *INCLUDE

specification and is intended to be used to omit a subset of a previously selected path.

Top

File identifier (OBJFID)

Specifies a maximum of 300 file identifiers (FID) for which changes are to be journaled. FIDs are a unique

identifier associated with integrated file system related objects. This field is input in hexadecimal format.

Only objects whose FID identifies an object of type *STMF, *DIR, or *SYMLNK that is in the ″root″ (/),

QOpenSys, or user-defined file systems, or objects of type *DTAARA or *DTAQ are supported.

file-identifier

Objects identified with the FID are journaled.

Top

Journal (JRN)

Specifies the path name of the journal that receives the journaled changes.

Note: This parameter is Unicode-enabled. See ″Unicode support in CL″ in the CL topic collection in the

Programming category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/

for additional information.

’journal-path-name’

Specify the path name of the journal that receives the journaled changes.

Top

Directory subtree (SUBTREE)

Specifies whether the directory subtrees are included in the start journal operation.

Note: This parameter is ignored if the OBJ parameter is not specified.

Note: This parameter is ignored unless object-path-name is a directory (*DIR) object.

*NONE

Only the objects that match the selection criteria are processed. The objects within selected

directories are not implicitly processed.

*ALL All objects that meet the selection criteria are processed in addition to the entire subtree of each

directory that matches the selection criteria. The subtree includes all subdirectories and the objects

within those subdirectories.

Once the command has begun processing a specific directory subtree, the objects which will be

found and processed may be affected by operations that update the organization of objects within

the specified directory tree. This includes, but is not limited to, the following:

v Adding, removing, or renaming object links

v Mounting or unmounting file systems

v Updating the effective root directory for the process calling the command

Start Journal (STRJRN) 469

Page 486: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

v Updating the contents of a symbolic link

In order to process the directory subtree, the system code may increase the process-scoped

maximum number of file descriptors that can be opened during processing. This is done so that

the command is not likely to fail due to a lack of descriptors. This process-scoped maximum

value is not reset when the command completes.

Top

Name pattern (PATTERN)

Specifies a maximum of 20 patterns to be used to include or omit objects for the start journal operation.

Only the last part of the path name will be considered for the name pattern match. Path name delimiters

are not allowed in the name pattern. An asterisk (*) matches any number of characters and a question

mark (?) matches a single character. If the path name is qualified or contains a pattern, it must be

enclosed in apostrophes. Symbolic links within the path name will not be followed.

If this parameter is not specified, the default will be to match all patterns.

Additional information about path name patterns is in the Integrated file system topic collection in the

i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Note: This parameter is ignored if the OBJ parameter is not specified.

Note: This parameter applies to objects that exist when the start journal command is processed. This

parameter does not apply to objects that will be created later in a journaled directory where new objects

inherit journaling.

Element 1: Pattern

’*’ All objects that match the input OBJ parameter are to be included into the start journal operation

or omitted from the start journal operation.

name-pattern

Specify the pattern to either include or omit objects for the start journal operation.

Note: This parameter is Unicode-enabled. See ″Unicode support in CL″ in the CL topic collection

in the Programming category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/ for additional information.

Element 2: Include or omit

The second element specifies whether names that match the pattern should be included or omitted from

the operation. Note that in determining whether a name matches a pattern, relative name patterns are

always treated as relative to the current working directory.

*INCLUDE

The objects that match the object name pattern are included into the start journal operation unless

overridden by an *OMIT specification.

*OMIT

The objects that match the object name pattern are not to be included into the start journal

operation. This overrides an *INCLUDE specification and is intended to be used to omit a subset

of a previously selected pattern.

Top

470 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 487: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

New objects inherit journaling (INHERIT)

Specifies whether new objects created within a journaled directory should inherit the journal options and

the journal state of its parent directory.

*NO New objects created within the directory will not inherit the journal options and journal state of

the parent directory.

*YES New objects created within the directory will inherit the journal options and journal state of the

parent directory.

Top

Images (IMAGES)

Specifies the kinds of images that are written to the journal receiver for changes to objects.

*AFTER

Only after images are generated for changes to objects.

*BOTH

The system generates both before and after images for changes to objects.

Note: The value *BOTH is only valid for *DTAARA objects.

Top

Omit journal entry (OMTJRNE)

Specifies the journal entries that are omitted.

*NONE

No entries are omitted.

*OPNCLOSYN

Open, close and force entries are omitted. Open, close and force operations on the specified

objects do not generate open, close and force journal entries. This prevents the use of TOJOBO

and TOJOBC entries on the Apply Journaled Changes (APYJRNCHG) command, but it saves

some storage space in the journal receivers.

Note: The value *OPNCLOSYN is only valid for *DIR and *STMF objects.

Top

Logging level (LOGLVL)

Specifies the error logging level used. This parameter is used to determine which messages will be sent.

*ERRORS

All diagnostic and escape messages are sent but the command will not send successful

completion messages for each object. At the completion of this command, one completion

message will be sent.

*ALL The command sends all the messages that would be sent with *ERRORS and it will also send the

successful completion message for each object.

Top

Start Journal (STRJRN) 471

Page 488: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Examples

Example 1: Start Journaling with Omit of Directory

STRJRN OBJ((’/mypath’ *INCLUDE)

(’/mypath/myobject’ *OMIT))

JRN(’/QSYS.LIB/MYLIB.LIB/JRNLA.JRN’)

This command journals all changes to all objects supported by this command within the first-level of

directory ’/mypath’ except ’/mypath/myobject’ to journal ’/QSYS.LIB/MYLIB.LIB/JRNLA.JRN’. None of

the objects within the subdirectories of ’/mypath’ will be journaled.

Only the after images of updated records are written to the journal.

Example 2: Start Journaling with Pattern Matching

STRJRN OBJ((’/mypath’ *INCLUDE)

(’/mypath/myobject.txt’ *OMIT))

JRN(’/QSYS.LIB/MYLIB.LIB/JRNLA.JRN’) SUBTREE(*ALL)

PATTERN((’*.TXT’ *INCLUDE)) OMTJRNE(*OPNCLOSYN)

This command journals changes to all objects that match pattern ’*.txt’ in directory ’/mypath’ except

object ’/mypath/myobject.txt’. The open, close and force entries are not journaled.

Only the after images of updated records are written to the journal.

Example 3: Start Journaling with Omit by Pattern

STRJRN OBJ((’/mypath/my*’ *INCLUDE))

JRN(’/QSYS.LIB/MYLIB.LIB/JRNLA.JRN’)

PATTERN((’*.DTA*’ *OMIT))

This command journals changes to all objects within the first-level directories that match the pattern for

path ’/mypath/my*’ and will omit all objects that match pattern ’*.DTA*’ (objects of type *DTAARA and

*DTAQ).

Only the after images of updated records are written to the journal.

Example 4: Start Journaling using File Identifiers

STRJRN OBJFID(00000000000000007E09BDB000000009

00000000000000009E09BDB00000000A)

JRN(’/QSYS.LIB/MYLIB.LIB/JRNLA.JRN’)

This command journals all changes to the objects represented by the specified file identifiers to journal

’/QSYS.LIB/MYLIB.LIB/JRNLA.JRN’.

Only the after images of updated records are written to the journal.

Example 5: Start Journaling on a Set of Data Queues

STRJRN OBJ((’/QSYS.LIB/MYLIB.LIB/MYDATA*.DTAQ’))

JRN(’/QSYS.LIB/MYLIB.LIB/MYJRN.JRN’)

472 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 489: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This command starts the journaling of all changes to the objects of type *DTAQ in library MYLIB that

begin with the characters ’MYDATA’.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPFA0D4

File system error occurred. Error number &1.

CPF700A

&1 of &2 objects have started journaling.

CPF705A

Operation failed due to remote journal.

CPF9801

Object &2 in library &3 not found.

CPF9802

Not authorized to object &2 in &3.

CPF9803

Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.

CPF9810

Library &1 not found.

CPF9820

Not authorized to use library &1.

CPF9825

Not authorized to device &1.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

CPF9873

ASP status is preventing access to object.

CPF9875

Resources exceeded on ASP &1.

Top

Start Journal (STRJRN) 473

Page 490: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

474 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 491: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Journal Access Path (STRJRNAP)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Yes

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Journal Access Path (STRJRNAP) command is used to start journaling the access paths for all

members of a database file to a specified journal. Any new member that is later added to the file also has

its access path journaled.

If a physical file is specified, journaling can be started for its access paths. When access path journaling is

started for a physical file, only the access paths for the physical file members are journaled. Journaling for

any logical file access paths is started only when access path journaling is started for the logical file.

The journal entries created after running this command cannot be used in any apply or remove journaled

changes operation. These entries are used only to recover the access path without rebuilding it after an

abnormal system operation ending.

If you start journaling your access paths, consider specifying RCVSIZOPT(*RMVINTENT) on either the

Create Journal (CRTJRN) or the Change Journal (CHGJRN) command for this journal. This will reduce

the additional storage required to do access path journaling.

If you do not want the overhead of managing the access path journaling yourself, consider taking

advantage of the system-managed access-path protection support. For more information, see the Journal

management topic collection in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/, and the Edit Recovery for Access Paths (EDTRCYAP) or the Change Recovery for Access

Paths (CHGRCYAP) command.

For other ways to start journaling see the following commands:

v Integrated file system objects - Start Journal (STRJRN)

v Physical files - Start Journal Physical File (STRJRNPF)

v Libraries - Start Journal Library (STRJRNLIB)

v Other objects - Start Journal Object (STRJRNOBJ)

Restrictions:

v Before journaling an access path, all physical files over which the access path is built must first be

journaled to the same journal that is used to journal the access path. Even if all physical file members

for a particular physical file are removed from the access path of a logical file, all physical files must

still be journaled to the same journal before journaling the access path.

v The maximum number of objects that can be associated with one journal is either 250,000 or 10,000,000.

To get 10,000,000, the value of *MAX10M must have been specified for the JRNOBJLMT parameter on

either the Create Journal (CRTJRN) command or on the Change Journal (CHGJRN) command. Once the

number of objects is greater than or equal to this maximum, journaling does not start for any more

objects.

v All access paths to be journaled must specify MAINT(*IMMED) or MAINT(*DLY).

v If only after images are being journaled for the physical file members, the system automatically starts

journaling the before and after images for the physical file once journaling is started for any access

path built over the physical file. When journaling ends for the access paths, the system automatically

stops journaling the before images for the physical file and again only journals the after images.

v Overrides are not applied to files specified on the FILE parameter.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 475

Page 492: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

v The specified journal must be a local journal. Although all object types which can be journaled to a

local journal can also have their changes sent to a remote journal, this is accomplished by a two step

process. First start journaling to the local journal. Then connect the local journal to a remote instance.

To initiate such a connection, use the Add Remote Journal (ADDRMTJRN) command or the Add

Remote Journal (QjoAddRemoteJournal) API. For information about remote journaling, see the Journal

management topic collection in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

v Lock Processing

The file with the access path to start journaling is locked with a read exclusive lock (*EXCLRD).

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

FILE Journaled file Values (up to 300 repetitions): Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: Journaled file Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

JRN Journal Qualified object name Required,

Positional 2 Qualifier 1: Journal Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

LOGLVL Logging level *ERRORS, *ALL Optional

Top

Journaled file (FILE)

Specifies a maximum of 300 database files whose access paths are journaled.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Journaled file

file-name

Specify the name of the file.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

476 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 493: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Journal (JRN)

Specifies the journal that receives the file change journal entries.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Journal

journal-name

Specify the name of the journal.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Logging level (LOGLVL)

Specifies the error logging level used. This parameter is used to determine which messages will be sent.

*ERRORS

All diagnostic and escape messages are sent but the command will not send successful

completion messages for each object. At the completion of this command, one completion

message will be sent.

*ALL The command sends all the messages that would be sent with *ERRORS and it will also send the

successful completion message for each object.

Top

Examples

STRJRNAP FILE(MYFILE) JRN(MYLIB/JRNLA)

This command journals all access paths for all members in file MYFILE (found using the library search

list) to journal JRNLA in library MYLIB.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF6971

Damage prevents object &1 from being journaled.

CPF6972

Cannot allocate access path for file &1 in &2.

Start Journal Access Path (STRJRNAP) 477

Page 494: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF7003

Entry not journaled to journal &1. Reason code &3.

CPF7004

Maximum number of objects journaled to journal &1.

CPF7008

Cannot start or end access path journaling for file &1.

CPF7009

Not all based-on files being journaled to &3.

CPF7011

Not enough storage or resources.

CPF703C

DDL transaction prevents journaling operation.

CPF703D

DDL transaction prevents journaling operation.

CPF703E

DDL transaction prevents journaling operation.

CPF7030

Object of type *&3 already being journaled.

CPF7031

Cannot allocate member &3 file &1 in &2.

CPF7033

Start or end journaling failed for member &3.

CPF7034

Logical damage of file &1 in &2.

CPF7035

Object &1 in &2 already known to journal.

CPF705A

Operation failed due to remote journal.

CPF7079

Access path journaling for file &1 not started.

CPF708D

Journal receiver found logically damaged.

CPF7084

Object of type *&6 could not be journaled.

CPF709D

Cannot start journaling object of type *&7.

CPF9801

Object &2 in library &3 not found.

CPF9802

Not authorized to object &2 in &3.

CPF9803

Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.

CPF9812

File &1 in library &2 not found.

478 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 495: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF9820

Not authorized to use library &1.

CPF9822

Not authorized to file &1 in library &2.

CPF9825

Not authorized to device &1.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

CPF9873

ASP status is preventing access to object.

CPF9875

Resources exceeded on ASP &1.

Top

Start Journal Access Path (STRJRNAP) 479

Page 496: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

480 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 497: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Journal Library (STRJRNLIB)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Conditional

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Journal Library (STRJRNLIB) command is used to start journaling changes (made to a library or

list of libraries) to a specific journal, and optionally to start journaling changes to objects within the

library or list of libraries. Objects created in, moved into, or restored into a journaled library may be

automatically journaled to the same journal the library is journaled to. For more information about

journal entries which can be sent, see the Journal management topic collection in the i5/OS Information

Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/. Search for ″journal entry finder″.

After journaling begins for the object, the user should save the journaled object to preserve its journal

attribute information. Also, the object must be saved because, for example, journaled changes cannot be

applied to a version of the object that was saved before journaling was in effect.

Objects created, moved, or restored into the library that are eligible for journaling may automatically start

journaling to the same journal as the library. Which objects inherit the journal state of the library and

what journaling attributes they start journaling with are determined by the inherit journaling attributes of

the library.

Use the Display Library Description (DSPLIBD) command to display journal information including the

inherit rules for the library.

For other ways to start journaling see the following commands:

v Access paths - Start Journal Access Path (STRJRNAP)

v Integrated file system objects - Start Journal (STRJRN)

v Physical files - Start Journal Physical File (STRJRNPF)

v Other objects - Start Journal Object (STRJRNOBJ)

Restrictions:

v The object must not be journaling changes to another journal.

v The maximum number of objects that can be associated with one journal is either 250,000 or 10,000,000.

To get 10,000,000, the value of *MAX10M must have been specified for the JRNOBJLMT parameter on

either the Create Journal (CRTJRN) command or on the Change Journal (CHGJRN) command. Once the

number of objects is greater than or equal to this maximum, journaling does not start for any more

objects.

v The specified journal must be a local journal. Although all object types which can be journaled to a

local journal can also have their changes sent to a remote journal, this is accomplished by a two step

process. First start journaling to the local journal. Then connect the local journal to a remote instance.

To initiate such a connection, use the Add Remote Journal (ADDRMTJRN) command or the Add

Remote Journal (QjoAddRemoteJournal) API. For information about remote journaling, see the Journal

management topic collection in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

v The specified journal and object must reside in the same auxiliary storage pool (ASP).

v If the specified library contains a data area named QDFTJRN, no objects being created, moved, or

restored into the library will inherit the journaling state of the library. Instead, objects will

automatically start journaling based on the contents of the QDFTJRN data area. When the QDFTJRN

data area is deleted, objects being created, moved, and restored into the library will inherit the

journaling state of the library based on the inherit rules.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 481

Page 498: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

v The following libraries may not be journaled: QSYS, QSYSxxxxx, QSYS2, QSYS2xxxxx, QRECOVERY,

QRCYxxxxx, QSPL, QSPLxxxxx, QRCL, QRCLxxxxx, QRPLOBJ, QRPLxxxxx, QGPL, QTEMP, SYSIBM,

SYSIBxxxxx, SYSIBMADM, SYSPROC, and SYSTOOLS, where xxxxx is a five-digit number of an

Independent Auxiliary Storage Pool (IASP).

v Lock Processing

The library to start journaling is locked with a read exclusive lock (*EXCLRD).

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

LIB Library Values (up to 300 repetitions): Generic name, name Required,

Positional 1

JRN Journal Qualified object name Required,

Positional 2 Qualifier 1: Journal Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

INHRULES Inherit rules Values (up to 20 repetitions): Element list Optional

Element 1: Object type *ALL, *FILE, *DTAARA, *DTAQ

Element 2: Operation *ALLOPR, *CREATE, *MOVE, *RESTORE, *RSTOVRJRN

Element 3: Rule action *INCLUDE, *OMIT

Element 4: Images *OBJDFT, *AFTER, *BOTH

Element 5: Omit journal

entry

*OBJDFT, *NONE, *OPNCLO

LOGLVL Logging level *ERRORS, *ALL Optional

Top

Library (LIB)

Specifies a maximum of 300 library names for which changes are to be journaled.

generic-name

Specify the generic name of the library for which changes are to be journaled. A generic name is

a character string that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic

name is specified, all libraries that have names with the same prefix as the generic name will

have their changes journaled.

library-name

Specify the name of the library for which changes are to be journaled.

Top

Journal (JRN)

Specifies the journal that receives the journaled changes.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Journal

journal-name

Specify the name of the journal that receives the journaled changes.

482 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 499: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Inherit rules (INHRULES)

Specifies which objects created within a journaled library, moved into a journaled library, or restored into

a journaled library should inherit the journal state of the library and which journaling attributes those

objects should have.

Each rule defines object types and operations that the rule applies to. Multiple rules can be defined for

the same set of objects. If multiple rules are defined for the same object and operation, the last rule

defined for that object will be applied.

Note: If a data area named QDFTJRN exists within the library, no objects created, moved, or restored into

the library will inherit the journal state of the library. Objects created, moved, and restored into the

library will automatically start journaling based on the data area information.

Element 1: Object type

Specify the object type of the objects that are identified by this rule.

*ALL This rule applies to all object types that can be journaled.

*DTAARA

This rule applies to data areas.

*DTAQ

This rule applies to data queues.

*FILE This rule applies to database physical files.

Element 2: Operation

Specifies the operation or operations identified by this rule.

*ALLOPR

This rule applies to all objects created in, moved into, or restored into the library. This is a

combination of the values *CREATE, *MOVE, and *RESTORE. See their descriptions for further

information.

*CREATE

This rule applies to all objects created in the library.

*MOVE

This rule applies to all objects moved into the library, if they are not already journaled.

*RESTORE

This rule applies to all objects restored into the library. If an object is restored over a currently

existing object, the restored object will retain the same journal state and journaling attributes of

the object it was restored over. If an object was never journaled when it was saved, journaling is

started for the object when it is restored into the library. Otherwise, if an object was journaled

Start Journal Library (STRJRNLIB) 483

Page 500: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

when it was saved, it will first attempt to start journaling to the journal it was journaled to when

it was saved, with the same journaling attributes it had when it was saved. If that journal does

not exist, the object will start journaling to the same journal the library is journaled to, with the

journaling attributes defined by this rule. A rule with *RESTORE specified will override any

previous rule for the same object type with *RSTOVRJRN specified.

If the accompanying rule action is set to *OMIT and the object is not restored over an existing

object, the restored object will retain the same journal state and journaling attributes as it had

when it was saved. The journal state of the library is ignored.

*RSTOVRJRN

This rule applies to all objects restored into the library. If an object is restored over a currently

existing object, the restored object will retain the same journal state and journaling attributes of

the object it was restored over. Otherwise, the object will start journaling to the same journal the

library is journaled to, with the journaling attributes defined by this rule. A rule with

*RSTOVRJRN specified will override any previous rule for the same object type with *RESTORE

specified.

If the accompanying rule action is set to *OMIT and the object is not restored over an existing

object, the restored object will retain the same journal state and journaling attributes as it had

when it was saved. The journal state of the library is ignored.

Element 3: Rule action

Specifies whether or not the objects that match object type and operation in this rule will be included or

omitted from the list of objects that inherit the journal state of the library.

*INCLUDE

All objects that match the object type and operation will inherit the journal state of the library,

and will use the journaling attributes defined by this rule.

*OMIT

All objects that match object type and operation will not inherit the journal state of the library.

This overrides an *INCLUDE specification and is intended to be used to omit a subset of a

previously defined rule.

Element 4: Images

Specifies the kinds of images that are written to the journal receiver for changes to objects for objects that

inherit the journal state of the library.

Note: This element is ignored if *OMIT is specified for Rule action.

*OBJDFT

The default value for each object type will be used for this journaling attribute when an object

inherits the journal state of the library. Database files (*FILE) will have both before and after

images generated by the system (*BOTH). All other object types will have only after images

generated by the system (*AFTER).

*AFTER

Only after images are generated for objects that inherit the journal state of the library.

*BOTH

Both before and after images are generated for objects that inherit the journal state of the library.

Note: The value *BOTH is only valid for data area (*DTAARA) and database file (*FILE) objects.

If *BOTH is specified and *ALL is specified for Object type, the system will generate both before

and after images for data areas and database files. All other object types will only generate after

images.

484 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 501: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Element 5: Omit journal entry

Specifies the journal entries that are omitted for objects that inherit the journal state of the library.

Note: This element is ignored if *OMIT is specified for Rule action.

*OBJDFT

The default value for each object type will be used for this journaling attribute when an object

inherits the journal state of the library. Database files (*FILE) will omit open and close entries. No

other object types will omit journal entries.

*NONE

No journal entries will be omitted for objects that inherit the journal state of the library.

*OPNCLO

Open and close entries are omitted for database file (*FILE) objects that inherit the journal state of

the library. This prevents the use of TOJOBO and TOJOBC entries on the Apply Journaled

Changes (APYJRNCHG) command, but it saves some storage space in the journal receivers.

Note: The value *OPNCLO is only valid for database files (*FILE). If *OPNCLO is specified and

*ALL is specified for Object type, database files will omit open and close entries. All other object

types will not omit any journal entries.

Top

Logging level (LOGLVL)

Specifies the error logging level used. This parameter is used to determine which messages will be sent.

*ERRORS

All diagnostic and escape messages are sent but the command will not send successful

completion messages for each object. At the completion of this command, one completion

message will be sent.

*ALL The command sends all the messages that would be sent with *ERRORS and it will also send the

successful completion message for each object.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Start Journaling a Single Library

STRJRNLIB LIB(MYLIBA) JRN(MYLIBA/JRN) JRNCUROBJ(*NONE)

This command journals all changes to library MYLIBA to journal JRN in MYLIBA. Also, all objects that

can be journaled that are created in, moved into, or restored into this library will automatically start

journaling to journal JRN in MYLIBA.

Example 2: Start Journaling a Library and Selectively Inherit Journaling

STRJRNLIB LIB(MYLIBC) JRN(MYLIBC/JRN)

INHRULES((*FILE *ALLOPR *INCLUDE *BOTH *OPNCLOSYN)

(*DTAARA *CREATE *INCLUDE *OBJDFT *OBJDFT))

Start Journal Library (STRJRNLIB) 485

Page 502: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This command journals all changes to library MYLIBC to journal JRN in MYLIBC. All files that are

created in, moved into, or restored into library MYLIBC will have journaling started to journal JRN in

library MYLIBC, and will generate both before and after images and will omit open and close entries. All

data areas that are created in library MYLIBC will have journaling started.

Example 3: Start Journaling a Library and Selectively Inherit Journaling with Omit

STRJRNLIB LIB(MYLIBD) JRN(MYLIBA/JRN)

INHRULES((*ALL *ALLOPR *INCLUDE *OBJDFT *OBJDFT)

(*FILE *CREATE *OMIT)

(*FILE *RESTORE *OMIT))

This command journals all changes to library MYLIBD to journal JRN in MYLIBA. All objects that can be

journaled that are created in, moved into, or restored into library MYLIBD will have journaling started to

journal JRN in MYLIBA, except any files that are created or restored into the library.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF6979

Journal &1 in library &2 is unusable.

CPF700A

&1 of &2 objects have started journaling.

CPF705A

Operation failed due to remote journal.

CPF9801

Object &2 in library &3 not found.

CPF9802

Not authorized to object &2 in &3.

CPF9803

Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.

CPF9810

Library &1 not found.

CPF9820

Not authorized to use library &1.

CPF9825

Not authorized to device &1.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

CPF9873

ASP status is preventing access to object.

CPF9875

Resources exceeded on ASP &1.

Top

486 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 503: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Journal Object (STRJRNOBJ)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Yes

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Journal Object (STRJRNOBJ) command is used to start journaling changes (made to an object or

list of objects) to a specific journal. The object types which are supported through this interface are Data

Areas (*DTAARA) and Data Queues (*DTAQ). For more information about journal entries which can be

sent, see the Journal management topic collection in the i5/OS Information Center at

http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/. Search for ″journal entry finder″.

Additionally, the user can specify that only the after image or both the before and the after images of an

object of type *DTAARA be journaled. Before images are necessary to remove journaled changes using

the Remove Journaled Changes (RMVJRNCHG) command.

After journaling begins for the object, the user should save the journaled object to preserve its journal

attribute information. Also, the object must be saved because, for example, journaled changes cannot be

applied to a version of the object that was saved before journaling was in effect.

For other ways to start journaling see the following commands:

v Access paths - Start Journal Access Path (STRJRNAP)

v Integrated file system objects - Start Journal (STRJRN)

v Physical files - Start Journal Physical File (STRJRNPF)

v Libraries - Start Journal Library (STRJRNLIB)

Restrictions:

v The object must not be journaling changes to another journal.

v The maximum number of objects that can be associated with one journal is either 250,000 or 10,000,000.

To get 10,000,000, the value of *MAX10M must have been specified for the JRNOBJLMT parameter on

either the Create Journal (CRTJRN) command or on the Change Journal (CHGJRN) command. Once the

number of objects is greater than or equal to this maximum, journaling does not start for any more

objects.

v The specified journal must be a local journal. Although all object types which can be journaled to a

local journal can also have their changes sent to a remote journal, this is accomplished by a two step

process. First start journaling to the local journal. Then connect the local journal to a remote instance.

To initiate such a connection, use the Add Remote Journal (ADDRMTJRN) command or the Add

Remote Journal (QjoAddRemoteJournal) API. For information about remote journaling, see the Journal

management topic collection in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

v The specified journal and object must reside in the same auxiliary storage pool (ASP).

v For data areas, only local external data area objects may be journaled. The special data areas (*LDA,

*GDA, and *PDA) and DDM data areas cannot be journaled.

v For data queues, only local data queues are supported. DDM data queues cannot be journaled.

v Lock Processing

The object to start journaling is locked with a read exclusive lock (*EXCLRD).

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 487

Page 504: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

OBJ Object Values (up to 300 repetitions): Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: Object Generic name, name, *ALL

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

OBJTYPE Object type *DTAARA, *DTAQ Required,

Positional 2

JRN Journal Qualified object name Required,

Positional 3 Qualifier 1: Journal Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

IMAGES Images *AFTER, *BOTH Optional

LOGLVL Logging level *ERRORS, *ALL Optional

Top

Object (OBJ)

Specifies a maximum of 300 qualified object names for which changes are to be journaled.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Object

*ALL All objects of the specified type in the specified library will have their changes written to the

journal.

generic-name

Specify the generic name of the object for which changes are to be journaled. A generic name is a

character string that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name

is specified, all objects of the specified object type that have names with the same prefix as the

generic name will have their changes journaled.

object-name

Specify the name of the object for which changes are to be journaled.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Object type (OBJTYPE)

Specifies the object type for which changes are to be journaled.

This is a required parameter.

488 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 505: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*DTAARA

Changes for data area objects are to be journaled.

*DTAQ

Changes for data queue objects are to be journaled.

Top

Journal (JRN)

Specifies the journal that receives the journaled changes.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Journal

journal-name

Specify the name of the journal that receives the journaled changes.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Images (IMAGES)

Specifies the kinds of images that are written to the journal receiver for changes to objects.

*AFTER

Only after images are generated for changes to objects.

*BOTH

The system generates both before and after images to the journal for changes to objects.

Note: The value *BOTH is only valid for *DTAARA objects.

Top

Logging level (LOGLVL)

Specifies the error logging level used. This parameter is used to determine which messages will be sent.

*ERRORS

All diagnostic and escape messages are sent but the command will not send successful

completion messages for each object. At the completion of this command, one completion

message will be sent.

*ALL The command sends all the messages that would be sent with *ERRORS and it will also send the

successful completion message for each object.

Top

Start Journal Object (STRJRNOBJ) 489

Page 506: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Examples

STRJRNOBJ OBJ(DTALIB/MYDTAARA) OBJTYPE(*DTAARA)

JRN(MYLIB/JRNLA)

This command journals all changes to data area MYDTAARA in library DTALIB to journal JRNLA in

library MYLIB. Only the after images of updates are written to the journal.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF6979

Journal &1 in library &2 is unusable.

CPF700A

&1 of &2 objects have started journaling.

CPF705A

Operation failed due to remote journal.

CPF7057

*LIBL not allowed with *ALL or *ALLLIB or a generic name.

CPF9801

Object &2 in library &3 not found.

CPF9802

Not authorized to object &2 in &3.

CPF9803

Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.

CPF9810

Library &1 not found.

CPF9820

Not authorized to use library &1.

CPF9825

Not authorized to device &1.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

CPF9873

ASP status is preventing access to object.

CPF9875

Resources exceeded on ASP &1.

Top

490 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 507: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Journal Physical File (STRJRNPF)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Conditional

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Journal Physical File (STRJRNPF) command is used to start journaling changes made to a

specific database physical file to a specific journal. Changes in new members added to the file are also

journaled.

The user can specify that only the after image or both the before and after images of records in the

journaled physical file be journaled. Before images are necessary to remove journaled changes using the

Remove Journaled Changes (RMVJRNCHG) command. In addition, the system will automatically capture

the before images for a database file if the file is opened under commitment control. For more

information about commitment control, see the Database category in the i5/OS Information Center at

http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

After journaling begins for the file, and after any new members are added to the file, the user should run

the Save Changed Object (SAVCHGOBJ) command with OBJTYPE(*FILE) and OBJJRN(*YES) specified.

The file must be saved because journaled changes cannot be applied to a version of the file that was

saved before journaling was in effect.

When the file being journaled is a distributed file, the STRJRNPF command is also distributed if

journaling was successfully started locally. Even if the distribution request fails, the local file remains

journaled.

For other ways to start journaling see the following commands:

v Access paths - Start Journal Access Path (STRJRNAP)

v Integrated file system objects - Start Journal (STRJRN)

v Libraries - Start Journal Library (STRJRNLIB)

v Other objects - Start Journal Object (STRJRNOBJ)

Restrictions:

v The file must not be journaling changes to another journal.

v Overrides are not applied to files specified on the FILE parameter.

v The maximum number of objects that can be associated with one journal is either 250,000 or 10,000,000.

To get 10,000,000, the value of *MAX10M must have been specified for the JRNOBJLMT parameter on

either the Create Journal (CRTJRN) command or on the Change Journal (CHGJRN) command. Once the

number of objects is greater than or equal to this maximum, journaling does not start for any more

objects.

v The specified journal must be a local journal. Although all object types which can be journaled to a

local journal can also have their changes sent to a remote journal, this is accomplished by a two step

process. First start journaling to the local journal. Then connect the local journal to a remote instance.

To initiate such a connection, use the Add Remote Journal (ADDRMTJRN) command or the Add

Remote Journal (QjoAddRemoteJournal) API. For information about remote journaling, see the Journal

management topic.

v In multithreaded jobs, this command is not threadsafe for distributed files and fails for distributed files

that use relational databases of type *SNA.

v If the file has Large Object (LOB) columns, and the total of the LOB columns plus the record size is

greater than 15,761,440 bytes, then the file can only be journaled to a journal with

RCVSIZOPT(*MAXOPT2) or RCVSIZOPT(*MAXOPT3) specified.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 491

Page 508: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

v Lock Processing

The physical file to start journaling is locked with a read exclusive lock (*EXCLRD). Any logical files

built over the physical file are also locked with a read exclusive lock (*EXCLRD).

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

FILE Physical file to be journaled Values (up to 300 repetitions): Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: Physical file to

be journaled

Generic name, name, *ALL

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

JRN Journal Qualified object name Required,

Positional 2 Qualifier 1: Journal Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

IMAGES Record images *AFTER, *BOTH Optional

OMTJRNE Journal entries to be omitted *NONE, *OPNCLO Optional

LOGLVL Logging level *ERRORS, *ALL Optional

Top

Physical file to be journaled (FILE)

Specifies a maximum of 300 physical files whose changes are written to the journal.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Physical file to be journaled

*ALL All physical files in the specified library will have their changes written to the journal.

generic-name

Specify the generic name of the physical file for which changes are to be journaled. A generic

name is a character string that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a

generic name is specified, all physical files that have names with the same prefix as the generic

name will have their changes journaled.

file-name

Specify the name of the physical file for which changes are to be journaled.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

492 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 509: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Journal (JRN)

Specifies the journal that will receive the file change journal entries.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Journal

journal-name

Specify the name of the journal.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Record images (IMAGES)

Specifies the kinds of record images to be written to the journal for changes to records in the file.

*AFTER

Only after images are written to the journal for changes to records in this file.

*BOTH

The system writes both before and after images to the journal for changes to records in this file.

Top

Journal entries to be omitted (OMTJRNE)

Specifies the journal entries that are omitted.

*NONE

No journal entries are omitted.

*OPNCLO

Open and close entries are omitted. Open and close operations on the specified file members do not

create open and close journal entries. This prevents the use of TOJOBO and TOJOBC entries on the

Apply Journaled Changes (APYJRNCHG) and Remove Journaled Changes (RMVJRNCHG)

commands, but it saves some storage space in the attached receivers.

Top

Logging level (LOGLVL)

Specifies the error logging level used. This parameter is used to determine which messages will be sent.

*ERRORS

All diagnostic and escape messages are sent but the command will not send successful

completion messages for each object. At the completion of this command, one completion

message will be sent.

Start Journal Physical File (STRJRNPF) 493

Page 510: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*ALL The command sends all the messages that would be sent with *ERRORS and it will also send the

successful completion message for each object.

Top

Examples

STRJRNPF FILE(MYFILE) JRN(MYLIB/JRNLA)

This command journals all changes to all members of file MYFILE (as found using the library search list)

to journal JRNLA in library MYLIB. Only the after images of updated records are written to the journal.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF6979

Journal &1 in library &2 is unusable.

CPF700A

&1 of &2 objects have started journaling.

CPF705A

Operation failed due to remote journal.

CPF7057

*LIBL not allowed with *ALL or *ALLLIB or a generic name.

CPF708D

Journal receiver found logically damaged.

CPF9801

Object &2 in library &3 not found.

CPF9802

Not authorized to object &2 in &3.

CPF9803

Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.

CPF9810

Library &1 not found.

CPF9820

Not authorized to use library &1.

CPF9825

Not authorized to device &1.

CPF9830

Cannot assign library &1.

CPF9873

ASP status is preventing access to object.

CPF9875

Resources exceeded on ASP &1.

494 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 511: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Start Journal Physical File (STRJRNPF) 495

Page 512: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

496 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 513: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Job Watcher (STRJW)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Job Watcher (STRJW) command starts the collection of detailed job performance data. It allows

the user to obtain detailed data related to a selected set of jobs or tasks on the system. Job Watcher

collects data on a sampling basis and writes the collected data to a set of database files. The file names all

begin with the letters ’QAPYJW’. In addition to basic job information the user may optionally request

SQL, activation group, sockets and TCP, and call stack data.

Restrictions:

v To use this command, you must have service (*SERVICE) special authority, or be authorized to the Job

Watcher function of the Operating System through System i5 Navigator’s Application Administration

support. The Change Function Usage (CHGFCNUSG) command, with a function ID of

QIBM_SERVICE_JOB_WATCHER, can also be used to change the list of users that are allowed to use

this command.

v You must have execute (*EXECUTE) authority to the library specified in the Library (LIB) parameter.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DFN Definition Name, *SELECT Optional

COL Collection Name, *GEN Optional

LIB Library Name, QPFRDATA Optional

TEXT Text ’description’ Character value, *DFN, *BLANK Optional

RPLDTA Replace data *NO, *YES Optional

COLITV Collection interval 0.1-3600.0, *DFN, *NODELAY Optional

ENDCOL End collection Single values: *NOITVDTAOther values (up to 3 repetitions): Element list

Optional

Element 1: Option *NBRSEC, *DASDMB, *NBRITV

Element 2: Value Integer, 60

JOB Job name Single values: *DFN, *ALL, *NONEOther values (up to 20 repetitions): Qualified job name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Job name Generic name, name

Qualifier 2: User Generic name, name, *ALL

Qualifier 3: Number 000000-999999, *ALL

TASKNAME Task name Single values: *DFN, *ALL, *NONEOther values (up to 20 repetitions): Character value

Optional

TDENBR TDE number Single values: *DFNOther values (up to 20 repetitions): Hexadecimal value

Optional

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 497

Page 514: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Definition (DFN)

Specifies the Job Watcher definition to use when starting a new Job Watcher collection. The definition

identifies the parameters to use when starting a Job Watcher collection. A new Job Watcher definition can

be created using the Add Job Watcher Definition (ADDJWDFN) command.

*SELECT

The user will be prompted to select from a list of existing Job Watcher definitions. This value is

not valid when the STRJW command is submitted to batch and will result in an error.

name Specify the name of the Job Watcher definition to use for this collection.

Top

Collection (COL)

Specifies the name of the collection. The name of the collection is the name of the database file member

to which the output data will be written. If a member by this name does not exist in each Job Watcher

database file, one will be created with the specified name. If a member by this name already exists, you

must specify *YES on the Replace data (RPLDTA) parameter in order to write over the data in the

existing member.

*GEN The collection name will be generated based on when the STRJW command was called. The

format of the collection name will be Qdddhhmmss where ddd is the Julian day (001-366) and

hhmmss is the hour (01-24), minute (00-59) and second (00-59) the collection was started.

name Specify the name of the collection.

Top

Library (LIB)

Specifies the library where the database files for the Job Watcher data will exist. Each file that is not

found in the specified library is automatically created in that library.

QPFRDATA

The database files will be located in library QPFRDATA.

name Specify the name of the library where the database files will be located.

Top

Text ’description’ (TEXT)

Specifies the text to be used for each member across the set of Job Watcher database files associated with

the collection.

*DFN Job Watcher database file members will have the same text description as the Job Watcher

definition that was selected on the Definition (DFN) parameter.

*BLANK

Job Watcher database file members will have no text description.

character-value

Specify a text description for this set of Job Watcher database file members. The description

should be no more that 50 characters of text, enclosed in apostrophes.

Top

498 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 515: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Replace data (RPLDTA)

Specifies whether an existing set of Job Watcher database file members should be replaced with a new set

of members with the same name.

*NO The existing Job Watcher database file members will not be replaced. A new Job Watcher

collection will not begin if the specified member already exists.

*YES The existing Job Watcher database file members will be replaced with data from the new

collection.

Top

Collection interval (COLITV)

Specifies the interval between retrieval of job/task data. Job/task data is collected from the system on a

sampling basis. This value specifies the amount of time that will elapse between the collection of each

sample.

*DFN The collection interval specified in the Job Watcher definition will be used for this collection.

*NODELAY

Data will be collected as fast as possible, with no delay between the collection of interval data.

0.1-3600.0

Specify the number of seconds to delay between the collection of interval data. If a value is

specified on this parameter it will override the value in the Job Watcher definition.

Top

End collection (ENDCOL)

Specifies the criteria which will end the collection. This parameter allows you to specify multiple

conditions which will end the collection of data. If more than one end option is specified, the Job Watcher

collection will end the first time any one of the specified criteria has been met.

You can specify 3 values for this parameter.

Element 1: Option

Single values

*NOITVDTA

End the collection after the first interval in which no records were collected.

Other values

*NBRSEC

End the collection after a number of seconds has elapsed. Specify the time limit in element 2 of

this parameter.

*DASDMB

End the collection when a number of megabytes of data has been written to the Job Watcher

database files. Specify the megabyte limit in element 2 of this parameter.

*NBRITV

End the collection when a number of collection intervals has occurred. Specify the number of

intervals in element 2 of this parameter.

Start Job Watcher (STRJW) 499

Page 516: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Element 2: Value

60 If the default of *NBRSEC is used for element 1 of this parameter, the collection will end after

sixty seconds of data is collected.

integer

Specify the number of seconds (for *NBRSEC) or the number of megabytes (for *DASDMB) or the

number of intervals (for *NBRITV) to use as the ending criteria for the collection.

Top

Job name (JOB)

Specifies the jobs that will be included in the Job Watcher collection. If a value is specified on this

parameter it will override the value in the Job Watcher definition.

Single values

*DFN The jobs specified in the Job Watcher definition will be used for this collection.

*ALL All jobs on the system are included.

*NONE

None of the jobs on the system are included.

Other values (up to 20 repetitions)

Qualifier 1: Job name

name Specify the name of the job to include in the Job Watcher collection.

generic-name

Specify the generic name of the job to be included. A generic name is a character string of one or

more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. The asterisk substitutes for any

valid characters. A generic name specifies all objects with names that begin with the generic

prefix for which the user has authority. If an asterisk is not included with the generic (prefix)

name, the system assumes it to be the complete object name. For more information about generic

object names, see the CL topic collection in the Programming category in the i5/OS Information

Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/

Qualifier 2: User

*ALL All jobs that match the specified job name are included.

name Specify the name of the user of the job to be included.

generic-name

Specify the generic user name of the jobs to be included.

Qualifier 3: Number

*ALL All jobs that match the specified job name and user name are included.

number

Specify the job number to further qualify the job name and user name.

Top

500 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 517: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Task name (TASKNAME)

Specifies the name of the task(s) which will be included in the Job Watcher collection. If a value is

specified on this parameter it will override the value in the Job Watcher definition.

Single values

*DFN The tasks specified in the Job Watcher definition will be used for this collection.

*ALL All tasks on the system will be included in the collection.

*NONE

None of the tasks on the system will be included in the collection.

Other values (up to 20 repetitions)

name Specify the name of the tasks which will be included in the collection.

Top

TDE number (TDENBR)

Specifies the Task Dispatching Element (TDE) number of the TDE(s) which will be included in the Job

Watcher collection. The TDE number is a unique identifier assigned to each job, thread, and task running

in the system. The TDE number may be found by using the Display list of tasks option in the

Display/Alter/Dump function of Start System Service Tools (STRSST). If a value is specified on this

parameter it will override the value in the Job Watcher definition.

Single values

*DFN The TDE numbers specified in the Job Watcher definition will be used for this collection.

Other values (up to 20 repetitions)

number

The TDE number of the TDEs which will be included in the collection.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Start Job Watcher Using a Definition

STRJW DFN(MYDFN) COL(TEST) LIB(MYLIB)

This command will start a Job Watcher collection using the definition called MYDFN to determine which

data will be collected. Assuming the shipped default of ENDCOL(*NBRSEC 60) is used, data collection

will end after 60 seconds. Collected data will be written to the Job Watcher database files in library

MYLIB in member TEST. The Job Watcher database file names all begin with ’QAPYJW’.

Example 2: Start Job Watcher Using a Collection Interval

STRJW DFN(MYDFN) COLITV(5) ENDCOL((*NBRITV 200))

This command will start Job Watcher to collect data using the definition called MYDFN. Data will be

collected at an interval of 5 seconds, overriding the interval specified in the definition. Data collection

Start Job Watcher (STRJW) 501

Page 518: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

will end after 200 intervals have been collected. Data will be written to the Job Watcher database files in

library QPFRDATA in a member name which will be generated by Job Watcher based on the date and

time the collection started.

Example 3: Start Job Watcher, Prompting to Select a Definition

STRJW DFN(*SELECT) COL(TEST) LIB(MYLIB)

ENDCOL((*DASDMB 100))

This command will open a prompt panel listing all Job Watcher definitions which currently exist on the

system. The definition selected on this panel will be used to determine what data will be collected. Data

collection will end after 100 megabytes of data have been written to the Job Watcher database files in

library MYLIB in member TEST.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2401

Not authorized to library &1.

CPF9810

Library &1 not found.

CPFB514

Member already exists.

CPFB517

Unexpected error in Job Watcher.

CPFB518

The user does not have the required authority.

CPFB519

Error detected in Job Watcher condition control file.

CPFB51A

Start Job Watcher did not complete successfully.

CPFB51B

Option *SELECT is only valid if the command is being run interactively.

Top

502 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 519: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Job Log Server (STRLOGSVR)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Job Log Server (STRLOGSVR) command is used to start the job log server which writes job logs

for jobs that are in a job log pending state. See Job log output (LOGOUTPUT) for additional information

on which jobs are handled by the server.

The job log server will write a job’s job log either to a spooled file, to a printer, or to an outfile, if

specified to do so (by using the QMHCTLJL, Control job log API).

Restrictions:

v You must have job control (*JOBCTL) special authority to use this command.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

NBRSVR Number of servers 1-30, *CALC Optional,

Positional 1

Top

Number of servers (NBRSVR)

Specifies the number of job log server jobs to be started. If one or more job log server jobs are already

active, this is the number of additional server jobs that will be started. If the number of servers requested

would exceed the maximum active, only the difference between the maximum and the current number of

active servers will be started. The maximum number of job log servers that can be active at one time is

30.

*CALC

The number of job log server jobs started will be determined by the system.

1-30 Specify the number of job log servers to start.

Top

Examples

STRLOGSVR NBRSVR(*CALC)

This command starts the job log server. The number of server jobs started will be determined by the

system.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 503

Page 520: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF134A

Job log server not started.

Top

504 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 521: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Mode (STRMOD)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Mode (STRMOD) command starts one or all modes currently in use for an advanced

program-to-program communications (APPC) remote location. The user can use STRMOD in either the

reset or ended state; it is required only after an End Mode (ENDMOD) command has ended a mode.

More information is in the APPC Programming book, SC41-5443.

Restriction: The user must have operational authority for the APPC device to use this command.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

RMTLOCNAME Remote location Communications name Required,

Positional 1

DEV Device Name, *LOC Optional,

Positional 2

MODE Mode Communications name, *NETATR, *ALL Optional

LCLLOCNAME Local location Communications name, *LOC, *NETATR Optional

RMTNETID Remote network identifier Communications name, *LOC, *NETATR, *NONE Optional

Top

Remote location (RMTLOCNAME)

Specifies the remote location name.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Device (DEV)

Specifies the device description name.

The possible values are:

*LOC The device description is determined by the system.

device-name

Specify the name of the device description.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 505

Page 522: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Mode (MODE)

Specifies the mode that is to be started.

The possible values are:

*NETATR

The mode in the network attributes is used.

*ALL All modes currently in use for the remote location are to be started.

v For a device description automatically created by the APPN support or a device description

manually created with the APPN parameter specified as *YES, *ALL indicates that any modes

that have been used while the remote location was active, but are not currently started, are to

be started.

v For a device description manually created with the APPN parameter specified as *NO, *ALL

specifies that all configured modes for the specified remote location are to be started.

BLANK

The mode name (consisting of 8 blank characters) is used.

mode-name

Specify a mode name.

Note: SNASVCMG and CPSVCMG are reserved names and cannot be specified.

Top

Local location (LCLLOCNAME)

Specifies the local location name.

The possible values are:

*LOC The local location name is determined by the system.

*NETATR

The LCLLOCNAME value specified in the system network attributes is used.

local-location-name

Specify the name of your location. The local location name is specified if you want to indicate a

specific local location name for the remote location.

Top

Remote network identifier (RMTNETID)

Specifies the remote network ID used with the remote location.

The possible values are:

*LOC The system selects the remote network ID.

*NETATR

The remote network identifier specified in the network attributes is used.

*NONE

No remote network identifier (ID) is used.

remote-network-id

Specify the name of the remote network ID.

506 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 523: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Examples

STRMOD RMTLOCNAME(APPCRLOC) DEV(APPCDEV) MODE(APPCMODE)

RMTNETID(CHICAGO)

This command starts a mode named APPCMODE for a remote location named APPCRLOC, a device

named APPCDEV, and a remote network ID of CHICAGO.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF598B

The &1 command failed for one or more modes.

Top

Start Mode (STRMOD) 507

Page 524: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

508 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 525: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Mail Server Framework (STRMSF)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Mail Server Framework (STRMSF) command starts the mail server framework jobs in the

system work subsystem (QSYSWRK).

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

MSGOPT How to process mail

messages

*RESUME, *RESET, *CLEAR Optional,

Positional 1

NBRMSFJOB Number of MSF jobs 1-99, 3 Optional,

Positional 2

Top

How to process mail messages (MSGOPT)

Specifies how the mail server framework processes existing mail server framework messages.

The possible values are:

*RESUME

All existing mail server framework messages continue processing from the point the mail server

framework previously ended.

*RESET

All existing mail server framework messages are processed as if they were just created.

*CLEAR

All existing mail server framework messages are deleted. This option should only be used when

a software error is reported with the mail server framework or its associated exit point programs.

Top

Number of MSF jobs (NBRMSFJOB)

Specifies the number of mail server framework jobs to start. This option allows concurrent processing of

several mail server framework messages.

The possible values are:

3 Three jobs are started.

number-of-jobs

Specify the number of jobs you want handling mail server framework messages. The valid values

range from 1 through 99.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 509

Page 526: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Examples

Example 1: Starting One Mail Server Framework Job

STRMSF NBRMSFJOB(1)

This command starts one mail server framwork job in a normal manner, processing any mail server

framework messages at the point at which processing was interrupted.

Example 2: Restarting Mail Server Framework Jobs

STRMSF NBRMSFJOB(3) MSGOPT(*RESET)

This command starts three mail server framework jobs and any mail server framework messages which

were partially handled by previous mail server famework jobs are processed again from the beginning.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPFAFAA

STRMSF did not complete successfully.

CPFAFAD

Mail Server Framework currently active.

CPFAFA0

Errors detected on MSF internal message index.

CPFAFA1

Errors detected on MSF internal message queue.

CPFAFFF

Internal system error in program &1.

Top

510 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 527: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start NFS Server (STRNFSSVR)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Network File System Server (STRNFSSVR) command starts one or all of the following Network

File System (NFS) server daemons. For more information about these daemon jobs, see i5/OS Network

File System Support book, SC41-5714

SERVER(*ALL) should be used, which will start the daemons in the following order. (This order is the

recommended order for starting the Network File System daemons.)

v The Remote Procedure Call (RPC) RPCBind daemon

v The block input/output (I/O) (BIO) daemon

v The generic security service (GSS) daemon

v The name registry (RGY) daemon

v The server (SVR) daemon

v The mount (MNT) daemon

v The network status monitor (NSM) daemon

v The network lock manager (NLM) daemon

If just one daemon is to be started, be sure the appropriate order for starting NFS daemons and the

possible consequences of starting daemons in an order other than that specified above are understood.

For more information about starting NFS daemons, see i5/OS Network File System Support book,

SC41-5714

If the user attempts to start a daemon or daemons that are already running, they will not cause the

command to fail, and it will continue to start other daemons that were requested to start. The command

will issue diagnostic message CPDA1BA or CPDA1BD if the daemon is already running. However, for

best results, end NFS daemons before attempting the STRNFSSVR command.

To determine if an NFS daemon is running, use the Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) command and

look in the subsystem QSYSWRK for existence of the following jobs:

QNFSRPCD The RPCBind daemon

QNFSBIOD The block I/O (BIO) daemon

QNFSGSSD The generic security service (GSS) daemon

QNFSRGYD The name registry (RGY) daemon

QNFSNFSD The NFS server (SVR) daemon

QNFSMNTD The mount (MNT) daemon

QNFSNSMD The network status monitor (NSM) daemon

QNFSNLMD The network lock manager (NLM) daemon

Restrictions:

v The user must have input/output (I/O) system configuration (*IOSYSCFG) special authority to use this

command.

v The user must be enrolled in the system distribution directory. Use the Add Directory Entry

(ADDDIRE) command to enroll the user.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 511

Page 528: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

SERVER Server daemon *ALL, *RPC, *BIO, *GSS, *RGY, *SVR, *MNT, *NSM,

*NLM

Required,

Positional 1

NBRSVR Number of server daemons 1-20, 1 Optional,

Positional 2

NBRBIO Number of block I/O

daemons

1-20, 1 Optional

RTVRPCREG Retrieve RPC registration *NO, *YES Optional

STRJOBTIMO Timeout for start of daemon 1-3600, 30, *NOMAX Optional

Top

Server daemon (SERVER)

Specifies the Network File System (NFS) daemon jobs to be started by this command. The specified

daemon should not already be running.

*ALL All NFS daemons will be started.

*RPC The NFS RPCBind daemon will be started.

*BIO Starts NFS block input/output (I/O) daemons. Additional daemons will be started if the number

specified on the Number of block I/O daemons (NBRBIO) parameter is greater than the number

of block I/O daemons already running on the system.

*GSS The NFS generic security services daemon will be started.

*RGY The NFS name resolution registry daemon will be started.

*SVR Starts NFS server daemons. Additional daemons will be started if the number specified on the

Number of server daemons (NBRSVR) parameter is greater than the number of server daemons

already running on the system.

*MNT The NFS mount daemon will be started.

*NSM The NFS network status monitor daemon will be started.

*NLM The NFS network lock manager daemon will be started.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Number of server daemons (NBRSVR)

Specifies the number of NFS server (*SVR) daemon jobs the user wants to have running. Additional

daemons will be started if the number specified on this parameter is greater than the number of server

daemons already running on the system. This parameter can only be used if SERVER(*SVR) or

SERVER(*ALL) is specified.

1 One NFS server daemon job should be started if there are not already any NFS server daemons

running.

1-20 Specify the number of NFS server daemon jobs the user wants to have running.

Top

512 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 529: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Number of block I/O daemons (NBRBIO)

Specifies the number of NFS block input/output (I/O) (*BIO) daemon jobs the user wants to have

running. Additional daemons will be started if the number specified on this parameter is greater than the

number of block I/O daemons already running on the system. This parameter can only be used if

SERVER(*BIO) or SERVER(*ALL) is specified.

1 One NFS block I/O daemon job should be started if there are not already any NFS block I/O

daemons running.

1-20 Specify the number of NFS block I/O daemon jobs the user wants to have running.

Top

Retrieve RPC registration (RTVRPCREG)

Specifies whether to retrieve previously recorded registration information when the RPCBind daemon is

started. If registration information is retrieved, any services already registered with the RPCBind daemon

do not have to re-register with the RPCBind daemon. This parameter can only be used if SERVER(*RPC)

or (SERVER(*ALL) is specified.

*NO Do not retrieve registration information.

*YES Retrieve registration information.

Top

Timeout for start of daemon (STRJOBTIMO)

Specifies the number of seconds to wait for each daemon to successfully start. If a daemon has not

started within the timeout value, the command will fail.

30 Default seconds before timeout.

*NOMAX

Wait forever for daemons to start; do not timeout.

1-3600 Specify a number of seconds to wait for daemons to start before timing out and failing the

command. Timeout values less than 30 seconds are rounded up to 30 seconds.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Start All NFS Daemons

STRNFSSVR SERVER(*ALL) STRJOBTIMO(*NOMAX)

This command starts all NFS daemons, and waits forever for them to start. No daemons should be

previously running.

Example 2: Start Only One Daemon

STRNFSSVR SERVER(*MNT)

Start NFS Server (STRNFSSVR) 513

Page 530: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This command starts the NFS mount daemon, and waits up to the default of 30 seconds for it to start.

The mount daemon should not be already running, and other daemons have been started in the

appropriate order.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPFA1B8

*IOSYSCFG authority required to use &1.

Top

514 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 531: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Object Conversion (STROBJCVN)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Object Conversion (STROBJCVN) command either converts user objects or checks which

objects will require conversion. Objects are converted from the format used in a previous version, release,

and modification level of the operating system to the format required for use in the current version,

release, and modification level of the operating system.

The following types of objects in libraries are converted or checked by this command:

v Programs (original program model (OPM) and Integrated Language Environment (ILE))

v Service programs

v Modules

SQL data is converted or checked by this command. Programs, service programs, and SQL package

(*SQLPKG) objects may contain SQL statements and data used for external stored procedures. Note that

converting SQL data contained within a program object is handled separately from converting the

program itself.

The following object types in directories are converted or checked by this command:

v Stream files with Java programs that were created to run on iSeries. Only stream files in the ″root″ (/),

QOpenSys and user-defined file systems (UDFS) are included.

The user objects that are not converted with this command are automatically converted when they are

first used.

Note: Using objects that are not yet converted will have one-time performance degradation while the

conversion operation is performed.

Note: In most cases, the objects analyzed by Analyze Object Conversion (ANZOBJCVN) can be converted

by the STROBJCVN command or on first touch. However, STROBJCVN will not convert the directories

affected by new Unicode characters and casing rules in the target release since this conversion is

automatically done by the operating system when necessary. Spooled files will not be converted by

STROBJCVN, conversion is automatically done by the operating system when necessary.

Restrictions:

v Any primary or secondary independent ASP (ASPs 33-255) referenced by this command must be varied

on and have a status of ’Available’ before running this command.

v Any user-defined file systems referenced by this command must be mounted before running this

command.

v Objects located in a ’read-only’ user-defined file system will not be converted.

v You must have all object (*ALLOBJ) special authority to run this command.

v This command can be very long running. For this reason, it is suggested that this command be run in a

batch job.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 515

Page 532: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

OPTION Option *CONVERT, *CHECK Optional,

Positional 6

LIB Library Name, *ALLUSR, *NONE Required,

Positional 1

OBJTYPE Object type *ALL, *FILE, *ALLPGM, *SQL Optional,

Positional 2

ASPDEV ASP device Name, *, *ALLAVL, *CURASPGRP, *SYSBAS Optional,

Positional 3

OBJ Object Path name, *NONE Optional,

Positional 4

SUBTREE Directory subtree *ALL, *NONE Optional,

Positional 5

Top

Option (OPTION)

Specifies whether conversion is performed or objects are checked to determine if conversion is required.

*CONVERT

Objects specified on the Library (LIB) parameter and Object (OBJ) parameter are converted to

the format required by the current version, release, and modification level of the operating

system.

*CHECK

Objects specified on the LIB parameter and OBJ parameter are checked to determine if they need

to be converted. Messages are sent to the job log which includes the number of objects which

have already been converted and the number of objects which still need to be converted.

Top

Library (LIB)

Specifies the user library for which objects are to be checked or converted to the format required for use

in the current version, release, and modification level of the operating system.

*ALLUSR

All user libraries are selected. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are

selected except for the following:

#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB

#COBLIB #RPGLIB

#DFULIB #SDALIB

Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that

changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also selected:

QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI

QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx

QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRINFSKR

QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSRNOTES

QMGTC2 QS36F QUSROND

QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSGS

516 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 533: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPOSSA

QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRPYMSVR

QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCF QUSRRDARS

QRCL QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS

1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).

2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each

previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL

program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,

release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.

*NONE

No user library is selected. You can specify LIB(*NONE) if you only want to convert or check

objects that are located in directories.

name Specifies the name of the user library whose objects are to be checked or converted.

Top

Object type (OBJTYPE)

Specifies which object types in the library should be converted.

If *CHECK is specified for the Option (OPTION) parameter, specification of this parameter is ignored.

If *NONE is specified for the Library (LIB) parameter, specification of this parameter is ignored.

*ALL All program (*PGM) objects, service program (*SRVPGM) objects, module (*MODULE) objects,

and database file (*FILE) objects in the specified library are converted. In addition, the stored SQL

information in all *PGM, *SRVPGM, and *SQLPKG objects that contain SQL statements, as well as

*PGM and *SRVPGM objects that are used to implement external stored procedures, is converted.

*FILE Only database file member objects in the specified library are converted.

*ALLPGM

All program (*PGM) and service program (*SRVPGM) objects in the specified library are

converted.

*SQL The stored SQL information in all *PGM, *SRVPGM, and *SQLPKG objects that contain SQL

statements, as well as *PGM and *SRVPGM objects that are used to implement external stored

procedures, is converted.

Top

ASP device (ASPDEV)

Specifies the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) device where storage is allocated for the library to be checked

or converted. If the library is in an ASP that is not part of the thread’s library name space, this parameter

must be specified to ensure the correct library is checked or converted.

Note: This parameter does not apply for the objects specified in the OBJ parameter since the independent

ASP name is part of the path name of the object.

* The ASPs that are currently part of the thread’s library name space will be searched to find the

library. This includes the system ASP (ASP 1), all defined basic user ASPs (ASPs 2-32), and, if the

thread has an ASP group, the primary and secondary ASPs in the thread’s ASP group.

Start Object Conversion (STROBJCVN) 517

Page 534: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*ALLAVL

All available ASPs will be searched. This includes the system ASP (ASP 1), all defined basic user

ASPs (ASPs 2-32), and all available primary and secondary ASPs (ASPs 33-255 with a status of

’Available’).

*CURASPGRP

If the thread has an ASP group, the primary and secondary ASPs in the thread’s ASP group will

be searched to find the library. The system ASP (ASP 1) and defined basic user ASPs (ASPs 2-32)

will not be searched. If no ASP group is associated with the thread an error will be issued.

*SYSBAS

The system ASP (ASP 1) and all defined basic user ASPs (ASPs 2-32) will be searched to find the

library. No primary or secondary ASPs will be searched, even if the thread has an ASP group.

name

Specify the name of the primary or secondary ASP device to be searched. The primary or

secondary ASP must have been activated (by varying on the ASP device) and have a status of

’Available’. The system ASP (ASP 1) and defined basic user ASPs (ASPs 2-32) will not be

searched.

Top

Object (OBJ)

Specifies the path name of the object or a pattern to match the name of the objects to be checked or

converted.

The object path name can be either a simple name or a name that is qualified with the name of the

directory in which the object is located. A pattern can be specified in the last part of the path name. An

asterisk (*) matches any number of characters and a question mark (?) matches a single character. If the

path name is qualified or contains a pattern, it must be enclosed in apostrophes.

For more information on specifying path names, refer to ″Object naming rules″ in the CL topic collection

in the Programming category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Note: If the last component in the path name is a symbolic link, the symbolic link object is checked or

converted, but the object pointed to by the symbolic link is not checked or converted.

*NONE

No object is selected. You can specify OBJ(*NONE) if you only want to convert or check objects

that are located in libraries.

path-name

Specify the path name of the object to be checked or converted.

Top

Directory subtree (SUBTREE)

Specifies whether or not to check or convert the objects within the subtree if the object specified by the

Object (OBJ) parameter is a directory.

*ALL The objects specified by OBJ will be checked or converted, if appropriate. If the object is a

directory, its contents as well as the contents of all of its subdirectories will be checked or

converted.

518 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 535: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Once the command has begun processing a specific directory subtree, the objects which will be

found and processed may be affected by operations that update the organization of objects within

the specified directory tree. This includes, but is not limited to, the following:

v Adding, removing, or renaming object links

v Mounting or unmounting file systems

v Updating the effective root directory for the process calling the command

v Updating the contents of a symbolic link

In order to process the directory subtree, the system code may increase the process-scoped

maximum number of file descriptors that can be opened during processing. This is done so that

the command is not likely to fail due to a lack of descriptors. This process-scoped maximum

value is not reset when the command completes.

*NONE

The objects specified by OBJ will be checked or converted, if appropriate. If the object is a

directory, it is checked or converted if appropriate, but its contents are not checked or converted.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Start Conversion of All Objects in One Library

STROBJCVN OPTION(*CONVERT) LIB(LIB1) OBJ(*NONE)

This command converts all original program model (OPM) and integrated language environment (ILE)

programs, service programs and modules contained in the LIB1 user library to the format required by the

current release of the operating system.

In addition, the stored SQL information in all *PGM, *SRVPGM, and *SQLPKG objects that contain SQL

statements, as well as *PGM and *SRVPGM objects that are used to implement external stored

procedures, is converted to the format required by the current release of the operating system.

No objects in directories will be converted.

Example 2: Start Conversion of SQL Objects

STROBJCVN OPTION(*CONVERT) LIB(LIB2) OBJTYPE(*SQL)

This command converts the stored SQL information in all *PGM, *SRVPGM, and *SQLPKG objects in

library LIB2 that contain SQL statements, as well as *PGM and *SRVPGM objects in library LIB2 that are

used to implement external stored procedures, to the format required by the current release of the

operating system.

Example 3: Start Conversion of All Programs

STROBJCVN OPTION(*CONVERT) LIB(*ALLUSR) OBJTYPE(*ALLPGM)

ASPDEV(*ALLAVL) OBJ(’/’) SUBTREE(*ALL)

This command converts all OPM and ILE program (*PGM) and service program (*SRVPGM) objects in all

user libraries on all available auxiliary storage pools, include the system ASP, all defined basic user ASPs,

and all primary and secondary independent ASPs.

Start Object Conversion (STROBJCVN) 519

Page 536: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

In addition, all Java programs in the ″root″ (/) file system (’/’ directory, its contents and the contents of

all its subdirectories) will be converted.

Depending on the number of user libraries and the number of directories on the system, this command

could take a very long time to run.

Example 4: Check How Many Objects in a Library Need to be Converted

STROBJCVN OPTION(*CHECK) LIB(LIB1) OBJ(*NONE)

This command checks all OPM and ILE programs, service programs, and modules in library LIB1. It will

send a completion message that includes the total number of objects that were checked, the number of

objects that have already been converted, and the number of objects that still need to be converted to the

format required by the current release of the operating system.

Example 5: Start Conversion in a Specific Directory

STROBJCVN OPTION(*CONVERT) LIB(*NONE) OBJ(’/MYDIR’) SUBTREE(*ALL)

This command converts all Java programs in the /MYDIR directory, its contents, as well as the contents

of all of its subdirectories will be analyzed.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF218C

&1 not a primary or secondary ASP.

CPF9833

*CURASPGRP or *ASPGRPPRI specified and thread has no ASP group.

CPFB0E1

Not all objects were checked.

CPFB0E2

Not all objects were converted.

Top

520 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 537: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Pass-Through (STRPASTHR)

Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT

*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Pass-Through (STRPASTHR) command allows you to pass through to a target system where

you can sign on as if you were attached locally. For information on configuring or operating the

pass-through function, refer to the Remote Work Station Support book.

Restriction:

1. This command cannot be entered at a work station with a display that has 12 lines by 80 characters.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

RMTLOCNAME Remote location Communications name, *CNNDEV Required,

Positional 1

CNNDEV APPC device Single values: *LOCOther values (up to 16 repetitions): Name

Optional

VRTCTL Virtual controller Name, *NONE Optional,

Positional 2

VRTDEV Virtual display device Single values: *NONEOther values (up to 32 repetitions): Name

Optional,

Positional 3

MODE Mode Communications name, *NETATR Optional

LCLLOCNAME Local location Communications name, *LOC, *NETATR Optional

RMTNETID Remote network identifier Communications name, *LOC, *NETATR, *NONE Optional

SRQ10PGM System request program Single values: *SRQMNUOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: System request

program

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

RMTUSER User profile Character value, *NONE, *CURRENT Optional

RMTPWD User password Character value, *NONE Optional

RMTINLPGM Initial program to call Name, *RMTUSRPRF, *NONE Optional

RMTINLMNU Initial menu Name, *RMTUSRPRF, *SIGNOFF Optional

RMTCURLIB Current library Name, *RMTUSRPRF Optional

PASTHRSCN Display option Character value, *YES, *NO Optional

Top

Remote location (RMTLOCNAME)

Specifies one of the following:

v If (*LOC) is specified for the APPC device prompt (CNNDEV parameter), the RMTLOCNAME

parameter specifies the name of the remote location that is the target of the pass-through session.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 521

Page 538: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

v If any devices are specified on the CNNDEV parameter, the RMTLOCNAME parameter specifies the

first system to do intermediate pass-through routing.

remote-location-name

Specify the remote location name that is the target of the pass-through session or the first system

that does intermediate pass-through routing. APPN determines the route to this location.

*CNNDEV

Use the APPC devices specified with the APPC device prompt (CNNDEV parameter).

Top

APPC device (CNNDEV)

Specifies the names of the device descriptions that connect the first system to do pass-through routing

with the target system. If *CNNDEV is specified on the Remote location prompt (RMTLOCNAME

parameter), the first device specified on this parameter is on the source system. If the name of a remote

location is specified on the Remote location prompt (RMTLOCNAME parameter), the first device

specified on this parameter is on the system in that remote location. If another system connects the source

system to the target system and pass-through must establish the intermediate sessions, then you must

specify a list of APPC device descriptions. The APPC device names must be listed in the order that the

systems are passed through to get to the target system.

You can enter multiple values for this parameter.

*LOC The Remote location prompt (RMTLOCNAME parameter) specifies the name of the remote

location that is the target of the pass-through session.

device-name(s)

Specify the names of the device descriptions that complete the route from the source system to

the target system. Up to 16 names can be specified.

Top

Virtual controller (VRTCTL)

Specifies the name of the virtual controller on the remote system that is used to do pass-through jobs. If

you specify a virtual controller, one of the virtual display devices attached to it is selected for the

pass-through job. A device on the target system is selected based on a comparison of device type and

model.

This entry is mutually exclusive with an entry on the Virtual display device prompt (VRTDEV

parameter); *NONE must be specified when one or more devices are specified on the Virtual display

device prompt (VRTDEV parameter).

*NONE

No controller is specified. If *NONE is also specified on the Virtual display device prompt

(VRTDEV parameter), you are requesting automatic configuration.

virtual-controller-name

Specify the name of the virtual controller description on the target system.

Top

522 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 539: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Virtual display device (VRTDEV)

Specifies one or more devices on the target system that are connected to a virtual controller used for the

pass-through session. A device on the target system from the list is selected based on a comparison of

device type and model.

This entry is mutually exclusive with an entry on the Virtual controller prompt (VRTCTL parameter);

*NONE must be specified when a controller name is specified on the Virtual controller prompt (VRTCTL

parameter).

You can enter multiple values for this parameter.

*NONE

No device names are specified. If *NONE is also specified on the Virtual controller prompt

(VRTCTL parameter), you are requesting automatic configuration.

virtual-display-device-name

Specify the names of the virtual display device descriptions on the target system. Up to 32 names

can be specified.

Top

Mode (MODE)

Specifies the mode name used.

*NETATR

The mode in the network attributes is used.

mode-name

Specify a mode name.

Top

Local location (LCLLOCNAME)

Specifies the local location name.

*LOC The local location name is chosen by the system.

*NETATR

The LCLLOCNAME value specified in the system network attributes is used.

APPN-location-name

Specify the local location name that is associated with the source system. If the local location

name is not valid, an escape message is sent.

Top

Remote network identifier (RMTNETID)

Specifies the network ID of the network where the remote location resides.

*LOC Any remote network ID for the remote location may be used.

*NETATR

The LCLNETID value specified in the system network attributes is used.

Start Pass-Through (STRPASTHR) 523

Page 540: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*NONE

The remote location does not support network identifiers.

APPN-network-identifier

Specify a remote network ID.

Top

System request program (SRQ10PGM)

Specifies that the system request menu is displayed, or specifies the name of the program that starts on

the source system when system request option 10 is selected.

The user program can display a menu that allows you to select the system you want to access, and then

transfer to a group job that sends the Start Pass-Through (STRPASTHR) command to the desired system.

For more information, see the Remote Work Station Support book.

*SRQMNU

The system request menu on the source system is displayed.

program-name

Specify the program and library names of the program started when system request option 10 is

selected.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the program.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the program. If no current library entry

exists in the library list, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the library where the program is located.

Top

User profile (RMTUSER)

Specifies the user profile for automatic sign-on to the target system. If a profile is specified for this

parameter and password security is active on the target system, (*NONE) is not valid for the User

password prompt (RMTPWD parameter).

*NONE

No user profile name is sent, and no automatic sign-on occurs.

*CURRENT

The user profile of the job using this command is sent. If the target system allows it, and the user

profile exists on the target system, and the password specified in the RMTPWD parameter is

valid for the profile, the user is automatically signed on. Otherwise, the user is presented with a

sign-on display on the target system or a failure message on the source system, depending on the

configuration of the target system.

profile-name

Specify a user profile name to use that exists on the target system. If the target system allows it,

and if the user profile exists on the target system, the user is automatically signed on. Otherwise,

the user is presented with a sign-on display on the target system or a failure message on the

524 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 541: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

source system, depending on the configuration of the target system. If a profile is specified and

password security is active on the target system, a password must be specified, even if the profile

specified is the same as the current profile.

Top

User password (RMTPWD)

Specifies the password being sent to the target system.

*NONE

The system does not send a password. If a profile is specified on the User profile prompt

(RMTUSER parameter), and password security is active on the target system, this value is not

allowed.

password

Specify a password being sent to the target system to verify the sign-on of the user specified in

the RMTUSER parameter. This password is encrypted before being sent across the communication

line.

Top

Initial program to call (RMTINLPGM)

Specifies the program that is called immediately after you sign on.

*RMTUSRPRF

The initial program specified in the remote user profile is called immediately after automatic

sign-on.

*NONE

No program is run before the initial menu is shown, even if an initial program is specified in the

remote user profile.

program

Specify the name of a program that is called immediately after automatic sign-on.

Top

Initial menu (RMTINLMNU)

Specifies the first menu shown when you are automatically signed on to the target system after the initial

program is run.

*RMTUSRPRF

The initial menu specified in the remote user profile is shown immediately after the initial

program is run.

*SIGNOFF

A menu is not shown after the initial program is run, even if an initial menu is specified in the

remote user profile. After the initial program ends, the user is signed off, and the pass-through

session ends.

menu Specify the menu that is shown immediately after the initial program is run.

Top

Start Pass-Through (STRPASTHR) 525

Page 542: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Current library (RMTCURLIB)

Specifies the name of the library that becomes the current library in the library list of the job after

automatic sign-on.

*RMTUSRPRF

The current library specified in the remote user profile becomes the current library in the library

list after automatic sign-on.

library

Specify the library that becomes the current library in the library list after automatic sign-on.

Top

Display option (PASTHRSCN)

Specifies whether the pass-through display and associated status messages appear before the

pass-through session is established.

*YES The pass-through display and information messages are shown before the pass-through session is

established.

*NO The pass-through display and information messages are not shown before the pass-through

session is established.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Pass-Through to Toronto

STRPASTHR RMTLOCNAME(*CNNDEV) CNNDEV(DET CHI TOR) VRTCTL(VWSC)

This command specifies starting a pass-through to the Toronto system by going through Detroit and

Chicago. More information is in the Remote Work Station Support book located in the Information

Center.

Example 2: Pass-Through to Detroit

STRPASTHR RMTLOCNAME(DETROIT) VRTCTL(VWSC)

This command specifies a pass-through to the Detroit system. APPN establishes the route to Detroit.

Example 3: Pass-Through to Toronto

STRPASTHR RMTLOCNAME(DETROIT) CNNDEV(CHI TOR) VRTCTL(VWSC)

This command specifies another way to pass-through to the Toronto system by going through Chicago

and Detroit. APPN establishes the route to Detroit.

Example 4: Pass-Through to Detroit

STRPASTHR RMTLOCNAME(DETROIT) RMTUSER(*CURRENT)

526 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 543: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This command specifies a pass-through to the DETROIT system and an automatic sign-on using the user

profile with the same name as the one currently used on the source system. It also specifies that the

DETROIT system automatically configures a virtual device for the pass-through session, since a virtual

controller or virtual device was not specified.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF2702

Device description &1 not found.

CPF2703

Controller description &1 not found.

CPF5383

Mode &7 specified for device &4 not valid.

CPF5536

System cannot automatically select an APPC device description for the remote location.

CPF5546

Class-of-service for device &4 not valid.

CPF8901

Virtual device &1 not varied on.

CPF8902

Virtual device &1 not available.

CPF8903

Device &1 not valid for pass-through.

CPF8904

Pass-through request not accepted.

CPF8905

Pass-through not allowed on this system.

CPF8906

Error during session initialization. Reason code &1.

CPF8907

Communications failure for device &1.

CPF8908

Controller &1 not varied on.

CPF8909

Old software release. Pass-through ended.

CPF8910

Controller &1 not valid for pass-through.

CPF8911

Communications failure. Session was not started.

CPF8912

Pass-through session ended. Reason code &1.

Start Pass-Through (STRPASTHR) 527

Page 544: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF8913

Pass-through ended abnormally.

CPF8916

Cannot select virtual device &1 at system &2.

CPF8917

Not authorized to &1.

CPF8918

Job canceled at system &1.

CPF8919

Device &1 not accessed by system &2.

CPF8920

Pass-through failed. &1 must be varied off and on.

CPF8921

APPC failure. Failure code is &3.

CPF8922

Negative response from device &1 at system &2.

CPF8923

Data stream received at system &1 not valid.

CPF8924

No available virtual controller.

CPF8925

Device &1 not created.

CPF8928

Device &1 could not be changed.

CPF8929

Device &1 could not be varied on.

CPF8931

Location &1 not an APPC location.

CPF8932

Device &1 must be non-networking APPC device.

CPF8933

Route to specified location not found.

CPF8935

Pass-through not allowed to system &1.

CPF8936

Pass-through failed for security reasons.

CPF8937

Automatic sign on not allowed.

CPF8938

Error in QRMTSIGN program. Pass-through failed.

CPF8939

Trying to send too much data.

CPF8940

Cannot automatically select virtual device.

528 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 545: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF8941

Incorrect internal use of pass-through.

CPF8943

Pass-through not allowed from server TELNET session.

*STATUS Messages

CPI8901

No matching device on remote system. Function limited.

CPI8902

Pass-through started at system &1.

CPI8903

Virtual device &1 selected at system &2.

CPI8906

Automatic sign-on not allowed.

Top

Start Pass-Through (STRPASTHR) 529

Page 546: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

530 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 547: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start PC Command (STRPCCMD)

Where allowed to run:

v Interactive job (*INTERACT)

v Interactive program (*IPGM)

v Using QCMDEXEC, QCAEXEC, or QCAPCMD API (*EXEC)

Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start PC Command (STRPCCMD) command allows you to run a single application, a DOS

command, or an OS/2 command on an attached personal computer.

Note: Do not precede an entry with an asterisk unless that entry is a ″special value″ that is shown (on the

display itself or in the help information) with an asterisk.

Error messages for STRPCCMD

None

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

PCCMD PC command Character value Required,

Positional 1

PAUSE Pause *YES, *NO Optional

Top

PC command (PCCMD)

Specifies the valid DOS command, OS/2 command, or personal computer application you want to run. If

you are using the STRPCCMD command on a command line and the command or application name

contains special characters, you must enclose the command in apostrophes. Special characters include

blanks, commas, and colons.

If you select the option to start a PC command from the System i Access Organizer menu, you do not

need to enclose the command in apostrophes unless it ends in a colon. The ending colon is ignored

unless the entire PC command is enclosed in apostrophes.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Pause (PAUSE)

Specifies whether the computer should pause after running a command.

The possible values are:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 531

Page 548: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*YES The computer will pause after running the command before returning to the System i Access

Organizer menu.

*NO The computer returns immediately to the System i Access Organizer menu after the command

runs.

Top

Examples

None

Top

Error messages

None

Top

532 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 549: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Organizer (STRPCO)

Where allowed to run:

v Interactive job (*INTERACT)

v Interactive program (*IPGM)

v Using QCMDEXEC, QCAEXEC, or QCAPCMD API (*EXEC)

Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start System i Access Organizer (STRPCO) command starts the System i Access Organizer on the

host system.

Note: Do not precede an entry with an asterisk unless that entry is a ″special value″ that is shown (on the

display itself or in the help information) with an asterisk.

Error messages for STRPCO

None

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

PCTA Text Assist Character value, *YES, *NO Optional,

Positional 1

Top

Text Assist (PCTA)

Specifies whether you are going to use the Personal Computer Text Assist.

The possible values are:

*YES The Personal Computer Text Assist is going to be used.

*NO The Personal Computer Text Assist is not going to be used.

Top

Examples

None

Top

Error messages

None

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 533

Page 550: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

534 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 551: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Performance Explorer (STRPEX)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Conditional

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Performance Explorer (STRPEX) command starts a new Performance Explorer session or

resumes a suspended Performance Explorer session.

Restrictions:

1. This command is shipped with public *EXCLUDE authority.

2. To use this command you must have *SERVICE special authority, or be authorized to the Service

Trace function of i5/OS through iSeries Navigator’s Application Administration support. The Change

Function Usage (CHGFCNUSG) command, with a function ID of QIBM_SERVICE_TRACE, can also

be used to change the list of users that are allowed to perform trace operations.

3. The following user profiles have private authorities to use the command:

v QPGMR

v QSRV4. Two threads within the same job will not be allowed to run STRPEX at the same time. The thread that

issued STRPEX first will run the command to completion while the second STRPEX waits.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

SSNID Session ID Name Required, Key,

Positional 1

OPTION Option *NEW, *INZONLY, *RESUME Optional,

Positional 2

DFN Definition Name, *SELECT Optional

FTR Filter Name, *NONE, *SELECT Optional

Top

Session ID (SSNID)

Specifies an identifier for this Performance Explorer session. This name must be unique within the active

sessions of the Performance Explorer tool.

This is a required parameter.

session-identifier

Specify the session identifier for a new or suspended Performance Explorer session.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 535

Page 552: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Option (OPTION)

Specifies whether a new session should be started or a session which is currently suspended should be

resumed.

This is a required parameter.

*NEW A new session of the Performance Explorer tool is started. Performance data collection begins as

soon as the session has been established.

*INZONLY

A new Performance Explorer session is started, but once the session is established, it is

suspended. This option allows the user to perform the setup for a particular session before the

scenario to be monitored is started. To begin data collection, the user must invoke this command

again specifying the same session identifier and OPTION(*RESUME).

*RESUME

A suspended Performance Explorer session is resumed. The session was suspended either by

specifying OPTION(*SUSPEND) on the ENDPEX command or by specifying

OPTION(*INZONLY) on a previous STRPEX command.

Top

Definition (DFN)

Specifies the name of the Performance Explorer definition to use when starting a new Performance

Explorer session. The definition identifies the performance data to be collected. This parameter is required

in order to start a new Performance Explorer session. This parameter cannot be specified when resuming

a suspended session, since the suspended session already has an associated Performance Explorer

definition.

name Specify the name of the Performance Explorer definition.

Top

Filter (FTR)

Specifies the name of the Performance Explorer filter to use when starting a new Performance Explorer

session. The filter determines which events are collected based on the filter values which are compared to

the event’s actual data. If a filter is not specified, then all events in the definition are collected. This

parameter cannot be specified when resuming a suspended session.

*SELECT

A list of existing filters will be displayed for user selection. This value is valid only if the

command is run in an interactive job.

name Specify the name of the Performance Explorer filter.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Start a New Session

STRPEX SSNID(TESTRUN2) DFN(NEWDESC) OPTION(*NEW)

FTR(MYFILTER)

536 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 553: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This command starts a new session of the performance explorer using the criteria identified in a

definition named NEWDESC and a filter named MYFILTER. The new session name is TESTRUN2.

Example 2: Resume a Suspended Session

STRPEX SSNID(TESTRUN1) OPTION(*RESUME)

This command resumes an already existing session of the performance explorer named TESTRUN1.

Top

Error messages

Error messages for RMVPEXDFN

*ESCAPE Messages

CPFAF05

STRPEX command was not successful. Reason code is &1. See details for more information.

CPFAF11

Unable to locate program, object, library, or file member as specified in the definition or filter.

Top

Start Performance Explorer (STRPEX) 537

Page 554: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

538 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 555: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Performance Collection (STRPFRCOL)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Performance Collection (STRPFRCOL) command starts the system-level collection of

performance data by Collection Services. The properties of the system-level collection are controlled by

the Collection Services configuration, which can be changed using the Configure Performance Collection

(CFGPFRCOL) command. The data included in the system-level collection is determined by the value

specified on the Collection profile parameter.

Performance data collection is conducted by the Collection Services server job (QYPSPFRCOL). If this job

is not active, it will be started as a result of this command. If the job is active, any change to the

collection profile will take effect immediately and the collection will continue uninterrupted.

QYPSPFRCOL creates a management collection object (*MGTCOL) to store performance data. Data

collected will include both the system-level collection profile categories as well as data collected on behalf

of client applications (for example, IBM System i Navigator monitors or Performance Collector APIs). All

data is stored in the current management collection object. This data may be processed using the Create

Performance Data (CRTPFRDTA) command to generate the performance database files.

Cycling the performance collection will cause the Collection Services server job to create a new

management collection object prior to implementing the specified Collection profile. Note: cycling may

result in the loss of one interval of data and will also impact any client applications that are using

Collection Services.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

COLPRF Collection profile *CFG, *MINIMUM, *STANDARD, *STANDARDP,

*ENHCPCPLN, *CUSTOM

Optional,

Positional 1

CYCCOL Cycle collection *NO, *YES Optional,

Positional 2

Top

Default collection profile (COLPRF)

Specifies the collection profile. This will determine which categories will be included in the system-level

collection. Specifying a profile for this parameter will change the default collection profile in the

Collection Services configuration. The default collection profile may also be changed using the Configure

Performance Collection (CFGPFRCOL) command.

*CFG The collection will use the currently configured value. If the configured value has never been

modified, the collection profile will be *STANDARDP.

*MINIMUM

The minimum data collection recommended. Includes the following categories: *SYSBUS, *POOL,

*HDWCFG, *SYSCPU, *SYSLVL, *JOBMI, *JOBOS, *DISK, and *IOPBASE.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 539

Page 556: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*STANDARD

The standard profile includes all categories which are typically needed by the Performance Tools

for System i5, with the exception of communications data. It includes all categories in the

*MINIMUM profile, as well as the following categories: *POOLTUNE, *SUBSYSTEM, *SNADS,

*LCLRSP, *APPN, *SNA, *TCPBASE, *USRTNS, and *LPAR. The category *DOMINO will be

included if the product Domino for System i5 has been installed on the system. The category

*HTTP will be included if the product IBM HTTP Server for System i5 (powered by Apache) has

been installed on the system.

*STANDARDP

The standard plus profile includes all categories which are typically needed by the Performance

Tools for System i5, including communications data. It includes all categories in the *STANDARD

profile, as well as the following categories: *IPCS, *CMNBASE, *CMNSTN, *CMNSAP, *TCPIFC,

and *DPS.

*ENHCPCPLN

The enhanced capacity planner profile includes all categories in the *STANDARDP profile, with

the addition of *INTPEX.

*CUSTOM

The custom profile includes categories as defined by the user. This profile must be defined using

the Collection Services function in IBM System i Navigator.

Top

Cycle collection (CYCCOL)

Specifies whether the collection should be cycled. Cycling the collection will cause data to be collected in

a new management collection object (*MGTCOL).

*NO Data will continue to be collected in the current collection object.

*YES Data will be collected in a new collection object.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Starting the Performance Collection

STRPFRCOL

This command will cause the Collection Services server job (QYPSPFRCOL) to start the system-level

collection of performance data using the currently configured default collection profile.

Example 2: Starting with Collection Profile and Cycle Collection

STRPFRCOL COLPRF(*MINIMUM) CYCCOL(*YES)

This command will cause the Collection Services server job (QYPSPFRCOL) to cycle and begin collecting

performance data in a new management collection object (*MGTCOL) using the *MINIMUM collection

profile. Note: this command will also change the configured default collection profile to *MINIMUM.

Top

540 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 557: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF3CF2

Error(s) occurred during running of &1 API.

CPFB94A

Collector communications error. Reason code &1.

Top

Start Performance Collection (STRPFRCOL) 541

Page 558: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

542 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 559: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Performance Trace (STRPFRTRC)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Performance Trace (STRPFRTRC) command is a simplified interface to the TRCINT command

for collecting Multiprogramming level (MPL) and Transaction trace data. This command collects the same

performance trace data as was collected in previous releases by the Start Performance Monitor

(STRPFRMON) command.

The trace started by this command creates and uses trace table QPM_STRPFRTRC.If the trace table exists,

any existing data will be deleted before this trace begins.

The trace can be stopped and the data can be written to a data base file by using the End Performance

Trace (ENDPFRTRC) command.

Restrictions:

v This command is shipped with public *EXCLUDE authority.

v The following user profiles have private authorities to use the command:

– QSRV

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

SIZE Trace table size Single values: *CALC, *MAXOther values: Element list

Optional,

Positional 1

Element 1: Number of units 1-998000

Element 2: Unit of measure *KB, *MB

OMTTRCPNT Omit trace points *NONE, *RSCMGT Optional

JOBTYPE Job types Single values: *NONE, *ALLOther values (up to 12 repetitions): *DFT, *ASJ, *BCH,

*EVK, *INT, *MRT, *RDR, *SBS, *SYS, *WTR, *PDJ, *PJ,

*BCI

Optional

JOBTRCITV Job trace interval 0.1-9.9, 0.5 Optional

Top

Trace table size (SIZE)

Specifies the size of the trace table.

Note: The storage indicated on this parameter is immediately allocated from the system auxiliary storage

pool (ASP 1). Refer to the Trace Internal (TRCINT) command SIZE parameter for additional information

regarding the setting of trace table size.

Specifying a size of less than 16 megabytes is not recommended.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 543

Page 560: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Single values

*CALC

The minimum trace table size is determined based on the processor group of your system.

*MAX The trace table is set to the maximum size of 258048 megabytes.

Element 1: Number of units

Specify the size of the trace table.

1-998000

Specify the size of the trace table in kilobytes or megabytes.

Element 2: Unit of measure

Specify whether the value specified for the first element of this parameter should be treated as number of

kilobytes or number of megabytes.

*KB The trace table size is specified in kilobytes. The valid range is 128 through 998000.

*MB The trace table size is specified in megabytes. The valid range is 1 through 258048.

Top

Omit trace points (OMTTRCPNT)

Specifies trace points whose trace records are to be excluded.

*NONE

No trace points are to be excluded.

*RSCMGT

Resource management trace points (seize/lock conflict data) will be excluded from the trace.

Top

Job types (JOBTYPE)

Specifies the types of jobs for which trace data is to be collected for use in the batch job trace report.

Note: The value *DFT includes the values *ASJ, *BCH, *EVK, *MRT, *PDJ, *PJ and *BCI. The value *BCH

includes the values *EVK, *MRT, *PDJ, *PJ, and *BCI.

Single values

*NONE

No jobs are to be traced.

*ALL All job types are to be traced.

Other values (up to 12 repetitions)

*DFT Batch and autostart jobs are traced.

*ASJ Autostart jobs are traced.

*BCH Batch jobs are traced.

*EVK Jobs started by a procedure start request are traced.

*INT Interactive jobs are traced.

544 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 561: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*MRT Multiple requester terminal jobs are traced.

*RDR Reader jobs are traced.

*SBS Subsystem monitor jobs are traced.

*SYS System jobs are traced.

*WRT Writer jobs are traced.

*PDJ Print driver jobs are traced.

*PJ Prestart jobs are traced.

*BCI Batch immediate jobs are traced.

Top

Job trace interval (JOBTRCITV)

Specifies the time interval (in CPU seconds) to be used between each collection of the job trace data.

0.5 A time slice interval value of 0.5 CPU seconds is used.

0.1-9.9 Specify the trace interval to be used, in CPU seconds.

Top

Examples

STRPFRTRC SIZE(*CALC)

This command starts the collection of performance trace data. The trace table size may be adjusted to the

calculated minimum. This example will result in the same trace table size and data as would

STRPFRMON TRACE(*ALL) DMPTRC(*NO).

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF0A2A

Performance trace already started

Also refer to the TRCINT command for other messages.

Top

Start Performance Trace (STRPFRTRC) 545

Page 562: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

546 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 563: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Program Export List (STRPGMEXP)

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Program Export List (STRPGMEXP) binder definition statement starts a list of exports in a

service program export block.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

PGMLVL Program level *CURRENT, *PRV Optional,

Positional 1

LVLCHK Signature level check *YES, *NO Optional,

Positional 2

SIGNATURE Signature Character value, *GEN Optional,

Positional 3

Top

Program level (PGMLVL)

Specifies the service program level for this export block.

*CURRENT

This service program export block contains exports for the current service program.

*PRV This service program export block contains exports for a previous version of the service program.

Top

Signature level check (LVLCHK)

Specifies whether a level check is performed on the export block.

*YES The service program export block is level checked by generating a nonzero signature.

*NO The service program export block is not level checked. A zero signature is generated.

Top

Signature (SIGNATURE)

Specifies the signature for the export block.

*GEN If *YES is specified for the Signature level check (LVLCHK) parameter, the system generates a

nonzero signature for the export block. If *NO is specified for the LVLCHK parameter, this value

is required and the system generates a zero signature for the export block.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 547

Page 564: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

hexadecimal-character-value

The signature value for the export block is set to the specified string of hexadecimal digits and is

not generated by the system. If the specified value is less than 32 hexadecimal digits in length,

the system pads it on the left with hexadecimal zeros to 32 digits. If the specified value is greater

than 32 hexadecimal digits in length, the system truncates it on the right to 32 digits.

character-value

The signature value for the export block is set to the EBCDIC character codes of the given

signature-value and is not generated by the system. If the signature-value is less than 16

characters in length, the system pads the signature-value on the right with spaces to 16

characters. If the signature-value is greater than 16 characters in length, the system truncates it on

the right to 16 characters.

Top

Examples

STRPGMEXP PGMLVL(*CURRENT) LVLCHK(*YES) SIGNATURE(*GEN)

This binder definition statement marks the beginning of a list of exported variables or procedures for a

service program. This service program export block contains exports for the current service program.

Level checking will be performed using a signature generated by the operating system.

Top

Error messages

None

Top

548 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 565: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Programmer Menu (STRPGMMNU)

Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT

*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Programmer Menu (STRPGMMNU) command shows the programmer menu. This command

can be used instead of the CALL QPGMMENU function, and allows you to pass parameters to specify

and control the data which appears in the associated fields on the programmer menu.

NOTES:

1. A user exit program can be called instead of submitting a job when option 3 is selected.

2. The first four parameters control the defaults that appear when the menu is first displayed.

More information about using the Programmer Menu is in the CL topic collection in the Programming

category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

SRCFILE Source file Name, *DFT Optional,

Positional 1

SRCLIB Source library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Optional,

Positional 2

OBJLIB Object library Name, *DFT, *CURLIB Optional,

Positional 3

JOBD Job description Name, *USRPRF Optional,

Positional 4

ALWUSRCHG Allow changes *YES, *NO Optional

EXITPGM Option 3 exit program Single values: *NONEOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Option 3 exit

program

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

DLTOPT Delete option *DLT, *PROMPT, *NODLT Optional

Top

Source file (SRCFILE)

Specifies an existing source file that contains source file members to be updated or to which new source

file members are to be added.

*DFT This is the default for the type being specified on the menu. This field is blank when shown on

the display station.

name Specify the name of the source file to be updated.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 549

Page 566: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Source library (SRCLIB)

Specifies the library that is searched for the source file.

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the source file. If no current library entry exists in

the library list, QGPL is used.

name Specify the name of the library where the source file is located.

Top

Object library (OBJLIB)

Specifies the library that is to contain the object.

*DFT Blanks appear for this field. The library used depends on the menu option you selected.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is the library that is to contain the object.

name Specify the name of the library that is to contain the created object.

Top

Job description (JOBD)

Specifies the job description used with the job being submitted.

*USRPRF

The job description defined in the user profile of the user running the STRPGMMNU command

is used for the job.

name Specify the name of the job description used for the job. The job description is found through the

library list being used by the job.

Top

Allow changes (ALWUSRCHG)

Specifies whether the menu display fields you specified on the previous parameters in this command can

be changed by the user.

*YES Values on the display can be changed.

*NO The display fields cannot be changed.

Top

550 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 567: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Option 3 exit program (EXITPGM)

Specifies the user-written program that is called as an exit program in place of submitting a batch job

when menu option 3 is selected. When the exit program is called, it receives parameters that are sent by

the programmer menu. More information about the EXITPGM parameter is in the CL topic collection in

the Programming category in the i5/OS Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Single values

*NONE

No user-written program is called; a batch job is submitted. When *NONE is specified, *DLT

must be specified for the Delete option (DLTOPT) parameter.

Qualifier 1: Option 3 exit program

name Specify the name of the program called when option 3 is selected, instead of submitting the

create command as a batch job. When a value is specified on this parameter, the text that appears

on the menu for option 3 shows the name and library of the exit program.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the program. If no current library entry exists in

the library list, QGPL is used.

name Specify the library where the program is located.

Top

Delete option (DLTOPT)

Specifies the action to be taken when:

v A program name is specified on the Option 3 exit program (EXITPGM) parameter.

v Option 3 of the programmer menu is selected.

v An object of the name and type to be created already exists in the library specified on the menu.

Regardless of the value specified, the system passes a parameter (from among the parameters passed

from the Programmer Menu) to the exit program that specifies whether the object exists.

*DLT This value must be specified if *NONE is specified on the EXITPGM parameter. If an exit

program is specified for the EXITPGM parameter, and the object specified to be created with

option 3 exists, and the Enter key is pressed, a message is shown; press the F11 key to proceed.

When the F11 key is pressed, the system deletes or replaces the object before calling the program

specified by the exit program. This is the normal Programmer Menu function when an exit

program is not specified.

NOTES:

1. When the *DLT value is specified, the object is deleted or replaced before the job is submitted

or the user exit program is called.

2. If the source type is one of the following, the object is replaced rather than deleted (an exit

program must be used to delete instead of replace):

Start Programmer Menu (STRPGMMNU) 551

Page 568: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

BAS C CBL

CBL36 CLP DSPF

DSPF36 FTN ICFF

MNU36 MSGF36 PAS

PLI PRTF RPG

RPG36 RPT36

*PROMPT

The system does not delete or replace the object, but you are prompted for approval to delete the

object. If the object exists, and the Enter key is pressed, a message is displayed. Press the F11 key

to proceed; the system does not delete the object. The user confirms whether the object is deleted

or replaced, yet the deletion is still controlled by the exit program.

*NODLT

The user exit program is called regardless of the presence of the object.

Table 1. Figure: Table 1. Actions Taken by the System When an Exit Program Is Called

|-----------+----------+---------+------------|

| DLTOBJ | F11 | Object | Value |

| Specified | Required | Deleted | Passed |

| | | | to Exit |

| | | | Program |

|-----------+----------+---------+------------|

| If object | |

| existed | |

| when | |

| option 3 | |

| was | |

| selected | |

|--------------------------------+------------|

| *DLT | Yes | Yes | 1 |

|-----------+----------+---------+------------|

| *PROMPT | Yes | No | 0 |

|-----------+----------+---------+------------|

| *NODLT | No | No | 0 |

|-----------+----------+---------+------------|

| If object | |

| did not | |

| exist when | |

| option 3 | |

| was | |

| selected | |

|--------------------------------+------------|

| *DLT | No | --- | 2 |

|-----------+----------+---------+------------|

| *PROMPT | No | --- | 2 |

|-----------+----------+---------+------------|

| *NODLT | No | --- | 2 |

|-----------+----------+---------+------------|

Top

Examples

Example 1: Displaying Programmer Menu

STRPGMMNU

This command displays the Programmer Menu with defaults for all parameters. This has the same result

as entering CALL QPGMMENU.

Example 2: Preventing Values from Being Changed

552 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 569: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

STRPGMMNU SRCFILE(YOURFILE) SRCLIB(YOURLIB) OBJLIB(YOURLIB)

JOB(YOURJOBD) ALWUSRCHG(*NO)

This command prevents the values on the menu from being changed from those specified on the

command.

Example 3: Calling an Exit Program

STRPGMMNU EXITPGM(OPT3PGM) DLTOPT(*PROMPT)

This command calls user exit program OPT3PGM instead of submitting a batch job when option 3 is

specified. If the object already exists, DLTOPT(*PROMPT) requires the user to press the F11 key; however,

the object is not deleted.

Example 4: Receiving Parameters

The following portion of a CL program is an example of how these parameters would be received by a

user exit program. If the specified type is one of those listed, the object is not deleted. The create

command with REPLACE(*YES) specified is passed to the exit program. The value passed to the exit

program is 0.

PGM PARM(&OPTION &PARM &TYPE &PARM2 &SRCFILE +

&SRCLIB &OBJLIB &JOBD &RQSLEN &RQSDTA512 +

&F4 &F11 &EXIST)

/* The following values are passed in exactly as */

/* they appear on the Programmer Menu. */

DCL VAR(&OPTION) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(2)

DCL VAR(&PARM) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(10)

DCL VAR(&TYPE) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(10)

DCL VAR(&PARM2) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(21)

DCL VAR(&SRCFILE) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(10)

DCL VAR(&SRCLIB) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(10)

DCL VAR(&OBJLIB) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(10)

DCL VAR(&JOBD) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(10)

/* The following values are derived by QPGMMENU */

/* from the information entered to the above fields */

/* and the F keys. */

/* NUMBER OF BYTES OF REQUEST DATA */

DCL VAR(&RQSLEN) TYPE(*DEC) LEN(3 0)

/* DATA FOR RRQSDTA PARAMETER OF SBMJOB COMMAND. */

DCL VAR(&RQSDTA512) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(512)

/* F4 WAS PRESSED, ’1’, OTHERWISE ’0’. */

DCL VAR(&F4) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(1)

/* F11 WAS PRESSED, ’1’, OTHERWISE ’0’. */

DCL VAR(&F11) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(1)

/* OBJECT EXISTS- ’0 OBJECT WAS DELETED- ’1’

OR OBJECT DID NOT EXIST -’2’*/

DCL VAR(&EXIST) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(1)

Additional information, along with examples of the STRPGMMNU command with the EXITPGM

parameter, can be found in the CL Programming book in the Information Center.

Top

Start Programmer Menu (STRPGMMNU) 553

Page 570: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Error messages

None

Top

554 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 571: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Program Profiling (STRPGMPRF)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Program Profiling (STRPGMPRF) command starts collection of profiling information of ILE

programs or service programs that have been enabled to collect profiling data by specifying

PRFDTA(*COL) on the Change Program (CHGPGM) or Change Service Program (CHGSRVPGM)

command, or when the modules were created by a compiler, or by specifying PRFDTA(*COL) on the

Change Module (CHGMOD) CL command. All programs compiled or changed with this option that are

active will have profiling information updated until an End Program Profiling (ENDPGMPRF) command

is issued.

The profiling information is added to existing profiling information. If this is not desired, the profiling

data can be cleared by specifying PRFDTA(*CLR) on the CHGPGM or CHGSRVPGM command.

Restrictions:

v This command is shipped with no public (*EXCLUDE) authority, and QPGMR user profile having use

(*USE) authority to the command.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters

None

Top

Examples

STRPGMPRF

This command start the collection of program profiling information.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF5CAA

Unexpected error occurred during program profiling.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 555

Page 572: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

556 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 573: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Prestart Jobs (STRPJ)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: Yes

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Prestart Jobs (STRPJ) command starts jobs for a prestart job entry in an active subsystem when

there are no currently active prestart jobs for the prestart job entry.

This command is valid after an ENDPJ command is complete, or when all prestart jobs have been ended

by the system due to an error or were never started during subsystem start up due to STRJOBS (*NO) on

the ADDPJE command. The number of jobs started is determined by the INLJOBS value on the prestart

job entry.

Restrictions:

1. To use this command, you must have:

v job control (*JOBCTL) special authority.

v use (*USE) authority to the subsystem description.

v use (*USE) authority to the program and execute (*EXECUTE) authority to the library that contains

the program.

v use (*USE) authority to all auxiliary storage pool (ASP) device descriptions in the ASP group if the

subsystem description specifies an ASP group.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

SBS Subsystem Name Required,

Positional 1

PGM Program Qualified object name Required,

Positional 2 Qualifier 1: Program Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Top

Subsystem (SBS)

Specifies the name of the active subsystem that contains the prestart job entry.

This is a required parameter.

name Specify the name of the active subsystem that contains the prestart job entry.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 557

Page 574: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Program (PGM)

Specifies the name of the program that identifies the prestart job entry. This program name is used to

match an incoming request.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Program

name Specify the name of the program that identifies the prestart job entry.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the thread’s library list are searched until a match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is used to locate the object. If no library is specified as the

current library for the thread, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the program’s library.

Top

Examples

STRPJ SBS(SBS1) PGM(PJLIB/PJPGM)

This command starts prestart jobs for prestart job entry PJPGM in subsystem SBS1. Subsystem SBS1 must

be active when this command is issued. The number of jobs started is the number specified in the

INLJOBS value of prestart job entry PJPGM. The subsystem starts program PJPGM in library PJLIB.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF0921

Start Prestart Jobs command not allowed now.

CPF101C

Not authorized to device &1.

CPF1226

Start prestart jobs failed.

CPF1227

No authority has been granted to use command.

CPF1317

No response from subsystem for job &3/&2/&1.

CPF1351

Function check occurred in subsystem for job &3/&2/&1.

CPF1834

Prestart job entry for program &1 in &2 does not exist.

558 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 575: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF1835

Not authorized to subsystem description.

CPF9810

Library &1 not found.

CPF9811

Program &1 in library &2 not found.

CPF9820

Not authorized to use library &1.

CPF9821

Not authorized to program &1 in library &2.

Top

Start Prestart Jobs (STRPJ) 559

Page 576: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

560 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 577: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Printer Emulation (STRPRTEML)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Printer Emulation (STRPRTEML) command starts 3270 printer emulation using a binary

synchronous communications (BSC) or Systems Network Architecture (SNA) emulation printer device

and a printer device file. The STRPRTEML command is used to print host system (System/370 type)

information on an iSeries system. It is used when the user is working on an iSeries system and the

information is on a System/370 type system.

More information is in the 3270 Device Emulation Support book, SC41-5408.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

EMLCTL Emulation controller, or Name Optional,

Positional 1

EMLDEV Emulation device, or Name Optional,

Positional 2

EMLLOC Emulation location Communications name Optional,

Positional 3

PRTDEV Print device Name Optional

JOB Job name Name, *EMLDEV Optional

ENDBKTEJT End Bracket eject *NO, *YES Optional

PRTFILE Printer file Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: Printer file Name, QPEMPRTF

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

TIMOUTEJT Timeout wait eject Single values: *NONE, *IMMEDOther values: Element list

Optional

Element 1: Minutes 0-99

Element 2: Seconds 0-59, 0

DFRPRTOUT Defer printing spool output *PRTFILE, *YES, *NO Optional

SPOOL Spool output *PRTFILE, *YES, *NO Optional

OPNPRTF Open printer file *IMMED, *RCVDTA Optional

NUMCOL Print positions per line 1-378, *PRTFILE Optional

NUMLIN Lines per page 1-255, *PRTFILE Optional

LPI Lines per inch *PRTFILE, 6, 3, 4, 7.5, 7,5, 8, 9 Optional

MSGQ Message queue Single values: *DSPDEV, *NONEOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Message queue Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 561

Page 578: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

CHRSET Language character set *SYSVAL, AGB, AGE, AGI, AGM, ALI, ALM, BGB, BGE,

BLI, BLM, BRB, BRE, CAB, CAE, CAI, CAM, CLB, CLE,

CYB, CSB, CSE, DMB, DMI, DME, DMM, ESB, FAB, FAI,

FAE, FAM, FNB, FNI, FQB, FQI, FNE, FNM, ICE, GKB,

GNB, GNE, HIB, HNB, HNE, ICB, ICI, ICM, INB, INI,

IRB, ITB, ITE, ITI, ITM, JEB, JEI, JKB, JPB, JPE, JUB, KAB,

KOB, LTB, LAE, LVB, MKB, MKE, NCB, NCE, NEB, NEI,

NEE, NEM, NWB, NWE, NWI, NWM, PKE, PLB, PLE,

PRB, PRI, PRE, PRM, RCB, RMB, RME, ROB, ROE, RUB,

RUE, SFI, SFM, SGM, SGI, SKB, SKE, SPB, SPE, SPI, SPM,

SQB, SQE, SSB, SSI, SWB, SWI, SSE, SSM, SWE, SWM,

TAB, THB, THE, TKB, TKE, TRB, TRE, UAE, UKB, UKI,

USB, USI, UKE, UKM, USE, USM, VNE, YGI, YGM,

*TRNTBL

Optional

SBMJOB Submit job *YES, *NO Optional

JOBD Job description Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: Job description Name, QBATCH

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

TRNTBLOUT Outgoing translation table Single values: *CHRSETOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Outgoing

translation table

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

JOBQ Job queue Single values: *JOBDOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Job queue Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

ENDCOND End emulation conditions Single values: *NONEOther values (up to 3 repetitions): *DACTLU, *ENDBKT,

*UNBIND

Optional

FORMFEED Acknowledge form feed *YES, *NO Optional

EMLCFGE Configuration entry Name, QEMDFTCFGE, *NONE Optional

Top

Emulation controller (EMLCTL)

Specifies the name of a BSC controller description or SNA controller description that has attached 3270

printer emulation device descriptions. When this parameter is specified, the printer emulation job uses a

3270 printer emulation device attached to this controller description. The requester must be authorized to

the controller and at least one device, and the device must be available.

Either this parameter, the Emulation device (EMLDEV) parameter, or the Emulation location (EMLLOC)

parameter is required.

Top

Emulation device (EMLDEV)

Specifies the name of a BSC or an SNA printer emulation device (EMLDEV(3284, 3286, 3287, 3288, or

3289)) that is used by the printer emulation job to do a type 3270 printer emulation. The user must be

authorized to the device, and the device must be available.

Top

562 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 579: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Emulation location (EMLLOC)

Specifies the emulation remote location name that describes the location of the 3270 printer emulation

devices. This name is defined during device description configuration and refers to the remote location

where communication takes place. When this parameter is specified, an available printer emulation

device is selected from those referred to by the location. At least one printer emulation device referred to

by the location must be available, and the job running emulation must be authorized to use the device.

Either this parameter, the Emulation controller (EMLCTL) parameter, or the Emulation device

(EMLDEV) parameter is required.

Top

Print device (PRTDEV)

Specifies the name of the printer used with this printer device file to print the output. This parameter is

ignored if the printer data is spooled. If the output is not spooled and the printer device is being used at

the time the job is initiated, the emulation session ends.

Note: If a printer name is not specified, the output is sent to the printer device specified on the Device

(DEV) parameter of the Create Printer File (CRTPRTF) command. This printer device can be displayed by

using the Display File Description (DSPFD) command.

Top

Job name (JOB)

Specifies a job name for the printer emulation job. If the EMLDEV parameter is not specified, and a batch

job is to be submitted (*YES is specified for the Submit job (SBMJOB) parameter), a job name must be

specified. This parameter is ignored when *NO is specified for the SBMJOB parameter.

*EMLDEV

The job name is the same as the printer emulation device name.

job-name

Specify a name for this printer emulation job.

Top

End Bracket eject (ENDBKTEJT)

Specifies whether SNA printer emulation should force out the emulation output when an SNA End

Bracket (EB) is received from the host system. Emulation output is forced out by closing and then

reopening the emulation printer file specified in the PRTFILE parameter. When the emulation printer

output is ejected, a page eject is performed. The parameter uses the default value of *NO for BSC printer

emulation.

*NO The emulation output is not forced out when SNA printer emulation receives an End Bracket.

*YES The emulation output is forced out when SNA printer emulation receives an End Bracket. This is

done only if the open printer file contains host system data.

Top

Start Printer Emulation (STRPRTEML) 563

Page 580: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Printer file (PRTFILE)

Specifies the printer device file that prints data received from the host system. The printer device file can

be spooled or not spooled.

QPEMPRTF

The standard printer file (which specifies SPOOL(*YES)) shipped with the emulation program is

used as the printer device file.

printer-device-file-name

Specify the name and library of a user-defined printer device file.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the printer device file. If no library is specified as

the current library for the job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the library where the printer device file is located.

Top

Timeout wait eject (TIMOUTEJT)

Specifies whether printer emulation forces out the emulation output when a time-out has occurred while

waiting for host system data. The emulation output is forced out only if the open printer file contains

host system data. The wait interval can be specified in number of minutes or seconds. If a value is

specified for both minutes and seconds, then these values will be added together.

Note: When the emulation printer output is ejected, a page eject is also performed.

*NONE

The emulation output is not forced out based on a specified timeout period.

*IMMED

The emulation output is forced out immediately.

minutes-seconds

Specify a time-out wait interval in minutes or seconds or both.

Minutes

Valid values range from 0 through 99.

Seconds

Valid values range from 0 through 59.

Top

Defer printing spool output (DFRPRTOUT)

Specifies whether spooled output is printed immediately or is delayed. This parameter is ignored when

*NO is specified for the Spool output (SPOOL) parameter.

*PRTFILE

The SCHEDULE value for the printer file controls how the spooled output is printed.

564 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 581: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*YES Spooled output is printed when the spooled file is closed.

*NO Spooled output can be printed before the spooled file is closed. The printed output does not

contain all the data sent by the host system until the spooled file is closed. If the printer is not

using spooling, this parameter is ignored.

Note: Once the printer starts printing output from 3270 device emulation, spooled output from

other jobs sharing the printer does not print until the spooled file that is currently printing is

complete.

Top

Spool output (SPOOL)

Specifies whether the output data for the printer device file is spooled. If *NO is specified on this

parameter, output is sent to the printer specified on the Print device (PRTDEV) parameter. If the output

is spooled, it is sent to the output queue specified on the Spooled output queue (OUTQ) parameter of

the Create Printer File (CRTPRTF) command for the printer file specified on the PRTFILE parameter. The

Output Queue value can be displayed by using the Display File Description (DSPFD) command and

specifying the printer file name.

Note: If *JOB is specified on the OUTQ parameter, output is sent to the output queue specified on the

OUTQ parameter of the job description specified on the JOBD parameter. This value can be displayed by

using the Display Job Description (DSPJOBD) command and specifying the job description name.

*PRTFILE

The value specified on the Spool output (SPOOL) parameter of the Create Printer File

(CRTPRTF) command determines whether spooling is performed.

*YES The data is spooled.

*NO The data is not spooled; it is sent directly to the device and is printed as the output becomes

available.

Top

Open printer file (OPNPRTF)

Specifies when the printer file is opened during the SNA 3270 printer emulation session. If the printer

data is not spooled, then the printer will be allocated to your job when the printer file is opened. If the

printer data is spooled, then the spool writer is allocated to your job after the printer file is opened

depending on the value of the DFRPRTOUT parameter.

This parameter is not allowed if specified for BSC 3270 printer emulation.

*IMMED

The printer file is opened immediately after starting the 3270 printer emulation session.

*RCVDTA

The printer file is opened after first receiving print data from the host system.

Top

Print positions per line (NUMCOL)

Specifies the number of columns in a line when creating the printed output.

Start Printer Emulation (STRPRTEML) 565

Page 582: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*PRTFILE

The printer file PAGESIZE(width) value contains the number of columns per line. This value is

used if *IMMED is specified on the open printer file (OPNPRTF) parameter, or *RCVDTA is

specified on the OPNPRTF parameter and the maximum print positions (MPP) value is not sent

from the host system. Otherwise, the MPP value sent from the host system is used.

number-of-columns

Specify the number of columns per line in the printed output. Valid values range from 1 through

378.

Top

Lines per page (NUMLIN)

Specifies the number of lines per page when creating the printed output.

*PRTFILE

The printer file PAGESIZE(length) value contains the number of lines per page. This value is

used if *IMMED is specified on the open printer file (OPNPRTF) parameter, or *RCVDTA is

specified on the OPNPRTF parameter and the maximum page length (MPL) value is not sent

from the host system. Otherwise, the MPL value sent from the host system is used.

number-of-lines

Specify the number of lines per page in printed output. Valid values range from 1 through 255.

Top

Lines per inch (LPI)

Specifies the number of lines per inch when creating the printed output.

*PRTFILE

The printer file LPI value contains the number of lines per inch. This value is used if *IMMED is

specified on the open printer file (OPNPRTF) parameter, or *RCVDTA is specified on the

OPNPRTF parameter and the set line density (SDL) value is not sent from the host system.

Otherwise, the SDL value sent from the host system is used.

lines-per-inch

Specify the number of lines per inch in the printed output. Valid values are 3, 4, 6, 7.5, 7,5, 8 and

9. Values 3, 7.5 and 7,5 are valid only for double-byte character set (DBCS) printer devices.

Top

Message queue (MSGQ)

Specifies the message queue to which operational messages for this device are sent.

*DSPDEV

The current display station message queue is used.

*NONE

No messages are sent to message queues other than the job log for the printer emulation job.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

566 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 583: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the message queue. If no library is specified as the

current library for the job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the library where the message queue is located.

message-queue-name

Specify the name and library of the message queue where messages are sent when the printer

emulation job is running.

Top

Language character set (CHRSET)

Specifies the 3-character country or region keyboard language identifier which represents a specific full

character identifier (CHRID - comprised of a character set and code page) that is used by the printer

being emulated.

*SYSVAL

The current QKBDTYPE system value is used.

country-keyboard-identifier

Specify the country or region keyboard language identifier to be used.

*TRNTBL

Allows a user-defined translation table to be used. The character translation is defined in the

translation table specified by the Outgoing translation table (TRNTBLOUT) parameter. The

CHRID associated with the QKBDTYPE system value will be used by the printer being emulated.

Top

Submit job (SBMJOB)

Specifies whether the printer emulation should be done as a separate job or as part of this job.

*YES A specific job is submitted to do the printer emulation. The job attributes are determined from the

job description specified by the Job description (JOBD) parameter. The job uses your user profile.

*NO Printer emulation is done in the current job.

Top

Job description (JOBD)

Specifies the job description for the job that is being submitted for 3270 printer emulation. This parameter

is ignored when *NO is specified for the Submit job (SBMJOB) parameter.

QBATCH

The job description QBATCH is used for the job.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the job description name. If no library is specified

as the current library for the job, QGPL is used.

Start Printer Emulation (STRPRTEML) 567

Page 584: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

library-name

Specify the library where the job description name is located.

job-description-name

Specify the name and library of the job description associated with the job.

Top

Outgoing translation table (TRNTBLOUT)

Specifies the outgoing translation table used to translate characters sent from the host system to 3270

Emulation.

*CHRSET

Specify that translation is done when data is sent from the host system using the character set

specified on the Language character set (CHRSET) parameter.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the translation table. If no current library entry

exists in the library list, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the library where the translation table is located.

table-name

Specifies the name and library of the table which is used for outgoing translation.

Top

Job queue (JOBQ)

Specifies the name of the job queue in which this 3270 printer emulation job is placed. This parameter is

ignored when *NO is specified for the Submit job (SBMJOB) parameter.

*JOBD

The submitted job is placed in the job queue associated with the job description specified in the

(JOBD) parameter.

job-queue-name

Specify the name and library of the job queue to contain the submitted job.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the job queue. If no library is specified as the

current library for the job, QGPL is used.

library-name

Specify the library where the job queue is located.

Top

568 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 585: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

End emulation conditions (ENDCOND)

Specifies additional ways in which the SNA 3270 printer emulation session can end.

This parameter is not allowed if specified for BSC 3270 printer emulation.

*NONE

No additional ways to end 3270 printer emulation are requested.

*DACTLU

The 3270 printer emulation session ends if it receives an SNA DACTLU from the host system.

*ENDBKT

The 3270 printer emulation session ends if it receives an SNA end bracket from the host system.

Please consider the following before selecting this end condition:

v This end condition should be used only when you need to print one host system file for the

duration of the session. An end bracket may occur after printing the first file, and the 3270

session ends before a second file can print.

*UNBIND

The 3270 printer emulation session will end if it receives an SNA UNBIND from the host system.

Please consider the following before selecting this end condition:

v This end condition should be used only when you need to print one host system file for the

duration of the session. An UNBIND may occur after printing the first file, and the 3270

session will end before a second file can print.

Top

Acknowledge form feed (FORMFEED)

Specifies whether to acknowledge a form-feed instruction located in the first character position of the first

print line for a 3270 Information Display System data-stream compatibility (DSC) LU3 printer.

This parameter is ignored for an SNA character string (SCS) LU1 printer.

*YES The form-feed instruction is acknowledged. The print position advances to a new page.

*NO The form-feed instruction is ignored. The print position does not advance to a new page.

Top

Configuration entry (EMLCFGE)

Specifies whether a configuration entry is used for this session. Configuration entries indicate 3270

emulation configuration options. Configuration entries are created with the Add Emulation Configuration

Entry (ADDEMLCFGE) command.

*NONE

No configuration entry is named and the configuration entry defaults are used.

QEMDFTCFGE

The default configuration entry QEMDFTFGE is used. This entry is shipped with configuration

entry defaults, and can be updated with the Change Emulation Configuration Entry

(CHGEMLCFGE) command.

configuration-entry-name

Specify the name of the configuration entry to be used. If the configuration entry named does not

exist in the configuration file, the configuration entry defaults are used.

Start Printer Emulation (STRPRTEML) 569

Page 586: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Examples

Example 1: Printing Data to Standard Emulation Printer File

STRPRTEML EMLDEV(HOSTPRT4)

This command starts a batch job by accepting data from the HOSTPRT4 device and prints the data to the

standard emulation printer file (QPEMPRTF). The job is named HOSTPRT4 and runs until the job is

canceled. Messages are sent to the current work station message queue.

Example 2: Emulating a Printer in the Current Job

STRPRTEML EMLDEV(HOSTPRT5) SBMJOB(*NO)

This command does printer emulation in the current job by accepting data from the HOSTPRT5 device,

and writing the data to the standard emulation printer device file (QPEMPRTF). The request is active

until it ends through the End Printer Emulation (ENDPRTEML) command, or until the job is canceled.

Example 3: Printing Output Immediately

STRPRTEML EMLCTL(EMLCTL1) TIMOUTEJT(10)

DFRPRTOUT(*NO) NUMLIN(96)

This command starts a batch job by accepting data from the device and printing the data in printer file

QPEMPRTF. If a timeout of 10 minutes occurs, printer emulation forces out the emulation output. The

output prints immediately; the maximum number of lines per page is 96.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF85EB

3270 device emulation session ended.

CPF85ED

Values other than ENDCOND(*NONE) are not supported.

CPF85EE

*RCVDTA on the OPNPRTF parameter is not supported.

CPF8510

Internal error occurred on device &1.

CPF8511

Emulation ended by errors on device &2.

CPF8512

Emulation ended because device &2 was held.

CPF8513

Emulation ended by errors on device &2.

570 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 587: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF8514

Error recovery stopped on device &1.

CPF8515

3270 emulation session ended by host.

CPF8516

No match between host and device &2.

CPF8517

Received more than maximum number of fields allowed.

CPF8518

Emulation ended because of internal failure in system.

CPF8519

Function check in 3270 emulation.

CPF8561

Printer emulation not started.

CPF8564

Printer emulation job &3/&2/&1 ended.

CPF8570

Translate of 3270 printer data stream failed.

CPF8579

Cannot open printer file &1 in library &2.

CPF8580

File &1 is not a printer file or has been overridden.

CPF8582

Cannot open printer file &1 again in library &2.

CPF8583

Printer emulation cannot open required file.

Top

Start Printer Emulation (STRPRTEML) 571

Page 588: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

572 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 589: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR) command starts a spooling writer to the specified printer. The

writer, which is a system job, takes spooled files from an output queue and produces (writes) the output

on the printer device. This command specifies the name of the printer, the names of the output and

message queues used, and the name of the writer.

More than one writer can be active at the same time (as determined by the spooling subsystem

description), and up to 10 writers can be active to the same output queue. Each writer must have a

unique writer name, its own device, and only one type of writer (print, remote, or diskette) can be active

to a single output queue. A writer that has been started can be actively writing output or waiting for a

file entry to be put on the output queue. The writer can be changed, held, or canceled if the Change

Writer (CHGWTR), Hold Writer (HLDWTR), or End Writer (ENDWTR) command is used. Because each

writer runs independently of the job that started it, you can continue doing other work on the system

after you start a writer.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DEV Printer Name, *ALL, *SYSVAL Required,

Positional 1

OUTQ Output queue Single values: *DEVOther values: Qualified object name

Optional,

Positional 2

Qualifier 1: Output queue Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

MSGQ Queue for writer messages Single values: *DEVD, *REQUESTEROther values: Qualified object name

Optional,

Positional 4

Qualifier 1: Queue for writer

messages

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

FORMTYPE Form type options Element list Optional

Element 1: Form type Character value, *ALL, *STD, *FORMS

Element 2: Message option *INQMSG, *MSG, *NOMSG, *INFOMSG

FILESEP File separators 0-9, *FILE Optional

SEPDRAWER Drawer for separators 1-255, *DEVD, *FILE Optional

WTR Writer Name, *DEV Optional,

Positional 3

AUTOEND Auto-end options Element list Optional,

Positional 5 Element 1: Automatically

end writer

*NO, *YES

Element 2: If yes, when to

end

*NORDYF, *FILEEND

ALWDRTPRT Allow direct print *NO, *YES Optional

ALIGN Align page *FILE, *WTR, *FIRST Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 573

Page 590: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

INIT Initialize printer *WTR, *FIRST, *ALL Optional

FILE Spooled file Name, *NONE, *LAST Optional

JOB Job name Single values: *Other values: Qualified job name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Job name Name

Qualifier 2: User Name

Qualifier 3: Number 000000-999999

SPLNBR Spooled file number 1-999999, *ONLY, *LAST, *ANY Optional

JOBSYSNAME Job system name Name, *ONLY, *CURRENT, *ANY Optional

CRTDATE Spooled file created Single values: *ONLY, *LASTOther values: Element list

Optional

Element 1: Creation date Date

Element 2: Creation time Time, *ONLY, *LAST

PAGE Starting page Integer, *BEGIN Optional

Top

Printer (DEV)

Specifies the printer device used to print the spooled file. The device must be available before the writer

can be started.

This is a required parameter.

*ALL Start a printer writer for every printer configured on the system.

*SYSVAL

Start a printer writer for the system default printer.

name Specify the name that the printer device being started is identified by.

Top

Output queue (OUTQ)

Specifies the output queue from which the writer processes spooled files.

Single values

*DEV Use the default output queue associated with the printer specified on the Printer (DEV)

parameter.

Qualifier 1: Output queue

name Specify the name of the output queue that the writer processes spooled files from.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the output queue. If no current library entry exists

in the library list, QGPL is used.

name Specify the name of the library where the output queue is located.

574 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 591: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Queue for writer messages (MSGQ)

Specifies the message queue that is used by this user.

Single values

*DEVD

The messages are sent to the message queue specified in the printer’s device description.

*REQUESTER

The messages are sent to the workstation message queue of the workstation of the user who

started the process. If this value is specified for a batch job, *DEVD is used.

Qualifier 1: Queue for writer messages

name Specify the name of the message queue where writer messages should be sent.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the message queue. If no current library entry

exists in the library list, QGPL is used.

name Specify the name of the library where the message queue is located.

Top

Form type options (FORMTYPE)

Specifies which form type should be selected to print. This parameter specifies that only the files with

this form type are processed now. All other files are left on the output queue as available. If you wish to

change the type of form to be printed after the writer is started, you should use the Change Writer

(CHGWTR) command.

Note: The form load message is issued when the spooled file to be printed has a form type different from

the form type of the last spooled file that was printed on the device. The last form type printed is kept

from the last STRPRTWTR, CHGWTR, or VRYCFG command issued.

Consider the following example:

1. The last spooled file printed on printer PRT01 had the form type *STD.

2. The user changes the form type on PRT01 to XYZ using the following command:

CHGWTR PRT01 FORMTYPE(XYZ)

3. No spooled file with the form type XYZ is printed on PRT01.

4. The user then sends a spooled file with the form type *STD to PRT01. The form load message is not

issued, despite the intervening CHGWTR command, because the last spooled file printed on PRT01

had the same form type as the spooled file being printed.

The form load message would be issued if a spooled file with the form type XYZ were actually

printed on PRT01.

Element 1: Form type

*ALL All available files on the output queue will be processed regardless of their form type.

Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR) 575

Page 592: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*FORMS

All available files on the output queue with the same form type are processed as a group before

the writer moves on to the next form type. The writer first chooses the first available file on the

queue. After the first file is complete, all files with the same form type will be processed. The

writer again chooses the first available file on the queue and repeats the process for that form

type.

*STD The writer processes spooled files with a form type of *STD.

form-type

Specify the type of form for which you want spooled files processed.

Element 2: Message option

*INQMSG

An inquiry message is sent to the message queue when a spooled file has a form type that is

different than the form type in the printer.

*INFOMSG

An informational message is sent to the message queue when no spooled files requiring this form

type remain in the output queue.

*MSG An inquiry message is sent to the message queue when a spooled file has a form type that is

different than the form type in the printer and an informational message is sent when no spooled

files requiring this form type remain in the output queue.

*NOMSG

Neither an inquiry message nor an informational message is sent to the message queue.

Top

File separators (FILESEP)

Specifies how to control the number of file separator pages that are printed before each file.

*FILE The number of separators that was specified for each individual file is used.

0-9 Specify the number of separator pages to print. Whenever you respond to the change form type

message indicating that a new form type has been put on the printer, the writer issues a message

inquiring how many file separator pages should be printed with the new form type.

Top

Drawer for separators (SEPDRAWER)

Specifies which paper drawer is selected for printing job and file separators.

*DEVD

The value stored in the device description for the printer is used.

*FILE The separator pages are printed from the same drawer as the spooled file.

1 The separator pages are printed from drawer 1.

2 The separator pages are printed from drawer 2.

3 The separator pages are printed from drawer 3.

1-255 Specify a number to indicate the drawer from which the separator pages are printed.

Note: For some printers, SEPDRAWER(3) implies an envelope drawer.

576 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 593: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Writer (WTR)

Specifies the name of the spooling writer being started. Each writer name must be unique.

*DEV The name of the writer is the same as the name of the printer device specified on the Printer

(DEV) parameter.

name Specify the name by which the writer being started is identified.

Top

Auto-end options (AUTOEND)

Specifies whether the writer ends automatically.

Element 1: Automatically end writer

*NO The writer does not end when the last available file has been removed from the output queue; it

waits for another spooled file entry to be put on the queue.

*YES The writer automatically ends after it has reached the state specified by the second part of this

parameter.

Element 2: If yes, when to end

*NORDYF

The writer automatically ends when there are no ready files (all the available files have been

removed from the output queue).

*FILEEND

The writer stops after it has finished processing one spooled file.

Top

Allow direct print (ALWDRTPRT)

Specifies whether the printer writer allows files to be printed directly to the printer. A file printed directly

to the printer is created by specifying SPOOL(*NO) for a printer file. When direct printing is allowed, the

non-spooled printer file is printed immediately if the printer is available or, if the printer is busy, the

non-spooled printer file waits until the printer is available. The maximum wait is the length of time

specified on the WAITFILE parameter on the printer file, after which the job is automatically canceled.

The user can cancel a non-spooled printer file only with an End Job (ENDJOB) command.

*NO The printer does not allow non-spooled printer files to be printed to the device.

*YES The printer can be used to print spooled and non-spooled output. See the Create, Change, or

Override Printer File (CRTPRTF, CHGPRTF, or OVRPRTF) command to set the value of the

WAITFILE parameter.

Note: Nonspooled files wait up to 30 seconds regardless of whether the value specified on the

WAITFILE parameter is less than 30 seconds.

Top

Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR) 577

Page 594: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Align page (ALIGN)

Specifies how to control the forms alignment.

*WTR The writer keeps track of the output that is printed and issues a forms alignment message

whenever it determines that forms may need to be aligned.

*FILE The forms alignment message is issued for every file that has *YES specified for the Align page

prompt (ALIGN parameter). This option should be taken whenever the automatic forms

alignment control provided by the writer does not provide the desired results.

*FIRST

The forms alignment message is issued only for the first file printed. No alignment messages are

issued when subsequent errors occur on the printer.

Top

Initialize printer (INIT)

Specifies how often to initialize the printer device.

Note: This parameter is ignored if TRANSFORM(*YES) or a user data transform program was specified

on the printer device description.

*WTR The writer initializes the printer device when necessary.

*FIRST

The writer initializes the printer device only before the first file is printed, or after a device error

occurs.

*ALL The writer initializes the printer device before each file and each copy of the file is printed.

Top

Spooled file (FILE)

Specifies the first (or only) spooled file to print on the printer. If several files are available on the output

queue, the next file produced is the first one available with the highest priority.

*NONE

No spooled file name is specified; the first spooled file that becomes available on the output

queue is processed first.

*LAST

The spooled file which was being printed when the writer ended will start to print when the

writer is restarted.

name Specify the name of the spooled file that is the first (or only) file to be written to the printer.

Top

Job name (JOB)

Specifies the name of the job that created the spooled file. This parameter is valid only if a spooled file

name is specified on the Spooled file (FILE) parameter.

Single values

578 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 595: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

* The job from which this Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR) command was issued is the job that

created the spooled file.

Qualifier 1: Job name

name Specify the name of the job that created the spooled file. If no other job qualifiers are given, all of

the jobs currently in the system are searched for the simple name of the job.

Qualifier 2: User

name Specify the user name that identifies the user profile under which the job is run.

Qualifier 3: Number

000000-999999

Specify the system-assigned job number.

Top

Spooled file number (SPLNBR)

Specifies the number of the spooled file that is processed first. This parameter is valid only if a spooled

file name is specified on the Spooled file prompt (FILE parameter).

*ONLY

Only one spooled file in the job has the specified file name; therefore, the number of the spooled

file is not necessary.

*LAST

The spooled file with the highest number and the specified file name is used.

*ANY The spooled file number is not used to determine which spooled file is used. Use this value when

the job system name parameter or the spooled file create date and time parameter is to take

precedence over the spooled file number when selecting a spooled file.

1-999999

Specify the number of the specified file from the job on the specified output queue that is to be

processed first.

Top

Job system name (JOBSYSNAME)

Specifies the name of the system where the job that created the spooled file (JOB parameter) ran. This

parameter is considered after the job name, user name, job number, spooled file name, and spooled file

number parameter requirements have been met.

*ONLY

There is one spooled file with the specified job name, user name, job number, spooled file name,

spooled file number, and spooled file create date and time.

*CURRENT

The spooled file created on the current system with the specified job name, user name, job

number, spooled file name, spooled file number, and create date and time is used.

*ANY The job system name is not used to determine which spooled file is used. Use this value when

the spooled file create date and time parameter is to take precedence over the job system name

when selecting a spooled file.

name Specify the name of the system where the job that created the spooled file ran.

Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR) 579

Page 596: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Spooled file created (CRTDATE)

Specifies the date and time the spooled file was created. This parameter is considered after the job name,

user name, job number, spooled file name, spooled file number, and job system name parameter

requirements have been met.

Single values

*ONLY

There is one spooled file with the specified job name, user name, job number, spooled file name,

spooled file number, and job system name.

*LAST

The spooled file with the latest create date and time of the specified job name, user name, job

number, spooled file name, spooled file number, and job system name is used.

Element 1: Creation date

date Specify the date the spooled file was created.

Element 2: Creation time

*ONLY

There is one spooled file with the specified job name, user name, job number, spooled file name,

spooled file number, job system name, and spooled file create date.

*LAST

The spooled file with the latest create time of the specified job name, user name, job number,

spooled file name, spooled file number, job system name, and spooled file create date is used.

time Specify the time the spooled file was created.

Top

Starting page (PAGE)

Specifies the page number of the first page to print from the first file. This parameter is valid only if a

spooled file name is specified on the Spooled file prompt (FILE parameter).

*BEGIN

The restart page of the spooled file is the first page to print.

Note: If this value has not been changed using the Change Spooled File Attribute (CHGSPLFA)

command, the file will print in the same manner as it would if the value were *BEGIN.

integer

Specify the number of the first page to print. This number must be within the page range of the

file to be valid.

Top

Examples

STRPRTWTR DEV(QSYSPRT) OUTQ(QPRINTS) WTR(TOM)

580 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 597: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This command starts a spooling writer named TOM. This writer takes the output from the output queue

named QPRINTS and prints the output on the printer named QSYSPRT. Writer messages are sent to the

system operator’s message queue, and the writer waits for more output when the queue is emptied.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF0906

A duplicate job named &3/&2/&1 was found.

CPF1338

Errors occurred on SBMJOB command.

CPF1764

Writer already started for device &1.

CPF1842

Cannot access system value &1.

CPF2115

Object &1 in &2 type *&3 damaged.

CPF2207

Not authorized to use object &1 in library &3 type *&2.

CPF3303

File &1 not found in job &5/&4/&3.

CPF3305

Output queue &1 in library &2 assigned to another writer.

CPF3309

No files named &1 are active.

CPF3310

Writer &1 already started.

CPF3330

Necessary resource not available.

CPF3340

More than one file with specified name found in job &5/&4/&3.

CPF3342

Job &5/&4/&3 not found.

CPF3343

Duplicate job names found.

CPF3347

Device &1 not found.

CPF3357

Output queue &1 in library &2 not found.

CPF3362

Objects in QTEMP not valid for parameter values.

CPF3363

Message queue &1 in library &2 not found.

Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR) 581

Page 598: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF3369

Device &1 not printer device.

CPF336B

Not found or not authorized to driver exit program &1 in library &2.

CPF3418

Duplicate file &1 number &2 found in job.

CPF346A

Transform exit program &1 in library &2 not found or user is not authorized.

CPF346B

Driver exit program &1 in library &2 not found or user is not authorized.

CPF3463

Output queue for device &1 not found.

CPF3464

Not authorized to output queue &1 in library &2.

CPF3478

File &1 not found in job &5/&4/&3 on output queue &6 in library &7.

Top

582 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 599: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Query Management Proc (STRQMPRC)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Query Management Procedure (STRQMPRC) command allows you to run a query management

procedure that was saved as a member in a source file.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

SRCMBR Source member Name Required,

Positional 1

SRCFILE Source file Qualified object name Optional,

Positional 2 Qualifier 1: Source file Name, QQMPRCSRC

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

RDB Relational database Simple name, *NONE, *CURRENT Optional

RDBCNNMTH Connection Method *DUW, *RUW Optional

USER User Name, *CURRENT Optional

PASSWORD Password Character value, *NONE Optional

NAMING Naming convention *SYS, *SQL, *SAA Optional

ALWQRYDFN Allow information from

QRYDFN

*NO, *YES, *ONLY Optional

CMDSRCFILE Command source file Single values: *NONEOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Command

source file

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

CMDSRCMBR Source member Name, *FIRST Optional

ALWDSPLAY Display screens *YES, *NO Optional

Top

Source member (SRCMBR)

Specifies the source file member that contains the query management procedure to be run.

This is a required parameter.

name Specify the name of the member.

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 583

Page 600: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Source file (SRCFILE)

Specifies the source file that contains the query management procedure to be run.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Source file

QQMPRCSRC

IBM-supplied source file QQMPRCSRC is used.

name Specify the name of the source file.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Relational database (RDB)

Specifies the relation database that is accessed during the processing of this command.

*NONE

The local database is accessed. If the user is connected to a remote database, the connection is

reset to local and remains local until completion of this command.

*CURRENT

The relational database to which the user is currently connected is accessed.

name Specify the name of the relational database that is accessed. The database must have an entry in

the relation database directory.

Top

Connection Method (RDBCNNMTH)

Specifies the connection method to use.

*DUW

Connections to several relational databases are allowed. Consecutive CONNECT statements to

additional relational databases do not result in disconnection of previous connections.

*RUW Only one connection to a relational database is allowed. Consecutive CONNECT statements result

in the previous connections being disconnected before a new connection is established.

Top

User (USER)

Specifies the user name sent to the remote system when starting the conversation.

*CURRENT

The user name associated with the current job is used.

584 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 601: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

name Specify the user name being used for the application requester job.

Top

Password (PASSWORD)

Specifies the password to be used on the remote system.

*NONE

No password is sent. The user name specified on the USER parameter is not valid if this value is

specified.

character-value

Specify the password of the user name specified on the USER parameter.

Top

Naming convention (NAMING)

Specifies the naming convention used for naming objects.

*SYS The system naming convention is used (name/object-name).

*SQL The SQL naming convention is used (database-name.object-name). If NAMING(*SQL) is specified,

CMDSRCFILE(*LIBL) cannot be specified or allowed as a default value for locating any of the

objects specified on other parameters on this command.

*SAA The SQL naming convention is used (database-name.object-name). If NAMING(*SAA) is

specified, CMDSRCFILE(*LIBL) cannot be specified or allowed as a default value for locating any

of the objects specified on other parameters on this command.

Top

Allow information from QRYDFN (ALWQRYDFN)

Specifies whether query or form information is taken from a query definition (QRYDFN) object when no

query management query (QMQRY) or query management form (QMFORM) object can be found using

the specified object name. Any information that has to be derived in this way is discarded when the

common programming interface (CPI) command in the procedure is completed. No query management

objects are created.

*NO The information is not taken from a QRYDFN object.

*YES The information is taken from a QRYDFN object when the specified QMQRY or QMFORM object

is not found.

*ONLY

Information can be derived only from a QRYDFN object. Query management objects are ignored.

Top

Command source file (CMDSRCFILE)

Specifies the command source file that query management uses to run a command procedure. A

command procedure can only contain query management set commands which can set application

variables as well as query management variables that start with the ’DSQ’ value.

The supported DSQ variables are:

Start Query Management Proc (STRQMPRC) 585

Page 602: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

v DSQCMTLV

v DSQCONFIRM

v DSQOAUTH

v DSQSDBNM

v DSQSRUN

Single values

*NONE

A command source file is not used. The CMDSRCMBR parameter is ignored.

Qualifier 1: Command source file

name Specify the name of the command source file.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Source member (CMDSRCMBR)

Specifies the command source member that query management uses to run a command procedure. A

command procedure can only contain query management set commands which set variables that start

with the ’DSQ’ value.

*FIRST

The first member is used.

name Specify the name of the command source member.

Top

Display screens (ALWDSPLAY)

Specifies the display mode used. The query management session is set to interactive mode if

ALWDSPLAY(*YES) is specified. If ALWDSPLAY(*NO) is specified, then the session is set to batch mode.

The mode is automatically set to batch when running this command in a batch environment.

*YES Displays are shown when used in an interactive session. This mode allows you to interact with

the query management commands in the procedure.

*NO No displays are shown.

Top

586 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 603: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Examples

Example 1: Running a Query Management Procedure

STRQMPRC SRCMBR(MYPROC) SRCFILE(RPTLIB/PROCFILE)

This command starts the query management procedure stored as the member named MYPROC in the

source file named PROCFILE in the RPTLIB library.

Example 2: Taking Information From QRYDFN Objects

STRQMPRC SRCMBR(MYPROC) SRCFILE(PROCFILE)

ALWQRYDFN(*YES) ALWDSPLAY(*NO)

This command starts the query management procedure stored as the member named MYPROC in the

first file named PROCFILE in the library list for the job. Query and form information is allowed to be

taken, as needed, from QRYDFN objects when the procedure statements are processed. No reports are

shown but they can be printed if the user specifies a print request. Objects are replaced without

confirmation if confirmation is not requested by the user. The procedure ends with some errors if

processing locates a global variable that is not set or if confirmation was requested before replacing

objects that already exist.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

QWM2701

&1 command failed.

QWM2703

&1 command ended.

QWM2707

*LIBL not allowed when SQL naming applied.

QWM2709

User or password not valid with relational database value.

QWM2710

Password value *NONE only valid with user value *CURRENT.

QWM2712

Character in user name not valid.

Top

Start Query Management Proc (STRQMPRC) 587

Page 604: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

588 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 605: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Query Management Query (STRQMQRY)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Query Management Query (STRQMQRY) command is used to run a query.

To use this command, you must first identify the query that is to be processed. The query is any single

Structured Query Language (SQL) statement in a QMQRY object. The SQL statement can also be taken

from a query definition (QRYDFN) object when a QMQRY object does not exist.

You can show the output on the display, print it, or store it in a database file.

If the SQL statement inside the query does not create an answer-set, then no report or output file is

created. This happens if the SQL statement inside a query is not valid or the SQL statement is not a

SELECT clause.

If the query contains substitution variables, the SETVAR parameter can be used to set the variables for

the query. If prompting is enabled, query management asks the user to provide a value for each variable

that was not set.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

QMQRY Query management query Qualified object name Required,

Positional 1 Qualifier 1: Query

management query

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT, *OUTFILE Optional,

Positional 2

QMFORM Query management report

form

Single values: *SYSDFT, *QMQRYOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Query

management report form

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

OUTFILE File to receive output Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: File to receive

output

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *CURLIB, *LIBL

OUTMBR Output member options Element list Optional

Element 1: Member *FIRST

Element 2: Replace or add

records

*REPLACE, *ADD

DATETIME Date and time *YES, *NO Optional

PAGNBR Page numbers *YES, *NO Optional

RDB Relational database Simple name, *NONE, *CURRENT Optional

RDBCNNMTH Connection Method *DUW, *RUW Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 589

Page 606: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

USER User Name, *CURRENT Optional

PASSWORD Password Character value, *NONE Optional

NAMING Naming convention *SYS, *SQL, *SAA Optional

ALWQRYDFN Allow information from

QRYDFN

*NO, *YES, *ONLY Optional

SETVAR Set variables Values (up to 50 repetitions): Element list Optional

Element 1: Variable name Character value

Element 2: Variable value Character value

Top

Query management query (QMQRY)

Specifies the query management query (QMQRY) to be run.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Query management query

name Specify the name of the query to run.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library where the query is located.

Top

Output (OUTPUT)

Specifies whether the output from the command is shown at the requesting work station, printed with

the job’s spooled output, or directed to a database file.

* The output produced by the query is formatted with the specified report form and, in interactive

mode, sent to the work station that runs the command. If the command is run in batch mode, the

output is sent to the default printer used by query management.

*PRINT

The output produced by the query is formatted with the specified query management form, then

sent to the default printer used by query management.

*OUTFILE

The output produced by the query is written to a database file (table), which is inserted into a

collection.

Top

590 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 607: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Query management report form (QMFORM)

Specifies which query management report form is to be applied to the answer-set to format the printed or

displayed output.

Single values

*SYSDFT

A default report form is created and used for the report that is printed or displayed.

*QMQRY

The value specified on the Query management query (QMQRY) parameter is used to locate the

report form.

Qualifier 1: Query management report form

name Specify the name of the report form.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the report form.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

File to receive output (OUTFILE)

Specifies the database file that receives the query output. If the file specified does not exist, the system

creates it in the specified library as a table in a collection. If the file is created by this function, the

authority for users without specific authority is *EXCLUDE.

Qualifier 1: File to receive output

name Specify the name of the database file that receives the output of the command.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the job’s library list are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the

job, the QGPL library is used.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Output member options (OUTMBR)

Specifies the database file member to which the output is directed.

Element 1: Member

*FIRST

The first member in the file receives the output.

Start Query Management Query (STRQMQRY) 591

Page 608: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Element 2: Replace or add records

*REPLACE

The file is cleared before new records are inserted.

*ADD New records are added after any existing records.

Top

Date and time (DATETIME)

Specifies whether the system date and time are printed on the bottom of each page.

*YES The system date and time are printed on the bottom of each page.

*NO The system date and time are not printed on the bottom of each page.

Top

Page numbers (PAGNBR)

Specifies whether page numbers are printed on the bottom of each page.

*YES The page numbers are printed on the bottom of each page.

*NO The page numbers are not printed.

Top

Relational database (RDB)

Specifies the relational database that is accessed during the processing of this command.

*NONE

The local database is accessed. If you are connected to a remote database, the connection is reset

to local and remains local until completion of this command. If the connection management

method is *DUW the remote connection is left in a dormant state.

*CURRENT

The relational database to which you are currently connected is accessed.

With *RUW connection management, if the user is connected to a remote database, *OUTFILE

cannot be specified on the OUPUT parameter.

With *DUW connection management, if the user is connected to a remote database and

OUTPUT(*OUTFILE) is specified, the connection is set to local for the *OUTFILE processing and

then the remote connection is restored when the STRQMQRY command is completed.

name Specify the name of the relational database that is accessed. The database you specify must have

an entry in the relational database directory.

With *RUW connection management, if the relational database specified is a remote database and

OUTPUT(*OUTFILE) is specified, the connection is reset to local for the *OUTFILE processing

and remains local when the STRQMQRY command is completed.

With *DUW connection management, if the relational database and OUTPUT(*OUTFILE) is

specified, the connection is set to local for the *OUTFILE processing and then the remote

connection is restored upon completion of the STRQMQRY command.

Top

592 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 609: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Connection Method (RDBCNNMTH)

Specifies the connection method to use.

*DUW

Connections to several relational databases are allowed. Consecutive CONNECT statements to

additional relational databases do not result in the disconnection of previous connections.

*RUW Only one connection to a relational database is allowed. Consecutive CONNECT statements result

in the previous connections being disconnected before a new connection is established.

Top

User (USER)

Specifies the user name sent to the remote system when starting the conversation.

*CURRENT

The user name associated with the current job is used.

name Specify the user name being used for the application requester job.

Top

Password (PASSWORD)

Specifies the password to be used on the remote system.

*NONE

No password is sent. The user name specified on the USER parameter is not valid if this value is

specified.

character-value

Specify the password of the user name specified on the USER parameter.

Top

Naming convention (NAMING)

Specifies the naming convention used for naming objects.

*SYS The system naming convention is used (database-name/object-name).

*SQL The SQL naming convention is used (database-name.object-name). If NAMING(*SQL) is specified,

the *LIBL value cannot be specified or allowed to be a default value for locating any of the

objects specified on other parameters on this command.

*SAA The SQL naming convention is used (database-name.object-name). If NAMING(*SAA) is

specified, the *LIBL value cannot be specified or allowed to be a default value for locating any of

the objects specified on other parameters on this command.

Top

Start Query Management Query (STRQMQRY) 593

Page 610: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Allow information from QRYDFN (ALWQRYDFN)

Specifies whether query or form information is taken from a query definition (QRYDFN) object when no

query management query (QMQRY) or query management form (QMFORM) object can be found using

the specified object name. Any information that has to be derived in this way is discarded when the

command completes. No query management object is created.

*NO Information is not taken from a QRYDFN object.

*YES Information is taken from a QRYDFN object when the specified QMQRY or QMFORM object

name is not found.

*ONLY

Information is taken only from a QRYDFN object. Query management objects are ignored.

Top

Set variables (SETVAR)

Specifies the variables that are set by query management before the query is run. Up to 50 variables can

be set.

Element 1: Variable name

character-value

Specify a variable name, from 1 to 30 characters. Because lower-case characters in variable names

are changed to upper-case characters when passed to the command processing program, you

cannot use this parameter to set values for variables with mixed case names.

Element 2: Variable value

character-value

Specify a variable value, from 0 to 55 characters. If you enclose a value in apostrophes, the

apostrophes are removed and double apostrophes within the value are condensed to single

apostrophes when the value is passed to the command processing program.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Displaying Query Output

STRQMQRY QMQRY(MYLIB/MYQRY) QMFORM(FORM1)

This command runs query management query MYQRY located in library MYLIB. The library list is

searched for form FORM1, which is used for the output sent to the display.

Example 2: Taking Information From Either QMQRY or QRYDFN

STRQMQRY QMQRY(MYLIB/MYQRY) QMFORM(FORM1) ALWQRYDFN(*YES)

This command runs query management query (QMQRY) MYQRY located in library MYLIB. If QMQRY

object MYQRY is not found in library MYLIB, the information is taken from query definition (QRYDFN)

MYQRY located in library MYLIB. The library list is searched for query management form FORM1 whose

594 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 611: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

information is used to format the output. If QMFORM object FORM1 is not found in the library list, the

library list is searched for QRYDFN FORM1, and that information is used to format the output shown on

the display.

Example 3: Printing Query Output

STRQMQRY QMQRY(MYLIB/QUERY1) OUTTYPE(*PRINTER)

This command runs query QUERY1 located in library MYLIB. The report is formatted and printed on the

printer specified in the printer file associated with the query session.

Example 4: Sending Output to an Existing File

STRQMQRY QMQRY(*CURLIB/MYQRY)

OUTPUT(*OUTFILE) OUTFILE(MYTAB) OUTMBR(*FIRST *ADD)

This command runs the query named MYQRY located in the current library for the user’s job. The

selected data records are added to the previously created table named MYTAB in collection MYCOL.

Example 5: Running a Query Containing Substitution Variables

STRQMQRY QMQRY(MYQUERY)

SETVAR((VAR1 ’select * from mytable’)

(VAR2 ’where salary > 15000’))

This command runs query MYQUERY, which contains only substitution variables, &VAR1 and &VAR2.

These two variables contain the entire structured query language (SQL) statement.

Example 6: Changing a Variable

STRQMQRY QMQRY(QRYNAME) SETVAR((LASTNAME ’’’Smith’’’))

This command runs query QRYNAME, setting the variable LASTNAME to the value, ’Smith’.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

QWM2701

&1 command failed.

QWM2703

&1 command ended.

QWM2707

*LIBL not allowed when SQL naming applied.

QWM2709

User or password not valid with relational database value.

QWM2710

Password value *NONE only valid with user value *CURRENT.

Start Query Management Query (STRQMQRY) 595

Page 612: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

QWM2712

Character in user name not valid.

Top

596 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 613: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Query (STRQRY)

Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT

*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Query (STRQRY) command displays the Query for i5/OS main menu.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters

None

Top

Examples

STRQRY

This command shows the main Query Utilities menu.

Top

Error messages

None

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 597

Page 614: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

598 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 615: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start QSH (STRQSH)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start QSH (STRQSH) command, as known as QSH, starts the qsh shell interpreter.

If run in an interactive job, STRQSH starts an interactive shell session. If a shell session is not already

active in the job, then:

1. A new shell session is started and a terminal window is displayed.

2. qsh runs the commands from the file /etc/profile if it exists.

3. qsh runs the commands from the file .profile in the user’s home directory if it exists.

4. qsh runs the commands from the file specified by the expansion of the ENV variable if it exists.

If a shell session is already active in an interactive job, you are reconnected to the existing session. From

the terminal window, you can enter shell commands and view output from the commands.

Using the Terminal Window

The terminal window has two parts:

v an input line for entering commands, and

v an output area that contains an echo of the commands you entered and any output generated by the

commands.

The terminal window supports the following function keys:

F3 (Exit)

Close the terminal window and end the qsh session.

F5 (Refresh)

Refresh the output area.

F6 (Print)

Print the output area to a spool file.

F7 (Up)

Roll output area up one page.

F8 (Down)

Roll output area down one page.

F9 (Retrieve)

Retrieve a previous command. You can press this key multiple times to retrieve any previous

command. For example, to retrieve the second to last command you entered, press this key two

times. You can also select a specific command to be run again by placing the cursor on that

command and pressing this key. When the interactive job is running in a double-byte CCSID, this

key is not available.

F11 (Toggle line wrap)

Toggle the line wrap/truncate mode in the output area. In line wrap mode, lines longer than the

width of the terminal window are wrapped to the next line. In truncate mode, the portion of a

line beyond the width of the terminal window is not shown.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 599

Page 616: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

F12 (Disconnect)

Disconnect from the qsh session. This key only closes the terminal window and does not end the

qsh session. You can redisplay the disconnected qsh session by running STRQSH again.

F13 (Clear)

Clear the output area.

F17 (Top)

Display top of output area.

F18 (Bottom)

Display bottom of output area.

F19 (Left)

Shift output area to the left.

F20 (Right)

Shift output area to the right.

F21 (CL command entry)

Display a command entry window where you can enter CL commands.

Also, you can use SysReq 2 to interrupt the currently running command.

Error messages for STRQSH

*ESCAPE Messages

QSH0002

Error found with QSH session, reason code &1, errno &2.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

CMD Command Character value, *NONE Optional

Top

Command (CMD)

Specifies the shell command to be run.

The possible values are:

*NONE:

No command is provided and an interactive session is started.

command

A shell command to run. The command can be a maximum of 5000 bytes in length. If a blank or

other special characters are used, the command must be enclosed in apostrophes (’). If an

apostrophe is intended, two apostrophes must be used (’’).

Note: The case is preserved when lowercase characters are specified.

Top

600 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 617: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Examples

None

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

QSH0002

Error found with QSH session, reason code &1, errno &2.

Top

Start QSH (STRQSH) 601

Page 618: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

602 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 619: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Question and Answer (STRQST)

Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT

*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Question and Answer (STRQST) command shows the main Question & Answer (Q & A) menu.

More information is available in the Basic system operations topic collection in the i5/OS Information

Center at http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

QSTDB Q/A database Name, *SELECT Optional,

Positional 1

LIB Lib containing Q/A database Name, *QSTLIB Optional,

Positional 2

Top

Q/A database (QSTDB)

Specifies the Question and Answer (Q & A) database with which to work.

The possible values are:

*SELECT

You are asked to specify a Q & A database. If only one Q & A database exists on the system, it is

the default.

question-database

Specify the name of the Q & A database with which to work.

Top

Lib containing Q/A database (LIB)

Specifies the name of the library that contains the Q & A database.

The name of the Q & A database can be qualified by one of the following library values:

*QSTLIB

The library containing the specified Q & A database is searched. If *SELECT is specified on the

QSTDB parameter, any Q & A database in any library to which you are authorized can be

selected.

library-name

Specify the name of the library to be searched. If *SELECT is specified on the QSTDB parameter,

any Q & A database in the library to which you are authorized can be selected.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 603

Page 620: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Examples

STRQST

This command shows the Question and Answer (Q & A) main menu.

Top

Error messages

None

Top

604 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 621: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start REXX Procedure (STRREXPRC)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start REXX Procedure (STRREXPRC) command calls the interpreter, explicitly specifying the library,

file, and source member to interpret.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

SRCMBR Source member Name Required,

Positional 1

SRCFILE Source file Qualified object name Optional

Qualifier 1: Source file Name, QREXSRC

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

PARM Parameters Character value, *NONE Optional

CMDENV Command environment Single values: *COMMAND, *CPICOMM, *EXECSQLOther values: Qualified object name

Optional

Qualifier 1: Command

environment

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

EXITPGM Exit program Single values: *NONEOther values (up to 8 repetitions): Element list

Optional

Element 1: Program Qualified object name

Qualifier 1: Program Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Element 2: Exit code 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10

Top

Source member (SRCMBR)

Specifies the name of the source file member that contains the REXX procedure to be started.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Source file (SRCFILE)

Specifies the source file that contains the REXX procedure to be started.

Qualifier 1: Source file

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 605

Page 622: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

QREXSRC

The IBM-supplied source file, QREXSRC, contains the REXX procedure.

name Specify the name of the source file that contains the REXX procedure to be run.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the source file.

When *LIBL is specified for this qualifier, REXX will find the first source file in the library list

with the specified source file name. If a source file is found, REXX will look for the source

member in only that source file. REXX will not continue looking for any other source files by the

same name in the library list. This is the default REXX source file member search behavior.

You can change how REXX searches for the source file member by adding a job-level

environment variable named QIBM_REX_FIND_SRCMBR. You would use the Add Environment

Variable (ADDENVVAR) command and specify ENVVAR(QIBM_REX_FIND_SRCMBR) and

LEVEL(*JOB).

v If the initial value (VALUE parameter) specified on the ADDENVVAR command is

*BYMBRNAME, REXX will search for the source member by looking in each source file with

the specified file name in the library list that contains a source member with the name

specified for the Source member (SRCMBR) parameter.

v If the initial value specified on the ADDENVVAR command is *BYFILENAME or any other

value, or if the environment variable does not exist, the default REXX source file member

search behavior is used.

*CURLIB

The current library is used to locate the source file. If no library is specified as the current library

for the job, QGPL is used.

name Specify the name of the library where the source file is located.

Top

Parameters (PARM)

Specifies procedure parameter values passed to the REXX procedure when it is started. These values are

accessed through the argument (ARG) instruction within the REXX procedure.

*NONE

There are no procedure parameters for the REXX procedure. The ARG instruction returns a null

string.

character-value

Specify the procedure parameter value to pass to the REXX procedure. A maximum of 3000

characters is allowed.

Top

Command environment (CMDENV)

Specifies the initial command environment program to process commands embedded in the REXX

procedure. The REXX interpreter will call this environment whenever a command is encountered within

the REXX procedure.

Single values

*COMMAND

The System i control language (CL) command environment is used.

606 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 623: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*CPICOMM

The Common Programming Interface (CPI) for Communications command environment is used.

*EXECSQL

The Structured Query Language (SQL) Command environment is used. EXECSQL is the

command environment used for CL commands that are imbedded within a REXX procedure.

Qualifier 1: Command environment

name Specify the name of the program to process commands embedded in the REXX procedure.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the program.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the program. If no library is specified as the

current library for the job, QGPL is used.

name Specify the name of the library where the program is located.

Top

Exit program (EXITPGM)

Specifies exit programs to be used when the interpreter is called. A maximum of 8 program and exit code

pairs can be specified.

Note: If multiple system exit codes are specified, the last one specified is the one taken.

Single values

*NONE

There are no exit programs for this call.

Other values (up to 8 repetitions)

Element 1: Program

Qualifier 1: Program

name Specify the name of the exit program.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the specified program.

*CURLIB

The current library for the job is used to locate the specified program. If no library is

specified as the current library for the job, QGPL is used.

name Specify the name of the library where the specified program is located.

Element 2: Exit code

number

Specify one of the following exit code values.

Start REXX Procedure (STRREXPRC) 607

Page 624: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Exit-code

Description

2 The associated program is called whenever an external function or subroutine has been

called by the REXX program. The exit program is then responsible for locating and

calling the requested routine.

3 The associated program is called whenever the interpreter is going to call a command.

The exit program is responsible for locating and calling the command given the

command string and the current environment name.

4 The associated program is called whenever a REXX instruction or function attempts an

operation on the REXX external data queue.

5 The associated program is called when session input or output operations are attempted.

7 The associated program is called after running each clause of the REXX procedure to

determine whether it should be stopped.

8 The associated program is called after running each clause of the REXX program to check

if tracing should be turned on or off.

9 The associated program is called before interpretation of the first instruction of a REXX

procedure (including REXX procedures called as external functions and subroutines).

10 The associated program is called after interpretation of the last instruction of a REXX

procedure (including REXX procedures called as external functions and subroutines).

Top

Examples

STRREXPRC SRCMBR(ABC)

This command calls the REXX interpreter instructing it to run the source member named ABC in the first

QREXSRC source file in the library list (*LIBL).

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF7CFB

Error occurred while processing REXX exit programs.

CPF7CFD

Error occurred running REXX procedure &1.

CPF7CFF

REXX procedure &1 ended; return code &4.

CPF7CF2

REXX procedure &1 not found.

CPF7CF3

Not authorized to source file &2.

608 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 625: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF7CF4

Cannot allocate REXX procedure &1.

CPF7CF6

Cannot allocate REXX source file &2.

CPF7CF7

REXX external data queue is damaged.

Top

Start REXX Procedure (STRREXPRC) 609

Page 626: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

610 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 627: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Remote Support (STRRMTSPT)

Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT

*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Remote Support (STRRMTSPT) command creates and varies on all configuration objects needed

for remote support. Remote support allows the IBM service organization to access your system. Remote

support options that are available include:

v remote work station

v virtual device

v virtual device over a systems network architecture (SNA) connection

v virtual device over a point-to-point protocol (PPP) connection using internet protocol (IP)

v virtual device over a virtual private network (VPN) connection using internet protocol (IP)

Each remote support option has different command parameters that are required for connectivity. If any

existing remote support configuration objects are found, they are deleted and then re-created. After the

configuration objects have been created, they are varied on. You must provide a user identifier and

password before the support person can sign-on your system.

Restrictions:

1. When using DEVCLS(*RMT), the remote work station used by a support organization must be one of

those listed in the DSPTYPE and DSPMODEL parameters. If your support organization has a

configuration that does not match, you must work with the support person to create the correct

configuration objects on your system.

2. When using DEVCLS(*VRT) or DEVCLS(*IPS), the QUSER user profile must not be disabled.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

DEVCLS Device class *RMT, *VRT, *IPS, *PPP, *VPN Required,

Positional 1

DSPTYPE Display type 3179, 3180, 3196, 3197, 5251, 5291, 5292 Optional,

Positional 2

DSPMODEL Display model 1, 2, 11, A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, W1, W2, 0001,

0002, 0011

Optional,

Positional 3

STNADR Station address 01-FE, FE Optional,

Positional 4

USRPRF User profile Character value, QPGMR Optional,

Positional 5

RSRCNAME Resource name Character value, *DFT Optional,

Positional 6

RMTLOCNAME Remote location Communications name, QREMOTE Optional,

Positional 7

LCLLOCNAME Local location Communications name, QLOCAL, *NETATR Optional,

Positional 8

RMTNETID Remote network identifier Communications name, *NETATR, *NONE Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 611

Page 628: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Keyword Description Choices Notes

MAXLENRU Maximum length of request

unit

241-32767, 32767, *SAME, *CALC Optional

DTACPR Data compression *SAME, *NETATR, *NONE, *ALLOW, *REQUEST,

*REQUIRE

Optional

INDTACPR Inbound data compression *SAME, *RLE, *LZ9, *LZ10, *LZ12, *NONE Optional

OUTDTACPR Outbound data compression *SAME, *RLE, *LZ9, *LZ10, *LZ12, *NONE Optional

MODEM Modem Character value, *RSRCNAME, *RMTPPP, *SELECT Optional

MDMRMTSYS Modem remote system Character value Optional

Top

Device class (DEVCLS)

Specifies the device class for this display station. Different configuration objects are created, depending on

the value specified.

This is a required parameter.

*RMT This device class is for a device connected to a remote work station. The configuration objects

created for this option include a line description, a controller description, a display device

description, and a printer device description.

*VRT This device class is for a virtual device. The configuration objects created for this option include a

line description, a controller description, a device description, a virtual control description, and a

virtual display device description.

*IPS This device class is for a virtual device and also supports internet protocol (IP) over SNA sessions

on this connection. The configuration objects created for this option include a line description, a

controller description, a device description, a virtual control description, and a virtual display

device description.

*PPP This device class supports IP over a point-to-point protocol (PPP) connection. The configuration

objects created for this option include a line description, a controller description, a device

description, and a PPP profile. DEVCLS(*PPP) requires that the QRETSVRSEC system value be

set to ’1’ to retain server security data. This allows for additional authentication to be performed

when the service organization attempts to connect.

*VPN This device class supports IP over a virtual private network (VPN) connection. The Universal

Connection wizard, or the Create Service Configuration (CRTSRVCFG) command must be run

before running the STRRMTSPT command in order to set up a VPN configuration on the system.

No configuration objects are created for this option.

Top

Display type (DSPTYPE)

Specifies the workstation display device type which will be used for remote support. A value must be

specified for this parameter when DEVCLS has a value of *RMT, *VRT, or *IPS.

Valid display station type values are:

v 3179

v 3180

v 3196

v 3197

612 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 629: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

v 5251

v 5291

v 5292

Top

Display model (DSPMODEL)

Specifies the model number of the device for this description. A value must be specified for this

parameter when DEVCLS has a value of *RMT, *VRT, or *IPS.

The possible values for the device model for each device type are:

TYPE MODEL

3179 2

3180 2

3196 A1, A2, B1, or B2

3197 C1, C2, D1, D2, W1, or W2

5251 11

5291 1, or 2

5292 1, or 2

Top

Address (STNADR)

Depending on the value specified for the DEVCLS parameter, this parameter specifies the address that

will be used for either the station address or the local IP address qualifier. If the DEVCLS is not *PPP or

*VPN, then this parameter specifies the station address. The station address is the hexadecimal address

by which the local system is known to the remote system. The hexadecimal address is the polling address

assigned to this system.

If the DEVCLS is *IPS, *PPP, or *VPN, this parameter is used as the local IP address qualifier. This

specifies the value of the last byte of the local internet address that will be used.

FE The hexadecimal value FE is the local system address.

address

Specify a hexadecimal value from 01 to FE.

Top

User profile (USRPRF)

Specifies the name of the user profile that the IBM service personnel will use to sign on to your system.

This profile is made the owner of the objects created by the system when remote support is started. The

user profile must already exist on your system.

QPGMR

The default system-supplied user profile, QPGMR, is used to sign on to your system.

user-profile-name

Specify the name of the existing user profile that will be used to sign on to the remote system.

Start Remote Support (STRRMTSPT) 613

Page 630: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Resource name (RSRCNAME)

Specifies the name of the resource used to access electronic customer support. This parameter is not used

for DEVCLS(*VPN).

*DFT

v For DEVCLS(*PPP):

– Look for resources being used by the 2771 or 2793 integrated modem. If only one 2771 or

2793 is defined, that resource is used for this PPP line. Note that more than one 2771 or 2793

could be defined, but a 2771 or 2793 resource can only be calculated if only one is defined.

– If a 2771 or 2793 modem resource cannot be used, determine if any resources are defined for

use by electronic customer support (ECS). If an ECS resource is available, that resource is

used for this PPP line.

– If neither a single 2771 or 2793 integrated modem or ECS resource is available, the resource

cannot be calculated and it will have to be explicitly specified.v For all other DEVCLS values (except *VPN): The resource name associated with the shipped

default port for accessing electronic customer support is used. This is the first port on the I/O

(input/output) adapter in card position B of the first multifunction IOP (input/output

processor) on the bus. If this port does not exist on the system, resource name CMN01 is used.

resource-name

Specify the name of the resource used to access electronic customer support.

Top

Remote location (RMTLOCNAME)

Specifies the remote location name of the system with which this object communicates. This parameter is

used when DEVCLS is *VRT or *IPS.

QREMOTE

The default system-supplied remote support location name.

remote-location-name

Specify the name of the remote support location.

Top

Local location (LCLLOCNAME)

Specifies the unique location name that identifies the local system to remote devices. The name cannot be

the same as that specified for the Remote location prompt (RMTLOCNAME parameter). The combination

of the names specified for the Local location prompt (LCLLOCNAME parameter) and the Remote

location prompt (RMTLOCNAME parameter) must be unique for each device attached to the same

controller. This parameter is used when the DEVCLS parameter has a value of *VRT or *IPS.

QLOCAL

The default system-supplied local location name is used.

*NETATR

The LCLLOCNAME value specified in the system network attributes is used.

local-location-name

Specify the location name to be used to identify the local system to remote devices.

614 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 631: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Top

Remote network identifier (RMTNETID)

Specifies the name of the remote network in which the remote system resides. This parameter is used

when the DEVCLS parameter has a value of *VRT or *IPS.

*NONE

No remote network name is used.

remote-network-name

Specify the remote network name.

Top

Maximum length of request unit (MAXLENRU)

Specifies the maximum request unit (RU) length allowed. This parameter is used when the DEVCLS

parameter has a value of *VRT or *IPS.

32767 The maximum request unit length is 32767 bytes.

*CALC

The system calculates the maximum value to use.

maximum-request-unit-length

Specify a value, ranging from 241 through 32767 bytes, for the maximum length of incoming

request units.

Some common values, based on line type, are:

v SDLC lines: 256, 512, 1024, 2048

v Token-Ring Network lines: 256, 512, 1024, 1985

v X.25 (QLLC) lines: 247, 503, 1015

v X.25 (ELLC) lines: 241, 497, 1009

More information on setting the maximum RU length is in the Communications Configuration book,

SC41-5401 book.

Top

Data compression (DTACPR)

Specifies whether data compression is used.

*REQUEST

Data compression is requested on the session by the local system. However, the request can be

refused or changed to lower compression levels by the remote system. Data compression is

allowed on the session if requested by the remote system. The requested compression levels for

inbound and outbound data are the levels specified on the Inbound data compression and

Outbound data compression prompts (INDTACPR and OUTDTACPR parameters).

If data compression is requested by the remote system, the data compression levels used by the

session are the lower of the requested levels and the levels specified on the Inbound data

compression and Outbound data compression prompts (INDTACPR and OUTDTACPR

parameters).

Start Remote Support (STRRMTSPT) 615

Page 632: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*NONE

Compression is not allowed on the session.

*ALLOW

Data compression is allowed on the session by the local system if requested by a remote system.

The local system does not request compression.

If data compression is requested by the remote system, the data compression levels used by the

session are the lower of the requested levels and the levels specified on the Inbound data

compression and Outbound data compression prompts (INDTACPR and OUTDTACPR

parameters).

*REQUIRE

Data compression is required on the session. If the remote system does not accept the local

system’s exact required levels of compression, the session is not established.

The data compression levels that the local system require are the levels specified on the Inbound

data compression and Outbound data compression prompts (INDTACPR and OUTDTACPR

parameters).

Top

Inbound data compression (INDTACPR)

Specifies the desired level of compression for inbound data. No data compression occurs if *NONE is

specified on the Data compression prompt (DTACPR parameter). Adaptive dictionary-based compression

is a dynamic compression algorithm, similar to Lempel-Ziv, that compresses previously seen strings to 9-,

10-, and 12-bit codes. This algorithm is referred to as LZ in the following parameters.

*LZ12 The LZ algorithm with the 12-bit code for repeated substrings in the data stream is used. These

codes refer to entries in a common dictionary, created as the data flows between the sender and

receiver. The LZ algorithms require storage and extra processing time. LZ12 requires the most

storage and processing time of the LZ algorithms; however, it compresses the data stream the

most.

*RLE The Run Length Encoding (RLE) algorithm is used. RLE substitutes a 1- or 2-byte sequence in the

data stream for each repeated occurrence of the same character. This algorithm requires no

storage and less processing time than the other options.

*LZ9 The LZ algorithm with the 9-bit code for repeated substrings in the data stream is used. These

codes refer to entries in a common dictionary, created as the data flows between the sender and

receiver. The LZ algorithms require storage and extra processing time. The LZ9 requires the least

storage and processing time of the LZ algorithms; however, it compresses the data stream the

least.

*LZ10 The LZ algorithm with the 10-bit code for repeated substrings in the data stream is used. These

codes refer to entries in a common dictionary, created as the data flows between the sender and

receiver. The LZ algorithms require storage and extra processing time. The LZ10 table algorithm

requires more storage and processing time than the LZ9, but less than the LZ12. The LZ10

compresses the data stream more than the LZ9, but less than the LZ12.

Top

Outbound data compression (OUTDTACPR)

Specifies the desired level of compression for outbound data. No data compression occurs if *NONE is

specified on the Data compression prompt (DTACPR parameter).

*LZ12 The LZ algorithm with the 12-bit code for repeated substrings in the data stream is used. These

616 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 633: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

codes refer to entries in a common dictionary, created as the data flows between the sender and

receiver. The LZ algorithms require storage and extra processing time. LZ12 requires the most

storage and processing time of the LZ algorithms; however, it compresses the data stream the

most.

*RLE The Run Length Encoding (RLE) algorithm is used. RLE substitutes a 1- or 2-byte sequence in the

data stream for each repeated occurrence of the same character. This algorithm requires no

storage and less processing time than the other options.

*LZ9 The LZ algorithm with the 9-bit code for repeated substrings in the data stream is used. These

codes refer to entries in a common dictionary, created as the data flows between the sender and

receiver. The LZ algorithms require storage and extra processing time. The LZ9 requires the least

storage and processing time of the LZ algorithms; however, it compresses the data stream the

least.

*LZ10 The LZ algorithm with the 10-bit code for repeated substrings in the data stream is used. These

codes refer to entries in a common dictionary, created as the data flows between the sender and

receiver. The LZ algorithms require storage and extra processing time. The LZ10 table algorithm

requires more storage and processing time than the LZ9, but less than the LZ12. The LZ10

compresses the data stream more than the LZ9, but less than the LZ12.

Top

Modem (MODEM)

Specifies the modem description to use for the point-to-point protocol (PPP) profile.

*RSRCNAME

The modem description will be determined based on the value defined for the RSRCNAME

parameter.

v If the resource is defined to use the 2771 integrated modem, the ’2771 Internal Modem’

description is used.

v If the resource is defined to use the 2772 integrated modem, the ’2772 Internal Modem’

description is used.

v If the resource is defined to use the 2793 integrated modem, the ’2793 Internal Modem’

description is used.

v If the resource is defined to use the 2805 integrated modem, the ’2805 Internal Modem’

description is used.

v If the ECS resource was chosen, the ’IBM 7852-400’ modem description is used.

v Otherwise if the resource does not have a pre-defined modem description,

MODEM(*RSRCNAME) cannot be used and the modem description will have to be explicitly

defined.

*RMTPPP

Indicates that a modem on a different partition or system is to be used. The internet address or

host name where the modem is located must be specified for the Modem remote system

(MDMRMTSYS) parameter.

*SELECT

A list of modem descriptions is shown from which you can select the modem to use. This option

is only valid when running the STRRMTSPT CL command in interactive mode, otherwise an

error will occur. If you are running interactively, it is recommended that you use the *SELECT

value to help ensure that you properly select the modem to use.

’modem-identification’

Specify the name of the modem to use. Note that modem names are case sensitive and must

match exactly to the modems defined for the system.

Start Remote Support (STRRMTSPT) 617

Page 634: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

’generic*-modem-identification’

Specify the generic name of the modem you wish to use. A generic modem name is a character

string of one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ’abc*’. If a generic name

is specified, then the FIRST modem name that matches with the generic name will be used. It is

recommended that you include as many characters in the modem name string as possible to

avoid any ambiguity. If an asterisk is not included with the generic (prefix) name, the system

assumes it to be the complete modem name. The actual modem name chosen will be posted in a

message in the joblog.

Top

Modem remote system (MDMRMTSYS)

Specifies the internet protocol (IPv4) address or the host name for the system or partition where the

modem to be used for remote support is located.

Note: This parameter is required if *RMTPPP is specified for the Modem (MODEM) parameter. If the

MODEM parameter has any value other than *RMTPPP, this parameter cannot be specified.

character-value

Specify the IP address or host name of the remote system or partition where the modem is

located.

Top

Examples

Example 1: Start Remote Support using PPP

STRRMTSPT DEVCLS(*PPP) STNADR(FA)

This command creates and starts a PPP answer profile and associated configuration objects. The local

internet address assigned is 169.254.2.250.

Example 2: Start Remote Support for Virtual Device

STRRMTSPT DEVCLS(*VRT) DSPTYPE(5251)

DSPMODEL(11) STNADR(FE)

This command creates and varies on the 5251 Model 11 Display Station located at station address FE.

Example 3: Start Remote Support using VPN

STRRMTSPT DEVCLS(*VPN)

This command starts remote support over a virtual private network (VPN) connection. Before running

this command, the Universal Connection wizard, or the Create Service Configuration (CRTSRVCFG)

command needs to be run to create the VPN configuration.

Example 4: Start Remote Support using a Remote Modem and PPP

STRRMTSPT DEVCLS(*PPP) STNADR(FE) MODEM(*RMTPPP)

MDMRMTSYS(’10.1.1.2’)

618 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 635: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

This command creates and starts an L2TP remote answer profile and associated configuration objects.

Before running this command, the Universal Connection wizard needs to be run on the system or

partition with internet address 10.1.1.2 where the modem to be used is located. When running the

Universal Connection wizard, you need to specify that the modem should provide connectivity to others

and that the connection type is AT&T. An alternative would be to create an L2TP terminator profile using

the Remote Access Service New Profile GUI on the system or partition where the modem is located,

specifying that outgoing calls are supported.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF1394

CPF1394 User profile &1 cannot sign on.

CPF9801

Object &2 in library &3 not found.

CPF9899

Error occurred during processing of command.

TCP83A7

QRETSVRSEC=0. Unable to save remote service password for &2.

Top

Start Remote Support (STRRMTSPT) 619

Page 636: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

620 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 637: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start Remote Writer (STRRMTWTR)

Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start Remote Writer (STRRMTWTR) command starts a spooling writer that sends spooled files from

an output queue to a remote system. The writer, which is a system job, takes spooled files from an output

queue and sends them to a remote system using SNADS or TCP/IP.

After the spooled file is successfully sent to a remote system, the spooled file will be deleted or saved, as

specified by the SAVE spooled file attribute.

More than one writer can be active at the same time (as determined by the spooling subsystem

description), and up to 10 writers can be active to the same output queue. Each writer must have a

unique writer name, and only one type (print, remote, or diskette) of writer can be active to a single

output queue. A writer that has been started can be actively sending output or waiting for a file to be put

on the output queue. Optionally, the writer can end automatically when it has processed all the files on

the output queue. You can also change, hold, or cancel the writer.

You can continue with other work after starting a writer because each job runs independently. The writer

is owned by the user who issues the STRRMTWTR command.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

OUTQ Output queue Single values: *ALLOther values: Qualified object name

Required,

Positional 1

Qualifier 1: Output queue Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

MSGQ Queue for writer messages Single values: *OUTQ, *REQUESTEROther values: Qualified object name

Optional,

Positional 3

Qualifier 1: Queue for writer

messages

Name

Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

FORMTYPE Form type options Element list Optional

Element 1: Form type Character value, *ALL, *STD, *FORMS

Element 2: Message option *NOMSG, *INQMSG, *MSG, *INFOMSG

WTR Writer Name, *OUTQ, *SYSGEN Optional,

Positional 2

AUTOEND Auto-end options Element list Optional,

Positional 4 Element 1: Automatically

end writer

*NO, *YES

Element 2: If yes, when to

end

*NORDYF, *FILEEND

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 621

Page 638: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Output queue (OUTQ)

Specifies the output queue that holds the spooled files to be written.

Single values

*ALL Starts remote writers for every output queue on the system which have a remote system

specified. No writer starts if an output queue has a different type of writer already started. The

number of ″writers to autostart″ attribute in the output queue determines the number of writers

started to a particular queue. This will determine how many remote writer jobs will be sending

spooled output to a remote system, from a single output queue.

Qualifier 1: Output queue

name Specify the name of the output queue from which the writer processes output files.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for

the thread, the QGPL library is searched.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

Queue for writer messages (MSGQ)

Specifies the message queue to which messages created by the writer are sent.

Single values

*OUTQ

Messages are sent to the message queue of the output queue specified on the OUTQ parameter.

*REQUESTER

The messages are sent to the workstation message queue of the workstation of the user who

started the writer. If this value is specified for a batch job, *OUTQ is used.

Qualifier 1: Queue for writer messages

name Specify the name of the message queue to which messages created by the writer are sent.

Qualifier 2: Library

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

*CURLIB

The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for

the thread, the QGPL library is searched.

name Specify the name of the library to be searched.

Top

622 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 639: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Form type options (FORMTYPE)

Specifies the name of the form type. The writer uses this value to select spooled files from the specified

output queue for sending to a remote system.

Note: A spooled file’s form type is specified in the device file that produced the spooled file.

Element 1: Form type

*ALL All form types are processed by the writer.

*FORMS

The writer first chooses the first available spooled file on the output queue. After the first spooled

file is complete, all spooled files with the same form type are processed. The writer then chooses

the first available spooled file on the output queue and repeats the process for that form type.

*STD Only spooled files that specify the standard form type are selected.

form-type

Specify the form type of the spooled files being produced.

Element 2: Message option

*NOMSG

Neither an inquiry message nor an informational message is sent to the message queue.

*INQMSG

An inquiry message is sent to the message queue when a spooled file has a form type that is

different than the form type last sent.

*INFOMSG

An informational message is sent to the message queue when no spooled files requiring this form

type remain in the output queue.

*MSG An inquiry message is sent to the message queue when a spooled file has a form type that is

different than the form type in the remote and an informational message is sent when no spooled

files requiring this form type remain in the output queue.

Top

Writer (WTR)

Specifies the spooling writer being started. Each writer name must be unique.

*OUTQ

The name of the writer is the same as that of the output queue specified on the OUTQ parameter.

If OUTQ(*ALL) is specified, and you have more than one writer to start, the name for each

additional writer is taken from the first nine characters of the output queue followed by a digit.

This last digit is sequentially assigned, starting with 2 for the second writer, 3 for the third writer,

and continuing through 0 for the tenth writer.

*SYSGEN

The writer name is generated by the system, starting with ’RMTW000001’ and incrementing the

numeric part for each successive writer.

name Specify the name by which the writer being started is identified.

Top

Start Remote Writer (STRRMTWTR) 623

Page 640: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Auto-end options (AUTOEND)

Specifies whether the writer ends automatically.

Element 1: Stop Writer Option

*NO The writer does not end when the last available file has been removed from the output queue. It

waits for another spooled file entry to be put on the queue. This is a single value (Element 2 is

not specified).

*YES The writer automatically ends after it has reached the condition specified on the second element

of this parameter.

Element 2: Conditions for Stopping Writer

*NORDYF

The writer automatically ends when there are no ready files (all the available files have been

removed from the output queue).

*FILEEND

The writer ends after it finishes processing one spooled file.

Top

Examples

STRRMTWTR OUTQ(RMTOUTQ) WTR(TOM)

This command starts a spooling writer named TOM. This writer takes the output from the output queue

named RMTOUTQ and sends the output to the remote system and printer queue specified in the output

queue RMTOUTQ. Writer messages are sent to the system operator’s message queue, and the writer

waits for more output when the queue is emptied.

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

CPF330A

Output queue &1 has RMTSYS specified as *NONE.

CPF3305

Output queue &1 in library &2 assigned to another writer.

CPF3310

Writer &1 already started.

CPF3357

Output queue &1 in library &2 not found.

CPF3362

Objects in QTEMP not valid for parameter values.

CPF3363

Message queue &1 in library &2 not found.

Top

624 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 641: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Start S/36 Session (STRS36)

Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT

*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC)Threadsafe: No

ParametersExamples

Error messages

The Start System/36 (STRS36) command starts a System/36 environment session (if one is not active

already). Even if the System/36 environment is active, this command allows the user to show a menu or

run a program or procedure before showing a menu.

When the command ends, the System/36 environment returns to the active or inactive state from which

this command is issued.

Restrictions: This command cannot be used if a System/36 procedure is already in process. This

command cannot be placed in a procedure or in a program that is started by a procedure.

Top

Parameters

Keyword Description Choices Notes

MENU Menu Name, *SAME Optional,

Positional 1

CURLIB Current library Name, *SAME Optional,

Positional 2

PRC Procedure or program Name, *NONE Optional,

Positional 3

FRCMNU Force menu *NO, *YES Optional

Top

Menu (MENU)

Specifies the first menu that is shown when the System/36 environment is started.

The possible values are:

*SAME

The menu specified in the job does not change. If no menu is specified in the job, the initial menu

specified in the user profile is shown.

menu-name

Specify the name of the first menu shown when the System/36 environment is started.

Top

Current library (CURLIB)

Specifies the current library to use in the System/36 environment.

The possible values are:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 625

Page 642: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

*SAME

The current library does not change. If the current library is *CRTDFT and *SAME is specified,

the current library is set to #LIBRARY.

library-name

Specify the name of the library you want to use as the current library in the System/36

environment.

Top

Procedure or program (PRC)

Specifies the name of the procedure or program to run before the menu is shown.

The possible values are:

*NONE

No procedure or program runs.

procedure-name

Specify the name of the procedure or program to run.

Top

Force menu (FRCMNU)

Specifies whether a menu is shown and what this command does in an active System/36 environment.

The possible values are:

*NO The specified menu is not shown if the System/36 environment is active when this command is

issued. This command does nothing, and the user is returned to the point at which the command

was issued.

*YES The specified menu is shown even if the System/36 environment is active when this command is

issued. The current library is set and the program or procedure is run as specified in this

command.

Top

Examples

STRS36 MENU(USER) CURLIB(MYLIB) PRC(INITPROC)

This command starts a System/36 environment session. This command:

v Displays the USER menu

v Changes the current library to MYLIB

v Runs procedure INITPROC before showing the USER menu

Top

Error messages

*ESCAPE Messages

626 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 643: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

CPF3709

Tape devices do not support same densities.

CPF3738

Device &1 used for save or restore is damaged.

CPF3767

Device &1 not found.

Top

Start S/36 Session (STRS36) 627

Page 644: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

628 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 645: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Appendix. Notices

This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries.

Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in

your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that

only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,

or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is

the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or

service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this

document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send

license inquiries, in writing, to:

IBM Director of Licensing

IBM Corporation

North Castle Drive

Armonk, NY 10504-1785

U.S.A.

For license inquiries regarding double-byte (DBCS) information, contact the IBM Intellectual Property

Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to:

IBM World Trade Asia Corporation

Licensing

2-31 Roppongi 3-chome, Minato-ku

Tokyo 106-0032, Japan

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such

provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION

PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some

states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this

statement may not apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically

made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication.

IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this

publication at any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in

any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of

the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without

incurring any obligation to you.

Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the

exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this

one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact:

IBM Corporation

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2008 629

Page 646: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Software Interoperability Coordinator, Department YBWA

3605 Highway 52 N

Rochester, MN 55901

U.S.A.

Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases,

payment of a fee.

The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material available for it are provided

by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement, IBM International Program License Agreement,

IBM License Agreement for Machine Code, or any equivalent agreement between us.

Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the

results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have

been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the

same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through

extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their

specific environment.

Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their

published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and

cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM

products. Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of

those products.

All statements regarding IBM’s future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal without

notice, and represent goals and objectives only.

This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate

them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and

products. All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an

actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental.

COPYRIGHT LICENSE:

This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrate programming

techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs

in any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing

application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for

which the sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all

conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these

programs.

Each copy or any portion of these sample programs or any derivative work, must include a copyright

notice as follows:

© (your company name) (year). Portions of this code are derived from IBM Corp. Sample Programs. ©

Copyright IBM Corp. _enter the year or years_. All rights reserved.

If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations may not appear.

Programming interface information

This i5/OS commands publication documents intended Programming Interfaces that allow the customer

to write programs to obtain the services of IBM i5/OS.

630 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 647: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Trademarks

The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States,

other countries, or both:

Advanced Function Printing

AFP

AS/400

CICS

COBOL/400

C/400

DataPropagator

DB2

Distributed Relational Database Architecture

Domino

DRDA

IBM

Infoprint

InfoWindow

i5/OS

iSeries

Integrated Language Environment

Lotus

LPDA

OfficeVision

Print Services Facility

RPG/400

System i

System x

SystemView

System/36

TCS

Tivoli

WebSphere

z/OS

Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks

of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States, and/or other countries.

Intel, Intel logo, Intel Inside, Intel Inside logo, Intel Centrino, Intel Centrino logo, Celeron, Intel Xeon,

Intel SpeedStep, Itanium, and Pentium are are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation

or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States, other countries, or both.

Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other

countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.

Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

Appendix. Notices 631

Page 648: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

Terms and conditions

Permissions for the use of these publications is granted subject to the following terms and conditions.

Personal Use: You may reproduce these publications for your personal, noncommercial use provided that

all proprietary notices are preserved. You may not distribute, display or make derivative works of these

publications, or any portion thereof, without the express consent of IBM.

Commercial Use: You may reproduce, distribute and display these publications solely within your

enterprise provided that all proprietary notices are preserved. You may not make derivative works of

these publications, or reproduce, distribute or display these publications or any portion thereof outside

your enterprise, without the express consent of IBM.

Except as expressly granted in this permission, no other permissions, licenses or rights are granted, either

express or implied, to the publications or any information, data, software or other intellectual property

contained therein.

IBM reserves the right to withdraw the permissions granted herein whenever, in its discretion, the use of

the publications is detrimental to its interest or, as determined by IBM, the above instructions are not

being properly followed.

You may not download, export or re-export this information except in full compliance with all applicable

laws and regulations, including all United States export laws and regulations.

IBM MAKES NO GUARANTEE ABOUT THE CONTENT OF THESE PUBLICATIONS. THE

PUBLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED ″AS-IS″ AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Code license and disclaimer information

IBM grants you a nonexclusive copyright license to use all programming code examples from which you

can generate similar function tailored to your own specific needs.

SUBJECT TO ANY STATUTORY WARRANTIES WHICH CANNOT BE EXCLUDED, IBM, ITS

PROGRAM DEVELOPERS AND SUPPLIERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EITHER

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR

CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND

NON-INFRINGEMENT, REGARDING THE PROGRAM OR TECHNICAL SUPPORT, IF ANY.

UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS IBM, ITS PROGRAM DEVELOPERS OR SUPPLIERS LIABLE FOR

ANY OF THE FOLLOWING, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY:

1. LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, DATA;

2. DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY ECONOMIC

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES; OR

3. LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS, REVENUE, GOODWILL, OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS.

SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF DIRECT,

INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO SOME OR ALL OF THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS

OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

632 System i: Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)

Page 649: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F
Page 650: System i Programming SAVS36F (Save S/36 File)public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v6r1/en_US/... · 2018. 6. 27. · System i Programming i5/OS commands Starting with SAVS36F

����

Printed in USA